Category: Comics in Context

  • Comics in Context #170: Miller’s Next Move

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    SATURDAY, FEB. 24, 3 PM

    cic2007-03-23.jpgThe 2007 New York Comic-Con reportedly received 40,000 attendees over three days; San Diego’s Comic-Con International declares that last year it had ” 114,000 individual attendees. . . (not counting the 9,000 or so exhibitors and their staff!)”. The New York con now seems to be acknowledged as being the nation’s second biggest comics convention, yet look at the gap in attendance.

    I wonder what percentage of the San Diego attendees come not for the comics but for the movie and television preview presentations, and the chance to see their starts in person. In contrast, the New York Comic-Con, despite ventures into anime and gaming, remains almost entirely a comic book convention. I expect that there will be a greater Hollywood presence in years to come, especially since when the New York con moves to April next year, it will present such an obvious opportunity to promote summer blockbuster movies. (But still, I was surprised that there was no promotion for the 300 movie at the New York con, even though it opened merely two weeks later, whereas San Francisco’s WonderCon, the week after the New York con, got its own preview screening.)

    But New York-based producer Michael Uslan has beaten most of the rest of Hollywood to the New York Comic-Con. He hosted the panel previewing the forthcoming film adaptation of Will Eisner’s The Spirit, which is being written and will be directed by comics great Frank Miller.

    Opening the presentation, Uslan told the audience that “If you’ve ever been to San Diego,” meaning the Comic-Con, “One of the headlines” the con gets “is “˜Hollywood Invades San Diego.’” This panel, he told us, “is the case of “˜New York Invades New York.’” Uslan explained that Spirit co-producer F. J. DeSanto, who was also on the panel, was from Manhattan, two of their associates on the film were from Long Island and Westchester County, respectively, and Miller himself was a Manhattanite. “Me, I’m a Jersey boy,” Uslan informed us. “We are based here.”

    Moreover, Uslan continued, “This con is special to me.” He told us that he had gone to the “New York Comicon” back in July, 1964, that was indeed the “first comic-con” This is long before I ever attended a comics convention in New York City. Uslan recalled that this first convention was in a “fleabag hotel” called the “Broadway Central” that had “drunks in the hallway,” and that the hotel “collapsed a year later.”

    At this point Uslan noticed a member of comic books’ generation of founding fathers in the audience. “One of the all-time great legends in the comics industry has graced us with his presence,” Uslan said, introducing Jerry Robinson, who worked with artist Bob Kane and writer Bill Finger on Batman #1 (see “Comics in Context” #141). Considering Robinson’s efforts to get Finger recognition as co-creator of Batman (see “Comics in Context” #94), it was appropriate that Uslan then reminisced that at this first comics con, when “I was thirteen,” “I met Bill Finger.” Another great comics writer, Otto Binder, was a “friend of mine,” Uslan explained, and he had “a beer with him and Bill Finger.” I don’t know that I approve of these Golden Age giants allowing a thirteen-year-old to drink alcohol, but otherwise this is an enviable experience for anyone with an appreciation of American comic book history.

    As fir their present project, Uslan said that “ten or eleven years ago Ben Melniker and I got the [movie] rights to The Spirit.” Uslan told us “I promised and swore to Will Eisner that nobody was going to touch this project if they didn’t get it, if we couldn’t do it the right way. And I’ve held to that promise.”

    Of course, Hollywood being Hollywood, lots of people in the movie business didn’t get what The Spirit is about. “It’s painful,” Uslan said, telling us that “We have had many lucrative deals put in front of us that we’ve turned down over the years.” That’s because “We have dealt with people in Hollywood who have said, “˜Great, you want to do a Spirit movie?’” but then added, “Let’s get him out of his suit and tie” and put him in a costume and give him “super-powers.” They would even propose “make him die” so that he could “come back as a ghost,” whereupon Uslan said he replied “That’s a great idea and we can call it The Spectre or Deadman,” referring to two established DC superheroes who really are ghosts.

    Meanwhile, Uslan continued, over the years he would consult with Eisner about The Spirit. “Thank God I had an opportunity over those years to spend a lot of time with Will to ask him questions, to get him involved, so that we know what he had in mind, we know what he was thinking about this, what his preferences were or weren’t.”

    Then Uslan introduced the other panelists. “One of the important members of the team,” he said, was Denis Kitchen, who was “Will’s friend,” publisher and agent. Next Uslan introduced co-producer F. J. DeSanto, who in turn read an e-mail from Frank Miller, who had been scheduled to appear on the panel.

    Miller’s e-mail began with a bit of philosophy: “Sometimes life really sucks.” Miller explained that “I slipped on a patch of black ice on a Manhattan sidewalk, smashed my left hip to bits and have spent the last bunch of weeks undergoing medical procedures and losing out on all these chances to tell everybody how much fun I’m having writing Will Eisner’s The Spirit.” MIller then cautioned, “Don’t go expecting a nostalgic tongue-in-cheek romp here. Remember. . .how scary Eisner got whenever he chose to. Remember, remember how he broke your heart with the story of Sand Serif,” whom Miller has credited as his inspiration for Elektra in Daredevil. “So expect some hairpin turns, some dead end, back alley madness of the wet kind. Get set, we’re on our way to some dark places.”

    (As terrible as this injury sounds, Miller was nonetheless able to attend the premiere of the 300 movie in Los Angeles (at Grauman’s Chinese Theater, no less) less than two weeks later, though he was using a cane. See the photo here.

    Then the panelists showed the “teaser poster” that Miller had created for The Spirit movie, showing Eisner’s character, looking formidable and grim, his sleeves rolled up, standing amidst darkness. The whole poster was in black and white, with the Spirit’s suit rendered as black and white lines, except for the brilliant red of his tie and of the logo “Will Eisner’s The Spirit.” In short, it looked like a melding of Eisner’s Spirit with Miller’s Sin City. Across the top were two lines in quotation marks: “Down these mean streets a man must come. A hero born, murdered, and born again.” That reminds me of the title of Miller’s Daredevil: Born Again storyline (1986), with its Christian imagery, as well as the title of Martin Scorsese’s Mean Streets (1973) and Raymond Chandler’s description of the fictional detective in his 1945 essay “The Simple Art of Murder” (http://en.wikiquote.org/wiki/Raymond_Chandler). The emphasis on the Spirit’s figurative death and resurrection reminds me of my debate with Dr. Peter Coogan, author of Superhero: The Secret Origin of a Genre, as to whether or not the Spirit is a superhero (see “Comics in Context” #163 and 165).

    Uslan said that he and Miller “ran into each other again” at Will Eisner’s memorial service in New York City. (Regular readers will recall that I was there, too, and reported on Uslan’s speech. In fact, Uslan said there that whenever he saw a film by “Alfred Hitchcock, Frank Capra, Orson Welles, and now Frank Miller, I’ll think of Will Eisner.” See “Comics in Context” #80-81.) Miller and Robert Rodriguez’s movie “Sin City had come out a week or two before that, and I said, “˜You know, Frank. . .I’m trying to make comic books into movies and what you’ve done is you’ve made a movie into a comic book.” Uslan had long been planning to do a Spirit movie, but he said at the memorial he told Miller, “For the first time I can really. . .see The Spirit being done, using this Sin City technology.” Uslan told the audience he asked Miller to write and direct The Spirit movie, but at first Miller didn’t think he could do justice to Eisner’s work.

    Uslan continued, “But after thinking about this for some time he came back and said, “˜I can’t let anyone else do it. I’ve got to do it.’” Uslan assured the audience that “the Spirit is safe with Frank,” and that even now “Frank is very busy writing the final draft of the movie.”

    Denis Kitchen observed that “The Spirit movie is something I don’t think Will ever expected to really happen, because over the years, many people optioned it, and for may reasons, [it] wasn’t an easy thing to translate. Many people had it and it just never got done right.”

    Moreover, Kitchen said, “Will also, unlike many other people in the world, did not want to direct and wasn’t particularly intrigued by the idea of comics becoming movies, because most of them he felt didn’t do justice to the original source. If you read Will’s serious works, you know he felt that comics should be an art in its own right and he didn’t like the implied superiority of film, because it was a more lucrative field to be in.” You, like myself, may wonder, then, why he even bothered to sell movie rights to The Spirit. Later during the panel Kitchen recalled Eisner’s comment on a notoriously dreadful TV-movie version of The Spirit: “It made my toes curl.”

    However, Kitchen stated, referring to Miller, that “Will would be very pleased to know that his friend and someone he respected is going to take this and mold it into another medium.” Kitchen voiced his approval of the Sin City movie and added, “I knew Frank was thinking right when he told me he was clipping out panels of Will’s Spirit and taping them on his wall and doing in-betweening.”

    What Kitchen was describing was Miller’s method of storyboarding the movie. Walt Disney and his animation studio pioneered storyboarding, which means plotting out a movie as if it were a long comics story. “in-betweening” is also an animation term, meaning filling in the movement between two separate poses of the character.

    DeSanto explained MIller’s process: “When we first started talking about the movie and ideas started to pour out of Frank’s head, he would xerox Will’s graphic novels”–presumably DeSanto actually meant Eisner’s Spirit stories, perhaps as collected in DC’s Archives editions–“and start cutting and pasting them into some sort of order. That’s how he mapped out the initial film. I was having lunch with him about six months ago and all of a sudden he had a pile of papers on his lap and he said, “˜Okay, here’s the movie.’”

    Later during the panel, Uslan put it this way: “The storyboards are by Will Eisner with an assist by Frank Miller.” While the film’s story is “not a specific story we’ve seen” in Eisner’s Spirit canon, Uslan explained, “you will recognize sequences” from classic Eisner Spirit stories in the film.

    Recently I have been having a discussion via e-mail with comics writer Peter Gillis as to whether “decompressed” storytelling in contemporary comics is more “cinematic” than Eisner’s Spirit; he votes for the former, while I vote for the latter. (As Scott McCloud explains in Understanding Comics, time works differently in comics and movies, and I feel that “decompressed” storytelling in Western-style comics moves at a deadening pace.) Miller’s comics storytelling is closer to the Eisner mode, and the Sin City movie testifies to the cinematic nature of Miller’s comics work. I certainly hope that these Spirit storyboards will be published if someday there will be an “art of The Spirit movie” book.

    So what will the story of the movie be like? DeSanto said “It’s not an origin story. When you meet the Spirit, he is the Spirit.” And how much will the film look as if Will Eisner drew it? For one thing, DeSanto said that “We’ll be incorporating the logo into the background,” thus imitating Eisner’s trademark technique in his Spirit splash pages. “With the technology they made Sin City and 300 with, we’re at a really neat point in filmmaking where we can make that world as Eisneresque as possible.”

    Will there be familiar Eisner characters aside from the Spirit himself in the movie? DeSanto said that “we’re going to see some of the femme fatales.”

    Then Uslan cautioned that “We’re not going to do the whimsical Spirit stories [in the movie]. We’re not going to do Rat-Tat the Machine Gun or Gerhard Shnobble” (see “Comics in Context” #68). Uslan continued, “However, that doesn’t mean that when we move to some animation projects that we won’t necessarily cover that then.” It seemed Uslan had revealed something he had not intended, for he quickly added, “But that’s a story I’m not allowed to talk about now.”

    But as for characters who will be in the movie, Uslan said, “We’ve got Commissioner Dolan, and believe me, you’ll understand why he is so different from Commissioner Gordon [in Batman]. Ellen Dolan will be there. Sand Saref and that magnificent romantic triangle will be there.” Later on during the panel Uslan advised the audience to “check out some of the Octopus stories” as preparation for seeing the movie, so it would seem that the Spirit’s archenemy is also in the film.

    Will the movie be set back in the 1940s, when most of Eisner’s Spirit stories were first published? Uslan recounted that he asked Eisner, “‘Should this be set in the 40s? Should this be set in the 50s? Should this be set today?’ He was kind of shocked at my question and said, “˜I never wrote The Spirit in a nostalgic sense. Whenever I write it and drew it, I was always doing something that was relevant at the time. He was in the 40s in the 40s. When I was doing it in the 50s it was the 50s. When I did it in the 60s, it was the 60s. There’s no reason this shouldn’t be contemporary or at least timeless.’”

    Hence, Uslan continued, “That’s what Frank is going to go for here. There’s going to be a timeless feel to this, The only thing I can throw back to you is what Tim Burton did in our first Batman picture, where a lot of people, if you asked them, weren’t absolutely sure if that movie took place in the past, present or future, or some kind of mix thereof.” For example, in that 1989 film, reporter Alexander Knox, in his fedora (the Spirit wears one, too) and trench coat, looks as if he were from the 1940s, whereas Vicki Vale wears a minidress in one sequence.

    Although Uslan and company are based in New York, they have partnered with a Hollywood company, Odd Lot Productions, to produce The Spirit movie. Uslan assured the audience that Odd Lot understood and appreciated The Spirit and the comics medium. He said that when he told Deborah Del Prete, one of the heads of Odd Lot, that he was attempting to make a movie of “the greatest comic in seventy years,” she exclaimed, “Oh my God, it’s The Spirit!” Not only is Del Prete a “comics fan,” Uslan told us, she is a “Legion [of Super-Heroes] completist.” (Well, that certainly makes her One of Us, perhaps more so than many of Us!) Uslan made the point that the film is being “independently financed,” perhaps in order to assure us that there would be no creative interference from a major studio.

    Then Uslan started taking questions from the audience. The first questioner started out by saying that writer/artist Darwyn Cooke’s new Spirit comic book series for DC “is my first experience of The Spirit.” That surprised me, but on reflection, I realized it shouldn’t have. I read my first Spirit story decades ago, but in recent years The Spirit had only been in print in DC’s hardcover Archives volumes. I would have assigned Spirit stories to attendees of my lectures, but I didn’t want to compel them to buy a fifty dollar book. Last year DC finally published a Best of the Spirit paperback collection, which should be good news for anyone teaching a course in the history of comics.

    This new Spirit fan pointed out that the tone of Cooke’s Spirit stories is considerably lighter than that of Miller’s Sin City. DeSanto responded that the “basis of the film is the very early Eisner work.” The story of Sand Saref, he said, provides “the tone” of the movie. It “will have that noir feel.”

    The next question was about the “ideal cast” for The Spirit movie. Denis Kitchen repeated the well known information that years ago, when the actor was closer to the right age, Eisner had “wanted James Garner to play the Spirit.” Kitchen said that Eisner had “really no more” casting suggestions “since then.” At another point during the panel we had been told that Miller already has some casting ideas in mind.

    Uslan said that the actor who portrays the Spirit “has to be a little scary. . . have a sense of humor. . .be able to win all these femme fatales,” and “take a lot of punishment.”

    Adapting the celebrated line of Eisner’s foremost femme fatale, P’Gell, Uslan told us, “I think if Frank was here, he’d say, “˜My name is Frank and this is not a movie for little boys.’”

    (I just saw the Sin City movie again recently. Please, Frank, don’t have the Spirit castrate anybody onscreen!)

    Moving to a bigger topic, Uslan declared, “I believe we are now in a Golden Age of comic book moviemaking.” He told us he had been in the movie business for thirty years, but in recent years there has been a “sea change” in how Hollywood regards comics.

    First, Uslan stated that years ago many people in Hollywood had no respect for comics. But now, he asserted, there were people in positions of power who grew up reading the comics of Stan Lee and DC editor Julie Schwartz.

    Second, he continued, people in Hollywood “finally understood” that comic books are not just about superheroes, that the interest in comics “is not [just] a trend,” and that “comics are an ongoing source of great stories and characters.”

    Third, Uslan declared, if you “look at successful comics-based movies” and “take out those based on sixty-year-old franchises”– like Batman and Superman, and he should have also mentioned those based on fortysomething -year-old franchises like Spider-Man and X-Men–then you see that they were based on comics that sold only “ten thousand” copies like Men in Black and Road to Perdition. In other words, even obscure comics properties can give rise to successful movies.

    Uslan declared that he and his colleagues were producing The Spirit movie “independently.” This, it seems, gives them the creative freedom to be faithful to the source material. He continued, “So we’ll never ignore sixty years of the history of a character just to create something out of whole cloth.” Uslan maintained, “We get to respect the creators, the characters, and the material.” Would that every producer of a comics-based movie would take that pledge and mean it!

    Uslan then mentioned one other important new “element” in making comic book-based movies: “the technology,” meaning CGI, which he said now allows moviemakers to do the Silver Surfer and Green Lantern onscreen. “This also makes this the Golden Age of comic book movies,” he concluded.

    Uslan then said his “guess” was that The Spirit movie would go into production before Sin City 2. “We’re moving like lightning. We really are.” (On the other hand, Frank Miller subsequently announced that he and Sin City 2 co-director Robert Rodriguez “intend to go into prep sometime in the next six weeks, and we’re hoping on shooting by June.”

    Then Uslan did something one doesn’t often hear from a movie producer: with obvious heartfelt sincerity, he voiced his sheer happiness in realizing his boyhood dream he had as One of Us. “I am so lucky in life,” he told us. “I’m working with what I loved since I was three years old,” meaning comics, and on his “favorite characters.” Moreover, he continued, he got to work with “geniuses” like Frank Miller, Sam Raimi (director of the Spider-Man movies), and Chris Nolan (director of Batman Begins).

    Raimi? The person I missed seeing last summer in San Diego? What’s this about?

    But first the panelists answered another question as to whether a familiar member of Eisner’s Spirit cast would turn up in the movie: the Spirit’s young African-American sidekick Ebony, who notoriously looks and speaks like a racist stereotype, something even Eisner acknowledged in his introduction to his last graphic novel, Fagin the Jew (see “Comics in Context” #25).

    “No Ebony,” declared DeSanto. Uslan added that “It was Frank’s choice,” repeating Miller’s line that “Creatively everyone has a bad day. That was Will’s bad day.”

    Uslan went on that he believed Miller’s main reason for not using Ebony “was less about the controversial nature of the character than it was the story doesn’t lend itself to a little kid being involved in the action.” Miller, he said, had created “too dark and violent and adult [a] world” to be “endangering a child.” (But what about the boy Dick Grayson in Miller’s All-Star Batman and Robin? Well, I suppose Grayson is already a trained athlete, whereas Eisner’s Ebony is not.)

    Yet another fan in the question-and-answer line revealed that he had been introduced to The Spirit through Darwyn Cooke’s new comic, and that he was “not very acquainted with Eisner’s Spirit.” I wonder just how many readers are like this. It’s a good thing that DC is finally publishing Spirit stories, new and old, in easily affordable formats. This is when Uslan recommended that he “check out” some of the Octopus stories as preparation for seeing the movie.

    The next question was whether The Spirit movie will get “a hard R [rating] like Sin City.” Uslan said “I can’t say” but “guesses” it will get “a hard PG-13.” (I guess that means no onscreen castration, thank God.) Here Uslan made the point that Miller “knows it’s Eisner’s stuff, so Eisner’s sense of humor is going to be there.”

    I hope so. With all of the panel’s emphasis on how The Spirit movie will be dark and frightening, and devoid of “whimsy,” and with the examples of the Sin City and 300 movies to consider, and even All-Star Batman and Robin (see “Comics in Context” #119, which was titled “Bats and Spats” before IGN changed it), I worry that Miller’s interpretation of The Spirit will be too one-sided, emphasizing the dark film noir aspect of Eisner’s creation but omitting its humor, essential optimism, and humane, ah, spirit.

    The panel drew to a close with news about subjects other than The Spirit movie. For example, Denis Kitchen assured us that “Virtually everything Will did will be back in print if it isn’t already” from a number of different publishers.

    Uslan told the audience that he was “making great progress” with developing a Shazam movie, about the original Captain Marvel, at New Line Cinema, where, he said, “everybody gets it.” Not only did Uslan know Otto Binder, the Captain’s principal writer in the Golden Age, but he also had a “correspondence as a kid with C. C. Beck,” the artist who co-created the character.

    Uslan reminded us that the “first gig I got writing comic books” was on The Shadow for DC. “I knew Walter Gibson,” the principal author of The Shadow pulp novels, Uslan told us, and “talked with him at length.” (Obviously knowing Michael Uslan would do wonders in playing a game of Six Degrees of Separation!) Now Uslan is developing a Shadow movie that Sam Raimi will direct. (Aha!) The “story’s been cracked,” Uslan reported, adding that they had found its “tone.” Interestingly, Uslan would not answer whether the movie is set in the 1930s or the 1940s, when the Shadow pulp novels and radio series were originally done. (It’s also interesting that another Shadow movie is in the works so soon after the 1994 version bombed. Could it be that Raimi and Uslan are changing the time period to make their film different from the last one?)

    Finally, Uslan announced that the Montclair Art Museum, in Montclair, New Jersey, would be holding an exhibit on superhero comics that will open on July 14. Indeed, there was a full-page ad for the show, “Reflecting Culture: The Evolution of American Comic Book Superheroes,” on page 11 of the New York Comic-Con program book.

    Uslan emphasized that the Montclair museum show would be an exhibit of “comic book art.” I interpreted this as a possible veiled reference to the “Masters of American Comics” museum exhibition, half of which showcased comic strip artwork (see “Comics in Context” #151-156).

    Uslan said that he is “really involved” in the Montclair show. Indeed, according to an interview with Uslan in the Asbury Park Press, it will draw from his own collection of comic books and original comics art.

    Uslan stated that the Montclair show will examine superhero comics “from three points of view”: First, that “comic books are a true American artform,” second, that comic books present a “modern mythology,” with superheroes as contemporary counterparts of the gods, and third, that comic books reflect changes in American culture.

    Uslan also stressed that Montclair was only a “half-hour train ride” from Manhattan. You may recall that one reason that Art Spiegelman pulled his artwork out of the New York area version of “Masters” was that he disapproved of the fact that the show was divided between the Jewish Museum in Manhattan and the Newark Museum in New Jersey. As he pointed out, it is exceedingly difficult to persuade New Yorkers to trek out to the wilds of New Jersey, and my long, complicated trip out to the Newark Museum and back demonstrated why.

    Well, good luck to the Montclair Art Museum in attracting visitors from Manhattan. Luckily, I’ve got a friend who lives near Montclair and is willing to put me up overnight, so I will be reporting on this show after it opens.

    SATURDAY FEB. 24, 4 PM

    Although I was told that the New York Comic-Con cleared each meeting room following each panel, this is not actually true, and I kept my seat in Room 1E12/13 after The Spirit movie panel in order to see the next event in the same room: “NYCC’s Behind the Panels: The 60s Marvel Bullpen.”

    Unlike at the San Diego Con, with its mammoth crowds, it is easier to encounter friends and acquaintances at the New York Comic-Con. So it was that while I was sitting in Room 1E12/13 I got to chat with Tom McLean, who writes the “Bags and Boards“ blog on comics for Variety and my old friend Scott Lobdell, one of Marvel’s most prolific writers of the 1990s, who asked me to assure my readers that he was “still alive.”

    This panel was supposed to start at four, but it didn’t commence at 4, or 4:05 or even 4:10 PM. It’s not that no one had told the panelists to show up, as with my panel earlier in the day. There, over to the right of the meeting room, Jerry Robinson was clapping Stan Lee on the shoulder. And then I saw Stan Lee talking with “Fabulous” Flo Steinberg, his legendary secretary from the 1960s, and bussing her on the cheek.

    Flo was here!? Very friendly but also very modest by nature, Flo always downplays the importance of her role at Marvel during its Silver Age, almost ever gives interviews, and never accepts invitations to be a guest at comics conventions. For her to show up here is highly unusual. Could it be that she’s on the panel, too?

    It was now 4:15 PM and the panel still hasn’t started. And in the present, I’ve run out of space for this week’s column. You’ll have to wait till next time to learn about the onstage reunion of Stan, Flo, and the great Silver Age artists Gene Colan and Joe Sinnott.

    ADVERTISEMENTS FOR MYSELF

    Editor Ken Plume has advised me that he’s finally making progress in transferring the columns that I did for IGN over to the “Comics in Context” archive page here at Quick Stop. There’s also a new, simpler way to access my archive page: just go to asitecalledfred.com/comicsincontext/.

    Copyright 2007 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #169: New York 2007 – The King Of Creation

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    SATURDAY, FEB. 24, 10 AM

    cic2007-03-17.jpgPleased at the success of the opening reception for “Stan Lee: A Retrospective” at the Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art, I remained there until the party finally broke up around 1:30 in the morning. That meant that eight hours later I was trudging from Penn Station to the Javits Center for the second day of this year’s New York Comic-Con. I’d already been keeping late hours that week putting finishing touches on the wall texts for the exhibit, and now I was definitely falling well into sleep debt.

    Still, I was better off than the folks standing out in the February chill in the long, long line waiting to get in. It was about 10:10 AM when I arrived, and the con had been officially open for ten minutes, and yet the line was so lengthy that I could not see where it ended. Lucky for me I had my all-powerful press badge, so I could walk right in. Inside the Special Events Hall, the panel “Slayer Tales with Xander, Kendra and Drusilla” was already in progress. The auditorium seemed half empty, not surprisingly, with so many people still stuck outside on line.

    “Slayer Tales” marked the tenth anniversary of the debut of the Buffy the Vampire Slayer television series, and there was even a birthday cake. Ten years already!? But the panel’s title turned out to be a misnomer: Nicholas Brendon, who played Xander, one of the leading characters, didn’t make it, either because he was stuck in traffic, or due to illness, according to different reports. (Brendon did show up to sign autographs later, and reportedly was clearly somewhat ill.) The other actors who showed up were all minor players on the series, including Bianca Lawson, who portrayed the short-lived African slayer Kendra, Larry Bagby, Dennis Christopher, James Leary, and Jonathan Woodward.

    The exception was Juliet Landau, who memorably portrayed the recurring vampiress villainess Drusilla. Wearing large glasses, with her hair pulled back, and speaking in an open, friendly American accent, Landau was unrecognizable as the half-mad, British Dru. She recalled that once she was doing a “press thing in England” and the interviewer was “floored” to discover “I was American.”

    Of all the panelists Landau made the most interesting comments. When a fan inquired about whether the actors could improvise dialogue, Landau explained that they could not change the dialogue, but they had considerable freedom of interpretation. “If I feel like dancing on the table” or “rolling on the floor,” she said, she could do it. Landau said that early on she had a “creative meeting” in which she was confused by the seeming contradictions in Buffy creator Joss Whedon’s description of Drusilla as both “childlike” and “sexual” and as both “sweet” and “innocent” yet “diabolical,” but that she eventually got a handle on playing these dualities in the character. “It was really collaborative,” Landau said, “but the words were strictly the words.” The “growls” and “giggles” that she put in, she added, were “not scripted.”

    Another fan informed Landau that “my eight-year-old daughter does Drusilla impressions.” “Oh, no!” exclaimed Landau.

    Of course, inevitably, Landau was asked to do Drusilla’s voice, and though she cautioned that she hadn’t done it in a long time, Landau shifted with apparent ease into Drusilla’s eerily sing-song British accent, and then shifted back to herself, smiling, as the audience applauded.

    SATURDAY, FEB. 24, 11 AM

    On that morning, outside the Special Events Hall, I saw two celebrities showing off their legs. The first was Hayden Panetierre, who plays the super-powered cheerleader on the NBC series Heroes. She was a vision of beauty with her blonde hair, minidress and boots, as she was escorted past the Special Events Hall by security. (See for yourself. Here’s a photo of Ms. Panetierre talking with comics writer Peter David in the Con’s green room).

    Yesterday I had seen a Silent Bob impersonator, but later this morning I saw Quick Stop’s lord and master, Kevin Smith himself, in his trademark long black coat, shorts, and sneakers outside the Special Events Hall. Didn’t he get cold outside? (But I commend Ms. Panetierre’s decision to sacrifice her personal comfort for the sake of aesthetics.)

    Between admiring Ms. Panetierre and sighting the Quick Stop’s founder, I made my way over to the Javits Center food court, which opened at 11 Am, and devoured an early lunch, knowing I wouldn’t get another break for eating until 7 PM. At one point I looked up and saw my favorite member of the Flash’s Rogues Gallery, the Mirror Master, walking over to the food court. Well, I’ve never seen him at a comics con before. He passed by a table where Supergirl was having lunch. She didn’t seem to notice the notorious super-villain; well, I guess she was off duty. This was one of three Supergirls I would see this weekend, as if she were Triplicate Girl as well. The mainstream media would have you believe that virtually everyone at a comics con is in costume, and this is far from true. But I rather enjoy seeing a familiar costumed character nonchalantly pass by at these conventions.

    SATURDAY, FEB. 24, 12 PM

    Studying the program book I noticed that tickets were required for the next panel I intended to attend, “MARVEL: Stephen King’s Dark Tower–The Gunslinger Born,” which would start in an hour. But how would I get a ticket? Returning to the lobby area just outside the Special Events Hall, I saw there was already a long line snaking back and forth, waiting to enter for the King panel. I asked one person in line when the con had begun giving out tickets; he replied, somewhat contemptuously, “Eight A. M.” Two hours before the convention opened!? Considering how long the line was to get in shortly after 10 AM, just how long did people have to wait out in the cold to get tickets for the King panel?

    I soon located one of the red-shirted volunteers who was in charge of distributing tickets for the King panel, showed him my all-powerful press badge, explained my connection with Publishers Weekly, and after consulting with other parties, he gave me a pass for the panel. Although I joke about the Red Shirts at the New York and San Diego Cons, he was gratifyingly helpful, and explained to me that the meeting rooms were cleared at the conclusion of each panel. The Red Shirt was quite surprised when I told him about the “camping” phenomenon that the San Diego Con encourages in its largest auditorium, the humongous Hall H. Not only are no tickets necessary to attend the movie preview panels in Hall H, but many, many conventioneers settle into Hall H on Saturday morning and never leave till the final panel of the day concludes. That’s why I never got into the Spider-Man 3 panel at last year’s San Diego Con (see “Comics in Context” #146).

    I wonder if, as attendance continues to mount at the San Diego Con, whether its organizers will also have to issue tickets for certain Hall H presentations (as they already do for events such as the Masquerade) and clear the hall afterwards. But I expect that if tickets are given out a full two hours before the Con opens for the day, I still won’t be able to get into these panels. (The San Diego Con doesn’t make exceptions for press people trying to get into Hall H.)

    SATURDAY, FEB. 24, 1 PM

    The large audience in the Special Events Hall broke into applause as the creative team for Marvel’s Dark Tower comic walked onto the stage. There was Stephen King’s research assistant Robin Furth, who plots the comic, and who turns out to be an attractive, smiling woman with long blonde hair (as you can see here). There were also the comic’s scripter Peter David, illustrator Jae Lee, colorist Richard Isanove, letterer Chris Eliopolous, and editor Ralph Macchio.

    “There’s Joe!” exclaimed a guy who was sitting near me and who was ecstatic at seeing Mr. Quesada, Marvel’s editor in chief. But there was one person still missing, King himself, whom Quesada proceeded to introduce as “one of the greatest authors and creators in the last fifty years, maybe ever!”

    Now wait a minute. I haven’t read widely in horror prose fiction, and, for all I know, Clive Barker, for example, may be a superior writer to Stephen King. But I’m very fond of The Shining and The Stand, so I have no trouble accepting the idea that King may be the greatest contemporary writer of horror fiction. But “one of the greatest authors and creators in the last fifty years, maybe ever”? Maybe not.

    Where to begin? Well, I could start at the top: is Stephen King in the same league as Shakespeare? Or perhaps I could start listing authors who are greater than King in roughly chronological order: say, Homer, Aeschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, Aristophanes, Plato, Aristotle, and so on. It’s a lengthy list.

    Or I could refer to the celebrated Yale scholar Professor Harold Bloom, who recently listed his “five most important books” in Newsweek: the complete works of Shakespeare, Chaucer’s The Canterbury Tales, Dante’s Divine Comedy, Cervantes’ Don Quixote, and Homer’s Iliad. Why, how strange that Professor Bloom did not mention Mr. King!

    There are all sorts of ways to come at the question of who’s a greater writer than Stephen King. For example, I could refer to the title of last week’s “Comics in Context,” which I took from Walt Whitman: he’s a better writer than King, too.

    And I should think that Mr. King would agree that all the people I’ve named are superior to himself. Years ago I saw the British playwright Tom Stoppard being interviewed onstage at Columbia University. The interviewer started comparing Stoppard to Shakespeare, and Stoppard clearly looked embarrassed, presumably because Stoppard, one of the leading contemporary playwrights, surely realized he was still nowhere near being a match for the Bard.

    And hey, Quesada referred to King as “one of the greatest authors and creators. . .maybe ever,” so that takes in creators of any form of art. So is Mr. King superior to Ingmar Bergman, or to Leonardo da Vinci, or to Wolfgang Amadeus Mozart? Or to the Creator of the heavens and earth? This is fun.

    But, you may be saying, I shouldn’t make too much of Mr. Quesada’s remark as signifying Marvel’s limitations in appreciating literature. Oh, look, here in the second issue of Marvel’s Dark Tower comic is a house ad for the company’s new Marvel Illustrated line, comics adaptation of what the ad calls “literature’s greatest stories.” First up: The Man in the Iron Mask. It’s as if I wasted my time studying James Joyce’s Ulysses in school instead of the oeuvre of Alexandre Dumas. (And shouldn’t Marvel be adapting The Three Musketeers before its sequel?)

    “I’ve been saying ad nauseum,” Quesada continued, “that being able to publish The Dark Tower is a coming out party for the comic book industry.” In his six years as editor in chief, Quesada said, his goal has been “reaching out into the mainstream.” Publishing The Dark Tower comic, Quesada declared, demonstrates that “We’re a very serious art form and one to be reckoned with.”

    And here I thought that Art Spiegelman’s Maus winning a Pulitzer Prize in 1992 had proved comics could be a “very serious art form.” Or maybe when Time Magazine named Alan Moore and Dave Gibbons’ Watchmen as one of the hundred greatest novels published between 1923 (when Time started publication) and 2005 (when the list was made). (Mr. King isn’t on this list, either.) Or Alison Bechtel’s autobiographical graphic novel (graphic autobiography?) Fun Home being named as one of the New York Times’ “100 Notable Books” of 2006? Or the success of the “Masters of American Comics” traveling museum exhibition (see “Comics in Context” #151-156)? Or the widespread appreciation of comics professionals such as Robert Crumb, Chris Ware, Neil Gaiman, Scott McCloud, Harvey Pekar, and Will Eisner in the worlds of academia, museums and the mainstream media in recent years.

    Certainly King is now a mainstream writer, and not simply read by a niche audience. But would the literary world consider comics to be a “very serious” artform simply because there is now a comic book based on King’s work? Quesada is probably unaware of the controversy that erupted in the literary world when King received a Lifetime Achievement Award at the National Book Awards in 2003. I think that King deserved the award, but it’s important to realize that many people in the literary community did not.

    So thus I am reminded once again why I’ve always felt somewhat out of place in the world of comics, whose study I regard as my life’s work, but where I remain on the periphery. I’m a man with three Ivy League degrees in English literature who works in a field in which the major publishers couldn’t care less about my academic background. We just don’t think alike.

    The literary world is quickly learning to take comics seriously; the real question is when the comics industry itself will recognize what it truly means to be a serious artform.

    And let’s appreciate Stephen King for his genuine achievements in popular culture, without indulging in unfounded hyperbole.

    Finally Stephen King came onstage, and the audience gave him a standing ovation, cheering more loudly than the audience did yesterday for Stan Lee. Once again, people crowded down front, flashing their cameras in the panelists’ faces. Quesada told them “Thank you” over and over, as an obvious hint to sit down, but these amateur paparazzi kept on flashing. Unlike yesterday during the Stan Lee panel, this time convention staffers cleared the space in front of the stage.

    And you know how I keep joking in my convention reports that the Red Shirts seem like fascist stormtroopers? The con actually stationed people in Star Wars stormtrooper costumes in front of the King panel dais as guards! Over the weekend I would continue to see Star Wars stormtroopers actually acting as Con security. (If they unmasked, would they all turn out to be clones?)

    When I saw King at Radio City Music Hall last year (See “Comics in Context” #148), he was giving a performance, acting the role of the scruffy, macabre prankster, who delighted in scaring and grossing out his audience. At the New York Comic-Con he was more serious and subdued, but still in character.

    The first question was from an audience member who said he hadn’t read The Dark Tower novels and wondered if the comics contained any “spoilers.”
    “Spoilers!” King retorted. “There are no spoilers!” King continued. “You might as well say “˜I’m never watch The Wizard of Oz again because I know how it comes out!” Summing up his opinion of Marvel’s Dark Tower, King declared, “The comic book just kicks ass.”

    Another audience member asked if Peter David was “intimidated” by working on a comics adaptation of “a serious book that’s reached this many people.” (Here we go again. What makes Stephen King’s Dark Tower any more or less “serious” than Peter David’s Hulk?) David replied that “What’s intimidating is it’s a book that’s going to one particular person,” indicating King. David said that King “goes over everything.”

    Another audience member asked KIng, “If I donate one hundred dollars to your favorite charity, will you autograph my copy of The Dark Tower?”

    King quietly replied, “No,” to appreciative audience laughter,

    A questioner asked about the theme of the final novel in The Dark Tower series. King explained, “if there’s an overall theme to The Dark Tower, it’s one of evolution. You don’t get what you want immediately. . . .Sometimes you don’t get it right the first time or the second time or the fiftieth time. There has to be an evolutionary process.”

    Then, observing that there were Harry Potter fans in the audience, King said that “when you do a long body of work. . . .when you get to the end, you’re going to piss off a lot of fans. They are pissed off because it’s over,” or because it ended differently than “whatever they had built up in their minds.”

    Peter David interjected that he “thought the ultimate theme of the books” was the futility of “obsession, and how it turns back on itself.”

    After Quesada made another of his respectful references to “Mr. King,” King threatened, “If you keep calling me Mr. King, I’m going to kick your ass.” Peter David suggested “your lordship” as an alternative mode of address. (I see that the New York Comic-Con program book’s biography of King, on page 10, refers to him as “Stephen Edwin King.” Edwin? What kind of novels would you expect from a writer who called himself “Edwin King”? Now there’s an alternate reality to contemplate.)

    Another audience member asked if King had planned certain events in The Dark Tower saga in advance, but King said no, explaining that “The story tells itself in a sense, and it’s your job to stand back and let it be what it is.” King compared it to a “hunk of granite,” saying you “know there’s a guy” in there. (Although King did not credit him, this is a paraphrase of a famous statement by Michelangelo about sculpting. See http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Michelangelo)

    The other panelists were asked what it was like to sit on a convention panel with Stephen King. “His lordship?” asked Quesada, who replied that years ago at the San Diego Comic-Con he was asked “what’s the Holy Grail in comics?” Quesada told us he replied, “To work with Stephen King.”

    Then King was asked if he was interested in working on any Marvel characters. “I never say never to anything,” King replied. He observed that he had written his novel Firestarter about a character, Charlie McGee, who could mentally set fires. “I’ve done the Torch, what’s the point?”

    Asked about what comics he had read in the past, KIng named Neil Gaiman’s Sandman, Alan Moore’s V for Vendetta, and Garth Ennis’s Preacher, as well as Spider-Man.

    King then addressed why he had so long refused to permit adaptations of his Dark Tower series of novels. “This is my life’s work,” he explained, stating that he had started it when he was twenty and finished it in his fifties. “So it’s very important to me,” and until recently, he had “said no to everybody” who asked to turn it into a movie.

    “But when the chance came to do The Dark Tower as a comic book, I thought this was the best of all possible worlds. This [the characters?] will look the way they’re supposed to look. And when they brought in Jae Lee and Peter David, I just thought, “˜This is as good as it gets.’ If you guys have ever seen some of the movies that have been made from Marvel comic books. . .a lot of times the books are better than the movies.”

    Now there may be a Dark Tower movie as well, made by J. J. Abrams and Damon Lindehof, co-creators of the television series Lost. “I trust these guys,” King told us. “And they said, “˜How much do you want for an option?’ And I said, “˜nineteen dollars.’ And that’s what they paid me and that’s where it is.” (The significance of the number nineteen here is as mysterious to me as that of those cursed numbers on Lost.)

    Towards the end King was asked if when he was writing a character, he ever imagined he ever imagined the character looked like a specific actor. “I never see them,” he replied, suggesting they were “behind my eyes. Maybe if they looked in a mirror I would see them.” Here King seemed to be moving toward the notion that all of his characters are actually parts of himself.

    And, oh yes, King said that just before the panel, he and the panelists had been discussing possibly doing a Marvel adaptation of The Stand!

    SATURDAY FEB. 24, 2 PM

    Weeks before the New York Comic-Con, I had been asked to moderate a panel titled “NYCC’s Behind the Panels: The Classic Age of Comics,” which had a stellar lineup of giants of the Golden and Silver Ages, including Murphy Anderson (Hawkman, The Spectre), Arnold Drake (Deadman, Doom Patrol), Irwin Hasen (Wildcat, Green Lantern), Carmine Infantino (The Flash, Adam Strange, Batman), and Jerry Robinson (Batman). I eagerly accepted, but then, a week before the Con, noticed that its online schedule didn’t list me as moderator, or Anderson, Infantino and Robinson as panelists. I contacted the con organizers, and was told that they had lost my contact information, and had reassigned the role of moderator. (This is especially too bad because I missed my opportunity to interview Arnold Drake, who died shortly after the convention.)

    However, on Friday I was asked to moderate a Saturday afternoon panel called “NYCC’s Behind the Panels: The 80s Superhero Renaissance” featuring Brian Bolland (Batman: The Killing Joke), Bill Sienkiewicz (Moon Knight, The New Mutants, Elektra: Assassin), Walter Simonson (Thor), and Rick Veitch (The One). After rearranging my Saturday schedule, I again eagerly accepted.

    And so, on Saturday at 2 PM, I took my position behind the lectern in Room 1E14, before a large audience, and waited for the panelists to show up.

    After a few minutes I informed the audience that I was simply holding the start of the panel until the artists arrived.

    Several more minutes passed. I told the admirably patient audience that I had had experiences at the Big Apple Con when I was supposed to interview a guest who never turned up for the panel, but this was the first time that I had four–count “˜em, four–absentees!

    I introduced myself to the audience, giving many of my credits, and was quite surprised when they applauded my mention of co-authoring DK Publishing’s recent Marvel Encyclopedia. At 2:10 PM I asked for, and got, a volunteer to go up to Artists’ Aerie and find the missing artists. Then, having conducted that year-long series of lectures, “1986: The Year That Changed Comics” at the Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art, I improvised a lecture about superhero comics in the 1980s on the spot. I also answered questions from the audience. One person wanted to know what I thought of Marvel’s Civil War, I denounced it, enumerating many of its faults, and a good portion of the audience applauded its approval, again to my surprise.

    I succeeded in holding the audience’s attention until, finally, at 2:30 PM, my volunteer arrived with Walter Simonson, who explained that no one had told him that he was supposed to be doing a panel. I subsequently learned that this was not an unusual happenstance at this year’s New York Comic-Con, and, in fact, some panels had to be canceled because the panelists didn’t show up. Keep in mind that it’s not just that these comics pros weren’t told that they were scheduled to do panels; presumably, this means the Con organizers hadn’t even asked them if they would do these panels!

    Walter Simonson is a brilliantly entertaining raconteur. I asked him only two questions, and he filled the remaining half hour by himself; all I had to do was sit back and enjoy. Without his realizing it, much of what Walter said confirmed what I had been telling the audience about the comics of the 1980s during the first half hour! In the 1980s Walter, Howard Chaykin, Frank Miller, and James Sherman worked together in a Manhattan studio under the name “the Upstarts.” Walter concluded his talk with a dynamite anecdote about how one day he went to a videogame arcade near the studio, racked up an extraordinarily high score, and turned around to see the other people in the arcade looking at him in awe. And that, I told the audience, concluding the panel, is an example of a real life superhero of the 1980s. Thanks again for coming to my rescue at the Con, Walter!

    SATURDAY, FEB. 24, 3 PM

    Then I headed next door to Room 1E12/13 for “Will Eisner’s THE SPIRIT Movie Spotlight.” Last summer at the San Diego Con I had to miss the panel previewing the forthcoming Spirit movie because I was doing signings at the same time. This time I wasn’t about to miss it.

    It turned out to be an occasion for nostalgia. The moderator of the panel was Michael Uslan, one of the executive producers of the live action Batman movies, who was also one of the producers of the projected Spirit film. I recall that decades ago I saw Uslan speak at a comics convention in New York City, talking about his intent to make a Batman feature film. This movie, Uslan assured the audience, would treat the character seriously, and he cited as inspirations the Batman comics stories by Denny O’Neil and Neal Adams, and the six-parter in Detective Comics by Steve Englehart and Marshall Rogers (see “Comics in Context” #84). Many years later, there was Uslan’s name in the credits of Tim Burton’s 1989 Batman movie, an enduring classic that did so much to wipe the stigma of “camp” off Batman in the public imagination.

    When I heard Uslan speak at that long-ago New York convention, I hoped that his dream of doing a serious Batman movie would come true, but I doubt that I felt certain that it would happen. In the case of The Spirit movie, I am confident that it will indeed come to pass.

    After all, just look at the huge grosses piled up by Warner Brothers’ movie adaptation of the graphic novel 300 in its opening weekend: seventy million dollars, twice what the film industry had expected. In its March 12, 2007 article on 300‘s success (“Surprise! Spartans Assault Box Office”), The New York Times showed that, despite its major recent advances in appreciating comics, it still doesn’t entirely Get It. Reporter Michael Cieply wrote, “The movie defied the odds in that it had no star bigger than the Scottish actor Gerard Butler (The Phantom of the Opera), Mr. [Dan] Fellman [Warners’ president of theatrical distribution] said, it was made by the relatively untested director Zack Snyder (Dawn of the Dead), and it carried the added handicap of an R rating.”

    The real “star” of 300 is Frank Miller, the writer and artist of the 300 graphic novel, whose popularity with moviegoers was “tested” and proved by the success of the Sin City movie, which was, like the 300 film, based in story and in visual design on his work in comics (see “Comics in Context” #78, 79, 83). And Miller is the director and writer of this Spirit movie in the works, about which I will say much more next week.

    ADVERTISEMENTS FOR MYSELF
    Prodded by yours truly, former Marvel comics writer Peter B. Gillis, who used to work on Captain America, has posted his reflections on the character’s apparent demise on his blog, under the title “The Assassination of Captain America as an Extreme Downhill Skateboard Race“. In the course of the piece you’ll see his brilliant analysis of the essence of Captain America as a character, which makes him different from other major superheroes. You’ll see some further observations by myself about Cap in the “Comments” section, as well, and I will have more to say on the subject in future installments of this column.

    Copyright 2007 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #168: O Captain! My Captain!

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    cic2007-03-09-01.jpgSo I woke up on Wednesday, March 7, and I saw that in addition to Tuesday’s Arctic temperatures, so low that weathermen warned that if you expose any bare flesh outside, you risked getting frostbite, that the sidewalks were buried in snow, and it was still falling. I again thought how lucky the New York Comic-Con organizers were that this didn’t happen during the weekend of the con. I wondered if I’d have trouble getting to a concert in Manhattan that night. Well, I thought, probably nothing worse would happen today.

    And then I turned on my computer and learned that Captain America was dead.

    The New York Daily News had just broken the story that morning, and not even The Beat or The Comics Reporter had it yet, but there are already pages of outraged posts at the John Byrne Forum, and it had been reported by CNN, among many other mainstream media outlets. Cap was apparently assassinated by a sniper in Captain America #25, which went on sale that very day (March 7).

    Now I realize that this could be some elaborate fake-out. The mainstream media, unaware of how death in the superhero genre usually resembles a revolving door, fell hard for DC’s “Death of Superman” over a decade ago, and, of course, DC was not about to keep this iconic character dead.

    Just as DC came up with four substitute Supermen to hold the fort until the real Superman returned, there will doubtless be one or more “new” Captain Americas. As Ron Hogan points out over at Galley Cat, this isn’t the first time Marvel has done that, and I can supply the details. Stan Lee (who wrote Cap longer than anyone else has) did it briefly in Tales of Suspense #96 in the 1960s; Steve Englehart had a kid named Roscoe take over as Captain America in the 1970s, and Mark Gruenwald had the “Super-Patriot” (now known as the U. S. Agent) become the new Cap in the 1980s. We’re overdue for another “new Cap” storyline. The difference is that each time in the past, Steve Rogers, the original Captain America, retired voluntarily from his costumed role before inevitably reassuming it later in the storyline.

    Significantly, according to the Daily News, “Joe Quesada, 43, Marvel Entertainment’s editor in chief, said he wouldn’t rule out the shield-throwing champion’s eventual return.” In The New York Times (March 8, 2007) George Gene Gustines quotes Marvel publisher Dan Buckley saying about Cap, “He’s very dead right now.” Gustines also quotes some fans who don’t believe that the Captain is dead and terms their reactions “cynical,” but considering these statements from Marvel execs, isn’t their cynicism justified?

    It turns out that in another comic currently on sale, Civil War: The Initiative #1, Ms. Marvel claims that Captain America is still alive. An official Marvel statement suggests that she may be mistaken or lying. Or is this an editorial mistake that lets the proverbial cat out of the bag?

    On the other hand, ever since the demise of the Silver Age Flash in Crisis on Infinite Earths, readers have been all too aware that the Big Two superhero companies are perfectly willing to kill off superheroes for real and put some new character in as a permanent replacement. (Now it seems that the Silver Age Flash may finally return, but it took over twenty years!)

    All of the previous “substitute Cap” stories have had the theme that Steve Rogers is irreplaceable as the true Captain America. My guess is that Marvel will indeed bring Rogers back as Cap. But I hope this isn’t just wishful thinking on my part. Gustines quotes another fan as saying “I’m fairly sure killing Cap with a movie in development (plus a possible Avengers flick on the way as well) would not be very sensible. So, I shall wait and see,” and praises him as “media-savvy.” And do we know for a fact that the Captain America in these movies is the original version from the 1940s?

    The aforementioned Marvel official statement declares that “Captain America will continue to be published despite the very real death of Steve Rogers,” and concludes, “So, yes, Captain America, Steve Rogers, is dead.” Considering the miracles that are possible in the superhero genre, Rogers could still be truly “dead” and come back to life. But here Marvel seems to be hinting that they will create a new Captain America, one that they consider more relevant to the 21st century. It’s possible that Marvel might someday resurrect Rogers but not allow him to take back the role of Captain America from this newcomer.

    The end of Civil War, in which Captain America decides he is wrong for fighting for the freedom of his fellow superheroes, and an already infamous Civil War: Frontline sequence in which a woman self-righteously denounces the Captain for knowing nothing about America since he doesn’t waste time on YouTube (Say what? I would think Cap keeps himself rather busy continually saving the lives of this woman and other Americans over the course of his career. This woman’s attitude smacks of ageism. This suggests that 21st century Marvel regards the original Captain as a dated character. “”˜He hasn’t been living in the modern world and the world does move,” says Marvel Editor-in-Chief Joe Quesada.” in the CNN report.

    And here I think of Captain America as representing American ideals, which have endured for over two hundred years, just as I believe Lee, Englehart, and Gruenwald did. Just reading the better Captain America stories from the last four decades, such as theirs, demonstrates how the character consistently adapts to changing times. I’d feel better if CNN and the Daily News had quoted Marvel representatives as extolling the greatness of the original Captain America rather than seeing Marvel, in and out of the stories, badmouthing the character as irrelevant to 21st century America.

    If Marvel was intent on killing off Captain America, why couldn’t the company have given him a heroic demise, like the one that Stan Lee and John Romita, Sr. gave Captain George Stacy in Amazing Spider-Man #90 (1970) or the one that Chris Claremont and John Byrne gave Phoenix in Uncanny X-Men #137 (1980). Even Mar-Vell’s demise from cancer in Jim Starlin’s The Death of Captain Marvel (1982) showed more courage and dignity than the ignominious killing of Captain America, arrested and handcuffed as a criminal for his role in Civil War.

    Here are some quotations from the Daily News and CNN reports that struck me as telling.

    “”˜What happens with the costume? And what happens to the characters that are friends and enemies of Cap?’ Quesada said with a smile. “˜You’re going to have to read the books to find out.’” (CNN)

    “”˜I was shocked. I was not expecting it,’ said Gerry Gladston, co-owner of Midtown Comics in Manhattan. “˜I’d rather they didn’t kill him–but it’s going to mean great sales.’” (Daily News)

    And here’s the sad one, from the Daily News: “”˜It’s a hell of a time for him to go. We really need him now,’ said co-creator Joe Simon, 93, after being informed of his brainchild’s death.” If this is all a fake-out to boost sales, I hope that somebody told Mr. Simon that’s all it is.

    I will have much more to say about Civil War, though not until after finishing my coverage of this year’s New York Comic-Con, and probably my review of the 300 movie. And yes, I will buy and read Captain America #25 (if I still can find a copy at cover price), so Marvel’s sales stunt has worked. But I’m doing it out of a sense of duty as a comics historian. I feel no pleasure at the prospect of seeing Marvel kill off the embodiment of the American spirit, even if his demise proves to be only temporary. Marvel quickly undid the gouging out of Spider-Man’s eye (see “Comics in Context” #113), but that didn’t alter my distaste for that storyline. And if the rumor I heard during the New York Comic-Con proves to be true, even greater horrors await in the Marvel Universe.

    It was only a year ago that New York Comic-Con audience, including myself, was happily photographing Joe Simon posing with an attendee dressed as Captain America (see “Comics in Context” #125). What questions might have been raised at panels at this year’s New York Comic-Con had we known what would happen to Captain America less than two weeks later?

    For that matter, how has the spirit of Marvel, and of the superhero genre, changed since their Silver Age forty-some years ago? This year’s New York Comic-Con offered attendees the chance to judge for themselves by listening to the man who launched what he called the Marvel Age of Comics. And keep in mind, I record quotations to the best of my ability; I don’t make any of them up.

    FRIDAY FEB. 23, 6:30 PM

    cic2007-03-09-02.jpgThe panel in the Javits Center’s Special Events Hall was titled “Stan Lee: An American Icon,” and indeed he is. Roy Thomas, Stan’s protégé in the 1960s who succeeded him as editor in chief, was supposed to interview him onstage, but had to cancel his trip to New York at the last minute.

    Roy’s replacement introduced himself to the audience: “I’m Joe Quesada of Marvel Comics, and let me say, I’m lucky to have a job.”

    Quesada reminisced about how when he was a boy, he didn’t read comics but his father learned about Stan Lee’s groundbreaking anti-drug storyline in Amazing Spider-Man #96-98 (1971). Quesada’s father encouraged him to read these issues and, Quesada told us, “I really got hooked.” Quesada continued, “What my father didn’t realize was that he was starting a whole other addiction,” that he said ultimately cost more than cocaine.

    In keeping with the “icon” theme, Quesada placed the Marvel Age’s founding father among some heavy company. “He is Elvis, he is the Beatles, he’s Bill Clinton,” declared Quesada, introducing Stan Lee to the vast audience.

    But Stan was not there. To fill time, Quesada started reminiscing about being on stage with Lee and Kevin Smith a while back, and then Stan came down the aisle, waving to the crowd. Everyone stood and applauded, even the little kids seated in front of me, and there was loud cheering. “I wasn’t late!” Stan explained; “I was waiting for them to call me!”

    Much as he clearly loves public adulation, perhaps there’s a part of Stan Lee that feels it’s a wee bit excessive. “You mean,” he asked Quesada, “I’ve come over here to answer questions for these people, who know more about us than we do?” Stan turned to the audience, and asked good-naturedly, “Don’t you guys have anything better to do?”

    One thing that a lot of these guys were doing was massing in front of the stage, several rows deep, to take flash photographs of Stan the Man. THis is something that the convention organizers should have anticipated, but didn’t. Lee may indeed have been concerned, but he characteristically masked it with humor. “They’ve left us alone!” No security!” with “all these hostile people!” he exclaimed in mock panic. “I’m scared!” The audience laughed, as he surely intended.

    “Do you feel the love in the room?” Quesada asked him.

    Finally the cavalry arrived, and Stan was relieved. “Oh, security,” he observed, and then warned the audience, “You better watch out. We got a guy in a red shirt here!”

    Quesada asked him about his long career at Marvel. “Before I came up with the Fantastic Four,” Lee replied, “the comic book industry was a cultural wasteland.” That’s really not much of an exaggeration, but Lee nonetheless apologized for his characteristic hyperbole. “You have to forgive me. It’s been a tough day. I refuse to be serious.”

    Then Lee continued his familiar story of what seems to have been a creative midlife crisis, and the turning point both in his career and the history of comics. Lee said that “The great thing about it”–comics–“was working with the greatest artists and writers.” But, referring to Martin Goodman without naming him, Lee explained that “Unfortunately our publisher thought comics were read by little kids or illiterate adults.” Lee claimed his unnamed publisher even decreed that he could not use words of more than three syllables. Dissatisfied with these restrictions, “Finally I was ready to quit.” Then he added, self-deprecatingly, “I make slow decisions. I was 40 years old when I said that.” (Actually, he was 39, which is close enough.) But “Then I did The Fantastic Four and everything changed.” Lee told us that he even used words of more than three syllables in the comics!

    “I think at that point the books said Atlas Publications,” Stan recalled. Actually, Goodman’s line of comics had dropped the title “Atlas,” and if you look at the cover of Fantastic Four #1 or The Incredible Hulk #1, you’ll see no company name listed. But Stan’s real point was that he thought the company needed a catchier, more memorable title, “so I came up with Marvel.” (Though he didn’t mention it, this appropriately came from the title of the company’s first superhero comic, Marvel Comics #1, published in 1939.) This name, Stan pointed out, lent itself to slogans like “Make Mine Marvel!” and “the Marvel Age of Comics.” “You see how corny I am,” he confided to the crowd.

    Even though Lee has done work for DC in recent years, it is clear that feelings linger from the old days, when Marvel’s rival so thoroughly dominated the comics market. Stan told the audience that back in the 1960s DC “called itself National Comics.” Observing Marvel’s success since it took on its new name, Lee continued, National “decided to change their name,” too. So, he said, they “hired a professional name change company,” which “labored for weeks” to come up with just the right new name. And, after all this herculean labor, Stan told us, “they came up with DC.” And Stan was and remains unimpressed. “Make Mine DC!? My God!”

    Quesada told Lee that “One thing that got me hooked” on Marvel Comics, “besides the great stories was the sense of community,” and Quesada talked about what he called “this magnificent world of artists and writer” that Stan dubbed the Marvel Bullpen. Ah, yes, the sense of community at Marvel. I remember that from my time there in the 1980s and early 1990s, before most of my friends and I all got bounced.

    Lee then praised Quesada and “every idea this guy comes up with,” especially Civil War to tumultuous applause. Quesada demurred, saying that Civil War wasn’t his idea. Lee retorted that “The great thing about being editor in chief us you can take credit for everything! I’ve been doing it for years!”

    Then, more seriously, Lee said, “I get so much credit,” but that “a lot of it should go to Jack Kirby, Steve Ditko, John Romita, John Buscema,” and he added other names from Marvel’s Silver Age as the audience applauded.

    Then Lee explained that “You can draw a script in a hundred different ways,” but success in visual storytelling “depends on where you put a closeup, where you put a long shot.” Stan continued, “A guy like Kirby could not draw a dull panel.” Lee said that his artists were “like the finest directors” in movies. “If it wasn’t for these talented artists, I wouldn’t be sitting here getting these nice things said [to me] by Joe Quesada.”

    Quesada ventured, “There has to be a ringmaster.”

    Knowing a straight line when he heard one, Lee replied, “Of course, it’s all due to me,” and the audience burst into laughter.

    The crowd got it. When Stan Lee appears in public, there are actually two Stans on view. One is his over-the-top public persona, and the audience recognized he was doing it ironically, as a self-created comedy character, mocking his own ego, and they loved it. Then, every so often, Stan lets the mask slip, and you see a more serious, generous Stan Lee, as when he graciously praised his many collaborators. And the audience loved this Stan, as well.

    As I wrote last week, I missed seeing Stephen Colbert at the con earlier that day. Colbert has created for himself a brilliantly funny public persona, trusting his audience to understand and appreciate his masterful use of irony. And Stan Lee has done much the same thing, and like Colbert, devised a comic persona that has won him a loyal and enthusiastic following.

    Quesada asked Lee to explain how he went about collaboration.

    “When I first thought of Spider-Man,” Lee began, ” I wanted Jack Kirby to do it.” Stan said he told Kirby, “I wanted a teenager with the power of a spider who can climb up walls. And I said, “˜But, Jack, don’t make him look like Captain America. You know how you like to draw these heroic guys with big muscles. I want him to be just this little, wimpy kid, just like anybody.’” So Kirby drew the character, “and it looked like a young Captain America,” Stan told us. “I thought Steve Ditko had the kind of style that might be better.” So it was Ditko who drew the kind of Spider-Man that Lee was looking for. “That’s how important the art style is.”

    With regard to working with Ditko, Stan told us, “With Spider-Man I did the first plot by myself, [and] probably the second plot. Then Steve Ditko made suggestions,” Lee continued. “Probably by the twentieth issue he was doing the plotting.”

    This Lee was explaining how the “Marvel method” of creating stories worked, and how he could give a story his personal style even if someone else had plotted it. “When I wrote the copy,” he said, meaning the dialogue and captions, “I could give it the style.” Indeed, Lee revealed that he enjoyed having the artists do plotting: “It made it more fun for me,” he said, because “the pages would be a surprise.” Then “I would change it,” meaning the story, “in the writing.”

    In “Stan Lee: A Retrospective,” the show I co-curated at the Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art, we have a good example of this. We have a page from Fantastic Four Annual #3, in which, according to the notes he made in the border, Kirby intended that Doctor Doom was raging because the Thing had crushed his hands in a previous story. In his dialogue Lee altered Doom’s motivation, having him instead seethe with fury over his previous defeats by Reed Richards. This more clearly motivates Doom’s attempt in the annual to wreck Richards’ wedding to Susan Storm.

    Turning to his work with Kirby, Lee asserted that “I came up with Galactus,” but when Kirby sent him the pages for Fantastic Four #48, “All of a sudden I see a naked nut on a surfboard, and I said “What’s that?’” This was, of course, the character we now know as the Silver Surfer. “Jack said, “˜Well, I figure anybody as powerful as Galactus… he ought to have a herald who goes ahead of him….’” Stan added, “And to Jack it was just a throwaway character.””

    Lee perceived, “There was a certain nobility to” the Surfer. “Jack drew him in such a way that he looked like the goodest [sic] person who ever lived, and I tried to write him that way.” Lee confessed, “I sort of fell in love with the character.” Lee said he then had the Surfer appear in further issues, and came to think of him as his character. “I sort of feel the Silver Surfer is mine because Jack just tossed it away.”

    Lee declared he was engaged in a “real collaborative process” with such artists and that “I didn’t know what they were going to bring me.” He added, “Because I was doing all the writing, I could keep the style consistent.”

    Lee then explained that “you want to write a story in such a way that you’re talking to the reader.” Working on “Stan Lee: A Retrospective,” I realized just how important Stan’s narration is. Nowadays, narration and captions have fallen out of favor in superhero comic books, except when a character is narrating his own adventure. But Stan used captions, not in the guise of an anonymous, omniscient narrator, but as the voice of the storyteller, who spoke in Stan’s distinctive manner, reaching out to the readers, creating a bond of community with them.

    Returning to the subject of working with Ditko, Stan revealed, “I think Steve made up the idea of Spider-Man shooting webs.” Lee maintained, “I wanted him crawling walls, [and] super-strong. I came up with the web-shooters idea.”

    It turns out that Ditko claimed in a 1965 interview that he himself came up with the “web gimmick on wrist.” But in a 1988 interview an artist named Eric Stanton, who shared a studio with Ditko in the 1960s, claimed, “I think I added the business about the webs coming out of his hands“.

    Who’s right? In 1962, when Lee and Ditko created Spider-Man, neither of them imagined how successful the character would become. So how likely was either one to remember precisely who came up with what? And now, forty-five years later, memories may have blurred even further. What impresses me is that Stan gave Ditko credit for the idea of Spider-Man shooting webs; who came up with the idea of the actual web-shooter devices seems less important (and, after all, both the Spider-Man movies and comics have now disposed of them as nonessential).

    Taken with Lee’s description of how his collaborations worked, Quesada observed, it’s “like [the] jazz composition idea.” “Yeah,” Stan enthusiastically agreed, “like riffs.”

    Next Quesada asked who was responsible for the “soap opera quality” and “cliffhangers” in Marvel stories.

    Stan replied quietly, “It was me.” Then he explained, with undisguised practicality, “It’s a lot easier to take one plot and keep it going for a lot of issues.” Moreover, “and in those days I was writing all the stories! So it made it easier for me.” Then, in a confidential manner, Stan advised the audience, “I’m going to give you a real philosophical theory you can keep with you the rest of your life. You will find that some of the most creative decisions in life are made because of laziness and selfishness.” The audience laughed, and Quesada commented, “That’s good.”

    Next Quesada asked if Lee had had any idea that the characters he co-created would become as successful as they have.

    “If someone said you’ll be at a convention talking to people with nothing better to do, at in a million years,” replied Stan. “We were hoping the books would sell, so we wouldn’t lose our jobs and could pay the rent. If someone said you’ll be talking at conventions to people with nothing better to do, and that Tobey Maguire and Nic Cage and Robert Downey Jr. would be starring in movies based on what we were doing. . . .we would’ve said, “˜You’re drunk! No way!’”

    “Did you think you’d do better than DC?” Quesada inquired.

    “Oh, yes!” answered Stan. “I read DC books. There was no way they could compete with us!” And the audience laughed.

    More seriously, Lee explained, “I felt they were in the wrong track. For example, in the Batman books most if the stories were detective stories. There was never any personal problem in Batman’s life. . . .We were concentrating on how can Spider-Man get enough money to pay for Aunt May.”

    Lee explained that he and his collaborators “would try to get into the personal life of these characters, and I knew that that was better.”

    It seems so obvious how Marvel in the 1960s differed from DC, but by Stan’s account, DC just couldn’t figure it out. Lee said, “We hoped they would never discover” what made Marvel comics sell. He told us that he had sources at DC, just as they did at Marvel, so he heard what they were up to.

    “They wondered when our books started to outsell theirs,” Lee said. “They decided it was because you [Marvel] use more dialogue on your covers. I said next month, no dialogue on covers.” And of course, he continued, Marvel still outsold them. “They had another meeting,” Lee recounted, at which they decided “Marvel uses more red on their covers,” so when Stan heard this, he decreed that Marvel wouldn’t use red on the next month’s covers, and Marvel still sold better. This “went on and on,” Stan stated, “and I liked it that way!”

    But what would Stan Lee have liked to do if he hadn’t been a success in comics?

    Considering Stan’s skill as a public performer, it should not come as a surprise that, as he told us, “When I was young I wanted to be an actor.” In fact, as a teenager during the Great Depression. Lee was a member of the Federal Theatre Project, sponsored by the government’s Works Projects Administration (WPA). “I was on the stage. Orson Welles was a member, too. But he was in another locale.” However, Lee told us, “It didn’t pay anything. Comics paid more.” Stan concluded, “I should’ve stayed in it. I could’ve been Brad Pitt!”

    Of course now Stan found himself a stage performing for an audience. He told us, “You don’t know what a good feeling this is. You’re a captive audience. I can say anything! My wife won’t even listen to me.”

    Here’s something else that isn’t as surprising as it may first seem: Stan Lee also wanted to work in advertising. “I treated all of Marvel Comics like a big ad campaign,” he told the audience, and mentioned how he came up with “catchphrases” for Marvel like “‘Nuff said!” and “Excelsior!”

    But, Stan claimed, if he hadn’t been in comics, “I would’ve starved.” He “wanted to write the Great American Novel,” he wanted to be an actor, and he wanted to be in advertising, but he conceded that each of these “wouldn’t have worked.”

    Returning to the subject of comics, Stan spoke about his relationship with Marvel readers at a time when the world did not take comic books seriously: “We had an inside joke that no one else understood.”

    So it seemed appropriate that Lee and Quesada started serenading the audience with the theme song for Marvel’s 1960s official fan club, the Merry Marvel Marching Society, whose very name is a joke. The audience, in the palm of Stan’s hand, applauded enthusiastically. Stan wrote the song, and Quesada complimented him, “Those are darn good lyrics.”

    But Stan can do more than write jingles. He then told us that he once write a poem, titled “God Woke.” (In fact, there is a copy of the poem on display in “Stan Lee: A Retrospective,” and it will be published later this year in the book Stan Lee: Conversations, from the University Press of Mississippi.) “Someone read it,” Stan continued, and “believe it or not, we’re working on a major motion picture based on “˜God Woke.”’

    FRIDAY FEB. 23, 8:30 PM

    Stan mentioned this at the opening of “Stan Lee: A Retrospective” later that night, and he seems genuinely astonished and delighted about that “God Woke” may become a movie. Here’s something else that years ago he could never have imagined happening.

    The opening was a great success and, I’m happy to say, one of the highlights of my life in comics. All of us present excitedly watched as Stan went through the show, frequently surprised and, it seems, genuinely thrilled at the many original art pages and artifacts we had found from his lengthy career. He was excited when I showed him the copy of “God Woke” in our exhibit. We also had a copy of Esquire from the 1960s that had a feature article about Marvel on display on the bottom shelf of a display case. Stan actually lay down on the floor to get a better look, but we need not have worried, because the Man got back on his feet without difficulty.

    Several veterans of 20th century Marvel were present, including Danny Fingeroth, Steve Saffel, Jim Salicrup and myself. It was disappointing that present day Marvel chose not to send a representative to the opening. But I felt the museum was alive and suffused with the true spirit of Marvel Comics on this memorable night.

    Would that all of us could live to see the kind of success and appreciation that Stan Lee has deservedly received after his long, groundbreaking career. Perhaps the manga invasion of the last several years still would have happened, but I doubt that there would be an American comics industry today if not for the revolution Stan Lee spearheaded in the 1960s. He is Marvel’s true Captain, still going strong, still an inspiration. His familiar personal motto is “Excelsior!”, a Latin word meaning “higher” or “Ever upward!” and that encapsulates the classic Marvel spirit, something we still need today.

    ADVERTISEMENTS FOR MYSELF

    Recently Marvel has sent me two handsome new reprint volumes: a new hardcover edition of Neil Gaiman’s Marvel 1602, for which I wrote an introduction, and the massive and expensive Daredevil Omnibus Vol. 1, a compilation of Frank Miller’s early work with the character, including an interview that I did with Miller and his collaborator Klaus Janson back in 1981. I also wrote the 1980s Official Handbook of the Marvel Universe entries on the Kingpin (definitely: I remember discussing it with Frank before I wrote it) and Elektra (probably: it reads like my work) that are included in the back of the book!

    Of course I also hope any of you passing through New York City between now and July will visit “Stan Lee: A Retrospective” at the Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art (www.moccany.org)!

    Copyright 2007 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #167: New York 2007 – Blogs, Bone, and Billy

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    cic2007-03-02.jpgIn this age of the Internet, you can find reports on events at major comics conventions within twenty-four hours of when they took place. Certain parties, such as the Beat, like to kid me for still writing about the San Diego Con weeks after it ended. But I like to think of myself as providing a service for those who you who did not, and perhaps could not, attend these major conventions, who want a sense of what it was like to be there, and who want to immerse themselves in detailed reports on panels of lasting interest. If you want to find out what the panelists said at the DC and Marvel panels about next month’s hot superhero titles, you can easily find that elsewhere. And that kind of news has a very limited shelf life. But if, say, you want to know what it was like to see and hear Stan Lee address audiences at this year’s New York Comic-Con, you will find it in my column’s reports. And this is a topic that people will still find interesting weeks, months, and years from now.

    Checking around the Net for reports on the New York Comic-Con, I found many reports on Stephen King’s appearance promoting Marvel’s comics adaptation of his novel series, The Dark Tower. (Last year, when I reported on King’s appearance at Radio City Music Hall [in “Comics in Context” #148], some of you might have wondered what connection he has to comics. Now you know.) But I also discovered that other panels I attended, despite the importance of their subjects, received little or no coverage. So you are going to find information in my New York Comic-Con reports that you will have seen nowhere else. (But yes, I went to the King panel, too.)

    Scheduling a major comics convention in New York for February is playing with fire, or, more precisely, snow. After a startlingly mild January, in which the temperature reached 72 degrees on “Twelfth Night,” January 6, the two weeks preceding this year’s New York Comic-Con (which was held from Friday, February 23 through Sunday, February 25) brought frigid temperatures and a major snowstorm. Another snowstorm struck the night of February 25, hours after the convention ended, although it did not prove to be as heavy as had been predicted. Through sheer luck, the convention took place during a stretch of sunny and relatively milder weather. Except when an occasional gust blew, the long walk from Penn Station to the Jacob Javits Convention Center did not feel like moving through an Arctic wind tunnel, as it did last year.

    But if the con continued to be held in February, sooner or later it would coincide with a Northeast blizzard. Next year, the New York Comic-Con moves to April 18 through 20, thereby escaping the threat of this meteorological Sword of Damocles.

    So, yes, the cold was bearable this year, as long as you didn’t have to spend too much time out in it. But on Saturday and Sunday mornings I arrived at the Javits Center to find a long, long line of attendees who stood outside, exposed to winds off the nearby Hudson River. Reportedly, those who got in line at 10 AM on Saturday, when the convention opened for the day, didn’t get in till noon. Keep in mind that Saturday was sold out in advance, so all the people waiting outside that morning already had tickets.

    THURSDAY 11 AM
    Luckily, I didn’t have to join this shivering throng, since I was the grateful possessor of an all-powerful press badge. In fact, for me the convention really started on Thursday morning, when I went to the Javits Center for a meeting of the writers for Publishers Weekly‘s online newsletter Comics Week, who would be reporting on the con.

    cic2007-03-02-02.jpg

    This is the only time all year that virtually the entire Comics Week crew gets together; there aren’t even as many of us at the San Diego Con, it seems. (I’d recommend that we all have a part after the New York Con, but we’re all too busy writing and editing articles for Tuesday’s edition of Comics Week.)

    Presiding over this annual assemblage was Comics Week editor in chief Calvin Reid and his second in command, Heidi MacDonald, the Beat in person, who looked quite stylish, having let her hair flow over her shoulders, and wearing a patterned skirt and boots. Also in attendance were contributors such as manga maven Kai-Ming Cha; Laurel Maury of The New Yorker website; Tom McLean, who writes the “Bags and Boards” blog on the comics business for Variety (http://weblogs.variety.com/bags_and_boards/); and Salon comics critic Douglas Wolk (http://dir.salon.com/topics/douglas_wolk/index.html?ti=1), among others. Under Calvin’s guidance we once again figuratively fused into a great journalistic Uni-Mind, much like in Jack Kirby’s Eternals.

    Last year Comics Week was still quite new, and not as yet well known. This year, though, it was rewarding to hear Calvin tell us how much Comics Week‘s impact had grown; he even quoted one major comics blogger as saying that Comics Week was the equivalent of The New York Times for comics!

    Speaking of the Times, this year, as it did last year, the New York Comic-Con shared the Javits Center with the annual New York Times Travel Show. Last year the Times had the main floor of the Convention Center while the Comic-Con was crammed into the much smaller lower floor. This year the Con and the Travel Show changed places: this time we were the main event!

    This year the New York Comic-Con’s organizers, Reed Exhibitions, also avoided repeating 2006’s catastrophic blunder, when they grossly oversold the number of tickets, resulting in New York City fire marshals shutting down admission to the convention on Saturday: no one could get in, even if they had advance tickets, were comics professionals, or even exhibitors who had temporarily left their booths (see “Comics in Context” #123). This year there was no such problem, and Saturday-only admission tickets were sold out before the convention even began. This meant that on Saturday there were no longer any casual, drop-in customers. Bess Braswell of DK Publishing remarked to me that the New York Con audience seemed different last year. She suggested that last year many people had come to see the sheer “spectacle,” as she put it. I expect that year’s attendees, since they had to plan coming in advance, were much more seriously committed to comics.

    After the Comics Week planning session ended, I headed off to the Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art (www.moccany.org) to work on editing the labels (or “story cards,” as MoCCA calls them) which I had written for “Stan Lee: A Retrospective.” For two last minute additions to the show, I ended up writing the final cards Thursday night, the night before the exhibition had its grand opening.

    FRIDAY 2 PM
    I returned to the Javits Center on Friday afternoon, and my first stop was at the Show Office, where the head of programming, Mark Dressler, asked me if I would moderate a Saturday afternoon panel titled “NYCC’s Behind the Panels: The 80s Superhero Renaissance,” featuring Brian Bolland (Batman: The Killing Joke), Bill Sienkiewicz (Elektra: Assassin), Walter Simonson (Thor), and Rick Veitch (The One). This fit me perfectly as the man who recently gave the lecture serties “1986: The Year that Changed Comics” at the Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art. After rearranging the time of a signing I was scheduled to do for DK Publishing, I was happy to say yes.

    FRIDAY 2:30 PM
    My next stop was the panel “Comics Bloggers: Rewriting the Rules of Tastemaking and Trade Influence,” which was already in progress. The moderator was the omnipresent Beat, whose blog is one of the most widely read in the field of comics, and she was joined by Johanna Draper Carlson of “Comics Worth Reading” (http://comicsworthreading.com/), Chris Butcher of “Comics 212″ (http://comics212.net/), and Ron Hogan, who writes about comics for the book industry blog “Galley Cat” (http://www.mediabistro.com/galleycat/).

    I read “The Beat” regularly and have visited “Comics Worth Reading” in the past, but I confess that I’d never known about these other two blogs before this panel. And though the Beat certainly knows about me, I suspect the other three bloggers don’t know about “Comics in Context” either.

    Loyal regular readers may even be wondering, hey, why weren’t you invited to be on this panel? Well, I don’t consider “Comics in Context” to be a blog. Webster’s New Millennium Dictionary of English defines a blog as “an online diary; a personal chronological log of thoughts published on a Web page,” and notes that it is “typically updated daily.” Instead, “Comics in Context” is “updated” once a week. Those who claim that “Comics in Context” installments run too long are mistakenly applying the “blog” model to my work. I consider “Comics in Context” to be a weekly column, the online equivalent of one of the review columns which appears in weekly publications like The New Yorker and The New York Observer. Nonetheless, much of what the panelists said about comics blogs could also apply to my online column.

    One of the panel’s major points was that with the rapidly increasing mainstream acceptance of the comics medium, comics blogs are suddenly being read by people beyond traditional comics fandom. The Beat explained that within the mainstream book community, there “were people who were fans [of comics] all along,” but “now it’s cool to admit it.” Moreover, there are also “now people who are discovering it [comics] because it is the cool thing.” Later in the panel, Butcher held that it used to be that “anyone who works in comics” either “loves comics,” “loves the industry” or “stumbled into it”; “now,” he claimed, “people are getting interested in comics because they know it’ll be profitable.”

    Hogan pointed out that there are “hundreds of thousands of readers out there who aren’t like us” and “didn’t know that Neil Gaiman wrote comic books” before he wrote his novels and screenplays. I’d go further, and say that Neil Gaiman is still far from being a household name (For example, do your parents know who he is?), and that you have to explain who he is to any readers who aren’t longtime comics or fantasy novel aficionados. Hogan warned comics bloggers against becoming mired in what he termed “fan isolation.”

    In fact, Hogan’s own blogging is evidence that people beyond traditional comics fandom are paying attention to comics news: “Galley Cat” is aimed at the entire publishing world, not the comics subculture. As Hogan told the audience later during the panel, “I’m not really writing for a comics audience.” He explained that when he does a story about comics, it must be something that will “appeal to a mainstream audience.” Hogan joked that when he recently mentioned a certain obscure and absurd Wonder Woman villain in his blog, “I had to contextualize Egg Fu for my audience.”

    Johanna Draper Carlson agreed that the audience for comics blogs was becoming “more diverse.” Chris Butcher said that “the biggest thing” he did in his blog “in the last year or two” was to “add more context.” It was a “huge change,” he asserted, in moving from writing something “really inside” for his comics fan audience to realizing that there are “a lot of people who aren’t hard core comics fans who are reading this.” Indeed, Butcher said that “more and more” he is contacted by members of the press and magazine writers with questions on subjects he has written about.

    The Beat said that she was trying “to be more sensitive” to the needs of wider readership. Later, she noted that “I’ve become “˜more influential’”–drawing invisible quotation marks in the air–because her blog is now carried by Publishers Weekly.

    Right from the start of my column in 2003, I’ve sought to make it accessible and comprehensible for anyone with little or no background in the subjects I address. That’s one reason why it’s called “Comics in Context,” so I’m pleased to see these bloggers likewise recognize the duty they have to their readers to “contextualize.”

    Representatives of the comics industry now have to be more careful about what they say to the comics press. Butcher warned that “now not just the comics industry,” but the “whole publishing industry knows what you say” in a major comics blog. He referred to Bill Jemas and the controversial “things he said in public” only several years ago, when he was the head of publishing at Marvel. Now, Butcher averred, “he wouldn’t get away with” them.

    The writers of blogs have to be careful, too. Hogan said that he would ask himself, “Is what I’m writing reasonably critical or veering into bitchiness?”
    The Beat maintained, “I don’t write anything I wouldn’t say to someone’s face.”

    Johanna Draper Carlson disagreed, asserting that she would “phrase” a criticism of a creator’s work differently in her blog than she would in conversation with the creator. Hogan concurred, declaring that “I’m not going to tell [Marvel editor in chief] Joe Quesada that Civil War completely sucked and it fell apart at the end,” which Hogan actually believes (adding that he had hoped in vain that the story “would be told coherently”).

    Reconsidering, the Beat said that if “sometimes you will write something that’d get you punched in the face” by someone you know, “maybe you shouldn’t be that person’s friend.” But this suggests that a critic should only have friends in the business whose work he or she likes. Yet, as Carlson observed, “your opinion is not yourself; your book is not yourself.” Aesthetic differences shouldn’t get in the way of friendship.

    The philosophy that I follow is that my duty as a critic is to critique the work, not the person who did the work. It should be possible to review a work of art without dealing in personal invective.

    I’m also always aware not only that anyone could read anything I write on the Internet, but also that whatever I write there could potentially exist somewhere on the Net forever. (Isn’t that right, graduate students of the future?)

    An audience member asked the panelists which blogs they read. The Beat mentioned the new ComicMix (http://www.comicmix.com/), but I was startled that otherwise the panelists did not mention any of the comics-related blogs I regularly visit. Not Mark Evanier’s “News from Me” (http://www.newsfromme.com), which until this point I had assumed was widely popular. Not even Neil Gaiman’s “Journal” (http://www.neilgaiman.com/journal/), which seemingly rivals his own fiction in popularity!

    However, the Beat and the panelists seem to have focused their panel on blogs that deal in daily news and reviews. (So why didn’t they mention
    Tom Spurgeon’s excellent “The Comics Reporter” [http://www.comicsreporter.com/]?). I find consulting one comics news blog, the Beat’s, usually sufficient for my purposes. Otherwise I enjoy blogs that provide entertaining personal perspectives on a variety of topics, not limited to comics, such as Colleen Doran’s (http://www.adistantsoil.com/blog/); Patricia Mulvihill’s (http://trishm.blogspot.com/); Peter Gillis’s, which is the most thought-provoking and superbly written blog that I know, whether dealing with comics or not (http://homepage.mac.com/petergillis/iblog/index.html); and, of course, Fearless Fred Hembeck’s (http://www.hembeck.com/FredSez.htm), which provides the same good humor as his column here at Quick Stop. I also regularly stop by Jerry Beck and Amid Amidi’s “Cartoon Brew” (http://www.cartoonbrew.com/) which is to animation news what the Beat is to comics.

    Towards the end of the panel, a member of the audience asked the panelists a simple question, “Why do you blog?” “Because I can’t not blog,” replied Johanna Draper Carlson, who added that her work online “makes me a better writer, a better thinker.” her answer applies to me, too; I could stop writing this weekly column, but it means so much to me, and helps me develop my ideas about comics so effectively, that I would prefer not to.

    The Beat told the audience, “I think I was born to blog.” Soon I imagined her armed with an electric guitar, performing this new variation on Bruce Springsteen’s “Born to Run,” leading the bloggers in this, their new anthem.

    3:30 PM
    The panels are held on the Javits Center’s first level, which is below street level. Now I ascended to the Convention’s main floor, which was Level 3.

    I was immediately greeted by sights reminiscent of the San Diego Con: volunteers and security people in bright red shirts, demanding to see admission badges. Even more ominous than the Red Shirts was the sight of the elder god Cthulhu, hovering above the convention floor, just as he does in San Diego. Oh, yes, I know he looks like a gigantic smiling Pikachu from Pokemon, but I am not deceived. He lurks in full view, poised to suck the brains out of unsuspecting convention goers. And why he is starting greedily over at the Marvel booths? (That’s right, folks! In sharp contrast to the San Diego Con, there was a large Marvel ara on the convention floor, right inside one of its two main entrances.)

    Immediately outside the entrance to this hall was a familiar sight from last year’s New York Comic-Con: “Car Toon,” the automobile decorated with drawings of characters from the whole history of comic books, comic strips and animation (see “Comics in Context” #125). Posing for photographers in front of the vehicle was DC’s Power Girl, busty, blonde and smiling. Nearby I saw Silent Bob, backwards cap and all, although this was a mere doppelganger, and not the True Master of the Quick Stop.

    cic2007-03-02-03.jpg

    On Friday until 4 PM only comics professionals, retailers, exhibitors, and press are allowed into the convention, and there were plenty of us: the hall was already crowded, but pleasantly so. Once the general public was let in, near-gridlock would develop here and there on the main floor.

    In fact, near 4:30 PM, there was already a line waiting to go up the escalator to Artist’s Alley, which the Beat aptly renamed Artist’s Aerie, up on the fourth floor. On the way up to the Aerie, congoers passed by advertising for the Seven, a new project co-developed by Jim Shooter, and billed as “the greatest superhero team of all time.” In other words, it’s allegedly better than the Fantastic Four, the X-Men, the Justice League or the Incredibles. Even without seeing a Seven story, I find this hard to believe, but this won’t be the only case of hyperbole I’ll encounter at this year’s con.

    If you walked all the way through Artist’s Aerie, you would find yourself in an enormous gaming area. Not interested, I turned back, failing to see that there were autograph booths along the sides of this gaming hall, to the left of its entrance. Thus, alas, I missed the opportunity to glimpse, in person, my hero Stephen Colbert, who was signing autographs at the from 4:30 to 5:15 PM on Friday, to promote Oni Press’s Stephen Colbert’s Tek Jansen, the comics mini-series based on his lookalike sci-fi hero. And why shouldn’t Dr. Colbert attend the New York Comic-Con? Is he not The Real Captain America?

    Damn! I missed my chance to see an uniquely talented man who has devised a brilliantly comedic public persona for himself, and is a master of satiric irony. Would there be anyone else at the Comic-Con who matches that description? Yes, as you shall see.

    The Javits Center is not only a long, cold walk from Penn Station, but also from any restaurants, and I hadn’t had lunch yet. Luckily, I reminded myself, there is an enormous food court on Level 1. I headed down there only to discover that, despite the presence of two major conventions, the Food Court wasn’t open. So I trekked back up to Level 3, where I was able to buy a sandwich, apple, and fruit juice for twice what they would cost at my local deli.

    5:30 PM
    The star of the next panel, “Jeff Smith Spotlight,” introduced himself to the audience: “I’m Jeff.”

    “Hi, Jeff!” the audience enthusiastically called back, before breaking into applause for the writer, artist and creator of the comedy/fantasy/adventure comic book series Bone, who is currently providing his take on the original Captain Marvel in DC Comics’ Shazam!: The Monster Society of Evil limited series.

    Looking around Room 1E15, where Jeff Smith was speaking, presented an unusual sight for a comics convention. There were kids here! And I don’t mean teenagers. I mean there were a goodly number of small children, members of the demographic that was once the traditional audience for comic books. In a time when Marvel shows us Spider-Man’s eye being gouged out (in a canonical story) and Mary Jane grotesquely dying thanks to Spidey’s radioactive semen (in the alternate reality of Spider-Man: Reign #3), and DC’s Blue Beetle gets his brains blown out on-panel, Jeff Smith has performed the miracle of creating in Bone an entertaining comic for all ages that is not only an acclaimed work of art but a commercial hit.

    Smith’s presentation consisted principally of a slide show via the newfangled technology of PowerPoint, pairing “images that inspired me” in the real world with their counterparts in Bone.

    Most of the natural landscapes in Bone were inspired by Old Man’s Cave Park, near Smith’s home in Columbus, Ohio. In one direction, he told us, are the “nearby foothills of Appalachia,” with their “rolling hills.” Turn south, he told us, and you will find “waterfalls” and “cliffs.” Old Man’s Cave itself, after which Smith titled Book 6 of Bone, is “more like a huge overhanging, a huge ledge,’ as he showed us in a photograph projected onscreen.

    As for the kingdom of Atheia in the last third of Bone, Smith said he didn’t want to do the “European kind of kingdom” that you see in Snow White. “I decided to make it something Eastern,” Smith told us. “So I went to Katmandu.” Describing the photos he was showing us, Smith said Katmandu was “like Atlantis,” in that it was “a place that used to be powerful” and “a great kingdom” that “has fallen down a bit in recent times.”

    Stating that “Bone takes place in a medieval time,” Smith then showed us a medieval European painting of people separating wheat from chaff; he said he wanted to be accurate in showing how such things were done at that stage of history.

    Smith next showed a slide of a “prayer stone” with the eyes of the Buddha, and amusingly showed how he had adapted it into the face of Bone‘s Red Dragon.

    Why was he showing us all of this? “When you’re drawing a comic,” Smith explained, “it really helps to look at stuff and make things real.”

    This portion of his presentation wound up with a photograph of “the Standing Stones of Stenness” in the Orkney Islands off the coast of Scotland.
    Smith spoke of “the quiet and the peace of that ancientness.” He continued, “You feel that kind of mystery,” which is “why you want to tell stories in the first place.”

    For the second part of his visual presentation, Smith gave us a preview of the second issue of his Shazam series, which went on sale the following Wednesday. First, Smith explained the historical significance of its hero, the original Captain Marvel. Oddly, though, Smith referred to him as Shazam, which is actually the name of the elderly wizard in the series. By speaking Shazam’s name, young orphan Billy Batson magically transforms into the super-powerful Captain Marvel. (DC calls its Captain Marvel series Shazam in order to avoid violating Marvel Comics’ trademark.)

    Each of the letters in Shazam’s name stands for a classical god or hero (or, in the case of S, the Jewish king Solomon), who represents a particular attribute. Smith tried to remember all of them, as the audience shouted out these he had forgotten. (“Zeus!” Smith exclaimed. “How could you forget Zeus?”)

    Smith explained that in the 1940s “Shazam“ “outsold Superman“ and even “outsold Mickey Mouse,” and was the “most popular comic” ever, but had never since recaptured that level of popularity.

    In the second issue of Smith’s Shazam series, Billy finds Mary, the sister he didn’t know he had. “I’m no Neil Gaiman,” Smith said, alluding to the Sandman author’s renowned expertise at performing his own work, “but I’m going to try to do a reading.” Actually, Smith proved to be quite good at it.

    Reading his own dialogue aloud as he projected comics pages onscreen, Smith recounted how Billy, searching for his sister, visits a circus featuring “The Great Carlini and his world-famous Monster Society of Evil!!” The ringmaster’s name is a homage to DC editor Mike Carlin, but Mike’s cameo role does not last long, as he is gobbled up by talking alligators. (“The monsters have eaten the Great Carlini!”) This doesn’t come off as horrific, but as the stuff of traditional fairy tales. LIke the witch in “Hansel and Gretel,” the alligators hunger for “Tender, juicy children!”

    One of the alligators seizes little Mary Batson, but Billy turns into Captain Marvel and rescues her. Coming to his aid is Smith’s revamped version of another classic character from the original Captain Marvel series, Mr. Tawky Tawny, the talking tiger.

    LIstening to the audience’s reaction, I could see how well Smith captures the spirit of classic children’s literature. As Captain Marvel battles the alligators, the adults at the circus flee for their lives. “All the adults just give up on the children,” Smith observed, and the real audience laughed knowingly. Smith’s voracious but cowardly alligators (“We’ve lost! Quick! Eat the children!”) likewise earned appreciative laughter from both adults and children.

    Smith left us with a cliffhanger, as Captain Marvel sights an enormous humanoid figure, its head literally in the clouds. Unprompted, audience members reacted with BIlly Batson’s favorite expression, “Holy moley!” And with the PowerPoint presentation finished, the audience applauded.

    Smith then took questions from the audience, mostly from kids. The first of these kids started out, “I’m not sure of you remember any of the Bone books,” to audience amusement. The questioner wanted to know which volume of Bone was Smith’s favorite; Smith said Book #4, which turned out to be the kid’s favorite as well.

    A thirteen-year-old wanted to know if there would be a Bone movie. “If you won’t let them change it and make it bad, you can’t make a movie,” Smith replied. Stating that he used to run an animation studio in Columbus, Smith conceded that “It could be done if I did it myself, but it’d be so much work.” He then reassured the questioner, “Don’t give up hope. It may happen someday.”

    Discussing his relationship with Scholastic, the publishers of the color version of Bone, Smith said that “someone” at the company “was worried” about beer being served in a tavern in Bone, and “wanted to change it.” Smith didn’t, and “to Scholastic’s credit it was not a problem.”

    Here Smith revealed that “I didn’t originally write it [Bone] for children. I wrote it for everyone.” He said that he likes works such as Huckleberry Finn and Star Wars which “start out as adventures” and “become more sophisticated.” Smith declared that “It’s parents and teachers who made it [Bone] a children’s book, not me.”

    In any event, Smith said, he pointed out that the “good characters” in Bone don’t drink beer. The beer stayed in Bone, and Smith also noted that there’s beer, called “butterbeer,” in the Harry Potter books (which Scholastic also publishes in America).

    Smith originally did Bone in black and white, but Scholastic wanted to redo it in color. Smith said that Scholastic had hired Art Spiegelman and his wife Francoise Mouly as consultants, and that “Art thought Bone should be in color.” Smith continued, “I resisted it at first.” He explained that “I spent a long time learning how to draw comics in black and white.” Smith told us, “I drew dawn in black and white. Do you know how hard that is?”

    Smith also noted the irony that Spiegelman’s most famous work, Maus, is in black and white. But Spiegelman told him, “Bone is about life and it should be in color.” What finally convinced Smith, he informed us, was when Spiegelman told him, “It won’t be done until it’s in color.”

    “I had a lot of concerns about doing it in color,” Smith concluded, “but in the end I’m really pleased with it.”

    An eight-year-old in the back of the room asked, “How did you get the idea for Bone?”

    Smith replied that “I was five or six when I was drawing different characters.’” One of them, “with his mouth open, looked like an old telephone receiver.” Smith therefore “called him Fone Bone” and “never stopped drawing him.” Fone Bone, he told us, “became a friend.”

    Another questioner wondered, “Why do Smiley and Phoney”–the other Bone cousins–“wear clothes and Fone Bone doesn’t?”

    “You’d probably have to ask my analyst,” replied Smith, who then said it was simply the “tradition” of funny animal stories according to which Donald Duck wears a shirt and no pants, and Mickey Mouse wears pants but often no shirt. Smith hypothesized that it seems talking animals must wear “just a piece of clothing” so we know this isn’t a realistic “nature” story.

    Smith told the audience that he wanted his readers to “focus” on “character” and “the story,” not on how the book is drawn. This reminded me of Scott McCloud’s Making Comics, in which one of his four categories of comics artists is the Animists, who are devoted to “putting craft entirely in the service of its subject,” so that “the teller of the story all but vanishes in the telling” (see “Comics in Context” #156).

    Asked what he would be doing after Shazam, Smith answered that he would be “working on an independent project,” whose title he would announce “at the end of this year or next year.”

    At the end of the panel an audience member recalled Smith’s previous statement that he had regarded Fone Bone as his childhood friend. The questioner insightfully asked if ending the Bone series was “like losing a friend.”

    Smith replied that his “wife would say yes,” and that he would say “possibly.” But Smith “doesn’t think so,” and asserted he “had a great time” working on the comic. He admitted he “had trouble ending it, not because I didn’t want to, but because I wanted to end it right.”

    Then he concluded, “and I can go visit Fone Bone anytime.”

    ADVERTISEMENTS FOR MYSELF
    On Monday March 5 at 6:30 PM I will be giving a lecture at the Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art in New York City in connection with its current show “Stan Lee: a Retrospective.” My subject will be the height of Stan Lee’s collaboration with Jack Kirby on “the Galactus trilogy,” “This Man, This Monster,” and other mid-1960s classics you can find in Essential Fantastic Four Vol. 3.

    You can find my Comics Week reports on Stan Lee and Stephen King’s appearances at the New York Comic-Con here. For further details about their panels, please come back here next week.

    Copyright 2007 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #166: Megahero Vs. Megavillain

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    cic2007-02-23-01.jpgWhen I left off last week I was going through Dr. Peter Coogan’s definition of the supervillain in his book Superhero: The Secret Origin of a Genre (MonkeyBrain Press, 2006), which should be a basic text for superhero genre studies, and discussing a major “supervillain” in contemporary pop culture whom he had left out: Dr. Hannibal Lecter.

    Even leaving aside the thousands of supervillains created for comic books, it’s inevitable that Coogan’s book couldn’t mention all the interesting candidates for supervillainy in high and pop culture.

    For example, how about the Queen of the Night in Mozart’s 1791 opera The Magic Flute? Aren’t her showpiece arias, full of coloratura fireworks, the musical equivalent of what Coogan (and The Incredibles) calls the supervillain’s proclivity for monologuing? Iago’s “Credo” in Verdi’s Otello (1887), an operatic adaptation of Shakespeare’s play, is an even clearer example.

    In his early German films director Fritz Lang pioneered the use of the “supervillain” in cinema through such characters as Dr. Mabuse (beginning with Dr. Mabuse der Spieler in 1922), the mad scientist Rotwang in Metropolis (1927), whose title was the source of the name of Superman’s home city, and the Bondian mastermind Haghi in Spione (Spies, 1928). All three characters were played by Rudolf Klein-Rogge, the movies’ first specialist in “supervillainy.”

    There are even candidates for supervillain status in the world of animated comedy. Consider the Hooded Claw, the dual-identitied masked archvillain of Hanna-Barbera’s The Perils of Penelope Pitstop (1969-1971), who loves monologuing (in the unmistakable voice of Paul Lynde) about his latest insanely elaborate death trap for the title heroine. Another characteristic that Coogan attributes to supervillains is mania, and who better exemplifies it than a certain Warners Animation mouse who fanatically persists in his grandiose ambitions in spite of continual failures:

    PINKY: What are we going to do tonight, Brain?

    THE BRAIN: The same thing we do every night, Pinky: try to take over the world!

    Dr. Coogan found three criteria for identifying a superhero: mission, power, and identity, and these are also three of his seven criteria for supervillains.

    “Power is central to [the] definition of supervillain,” Coogan writes; “if a malign individual has only the strength, wit, and other resources available to normal human beings, they [sic] are mere villains. If the resources and abilities of the police are sufficient to counter a villain’s schemes, he is just a bad guy. But if a villain transcends those abilities and holds mastery of so many resources that even major world government are working against the odds when they try to stop him, then he is a supervillain, particularly if those resources are matched to a vision that goes beyond mere avarice–if they [sic] have an ego-soaked or ego-driven mania or vision, some great project to accomplish, especially if this project is socially transformative but will have to be forced upon an unwilling populace and especially if it involves mass murder or massive numbers of deaths, or if the project can be viewed–in a sick and twisted way–as art. Therefore, mission and power as the two important defining elements of supervillainy” (Superhero, pgs. 95-96).

    There are some major problems with this thesis. First, there are many, many characters who are unquestionably supervillains, but whose goals go no further than robbing banks and killing the superheroes who keep foiling their schemes. Think of the Penguin, the Riddler, Two-Face, the Vulture, Captain Cold, the Mirror Master, and Captain Boomerang, among so many others.

    Second, there are many supervillans, such as Doctor Doom, that even “major world governments” would have trouble stopping. Jim Starlin’s Thanos succeeded in wiping out half the population of the universe in The Infinity Gauntlet (1990). If Jack Kirby’s Darkseid got hold of the anti-life equation, he could enslave the entire population of the universe. But if the United States government sent the entire might of its armed forces to capture the Riddler or the Vulture, those criminals wouldn’t have a chance. But, as noted, the Riddler and Vulture operate on a smaller scale than Doctor Doom or Thanos: the former two are basically costumed thieves. But they are supervillains because their wiliness and skills enable them to defy the legal authorities who likewise operate on this smaller scale: the city police. It takes superheroes–Batman and Spider-Man–to capture the Riddler and the Vulture. Once again, context counts.

    But even if “the resources and abilities of the police” prove to be insufficient “to counter a villain’s schemes,” that still doesn’t necessarily make him a supervillain. Isn’t a premise of a typical Sherlock Holmes story that the police, represented by Inspector Lestrade, are too unimaginative to solve the crime, and that only Holmes has the genius to find and capture the culprit? In fact, isn’t it a common theme of the mystery genre that the principal villain is too smart for the police, and that only Hercule Poirot, Philip Marlowe, or whoever the detective hero is, can outwit him? Lieutenant Columbo is a member of the police force, but he is invariably the only policeman who notices the telltale clues and identifies the true murderer.

    Moreover, in the television series 24, even though our “major world government” has an efficient, highly capable Counter-Terrorist Unit, the show creates the impression that only one man, Jack Bauer, can stop the terrorist masterminds. Are these masterminds, even when they tote around suitcase nukes, supervillains? Or are they simply more ordinary villains who have managed to procure weapons of mass destruction? The main villains on 24 lack the outsized personalities that more likely candidates for the role of supervillain, such as Dr. Lecter and Captain Nemo, possess.

    Speaking of these two, they fit the “power” requirement, too. Captain Nemo poses a threat to the world’s navies with his Nautilus. Dr. Lecter’s extraordinary intelligence enables him to outwit most lawmen, with rare exceptions such as Will Graham, the hero of Red Dragon, and Clarice Starling, the heroine of Silence of the Lambs and Hannibal. (Significantly, Graham is an F. B. I. profiler, who attempts to capture serial killers by thinking as they do, and Starling in Silence is studying profiling.)

    Coogan’s final criterion for supervillainy is identity. But, Coogan states, “in the reverse of the superhero[‘s case], identity is the weakest element of the definition of the supervillain and is not necessary but typical. It is a necessary aspect of inverted-superhero supervillains since they wear costumes and have codenames.” For example, Oswald Chesterfield Cobblepot is the Penguin. However, “Unlike superheroes, they often do not maintain secret identities. . . .They often give up their normal lives, deciding to live purely within the super-world. They have abandoned the things that tie them to mundane existence and cut themselves off from normal life. Just as the secret identity helps the superhero retain ties to the larger society he protects, so does the villain”˜s abandonment of the ordinary identity magnify his selfishness and disconnect from the larger society he attacks” (p. 96).

    “Captain Nemo” is an assumed name: Nemo has abandoned his true identity, which, we learn in Jules Verne’s Mysterious Island (1874), is Prince Dakkar, the son of an Indian rajah. He has indeed “cut” himself “off from normal life” and severed his “ties to the larger society.” The Disney Leagues movie makes evident his contempt for his visitors from the surface world, except for Professor Aronnax, whom he regards as intellectually capable of understanding and appreciating him.

    Dr. Lecter does not have a codename, but he is given a nickname, “Hannibal the Cannibal.” Lecter does not willingly abandon society: he is extracted from it and incarcerated when his crimes are exposed. Hence in the first two novels in which he appears, Red Dragon and The Silence of the Lambs, Lecter is a prisoner. After escaping in Silence, Lecter has adopted a dual identity in the next novel, Hannibal, and has reintegrated himself into civilized society as art historian Dr. Fell. But again, he is exposed and forced to abandon his role in society. But in that novel’s ending (which is very different from the film adaptation’s), he has apparently reestablished himself in society in Buenos Aires, presumably under yet another assumed identity.

    Nevertheless, the salient point is that all three books primarily present Dr. Lecter as an outsider. Indeed, as a prisoner, Lecter abandons the social graces he must have possessed as a member of society and adopts a monstrous persona to terrify and intimidate most members of “the larger society” who deal with him.

    The Joker has separated himself from “the larger society” of which he was once a part, as the possible origin that Alan Moore gave him in Batman: The Killing Joke (1988) shows. It’s a mistake to attempt to give the Joker a “real name,” as Tim Burton’s Batman movie (1989) did, since the lack of a “civilian identity” distances the Joker even further from “the larger society” that he attacks.

    In Alan Moore and Dave Gibbons’ Watchmen (1986-1987), Ozymandias purports to be a superhero, seeking to save the world, yet his actions cast him in the role of supervillain. Towards the end of the series, Ozymandias literally separates himself from society by retreating to his Antarctic base, Karnak. (This base is obviously partly inspired by Superman and Doc Savage’s arctic Fortresses of Solitude, but neither Superman nor Savage stay full time at their bases, whereas in Watchmen, once Ozymandias goes there, significantly we never see him leave.)

    Nowadays, the notion of giving a superhero a secret, “civilian” identity has fallen out of fashion with various comics editors and writers. Note that Coogan emphasizes the importance of the secret identity in helping him “retain ties to the larger society he protects”; indeed, the “civilian identity” keeps the superhero in touch with his own humanity. This is why Superman must continue his alternate life as Clark Kent. It is the supervillain who typically cuts himself off from “the larger society.” So, when Marvel has Spider-Man publicly reveal his Peter Parker identity in Civil War, and live with his wife and aunt at Avengers headquarters, it should be clear that the company is moving its flagship character in the wrong direction.

    Coogan contends that the supervillain can be found in genres other than the superhero genre, and that the supervillain even predates the creation of the first superhero, Superman. It’s true that there are many examples of larger-than-life, even fantastical villains, whom Coogan would class as supervillains, pitted against heroes who, however extraordinary, do not qualify as superheroes. Thus Sir Denis Nayland Smith, who is not a superhero, is the nemesis of the great supervillain Dr. Fu Manchu.

    In the classic British television series The Avengers (see “Comics in Context” #52-53), John Steed and Mrs. Emma Peel, who are secret agents, not superheroes, sometimes contended against super-powerful adversaries, such as the Cybernaut robots (whose creator, Dr. Clement Armstrong, was clearly a Mad Scientist), and the Positive Negative Man, who fired lethal electrical discharges from his finger, rather like Spider-Man’s enemy Electro. In one episode, “The Winged Avenger” (1967), the title character is an actual costumed supervillain, a cartoonist impersonating his own fictional superhero, whose weapons are his razor-sharp claws, which also allow him to scale walls. (And this is seven years before the creation of Wolverine!)

    In The X-Files F. B. I. agents Mulder and Scully, who fit the detective archetype, regularly combatted supervillains. Many of the latter had actual super-powers, such as the shapeshifting, nearly invulnerable alien Bounty Hunter.

    The show’s archvillain is known by a codename: the Cigarette-Smoking Man. The significance of that name is made clear by another alias he is sometimes given: Cancer Man. Cigarettes cause cancer, which is a cause of death, marking the CSM as a figure of death. His real name, like the Joker’s, is a mystery. (The series eventually gave him the name “C. G. B. Spender” but suggests this is one alias among many others.). Though the CSM is a high government official, in his personal life he lives alone, cut off from “the larger society.” Indeed, his covert operations likewise isolate him from society at large. He has no super-powers, but he commands vast resources in the U. S. government and armed forces (making him an Enemy Commander), as well as advanced technology. The CSM also shares the supervillainous trait of returning time and again from apparent death. He has a sense of mission, and justifies his crimes by claiming they are for the ultimate goal of staving off an impending alien invasion. The CSM even has a few psychological “wounds.” He was estranged from his lover, Mulder’s mother (and by the end of the series it was evident that the CSM was Mulder’s real father). If the episode “Musings of a Cigarette-Smoking Man” (1996) is to be believed, he is a failed writer of fiction, a particularly unusual sort of “wound.”

    If James West, the hero of the television series The Wild Wild West (1965-1969) was conceived by his creator Michael Garrison as “James Bond on horseback,” then his archnemesis, Dr. Miguelito Loveless, was the show’s version of a Bondian supervillain. Set in the 1870s, The Wild Wild West was a fusion of the Western with the Bondian superspy genre with science fiction.

    Coogan lists five categories of supervillain, and Dr. Loveless fits three. Primarily, he is a Mad Scientist, a genius who invented radio and television a century early, as shown in his debut episode, “The Night the Wizard Shook the Earth” (1965), whose title perceptively links the Mad Scientist with the evil sorcerers of earlier literature. In the series’ second season, Loveless proved able to create scientific marvels that lay beyond the reach of even early 21st century science. For example, in “The Night of the Surreal McCoy” (1967), he opens portals into pocket alternate realities through paintings. (Hey, that’s like Bert’s sidewalk painting in Mary Poppins! See “Comics in Context” #158.) Dr. Loveless is also a Criminal Mastermind, and in another episode, “The Night of the Bogus Bandits” (1967), he leads a private army, making him an Enemy Commander. (In that episode he even wears a military-style uniform.)

    Dr. Loveless is fond of monologuing. In fact, there’s an amusing sequence in “The Night of the Raven” (1966) in which West and his fellow agent Artemus Gordon feign lack of interest in Loveless’s latest scheme in order to provoke him into delivering a monologue, telling them all about it, demanding their recognition of his achievement. (These last three episodes will be released on DVD on March 20 in The Wild Wild West Vol. 2.)

    Loveless has a strong sense of mission. He commits his terrorist attacks on the California state government (in his debut episode) as part of his plan to take over the southern part of the state and transform it into a utopia for children. Later, in “The Night of the Murderous Spring” (1966), Loveless has extended the scope of his mission to the entire planet: he intends to wipe out the human race in order to return the planet to a pristine natural state.

    Like other supervillains, Dr. Loveless sees himself as an artist, and, indeed, a high point of his appearances comes when he performs a song. He has a sense of theatricality: he deceives West by impersonating his own supposed uncle in “The Night Dr. Loveless Died” (1967) and heads his own circus in “The Night of Miguelito’s Revenge” (1968). (Of course, supercriminals typically devise elaborate schemes of revenge against their heroic nemeses rather than, say, simply shooting them dead. Such convoluted plots are the expressions of the villains’ sinister creative imaginations, and hence, their equivalent of works of art.)

    Loveless also has very strong “wounds.” He claims to be the rightful owner of Southern California, and that the U. S. government has usurped it. More importantly, he is a dwarf, whose condition causes him continual pain, and he sees himself not only as a target of prejudice but as the victim of a cruel universe.

    Loveless’s sense of humor and joy in manipulating West also mark him as a trickster. Many supervillains, such as the Joker, are malevolent tricksters, while various superheroes, such as Spider-Man, with his snappy patter, act as tricksters against their adversaries. If Coogan’s Superhero ever has a sequel, it would behoove him to explore this subject. (I’ve written extensively about the trickster archetype in my analysis of Neil Gaiman’s novel Anansi Boys in “Comics in Context” #105-108.)

    And then there’s Count Petofi in the 1897 sequence of Dark Shadows (originally telecast in 1969; see “Comics in Context” #11), who not only has tremendous magical powers (making him an Evil Sorcerer, the counterpart of the Mad Scientist), but has a “wound” that is both physical and psychological: he hates and fears the gypsies for severing his hand. Petofi too regards himself as an artist, and was repeatedly shown happily studying musical scores while silently “conducting” them with his hand. More to the point, his master scheme involved his commissioning of a painting–a portrait of Quentin Collins–which he endowed with magical powers. (Later, Petofi considered the idea of using paintings to magically create an army, thereby making him an Enemy Commander.) Petofi is also an actor, playing the false identity of British aristocrat Victor Fenn-Gibbon when he first appears on the series, and later (thanks to switching bodies) impersonating Quentin Collins.

    In writing about the supervillain as Criminal Mastermind, Coogan describes Sherlock Holmes’s archfoe Professor Moriarty, whom Arthur Conan Doyle introduced in “The Final Problem” (1893).

    Notice the methods that Doyle utilizes to present Moriarty as figuratively more than human, larger than life. The Batman is figuratively superhuman in that he presents himself as if he were a bat in human form: a “bat man.” Likewise Professor Moriarty is metaphorically an animal in human form. In “The Final Problem” Sherlock Holmes tells Dr. Watson that Moriarty “sits motionless, like a spider in the centre of its web,” controlling his criminal empire. In falling down the Reichenbach Falls, Moriarty “clawed the air with both his hands,” according to Holmes in “The Adventure of the Empty House” (1903), as if Moriarty had claws like a bird or beast of some sort. Describing his first meeting with Moriarty in “The Final Problem,” Holmes tells Watson “his face protrudes forward and is forever slowly oscillating from side to side in a curiously reptilian fashion.”

    So Moriarty is also metaphorically a reptile, like a serpent, a traditional symbol of Satan. That would make sense, since Holmes calls Moriarty “the organizer of half that is evil and of nearly all that is undetected in this great city,” as if he were indeed Satan. Holmes also states that Moriarty “had hereditary tendencies of the most diabolical kind.” Holmes does not mean that Moriarty is literally a demon, but through his choice of words, Conan Doyle plants that metaphor in the readers’ minds.

    Doyle, through Holmes, goes even further, describing Moriarty as if he were not truly human, but some force of pure evil. Holmes tells Watson that “For years past I have continually been conscious of some power behind the malefactor, some deep organizing power which forever stands in the way of the law, and throws its shield over the wrong-doer. Again and again in cases of the most varying sorts — forgery cases, robberies, murders — I have felt the presence of this force, “ Eventually Holmes discovered that this unseen “power,” this “force,” was Moriarty, working through his many criminal agents. “But the central power which uses the agent is never caught — never so much as suspected.”

    But the conceptual heart of Professor Moriarty lies in this statement by Holmes in “The Final Problem”: “You know my powers, my dear Watson, and yet at the end of three months I was forced to confess that I had at last met an antagonist who was my intellectual equal.” Moriarty is Holmes’s equal; he is Holmes’ evil opposite; he is symbolically Holmes’s evil twin. Years ago I even saw a play in London, The Secret of Sherlock Holmes (1988), by Jeremy Paul, which postulated (Spoiler Alert! Skip to the next paragraph!) that Moriarty was Holmes, who suffered from multiple personality disorder.

    So Holmes and Moriarty are equals but opposites. How, then, can Moriarty be a “supervillain” when Holmes, by Coogan’s definition, is not a “superhero”?

    Or what about the Master, the archvillain of Doctor Who? He fits Coogan’s definition of supervillain, and, indeed, I wrote the Master’s entry for Visible Ink’s The Supervillain Book. The Doctor has certain superpowers, notably his ability to “regenerate” his body when he is on the brink of death (that is, when a new actor takes over the role). But Coogan would surely define the Doctor as a science fiction hero, not a “superhero” (one word). Yet the point of the Master is that he and the Doctor are both Time Lords, possessing the same abilities. The Master is the Doctor’s equal and opposite. But the Master is a “supervillain,” according to Coogan, who might classify the Doctor as a “super hero” (two words), his term for heroes with “extraordinary abilities” who do not qualify as heroes of the superhero genre.

    But as I wrote in last week’s column, I believe that it’s confusing to have to distinguish between “super hero” (two words) and “superhero” (one word), when they sound alike in spoken conversation. Besides, most people will assume the terms mean the same thing (as Marvel and DC do).

    Moreover, in his book Coogan establishes that the superhero is the protagonist of the superhero genre. That logically suggests that the supervillain should be defined as the principal kind of antagonist in the superhero genre. (Obviously, superheroes fight other sorts of villains as well: Batman and Spider-Man regularly combat ordinary muggers and bank robbers.) I believe it will lead to confusion to categorize characters outside the superhero genre as supervillains.

    Coogan precisely defies the superhero, and explains why characters like the Phantom, the Shadow, Buffy, Luke Skywalker and others don’t fit his definition. By doing so, Coogan enables us to comprehend more clearly what sets the superhero apart from other kinds of adventure heroes.

    I believe that by including in the supervillain category characters as far removed from the superhero genre as Beowulf‘s Grendel and the Satan of Milton’s Paradise Lost, Coogan may be making the same error as those who would include, say, Beowulf himself under the heading of superheroes.

    Coogan correctly perceives traits that are common to the sort of villains that he designates as “supervillains,” whether or not they operate in the superhero genre. But couldn’t he just as easily have found characteristics that link the “super heroes” (two words) of different genres? For example, don’t Spider-Man, Buffy, Luke Skywalker, and Harry Potter have many things in common. (For one thing, they’re all effectively orphans, though Buffy loses her mother in the course of her series, and her father not through his death but through his neglect of her.)

    Coogan makes reference to the work of the late literary critic Northrup Frye, the author of Anatomy of Criticism (1957), who wrote about he called the “mode” of “romance,” by which he meant stories of extraordinary adventure. According to Frye the hero of romance is “superior in degree to other men and to his environment” and “moves in a world in which the ordinary laws of nature are slightly suspended.” Coogan states that his “super heroes” (two words) fit Frye’s description of the heroes of romance; superheroes (one word) would, as well. I have coined the term “megaheroes” to refer to such heroes of romance, of which the “superheroes” (one word) of the superhero genre constitute a subset.

    Though Frye (as far as I know) did not address this subject, the romance mode would also include the villain of romance who is “superior in degree to other men and to his environment” and “move in a world in which the ordinary laws of nature are slightly suspended.” I believe that such a larger-than-life villain can also appear outside the romance mode. Iago, for example, is a character in a Shakespearean tragedy; Hannibal Lecter first appeared in what seemed to be realistic “low mimetic” crime thrillers. However, the presence of such extraordinary villains indicates that Othello and The Silence of the Lambs actually contain elements of romance, as Frye used the word. Coogan refers to these villains of romance as “supervillains.”

    I propose that the villain of romance should be called the “megavillain.” The supervillain would then be defined as the principal kind of antagonist in the superhero genre. Hence, supervillains constitute a subset of the category of megavillains. Beowulf‘s Grendel, Shakespeare’s Richard III and Iago, Milton’s Satan, the Queen of the Night, Professor Moriarty, Dracula, Dr. Fu Manchu, Goldfinger, Dr. Loveless, Dr. Lecter, Dr. Mabuse, Darth Vader, Lord Voldemort, the Cigarette-Smoking Man, the Hooded Claw, Magica de Spell (from Uncle Scrooge), Maleficent (from Disney’s Sleeping Beauty), the Master (from Doctor Who), and the Brain (from Pinky and the Brain) are all megavillains. Doctor Doom and the Joker are megavillains who are also supervillains, since they operate in the superhero genre. And the Winged Avenger is a Displaced Supervillain, who finds himself transplanted into another genre.

    Of the five types of “supervillains” that he identifies, Coogan asserts that only the “Inverted-Superhero Supervillain” (basically, the costumed supervillain), is specific to the superhero genre. Coogan also writes about the “gravitational pull” of a genre, and I find it instructive to study the “gravitational pull” of the superhero genre on the comics villains whom he lists as examples of the other four types of “supervillains.”

    As an example of the Monster, Coogan names the Lizard from Spider-Man. Yet the Lizard should also qualify as an “Inverted-Superhero Supervillain.” He has a dual identity, like his nemesis Spider-Man, but whereas Peter Parker merely dons a costume to become a metaphorical “spider man,” Dr. Curt Connors literally transforms into a reptile to become the Lizard.

    “In superhero comics,” Coogan writes, “the two foremost enemy commanders are Dr. Doom and the Red Skull” (p. 66).

    Doctor Doom, of course, wears a full costume, including an armored battlesuit that endows him with superhuman abilities. The subtext of his relationship with his principal nemesis, Reed Richards, is that Doom is Reed’s equal (or near-equal) and opposite: he is like Reed gone wrong, an extraordinary genius who seeks to dominate humanity.

    As he was originally portrayed, as a terrorist with a death’s-head mask, the Red Skull could easily have been a villain out of the pulps. But notice that when Stan Lee and Jack Kirby first brought the Red Skull from the 1940s into the modern age of superheroes, they considerably upgraded his power and ambitions. In possession of the virtually unlimited power of the Cosmic Cube, the Red Skull was no longer Hitler’s underling, but dreamed of conquering the world and even the universe (see Tales of Suspense #79-81, 1966). In the hands of certain gifted writers, the depiction of the Red Skull shifted to that of an “inverted” version of his superhero nemesis, Captain America. Indeed, Roger Stern established that the American government devised the costumed persona of Captain America as a response to the Red Skull, Nazi Germany’s iconic figure of terror (Captain America #255, March 1981). Mark Gruenwald literalized this analogy, by establishing that the Red Skull’s consciousness had been transferred into a body cloned from Captain America: he was literally his evil twin (Captain America #350, February 1989)!

    As for the Criminal Mastermind, look at the history of such characters in Spider-Man. The BIg Man and the Crime-Master wore masks concealing their faces and had codenames and secret identities. Built like a sumo wrestler, the Kingpin is strong enough to stand up to the super-powered Spider-Man in combat, and wields advanced weaponry (the disintegrator gun in his cane). Silvermane started out as an elderly gangster and was converted into a superhuman cyborg. And the Green Goblin is unquestionably a costumed “inverted-superhero” supervillain.

    The category of the Mad Scientist presents more difficulty. A definition of the superhero as a hero with super-powers cannot work because it excludes Batman, the second most important protagonist of the superhero genre. Similarly, any definition of the supervillain must include Lex Luthor, who has no super-powers, codename, dual identity, or (usually) distinctive costume.

    Significantly, the most prominent non-costumed mad scientists in the superhero genre–bald men, sometimes with thick glasses, most of them in lab coats–come from the earliest days of superhero comics: the Ultra-Humanite and Lex Luthor in Superman, Dr. Sivana in Captain Marvel, and Professor Hugo Strange in Batman. It shouldn’t be surprising that in these early years, in which the superhero was a brand new creation, that superhero comics were still using the pulp-style Mad Scientist as a principal villain. Significantly, with the debut of comics’ first costumed supervillain, the Joker, in Batman #1 (1940), he immediately supplanted Professor Strange as Batman’s leading villain.

    As the superhero genre evolved, the new Mad Scientists who were created in the genre usually became inverted-superhero supervillains as well. Doctor Doom is an evil scientific genius like Lex Luthor, but Stan Lee and Jack Kirby presented him in full costume from the beginning. (Note that in his 1986 Squadron Supreme series, Mark Gruenwald took Emil Burbank, the Squadron’s Luthor counterpart, and converted him into the armored Master Menace, a variation on Doctor Doom.) Another Marvel villain, the Wizard, started out as a plainclothes Mad Scientist, but eventually adopted a costume, a more elaborate codename {“Wingless Wizard”), and a specialty super-power (his antigravity discs). Gardner Fox’s Justice League villains Professor Amos Fortune and Doctor Destiny likewise began as plainclothes Mad Scientists and ended up in costumes. When Steve Englehart revived Professor Hugo Strange in the 1970s, he turned him into a metaphorical shapeshifter, who masqueraded as Bruce Wayne and, memorably, as Batman in costume (see “Comics in Context” #84). Even in the Golden Age, Dr. Sivana and his two nasty kids, Sivana Jr. and Georgia, were presented as the “Sivana Family,” an inverted, evil counterpart to the superheroic Marvel Family. The Ultra-Humanite became a kind of shapeshifter in the Golden Age by transplanting his brain into a woman’s body, and in the 1970s became a true superhuman, in the body of an ape.

    Lex Luthor has consistently remained one of the foremost villains of the superhero genre since his introduction. The gravitational pull of the genre has affected him, too: In the “Powerstone” storyline in the 1940s Luthor temporarily acquired superhuman strength, and there have been periods over the decades in which Luthor has been depicted in costume (as in the Justice League Unlimited animated series). But typically he lacks costume, codename, dual identity, and super-powers.

    Ultimately, there are two reasons that make Luthor, Sivana, and Professor Strange not just megavillains but true supervillains.

    First, they control resources, primarily those of advanced science, that enable them to rival or even surpass the power of their superhero adversaries. (As seen in Matt Wagner’s recent reworking of the original Hugo Strange stories, Batman and The Monster Men, Professor Strange’s foremost achievement was the transformation of ordinary people into super-strong giants.)

    Second, Luthor, Sivana, and Strange focus their criminal efforts on battling their respective superhero nemeses. Coogan argued that Shang-Chi became a superhero when he swerved as a member of a superhero team. I contend that this “gravitational” effect works with Luthor, Sivana, and Strange as well. All three could be villains in pulp novels outside the superhero genre. But their exclusive, longrunning connection to the superhero opponents establishes them as supervillains.

    I have much more to say about Peter Coogan’s Superhero book, but other topics await. Be assured that I will be referring to the book often in future columns. It should become a basic text for study of the superhero genre, and you should all go get yourselves copies. Then perhaps all of us who write about superheroes will share a common definition of just what a superhero is.

    Or maybe not. Denny O’Neil wrote a highly appreciative introduction to Coogan’s book. But in his new blog at ComicMix, O’Neil referred to “all superheroes, from Gilgamesh on”. No! Denny, please go back and reread Peter Coogan’s Chapter 5!

    ADVERTISEMENTS FOR MYSELF
    This very weekend, from Friday, February 23 through Sunday the 25th, I am appearing at the second New York Comic Con at Manhattan’s Javits Center. I am doing signings of the Marvel Encyclopedia and The Ultimate Guide to the X-Men at the DK Publishing booth on Saturday from 2 to 3 PM and on Sunday from 11 AM t 12:30 PM.

    Most importantly, “Stan Lee: A Retrospective” is now open at the Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art (www.moccany.org) in Manhattan. Museum president Ken Wong and I jointly curated the show, which features original comics artwork from the 1960s and rare collectibles, and which will run through July 3. Next week I hope to tell you about our opening night reception, featuring a visit from Stan the Man himself!

    Copyright 2007 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #165: The Supervillain Defined

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    cic2007-02-16-01.jpgOnly last week, in the course of my month-long consideration of Dr. Peter Coogan’s book Superhero: The Secret Origin of a Genre (MonkeyBrain Press, 2006), I hypothesized that despite the surface realism of the television series 24, its hero Jack Bauer is what I called a megahero. That is my name for what the late literary critic Northrup Frye called the hero of romance, by which he meant a tale of extraordinary adventure. According to Frye a romance hero is “superior in degree to other men and to his environment,” and “moves in a world in which the ordinary laws of nature are slightly suspended” (Frye, Anatomy of Criticism, pgs. 33-34).

    After I posted last week’s column, I purchased the new issue of TV Guide (Feb. 12-18, 2007), which contained a special section on 24, including a “guest column” by Kiefer Sutherland, who plays Bauer. Sutherland writes about Jack, “Sure, there’s a superhuman element to his character, too. . . .” It’s great getting one of my ideas confirmed, and so quickly!

    Before starting my critique of Dr. Coogan’s book, I was working my way through Neal Gabler’s recent biography of Walt Disney (see “Comics in Context” #158, 160-161). You may recall that Gabler contends that Disney had little interest in his feature films following World War II; the major exception was Mary Poppins (1964).

    Last weekend Turner Classic Movies showed two of Disney’s live action films for the first time: 20,000 Leagues under the Sea (1954), based on the novel by Jules Verne (whose name, unless I missed it, oddly never appeared in the movie) and The Absent-Minded Professor (1961). I hadn’t seen the first one since childhood, and I believe I had never seen the second.

    Something that struck me about Leagues was that it didn’t conform to the popular image of a Disney movie. Yes, there was a cute animal, Esmerelda the seal, and since it was a Disney movie, it made certain that Esmerelda escaped the destruction of the Nautilus, Captain Nemo’s submarine, at the movie’s end. But, following Verne’s novel, the movie unhesitatingly portrays Captain Nemo, played by James Mason, as a mass murderer, ramming and sinking ships. The film’s narrator, Professor Aronnax, played by Paul Lukas, seems intended to be the point of view character for the audience, and Aronnax never wavers in his condemnation of what today we would call Nemo’s terrorist attacks.

    Yet the movie allows the audience to understand and empathize with Nemo’s own point of view. He only attacks warships or ships carrying munitions. Moreover, he was once a prisoner of an unnamed nation which murdered his wife and children. (In a previous column I speculated that Captain Nemo, who rules beneath the waves, was a partial inspiration for Namor the Sub-Mariner, the noble prince of an undersea kingdom who also attacks a warlike surface world. See “Comics in Context” #22.)

    Furthermore, Aronnax admires Nemo as a creative genius who designed the Nautilus, discovered its power source, which in the Disney version is obviously nuclear energy, and mastered the ocean depths. The film invites the audience to marvel at Nemo’s wonders, as well. Ned Land, the sailor played in the film by Kirk Douglas, is presented as a more conventional adventure hero, with more brawn than brain, and he condemns Nemo as a killer. Aronnax disapproves of the killings, but argues that Nemo must be persuaded to share his secrets with the world. During the movie’s titanic battle between the Nautilus crew and a giant squid, Land finds himself saving Nemo’s life, much to his own surprise. It seems we are meant to agree with Aronnax’s opinion of Nemo; even Land does, subconsciously. When the unnamed nation’s armed forces attack and fatally wound Nemo at the film’s end, surely our sympathies are with him, and the movie gives Nemo the last word, repeating his prophesy that some day, when the world is ready for them, humanity will rediscover his secrets. Nemo is a creative visionary who was ahead of his time.

    On seeing Leagues and Absent-Minded Professor on successive evenings, I realized that both movies are about misunderstood creative geniuses, even though one is a science fiction drama with an antihero who meets a tragic end, and the other is a science fiction romantic comedy. Both Nemo and the latter film’s Professor Brainard are technical innovators, like Walt Disney himself. When we meet Nemo, he no longer has a family and is entirely devoted to his mission. Professor Brainard is so intensely dedicated to his scientific research that he neglects his personal life, and repeatedly fails to attend his own wedding. Gabler’s book depicted Disney as similarly neglectful of his marriage, and instead devoting most of his energies to his creative work at the studio. The unnamed nation imprisons Nemo and kills his family in a vain effort to force him to reveal his secrets to them (notably his discovery of nuclear energy). In Gabler’s book, the darkest moment in Disney’s early career came when his distributor took his star character, Oswald the Rabbit, and most of his staff away from him. The villain in Absent-Minded Professor is Alonzo P. Hawk, the head of a finance company. Having made a large loan to Professor Brainard’s college that the school cannot repay, Hawk threatens to foreclose and take possession of the campus. Subsequently, Hawk steals Brainard’s Model-T Ford which contains his discovery, flubber, which enables the car to fly. In Gabler’s biography one of Walt Disney’s foremost nemeses is the Bank of America, which made loans to the Disney company and then restricted his freedom of action in running his own studio.

    In other words, Captain Nemo and Professor Brainard each embody aspects of Walt Disney himself. So, Mr. Gabler, is it really true that Walt Disney had little to do with his live action movies except for Poppins? The stamp of Walt the auteur, expressing his own personality through his lead characters, is clear in both Leagues and Absent-Minded Professor. (TCM’s own article about Leagues demonstrates that Walt Disney was very much personally involved in the film.)

    Watching Professor Brainard bounding up and down in his flubber-soled shoes, I found myself thinking about Spring-Heeled Jack, a character from “penny dreadfuls” in Victorian England, who wore boots containing steel springs that enabled him to make superhuman leaps into the air. Dr. Coogan admits that Jack “very likely can be considered the first hero character to fulfill the core definitional elements of the superhero” (Superhero p. 176). Coogan’s primary criteria for a superhero are mission, powers, and identity. Spring-Heeled Jack had a mission, as what Coogan calls “an all-round do-gooder” (p. 175), his boots provided him with artificial super-powers, and he scores three out of three in the “identity” requirements of codename, costume and dual identity.

    Indeed, the only persuasive reason that Coogan can give for not considering Jack to be the first superhero is that “he did not inspire the imitation and repetition necessary to initiate a genre” (p. 176), as Superman did over a century later. Hence Spring-Heeled Jack’s adventures remained an “anomaly” in his own time (p. 177).

    Maybe the difference is that super-powers are usually based in science fiction, and the more technologically advanced world of the 1930s was therefore more conducive to the popularity of the superhero concept. Perhaps Jack’s “spring-heels” were too much of a gimmick; Superman’s powers bore more mythic resonance because they were innate. Besides, while Superman also traveled via superhuman leaps (before he was upgraded to flying), he also had more impressive powers like super-strength. There seems to be an archetype of a leaping or bouncing man underlying Spring-Heeled Jack, but, significantly, it reemerges in characters who are comedic or partly comedic, like the Legion of Super-Heroes’ Bouncing Boy, Looney Tunes‘ baby kangaroo Hippety Hopper, Marvel’s Frog-Man and Leapfrog characters, and, yes, the Absent-Minded Professor. Even the Hulk’s repeated leaping, like a big green frog, looks undignified compared to Superman’s flying.

    I’ve lately received some e-mails with relevance to my recent columns. For example, Roy Thomas informs me that despite what it says on the boxes our copies of Marvel Vault, the book we co-authored for Becker and Mayer, the book is still only in its first printing.

    Peter Coogan has been sending me e-mails about my columns on his book. Not surprisingly, he disagrees with my contention that the Spirit is a superhero, and says that the Spirit “is just a masked pulp detective in comics.” I see Coogan’s point, and certainly Spirit stories more often resemble film noir than conventional superhero sagas.

    But if Spring-Heeled Jack is not a true superhero because he did not inspire any imitations or variations, then can’t we apply similar logic to the Spirit? If the Spirit had been created before Superman’s debut, then he would fall into the same category of pulp-style masked vigilantes as the Green Hornet, DC Comics’ original version of the Sandman, and even Zorro. But did the debut of Superman and the early comic book superheroes radically alter the public perception of masked heroes? Would the newspaper readers of the 1940s have perceived the Spirit as one of the new breed of superheroes, or as a pulp-style hero?

    The newspaper syndicate for which Eisner did The Spirit certainly insisted that the character conform to the new genre. By Eisner’s own admission,
    “They wanted an heroic character, a costumed character. They asked me if he’d have a costume. And I put a mask on him and said, ‘Yes, he has a costume!’” (The Jack Kirby Collector #16). So the mask, and presumably the iconic blue suit, became signifiers of a superhero costume.

    Yet Eisner went further and gave the Spirit a superhero-style origin, complete with a “death” (via suspended animation) and resurrection, thereby metaphorically putting him on a superhuman level.

    If there had been no comic book superheroes, would the Spirit have been entirely the same character? Would Eisner have given him the science fictional origin involving suspended animation, the cemetery lair, the dual identity, or even the codename? Might the Spirit have been more like Eisner’s later, similar character, John Law, who lacked mask and codename, and worked as a policeman? Did anyone ever ask Eisner this?

    Eisner did as little as he needed to make the Spirit look like a superhero, and yes, Spirit stories typically resemble film noir more than conventional superhero tales. But to my mind, anyway, the Spirit just meets the minimum requirements to be considered a superhero. Just as Buffy is a Displaced Superhero operating in the supernatural horror genre, maybe the Spirit is a Technical Superhero, whose stories include a wide number of genres, from comedy to noir mystery, and even outright superhero stories like Darwyn Cooke’s Batman/Spirit comic.

    With regard to whether the TV series Heroes is in the superhero genre, Dr. Coogan wrote to me that “All Heroes has to do is show one costume and employ one codename.” I don’t know if that’s sufficient if most of the super-powered characters don’t use costumes or codenames. If only one of the Heroes dresses in a costume, he may come off as an eccentric. In the superhero genre, wearing a distinctive costume is typically presented as a reasonable choice.

    One of the Heroes, Hiro Nakamura, is a superhero comics buff and perceives himself as a superhero. The Wikipedia entry on the character observes that Hiro is “the one character that aspires to the pure heroism of comic book crime fighters.” In other words, he is the only one who has the same kind of sense of mission that conventional superheroes have, but so far this makes him an anomaly in the cast of characters.

    Coogan contends that Hiro’s future counterpart “has a costume” that isn’t doesn’t “strictly” conform to genre expectations, “but it’s clear that Hiro intends it as a superhero costume.” But a “declaration of intent” isn’t always sufficient. This “costume” consists of a black overcoat. According to Coogan’s book, the superhero costume should express the character’s biography, powers, and/or identity, and should have a “chevron,” an insignia that stands for the superhero identity. All that Future Hiro’s overcoat expresses is that he develops better fashion sense. I can’t accept this as a true superhero costume any more than I do Neo’s long black coat in The Matrix.

    Coogan also points out that a new character on the show, Hana Gittleman, who first appeared in comics on NBC’s Heroes website, has a codename: “Wireless.” Now this does seem to be a real move towards the direction of conforming to superhero genre conventions.

    Thinking further about this, I realized that Heroes’ first season may be one long origin story for the principal characters. Perhaps it is evolving slowly but surely into what would clearly be recognized as a superhero series, with the Heroes fulfilling Coogan’s major criteria. Maybe the true test is to see how many of the Heroes will have adopted codenames and a selflessly altruistic sense of mission by this point in the second season.

    I doubt that Coogan would consider the Captain Nemo of Alan Moore and Kevin O’Neill’s League of Extraordinary Gentlemen to be a superhero. “Nemo” is an alias, meaning “no one,” and is a kind of codename, but Moore and O’Neill dress their Nemo in conventional garments from India, not a superhero-style costume. Nemo’s sense of mission in League seems inadequate: he angrily quits the team by the end of Volume 2. While Coogan makes clear that advanced technology can fill his criterion of super-powers, Nemo’s primary “powers” reside not in his body or his personal weaponry and equipment, but in his vehicle, the Nautilus. The League of Extraordinary Gentlemen‘s supreme annotator Jess Nevins says that “Nemo was the archetypal Man With The Machine, the inventor/engineer character who created scientifically advanced machines and used them on their adventures.”

    But would the Captain Nemo of the Disney movie and Verne’s novel qualify under Coogan’s definition of supervillain? On his “Fantastic Victoriana” website, Jess Nevins places Nemo in the context of 19th century Romanticism: “The ostracized Romantic genius is unappreciated, his talent unvalued, and his intellectual and spiritual values rejected by the soulless materialistic society which does not appreciate his naturally superior talents.”

    This reminds me of Coogan’s three categories of characters from 19th and early 20th century fiction that are forebears of the 20th century superhero: the “science-fiction superman,” beginning with Frankenstein’s monster in 1918; the “dual-identity avenger-vigilante” and what Coogan calls “the pulp ubermensch,” beginning with Tarzan in 1912 (p. 126). Concealing his true identity behind an alias, Nemo fits the second category, striking out at the warships of the nations of the world. Coogan links the first and third categories of philosopher Friedrich Nietzche’s concept of the ubermensch, which Coogan defines as “a revolutionary figure, operating beyond the traditional notions of good and evil, following his will to power, and embodying the master morality while abandoning the slave morality of Christian teaching and platonic ideals” (p. 130). Now consider this speech by Nemo that Nevins takes from Verne’s novel: “I am not what you call a civilized man! I have broken with society entirely, for reasons which I alone have the right to assess. I therefore do not obey its laws. . . .” Nemo isn’t physically a “superman” but his “machine” enables him to exercise the power of one.

    Whereas Coogan limits the definition of superheroes to characters in the superhero genre, he contends that supervillains exist in numerous genres, and predate the creation of the first superhero. He divides supervillains into five basic types, while noting that a particular character can belong to one or more of these types.

    First is the Monster, a type including Grendel from Beowulf, Frankenstein’s monster, Dracula, and even beasts without any aspect of humanity, such as the Nemean Lion and the Lernaean Hydra from the Twelve Labors of Hercules.

    Second is the Enemy Commander, a category in which Coogan includes not only Darth Vader but also historical figures such as Xerxes, the Persian king at the Battle of Thermopylae (who figures in such disparate works as Herodotus’ Histories and Frank Miller’s 300). Coogan considers John Milton’s Satan in Paradise Lost (1667) as “the very model of the enemy commander supervillain” (p. 63). Coogan even maintains that Americans think of real life figures Adolf Hitler and Osama bin Laden as supervillains.

    Third is the Mad Scientist, a self-explanatory category that Coogan traces back through Dr. Victor Frankenstein to what we might call “mad alchemists” like Doctor Faustus (as in Christopher Marlowe’s play, published in 1604).

    Fourth is the Criminal Mastermind, a type prominently represented by Sherlock Holmes’ nemesis Professor Moriarty, who debuted in Arthur Conan Doyle’s “The Final Problem” (1893).

    The fifth and final category is what Coogan somewhat awkwardly calls the Inverted-Superhero Supervillain. By this Coogan means the familiar kind of costumed supervillain that we see in comics; indeed, he says that this is the only category of supervillain that is limited to the superhero genre. Like superheroes, the “inverted-superhero” type of supervillain can be identified by mission (an antisocial one), powers, and identity, expressed through codename and costume. Coogan identifies the Joker and Catwoman, who both debuted in Batman #1 (1940) as the first true “inverted-superhero” supervillains. Actually, that honor should go solely to Jerry Robinson’s creation, the Joker. In Batman #1 the Catwoman appears as “the Cat,” a comely female thief who is a master of disguise. This character later evolved into the Catwoman, complete with full costume and cat-themed weaponry and equipment. But in her first appearance, she’s a more ordinary sort of criminal that one could easily find in a conventional detective story.

    Captain Nemo would fall under the headings of Enemy Commander (leading his own one-ship navy, the Nautilus) and Mad Scientist (as its inventor). But we should note that Verne’s and Disney’s Nemo is more precisely of a character type that Coogan does not discuss: the supervillain as antihero. The Sub-Mariner fit into the same category when he was revived in Fantastic Four #4 (1962). Of course, Milton’s Satan is one of the greatest antiheroes in literature.

    Coogan proposes that Ian Fleming, the creator of villains such as Blofeld, Doctor No, and Goldfinger in his James Bond novels, “might be called the poet laureate of supervillainy.”

    There is one more recent character in both popular literature and film who is such a towering figure of what Coogan calls “supervillainy” that I am astounded that he never receives a mention in Coogan’s book. Who else but Dr. Hannibal Lecter, who was created by novelist Thomas Harris in his book Red Dragon (1981, released as a film as Manhunter in 1986 and under its original title in 2002), became a pop culture icon in The Silence of the Lambs (published in 1988, released as a film in 1991), and has reappeared in Hannibal (published in 1999, released as a film in 2001) and currently in Harris’s new novel Hannibal Rising, and the 2007 film thereof. The American Film Institute’s 2003 poll of movie professionals, critics and historians named Dr. Lecter as the greatest villain in film history. (in the Online Film Critics’ 2202 poll about great movie villains, Dr. Lecter placed second, after Darth Vader.)

    Dr. Lecter would fit two of Coogan’s categories of supervillains; the Monster (as a cannibal) and the Mad Scientist (as a psychiatrist).

    Whereas Coogan listed three main criteria for defining a superhero, he lists seven for determining who is a supervillain. Let’s go down the list and see how Nemo and Lecter fit.

    First, as with the superheroes, is Mission, which in the supervillain’s case is “selfish” and “anti-social.” Nemo has turned his back on society, and certainly the nations of the world regard his mission to destroy warships as antisocial. (But we may sympathize with his mission to some extent, and consider him to be an antihero.) In Hannibal Rising, the young Lecter embarks on a mission of vengeance against the men who murdered–and devoured–his sister. In his review of this novel in The New York Times Sunday Book Review (December 31, 2006), film critic Terence Rafferty points to “the doctor’s strong avenging-angel impulse, which since The Silence of the Lambs has sometimes manifested itself as a grisly kind of gallantry. In both Silence and Hannibal, he often functions as the protector, rescuer and champion of Clarice Starling, the comely young F.B.I. agent who strangely interests him.” Rafferty contends that real life serial killers murder merely to satisfy their sexual desires, and not out of a sense of mission. Rafferty asserts that Harris’s backstory for Lecter, as his sister’s avenger, “emphasize[s], by the very similarity to superhero origin stories, the character’s utter impossibility, his pure does-not-occur-in-nature absurdity.” Lecter isn’t a realistic character.

    Thus Rafferty inadvertently acknowledges that Lecter is what Coogan would call a “supervillain.” Lecter is not “one of us,” not what Frye would call a high or low mimetic character. Despite the surface realism of Harris’s novels, Lecter is a villain of what Frye calls the mode of romance, in which the rules of strict realism do not apply. Indeed, the rules of strict psychological realism are inapplicable to Lecter. That’s not Harris’s mistake; that’s the point.

    When he is not avenging his sister or aiding Clarice, Lecter has no ongoing mission, but Coogan points out that “It is possible, and even typical, for a monster to act without malice. Destructiveness comes out of its nature. . . .Most monsters express a force of nature in their destructiveness.” That seems to me to be a reasonable description of Lecter.

    Second, there is Criminal Artistry: “The supervillain’s dream reaches far beyond the acquisitive scheme of the ordinary crook.” Lecter definitely sees his crimes as art: specifically, he regards cannibalism into gourmet dining. Nemo may not regard his sinking of warships as art, but he is portrayed both by Verne and by Disney as an artist: both the novel and the film repeatedly portray him playing the organ. The portrayal of the extraordinary villain as having an interest in high culture is familiar. In the film of The Silence of the Lambs Lecter waves his hand to a recording of classical music, as if conducting, during the scene in which he murders his guards, and in Hannibal he has settled in Florence as an art historian.

    Rafferty perceives that “In Silence, Harris [added] a pitiless aesthetic objectivity to the list of Hannibal’s improbable properties: his taste is so impeccable it seems demonic. But the decisive leap in the evolution of Hannibal Lecter turned out to be his, let’s say, appreciation of Clarice Starling, whose beauty meets his high standards and whose tantalizingly inchoate sense of herself arouses his clinical curiosity.” So Lecter’s interest in Starling is driven not only by sexual urges but by his aesthetic sense and by his scientist’s pursuit of knowledge.

    Third is mania, or fanaticism: “The blindness that comes from a maniac singleness of purpose permits the supervillain to not see the inhumanity of what he does or to perceive what he does as beneficial to the world” (p. 82). Nemo: check. Lecter: check.

    Fourth is “the wound”: “This grandiose self-aggrandizement arises from a sense of victimhood, originating in a wound that the supervillain never recovers from” (p. 83). Coogan states that supervillains are “in love with the story of their wound, unable to get past whatever happened in their past and turn their energies toward healing or redemptive therapy” (p. 84). In the Disney film Nemo is haunted by the death of his family.

    Of course, there are also superheroes who are driven by psychological “wounds.” Take the Punisher, who embarked on his vigilante career because gangsters slaughtered his family. Coogan believes that the Punisher is a superhero only in stories in which he interacts with other superheroes. Often characters like Spider-Man collaborate with the Punisher on specific missions. But it seems to me that the Punisher becomes a supervillain in stories in which the superhero refuses to tolerate the Punisher’s killing of criminals, such as Frank Miller’s Daredevil #183-184 (June-July 1982).

    Batman is unquestionably a superhero, and yet he is famously driven by the “wound” of the murder of his parents. Rafferty compares Lecter to Batman: “In Hannibal Rising, Harris. . . .gives his popular fiend the kind of “˜origin story’ that comic-book writers bestow on their impossibly righteous superheroes: how, say, a certain caped crusader against crime acquired his steely resolve and cool paraphernalia.” although he has repeatedly attempted to give up his superhero career, Spider-Man is forever driven by his own “wound,” his guilt over his failure to prevent the murder of Uncle Ben, to return to his crimefighting mission. Even Superman has been interpreted as being dedicated to making sure that his adopted world, Earth, does not suffer destruction as Krypton did.

    Various reviewers, including Rafferty, have objected to Hannibal Rising on the grounds that revealing Lecter’s past and delving into his motivations reduces him as a character. Rafferty believes that Dr. Lecter’s power as a character resides in his “fundamental and impenetrable opacity.” I haven’t read Harris’s new book or seen the film adaptation. But Coogan’s analysis of the importance of the supervillain’s “wound” persuades me that by providing Lecter with an origin, Harris is simply following the logic of developing a supervillain.

    Fifth is “monologue and soliloquy.” As Coogan acknowledges, “monologuing” is a term invented by Brad Bird’s 2004 superhero movie The Incredibles (See “Comics in Context” #62) to refer to supervillains’ familiar trait of talking at great length about their own alleged greatness. As Coogan notes, Fleming is the great master of villains’ monologues. Coogan points out that the villain respects the hero, and tells him about his life or his master plans, in order to win the hero’s” respect and approval–the respect and approval he s missed in his early life” (p. 69).

    Nemo qualifies here: he allows Professor Aronnax to live because he respects Aronnax’s intelligence and believes that the professor can appreciate the significance of his achievements. Although Dr. Lecter famously insists on “quid pro quo” with Starling, he dominates their conversations. Here, too, Lecter perceives Starling as someone he can respect, and someone who can respect him, in contrast with the doctors and lawmen for whom Lecter feels utter contempt.

    As Coogan points out, “soliloquy” and “monologue” are theatrical terms, and therefore are further indications of the “artistic” side of the supervillain’s crimes: “they are impresarios, putting on a show of sorts, and the heroes who oppose them are their audience” (p. 89).

    Coogan distinguishes between the “monologue,” delivered to the hero, and the “soliloquy,’ delivered to unspeaking underlings or “without an audience.”
    Ah, but there is always an audience: the readers of the story, or the watchers of the film or TV show.
    This made me realize that there are other forebears of the modern supervillain whom Coogan has missed. What about the soliloquies of Shakespeare’s Richard III and Iago, as well as some of his lesser villains, all of whom are descended from the “vice” figure of medieval drama, who likewise addressed the audience? Are Shakespeare’s great villains the forefathers of Doctor Doom and his ilk?

    Obviously, I am not yet finished with the topic of supervillains, and will continue my own version of monologuing in the near future.

    ADVERTISEMENTS FOR MYSELF
    The second New York Comic Con will be held at Manhattan’s Javits Center from Friday, February 23 through Sunday the 25th. I’ll be doing signings of the Marvel Encyclopedia and The Ultimate Guide to the X-Men at the DK Publishing booth on Saturday from 2 to 3 PM and on Sunday from 11 AM t 12:30 PM.

    On Saturday from 5 to 6, I’m supposed to be moderating the convention’s “Behind the Panels: The Classic Age of Comics,” featuring Golden and Silver Age greats Murphy Anderson, Arnold Drake, Irwin Hasen, Carmine Infantino, and Jerry Robinson.

    But the biggest news is that I am the co-curator of “Stan Lee: A Retrospective,” an exhibit surveying his entire career, that opens on the weekend of the New York Comic-Con and runs through July 3. The opening reception, which Stan Lee will attend, is at 8:30 PM on the evening of Friday the 23rd. The reception is a benefit for the Museum, and tickets are still available (see www.moccany.org). After the opening, you can visit the exhibit on Fridays through Mondays at the regular admission fee. And for the next few months the Museum is also still holding “Saturday Morning,” curator Matt Murray’s wonderful retrospective of the history of Saturday morning television animation.

    Copyright 2007 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #165: Super Slayer

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    cic2007-02-09.jpgWhen Dr. Peter Coogan appeared at New York’s Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art last September to talk about his book Superhero: The Secret Origin of a Genre (MonkeyBrain Press, 2006), he said that of all the characters who possibly might be superheroes, he was most asked whether the Shadow and Joss Whedon’s Buffy the Vampire Slayer qualified under his definition. Coogan’s answer in both cases was no.

    I agree that the Shadow fits under the heading of pulp novel mystery men, rather than superheroes; indeed, he and Doc Savage are the foremost exemplars of the heroes of that genre.

    But what about Buffy? With her new Dark Horse comics series, recounting what Whedon says represents what could have been the “eighth season” of her seven-season television series, on the horizon, that question takes on new relevance. Now that her primary venue is comics, is Buffy a comics superhero?

    For the last two weeks I’ve been examining Coogan’s definition of the superhero in my column. Coogan establishes three major criteria for determining whether or not a character is a true superhero: a mission, which is altruistic, benefiting society rather than the hero, and long term; the super-powers; and a heroic identity, expressed through a codename and costume, and usually involving a secret identity.

    Buffy has a mission, certainly: she is the Slayer, the “Chosen One,” selected by destiny to battle vampires and other supernatural menaces. At the end of her television series, she succeeded in activating the super-powers of all other potential Slayers in the world. But even though there are now other people who can follow the Slayer’s mission, she continues to do so, from choice, and has become the other Slayers’ leader.

    Buffy has super-powers, which include superhuman strength and agility, and even that power Wolverine popularized, the ability to recover from injuries at superhuman speed.

    It’s in the area of identity that Coogan believes that Buffy falls short. He states that “Buffy has an identity as the Slayer. But this identity is not a superhero identity like Superman or Batman. This identity is not separate from her ordinary Buffy identity the way Superman is from Clark Kent, whose mild-mannered personality differs greatly from Superman’s heroic character. The Slayer is not a public identity in the ordinary superhero sense. . . .Buffy does not wear a costume, and while such a costume is not necessary, it is typical” (Superhero, p. 48).

    In discussing in his book why Luke Cage is a superhero, Coogan uncovered a precept which I have dubbed “declaration of intent”: Coogan demonstrated not only that Cage’s early editors and writers intended to make Cage a superhero, but the character himself expressed the intent to be a superhero. Last week I showed that a creator’s “declaration of intent” does not mean that his creation really is a superhero. The creator’s understanding of what a superhero is may be flawed. Hence, Tim Kring, the creator of NBC’s Heroes, believes it is a superhero show, but by Coogan’s definition, it isn’t. Nevertheless, as Coogan showed in his examination of Luke Cage, the intent of both the creator and the creation, as expressed in the work, is worth looking into.

    Coogan claims that “The producers of Buffy the Vampire Slayer do not seem to regard it as a superhero show” (p. 48). Perhaps that is so, but do they consider Buffy a superhero? Buffy’s creator, Joss Whedon, clearly thinks of her as a superhero. Consider this exchange from the interview that Brian Bendis recently conducted with Whedon for Wizard. First, Whedon says that, “People long before I started writing Astonishing X-Men pointed out the similarities between Buffy and the X-Men that I hadn’t even noticed. I hadn’t even noticed that all her friends had turned into superheroes.” (Whedon is referring to the fact that several of Buffy’s friends, who aided her in combatting supernatural foes, had supernatural powers as well; hence they formed a super-powered team.) A little later, Bendis says, “I actually, in the first seasons of Buffy, saw the similarities between Buffy and Spider-Man.” Whedon replies, “Yes,” and Bendis clarifies, “The early [Steve] Ditko years of Spider-Man,” and Whedon does not disagree.

    But it’s not just in retrospect that Whedon regards Buffy as a superhero. In interviews Whedon gave around the time he began writing the Astonishing X-Men comic (see “Comics in Context” #42-43), he stated that he has based Buffy in part on X-Men‘s teenage heroine Kitty Pryde. He told New York Magazine (June 7, 2004), “If there’s a bigger influence on Buffy than Kitty, I don’t know what it was. . . .She was an adolescent girl finding out she has great power and dealing with it”.

    In the Buffy television series there are frequent references to Buffy’s “super-powers,” as when in the episode “End of Days” her fellow Slayer Faith memorably and truthfully commented to Buffy, “Thank God we’re hot chicks with super-powers.” Buffy is explicitly called a “superhero” by her friend (and superhero comics buff) Xander in “The Harvest” (the second half of the two-parter that started the TV series) and by her mother Joyce in “Dead Man’s Party,” and is called “a superhero or something” by a supporting character in “Tabula Rasa.”

    In the episode “Inca Mummy Girl” Buffy’s “Watcher,” her mentor Giles, tells her, “Your secret identity is gonna be difficult enough to maintain while this exchange student is living with you.” (Since Whedon is a known Marvel aficionado, his use of the term “Watcher” seems to be a homage to Stan Lee and Jack Kirby’s Uatu the Watcher, a character from the superhero genre.)

    So Whedon explicitly endowed Buffy with a “secret identity.” As Coogan states, Buffy’s dual identity is not as clearly defined as Superman’s. Coogan notes that “The Slayer is not a public identity”; the public is not aware that there is a Slayer, or that vampires are real. But Whedon’s point is that Buffy leads an alternate life as the Slayer that she has to keep secret from public knowledge. Whereas Clark Kent has to prevent the public from learning he is Superman, Buffy is like a Clark Kent who has to prevent the public from even knowing there is a Superman. In the show’s early seasons Buffy even kept her Slayer career secret from her oblivious mom, Joyce. At the time this reminded me of Peter Parker’s efforts for years to conceal his Spider-Man identity from his equally oblivious Aunt May. Whedon’s acknowledgment of similarities between Buffy and Spider-Man may mean that this specific parallel was intentional.

    It strikes me that Buffy’s situation is also somewhat like that of Marvel’s Doctor Strange. Former surgeon Dr. Stephen Strange uses his real name in as Doctor Strange, Master of the Mystic Arts; again, his everyday identity and heroic persona are not as sharply differentiated as those of Superman and Clark Kent. But the general public of Marvel-Earth does not believe in magic, and considers Doctor Strange to be an eccentric, or even a charlatan. Only Strange’s allies–and enemies–know that he has actual magical abilities, and Strange considers it part of his mission to prevent the general populace from learning about the supernatural terrors from which he protects them.

    Buffy’s adversaries, notably the vampires, usually know her “civilian” name but refer to her as the Slayer; this further underlines the idea that she has a dual identity.

    Coogan contends that whereas Clark Kent and Superman have distinctly different personalities, Buffy’s personality is the same in her everyday life as it is when she acts as the Slayer. First, although the “mild-mannered” persona of Clark Kent is traditional (as in the Superman movies), there have been successful versions of Superman in which his personality is not noticeably different in his Clark Kent and Man of Steel personae: neither George Reeves on television nor John Byrne’s Superman in the comics feigned timidity or shyness as Clark. Second, there was a difference between Buffy’s personality as the Slayer and the way she behaved as an ordinary student. In high school and college, Buffy was usually more insecure and less assertive than she was as the independent, aggressive Slayer. In fact, I suspect it may have been a mistake when Whedon had Buffy drop out of college in the later seasons: without a “normal ” life to balance her Slayer career, her personality grew harder-edged, more solitary, and less appealing.

    Of course Buffy does not wear a distinctive costume, but she does characteristically wear a cross around her neck, which to some extent fills the functions of the superhero insignia that Coogan terms a “chevron.” Since vampires are repelled by the sight of a cross, Buffy’s cross signifies her role as vampire slayer. Moreover, although Whedon is not religious, Buffy’s cross inescapably suggests that she is on God’s side, or at least on the side of moral right, and perhaps even that her Slayer career is a spiritual quest.

    Let me tentatively suggest the following classifications for superhero double identities. Superman has a First Level Dual Identity, in which his heroic persona and everyday persona are clearly defined, distinct public identities: the general public does not know that Superman and Clark Kent are one and the same person. Mister Fantastic has a Second Level Dual Identity, in that the general public knows that his heroic identity (Mister Fantastic) and everyday identity (Reed Richards) belong to the same person. Buffy has a Third Level Dual Identity, in that the general public not only does not know that Buffy has a heroic persona (the Slayer), but does not even know that that heroic identity exists.

    In Superhero Coogan establishes that a genre can exert what he likens to a gravitational pull. Notice the effect of such “gravity” on the vampires that Buffy battles. In various ways Whedon downplays the supernatural nature of vampires. Compare Whedon’s vampires to that more traditional pop culture vampire, Barnabas Collins of Dark Shadows (see “Comics in Context” #11, 149). Barnabas can transform into a bat, and, by staring into people’s eyes, can place them under his mental control; Whedon’s vampires lack these powers. Even more importantly, Barnabas, as a vampire, is literally dead during the daylight hours, during which time he must lie in his coffin, and returns to his undead sort of life at dusk. Whedon’s vampires remain active during the day, although they must avoid direct sunlight, have no dependence on coffins (although Spike still made his home in a cemetery crypt), and can actually sleep rather than revert to true death during the daytime. But Barnabas, while his grip was indeed strong, was not usually portrayed as superhumanly strong. In contrast, Whedon continually emphasized that his vampires were superhumanly strong and agile, and nearly invulnerable. In other words, Whedon treated his vampires as if they were super-strong super-villains. While Buffy uses her stake to deliver the coup de grace, her principal weapon in combat is her own superhuman strength. Hence Buffy’s battles with vampires resemble fight scenes from the superhero genre. (The episode “Buffy vs. Dracula,” which pitted Buffy against a vampire with traditional supernatural attributes, was the exception to the rule that underlined how very different Whedon’s vampires are from the conventional model.)

    Then there are explicit references to the superhero genre within the Buffy television series. The “Trio” of wannabe villains in the sixth season refer to themselves as “supervillains,” and even invent a freeze gun reminiscent of the weaponry of numerous comics supervillains, notably Batman‘s Mr. Freeze and Flash‘s Captain Cold. In the sixth season Buffy’s friend Willow, a witch, becomes addicted to magic and turns into a villain. Not only has Whedon repeatedly referred to this version of Willow as “Dark Willow,” but one of the Trio, Andrew, explicitly says in one episode that Willow has gone “Dark Phoenix.” Hence the “Dark Willow” arc is an explicit homage to X-Men‘s “Dark Phoenix Saga,” one of the most celebrated storylines in the history of the superhero genre (see “Comics in Context” #134-135).

    I believe that Buffy the character does fit the definition of superhero. Nonetheless, Buffy the television series (or movie or comics series) is not part of the superhero genre.

    Earlier in his book Coogan stated that “If a character basically fits the mission-powers-identity definition, even with significant qualifications, and cannot be easily placed into another genre because of the preponderance of superhero conventions, the character is a superhero” (p. 40). This means that, according to Coogan’s rules, a character could fit the “MPI” definition yet still not be a superhero, if this character can indeed be “easily placed into another genre.” Therefore we must examine which genre provides the “preponderance” of genre conventions in the character’s series. We must not simply study the character, but the context in which that character exists. “Generic distinction,” Coogan asserts, “is a crucial element of the superhero. . . .” (p. 48).

    Coogan correctly argues that “the Slayer is a hero-type that predates the superhero, fitting firmly within the larger horror genre and specifically within the vampire sub-genre” (p. 48), and cites Dr. Van Helsing from Bram Stoker’s Dracula as the first version of this hero-type in literature. Marvel buff Whedon credits Kitty Pryde as an inspiration for Buffy, but surely the blonde vampire slayer Rachel Van Helsing from Marvel’s Tomb of Dracula was a direct influence. Come to think of it, Tomb of Dracula‘s small band of vampire hunters, led by an older British man, Quincy Harker, and including Rachel, resembles Buffy’s own vampire-hunting “Scooby Gang,” whose father figure is another Englishman, Giles. Coogan points out that “historically, the [vampire hunter] hero-type descends from actual vampire hunters, including the dhampir, the supposed male progeny of a vampire who is particularly able to detect and destroy vampires” (p. 48). That sounds like a sometime member of Harker’s band, Blade, who mother was attacked by a vampire while giving birth to him, and who wields stakes as weapons the same way that Buffy does. Janus, Dracula’s son in Tomb of Dracula who became his adversary, would also fall into this category of modern day dhampir.

    Though Coogan concedes that “the writers of Buffy draw on superhero conventions,” he also points out that “They also make references to Scooby Doo and the show fits within the Scooby Doo formula” (p. 48). Well, it does to the extent that Buffy has a band of friends and allies, all of whom are young, who help her combat supernatural evil; in a stroke of metafictional wit, they even refer to themselves as “Scoobies.” But the Scooby Doo formula entails a solving a mystery, and Buffy doesn’t follow the detective story pattern. The Scooby formula also entails exposing the supposed supernatural menace as a fraud, but in Buffy supernatural evil is indeed real.

    What Coogan is getting at is that the Buffy writers draw on conventions from various genres, including the superhero genre. Whedon has described Buffy as “My So-Called Life meets The X-Files“, and the show obviously draws on the high school/college comedy and “dramady” for its setting during the first four seasons. There are elements of science fiction, such as the cyborg Adam and robots like the Buffybot, and the Bondian superspy subgenre through the Initiative. Buffy is not just a vampire slayer, but a monster slayer, and thereby fits into a long line of characters going back to Gilgamesh and encompassing dragon slayers like St. George. Buffy is a television version of a bildungsroman, which is defied by the American Heritage Dictionary as “A novel whose principal subject is the moral, psychological, and intellectual development of a usually youthful main character.” Buffy’s fight scenes are obviously influenced by Asian martial arts movies. Wikipedia’s Buffy entry correctly observes that “The show blends different genres, including horror, martial arts, romance, melodrama, farce, comedy, and even, in one episode, musical comedy.” As noted on the BBC’s Buffy website, in the fifth season episode “Spiral,” the sequence in which Buffy, standing atop a moving RV, combats pursuing knights on horseback “is reportedly the Buffy production team’s homage to [the] classic Western film Stagecoach [1939].”

    Combining elements of different genres is a Joss Whedon trademark; his television series Firefly and its movie spinoff Serenity (2005) are fusions of science fiction with the Western genre. Whedon was more explicit in incorporating Western elements than was Gene Roddenberry, who famously pitched Star Trek as “Wagon Train to the stars”.

    But the “preponderant” genre conventions are those of the genre of supernatural horror and fantasy. Whedon has made that clear in his repeated descriptions of his original concept for Buffy, explaining that he took the genre formula of “the little blonde girl who goes into a dark alley and gets killed in every horror movie” and intended “to subvert that idea and create someone who was a hero.” (Billson, Anne, Buffy the Vampire Slayer [BFI TV Classics series] pp. 24-25).

    Whereas Coogan believes that Buffy is not a superhero, I’ve invented a special category for her, which I suspect reflects Whedon’s intentions for the character. To my mind, Buffy is a Displaced Superhero, which is to say that she is a superhero who operates outside the superhero genre. If someday, somehow, Whedon manages to do a Buffy-Batman or a Buffy-X-Men crossover, it will be interesting to see how well she fits into an actual superhero genre story.

    Having defined what he considers to be a true superhero, what then does Coogan do with all the characters, like Buffy, who have super-powers but don’t fit his definition? Having declared that Buffy is not a “superhero” (one word), Coogan states that she is instead a “super hero” (two words), “as are heroic characters from other genres that have extraordinary abilities such as the Shadow, the Phantom, Beowulf, or Luke Skywalker. They are superior to ordinary human beings and ordinary protagonists of more realistic fiction in significant ways.” However, “they are not superheroes, that is they are not the protagonists of superhero genre narratives” (pages 48-49).

    I see the point of Coogan’s distinction between “superheroes” (one word) and “super heroes” (two words), but his terminology presents problems. For one thing, the difference between the two terms does not work in spoken conversation, since you cannot hear whether there is a gap between the “super” and the “heroes.” Even in print (or on the computer screen), a simple typographical error can turn “super heroes” into “superheroes” or vice versa. Second, I understand that DC and Marvel have jointly trademarked both “superhero” (as one word) and “super hero” (as two words). DC and Marvel perceive no difference in meaning between the two forms of the term, so there is no legal distinction between them, either.

    At this point Coogan does something in his book that delighted me: he quotes from the late literary critic Northrop Frye’s Anatomy of Criticism (1957). I first encountered this book when I was in college and immediately recognized that his ideas could be applied to superhero fiction. (Another academic turned comics pro, Peter Gillis, paid tribute to Professor Frye by giving him a posthumous cameo in Defenders #133 [July 1984].)

    As Coogan recounts, Frye identified the hero of myth as “superior in kind both to other men and to the environment.” Then there is what Frye terms the literary mode of romance. Among the definitions that the American Heritage Dictionary gives for “romance” are “A long fictitious tale of heroes and extraordinary or mysterious events, usually set in a distant time or place” and “The class of literature constituted by such tales”; this is what Frye meant by the term. According to Frye, the hero of romance is “superior in degree to other men and to his environment,” but is still a human being, who “moves in a world in which the ordinary laws of nature are slightly suspended.” In the high mimetic mode, the hero is “superior in degree to other men but not to his natural environment,” the hero of the low mimetic mode is “one of us,” and the hero of the ironic mode is “inferior in power or intelligence to ourselves” (Anatomy of Criticism, pgs. 33-34).

    Coogan then declares that his “super heroes” (two words) are all “romance heroes.” Since, as he points out, nowadays the meaning of “romance” as love story is more common than its meaning as a tale of extraordinary adventure, calling these characters “romance heroes” would be confusing. So he calls them “super heroes” (two words) instead, which, as I’ve pointed out, is perhaps even more confusing.

    Moreover, by stating that his “super heroes” (two words) are “romance heroes,” Coogan may, perhaps inadvertently, be leading readers to think that true superheroes are not romance heroes. But I think that Frye’s definition of the romance hero as a human being who is “superior in degree to other men and to his environment,” and who “moves in a world in which the ordinary laws of nature are slightly suspended” is a nearly perfect description of the true superhero.

    A superhero’s superpowers account for his superiority to his “environment.” This slight “suspension” of the laws of nature could account for what Coogan calls “superhero physics,” whereby superpowers, which do not exist in the real world, can exist in the Marvel Universe, for example. Hence, for example, thanks to the way that physics works in the DC Universe, Superman can fly, thereby demonstrating his superiority to an element of his environment, the law of gravity.

    Frye’s description of the romance hero needs to be modified slightly to include those superheroes who are not literally human beings (like Superman, or the Silver Surfer, or the Vision), but all of them resemble Earth humans sufficiently, physically and psychologically, to be included. Also, as I’ve pointed out in previous installments, some superheroes, like Batman, lack actual super-powers; these characters are figuratively “superior in degree”: to other humans and to their environment.

    Frye’s theory of modes also enables me to show further why Neil Gaiman’s Morpheus is not a superhero. Morpheus fits Frye’s description of the hero of myth, who is “superior in kind both to other men and to the environment.” A superhero is “superior in degree” to other humans, due to his powers, but is still a human being. Morpheus is “superior in kind” to humans: he is not human, but is one of the Endless, a different, higher form of being.

    Elements of the superhero genre turn up at times in Gaiman’s Sandman, such as Element Girl and Doctor Dee (Justice League villain Doctor Destiny) in early issues, Batman and Clark Kent in “The Wake,” and the references to the Green Lantern and Superman mythos in Sandman: Endless Nights (see “Comics in Context” #17). But the predominant conventions in Gaiman’s Sandman are those of the fantasy genre.

    Notice how Gaiman treats the character of Lyta Hall, who was the superheroine Fury in Roy Thomas’s Infinity, Inc. series. The “gravitational” pull of the fantasy genre is so strong in Sandman that Lyta’s superheroic identity is never mentioned in Gaiman’s series, nor her superpowers. Perhaps, however, Gaiman made an unspoken in joke by having Lyta (a. k. a. Fury) send the Furies of Greek mythology to punish Morpheus.

    I also realized that the typical superhero is “superior in degree” to ordinary humans in his heroic identity, but in his alternate identity he is “one of us.” Superman is a romance hero, but as Clark Kent he is a “low mimetic” hero. Buffy is a romance hero when she acts as the Slayer, but when she is attending high school classes, she is acting as a low mimetic heroine.

    While Morpheus is a hero of myth, different in kind than humans, Gaiman’s Sandman series can be read as the story of how Morpheus discovers he has an emotional capacity that is not so different from that of humankind. The series begins with Morpheus as a captive, reduced to being a “naked man” in a glass cage. He comes to acknowledge his friendship for the human Hob Gadling; he feels guilt and responsibility over the fate of his human son Orpheus. Ultimately Morpheus forfeits an aspect of his godhood by surrendering to death (or his sister Death, if you prefer). His successor, the new Dream, is somehow simultaneously Lyta’s human son Daniel and Morpheus himself reborn.

    This is not to say that either Morpheus or the new Dream are superheroes. But notice that whereas a superhero typically has a double identity, one heroic and one that of a low mimetic “ordinary” human, the new Dream has a dual nature, making him simultaneously god and man. In the course of Sandman Morpheus discovers a “high mimetic” side to his nature, complete with a tragic flaw, enabling him to make himself vulnerable to death, sacrificing his life and becoming a tragic hero in the end.

    Jack Bauer of television’s 24 presents an interesting case. On the surface he is a low mimetic hero, “one of us,” an operative of a United States government agency. Audience members who prefer realism to explicit fantasy would therefore be more likely to accept Bauer; thus Bauer also fits into the democratic ideal of American society, wherein everyone is equal.

    In practice, however, Bauer is a high mimetic figure, “superior in degree to other men but not to his natural environment.” Bauer is unquestionably CTU’s top operative, who usually takes a leadership position in field operations. Bauer has saved America for five seasons going on six, and, though the show never actually says so out loud, it consistently presents Bauer as the only one who can defeat each season’s terrorist conspiracy. (Like Buffy or Anakin Skywalker or Neo in The Matrix, Bauer is, in effect, the Chosen One.) Since Bauer is not superior “to his natural environment,” he can be severely injured (as we have seen time and again on the show) or even killed. According to Frye, the hero of tragedy, such as Hamlet, is a high mimetic figure. This helps explain why each season of 24 usually ends tragically for Bauer: for example, his wife is killed, or he is forced into hiding, or he is captured and tortured by enemies.

    Ultimately, though, I think that Bauer is a romance hero, “superior in degree to other men and to his environment,” who “moves in a world in which the ordinary laws of nature are slightly suspended.” Not only does he repeatedly outfight and outshoot his opponents, but he recovers from even severe injuries at unusual speed. In one season Bauer was tortured so badly that his heart actually stopped: he literally died and returned to life. Heck, the “suspension” of the “ordinary laws of nature” even explains how Bauer can drive back in forth in Los Angeles so quickly, as if its notorious traffic didn’t exist!

    At present 24 and Heroes are on at the same time on Monday nights. One reason that I watch 24 rather than Heroes is that 24 feels to me much more like a heroic “romance” than Heroes, the supposed superhero series.

    Until and unless I find a better term, I am going to call the heroes of romance (as Frye defines it) “megaheroes.” This category encompasses all the characters that Coogan calls “super heroes” (two words) as well as true “superheroes” (one word). Superheroes therefore form a subset within the larger category of megaheroes.

    Having defined superheroes in his book, Coogan goes on to define supervillains. Here he takes what strikes me as a very different approach. In defining the superhero, Coogan went taken the approach that Superman is the first true superhero, who inaugurated the superhero genre. Therefore, Coogan sought to discover what distinguished Superman from his many megaheroic predecessors (drawing upon Judge Learned Hand’s perceptive court decision). In contrast, Coogan’s definition of the supervillain embraces characters from various different genres.

    In Coogan’s view the supervillain long predates the first superhero (Superman) and the superhero genre. Indeed, Coogan counts the monsters Khumbaba and the Bull of Heaven, both slain by the title character of the Babylonian Epic of Gilgamesh, as supervillains, thereby making the super-villain concept at least over three thousand years old! Another of Coogan’s supervillains is the monster Grendel from the Old English poem Beowulf (circa 700-1000 A. D.). (When the Beowulf movie co-written by Neil Gaiman comes out this fall, I will surely have much more to say about this early romance.) Coogan also identifies as a supervillain Sherlock Holmes’s archenemy Professor Moriarty, who was introduced in Arthur Conan Doyle’s “The Final Problem” (1893). (Oddly, Coogan states that Moriarty only appears in “The Final Problem” and “is mentioned again only in the novel The Valley of Fear“ [p. 71]. Rather, besides “The Final Problem,” Moriarty plays an active role, albeit behind the scenes, in The Valley of Fear, and is mentioned in five other Sherlock Holmes stories by Doyle, most notably “The Adventure of the Empty House” [1903], which describes how Holmes survived his battle with Moriarty at the Reichenbach Falls.)

    In his introduction to Superhero, Coogan explains that its chapter on “The Supervillain” grew out of his contribution to The Supervillain Book, which was published last year by Visible Ink Press; I was another of The Supervillain Book‘s contributing writers. The Supervillain Book likewise took the approach that supervillans are not restricted to the superhero genre, and included not just Professor Moriarty but James Bond villains like Blofeld and Goldfinger. When I was working on the book, I agreed with this idea.

    However, now that I’ve read Coogan’s Superhero, I’m not so sure. I suspect that just as true superheroes represent a subset of the category metaheroes, there are true supervillains who are part of the overall category of what I’ll call megavillains. Next week I’ll explain the distinction.

    ADVERTISEMENTS FOR MYSELF
    Now on sale from Image Comics is the second issue of The Official Handbook of the Invincible Universe, to which I was a contributing writer. Just seeing the cover, which is a homage to the covers to Mark Gruenwald’s original version of The Official Handbook of the Marvel Universe, made me smile.

    Copyright 2007 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #163: Are They On The List?

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    cic2007-02-02.jpgLast week I began my commentary on Peter Coogan’s book Superhero: The Secret Origin of a Genre (MonkeyBrain Press, 2006), in which he attempts to define both the superhero as a literary character and the superhero genre. He identifies three basic elements of the superhero, which he abbreviates as MPI: the mission, which benefits society and will typically last the length of the hero’s career; the powers; and the heroic identity, which is signified by a codename and costume, and which is usually accompanied by an alternate, secret identity.

    Coogan makes one important point almost in passing. Wondering what made the cover of Action Comics #1 (1938), featuring Superman lifting a car, so different from past pulp and comics covers, which featured “outlandish action,” he theorizes that “Most likely, it was Superman’s costume in conjunction with the display of superpowers in a contemporary setting. This setting did not distance the action as a more exotic setting, such as an African jungle or an alien world, would have done” (Superhero p. 36). Coogan’s emphasis here is on the costume as “marker” of the superhero genre. But the setting is important, too. A cover featuring a man without a superhero costume who was lifting a large object on an alien planet would indicate a science fiction adventure story, not a superhero tale.

    Over at his blog recently, former Marvel and DC writer Peter B. Gillis wondered about the Marvel and DC Universes: “How is it possible, I’d say, that in a world with antigravity, FTL travel, time travel, conscious computers, an alien contact every 2 1/2 weeks, and teleportation, that people still run around in gasoline powered cars with rubber tires?” Indeed, instead of using his anti-gravity discs for crime, why doesn’t the Wizard, one of the Fantastic Four’s enemies, mass produce them for sale to the general public? He’d become as rich as Bill Gates, and honestly. The Wizard would have also transformed the lives of ordinary people on Marvel-Earth possibly even more than the personal computer transformed our lives in the real world.

    Gillis propounds what he calls “the Fundamental Theorem of Superheroes: that A superhero strip is a story in which, whatever the science fiction or fantasy elements are in the main premise, the background is always everyday reality.” He then explains that if you “change the background too much, and the strip becomes science fiction or fantasy. Not that there’s anything wrong with that, but it stops being a superhero strip.” Moreover, superheroes “embody our myths and our self-images, or they fail. And therefore, for maximum effect, they should be us. And it gets harder to be us if you have a vastly different backdrop.” Gillis concludes that “you can play with the tensions all you want (and to good effect), but there’s no solving it. The superhero strip is basically like opera: there’s a contradiction built in to the form itself.”

    Last week I referred to opera as an artform in which one must accept the non-naturalistic convention that people sing rather than speak. The superhero genre is similarly founded on nonrealistic conventions, including the idea that superheroes and supervillains possess technology that is unavailable to the common man.

    For example, in Alan Moore’s recent series Albion, in which he resurrects characters from comics published by Britain’s IPC Media, the British government has locked up the various heroes and villains, as well as their advanced technology. It is explained that the government considered the technology too valuable to destroy, but too potentially dangerous to make publicly available. So here is Moore abiding by Gillis’s rule without even knowing about it, to ensure that the background of Albion remains an “everyday reality” like our own.

    So here’s another defining rule of the superhero genre, and I’d take it even further: a superhero story is typically set in an urban environment on Earth in the 20th or 21st century. Time travel stories and “Elseworlds” sagas that place superheroes in past centuries are by their very nature exceptions to the rule; they are not the normal settings for ongoing superhero series.

    One reason that Zorro is not a true superhero is that his stories are set in early 19th century California, and hence are historical romances. Zorro’s time is therefore not our own “everyday reality.” Zorro fits specifically into the tradition of the swashbuckler, a type of adventure hero associated with period settings, like Robin Hood and Captain Blood. There are even elements of Zorro stories which overlap with the Western (the California setting and pursuits by horseback, for example).

    Neil Gaiman’s 1602 (see “Comics in Context” #13, 18, 21, 25, 28, 33, 35, 36) transplants familiar Marvel superheroes and supervillains into the early 17th century, and persuasively shows how they could fit into the culture of that period. This is indeed a superhero series, but 1602‘s premise is that 17th century superheroes are anachronisms: the superheroes don’t belong there, and time must be set aright. 1602 thus acknowledges that it is an exception to a rule that is otherwise strict.

    The first two volumes of Alan Moore’s League of Extraordinary Gentlemen (see “Comics in Context” #22, 23) are set mainly in late Victorian London, another urban environment which serves as an effective counterpart to the New York (and such fictionalized analogues as Gotham City) in the modern superhero genre. The League has an overall mission (though some members–Mr. Hyde and Griffin, the Invisible Man–don’t have altruistic motives), some (Hyde and Griffin) have actual super-powers (while Captain Nemo has super-advanced technology), and some (Hyde and Griffin, and even Nemo) have codenames and dual identities. None of them wear unusual costumes, although Griffin’s bandages and Hyde’s bestial appearance are sufficiently iconic to count as substitutes. Significantly, Allan Quatermain and Mina Murray, the two core members, who will star in future installments, have neither codenames nor costumes nor superpowers (though they will acquire immortality). Moore intentionally portrays that the Victorian League as a precursor of modern superhero teams. But the League members are not true superheroes, though they are “extraordinary gentlemen” (and an extraordinary lady).

    The prime example of a superhero series set in a future time is DC’s Legion of Super-Heroes. Coogan points out that Legion is actually a “cross-genre” series that “blends the superhero and science fiction genres. It is set in the thirtieth century and features futuristic technology, space travel, alien races, other worlds, and a variety of other SF elements. . . . But it is clearly a superhero book” inasmuch as “The characters all have superpowers, wear costumes, have codenames, and the group’s founders sought to emulate. . .Superboy and Supergirl” (p. 52). Coogan might have added that the Legionnaires have an ongoing altruistic mission, and that many of their primary adversaries (such as the Fatal Five and Time Trapper) clearly qualify as supervillains.

    These various examples of series demonstrate that determining whether or not a certain character is a superhero may be a complex task. Coogan observes that “specific superheroes can exist who do not fully demonstrate these three elements [mission, powers, and identity], and heroes from other genres may exist who display all three elements to some degree but should not be regarded as superheroes” (pp. 39-40). It may be necessary to examine the context in which the character under examination exists. Coogan states that “If a character basically fits the mission-powers-identity definition, even with significant qualifications, and cannot easily be placed into another genre because of the preponderance of superhero-genre conventions, the character is a superhero” (p. 40). On the other hand, he asserts, “if a character largely fits the MPI qualifications of the definition, but can firmly and sensibly be placed within another genre, then the character is not a superhero. Typically, the identity convention (codename and costume) plays the greatest role of the three elements in helping to rule characters in or out” of the superhero genre (pp. 43-44).

    Hence, the “preponderance of superhero genre conventions” makes the Legion a superhero series perhaps more than a science fiction series. But the weakness of the “identity” element in League means its first two volumes are a pastiche of Victorian science fiction, but not a true superhero series.

    Since this column is titled “Comics in Context,” it should be no surprise that I quite like the idea of examining the context of a character in the story to determine whether or not he or she is a superhero. As I stated last week, this was the most eye-opening insight I got from Coogan’s book.

    For example, Coogan asserts that the Hulk is a superhero without a mission. In the traditional portrayal of the Hulk, he has not dedicated himself to fighting criminals and protecting the innocent: he merely seeks solitude and survival. What happens is that supervillains attack the Hulk, or he inadvertently stumbles across them, so he ends up battling them. Of course, the Hulk qualifies under the Identity and Powers categories. Moreover, Coogan points out, Hulk stories “are suffused with the conventions of the superhero genre: supervillains. . .superhero physics–the transformative power of gamma rays;” a sidekick “—Rick Jones, superteams-the Avengers and the Defenders,” and more (p. 41).

    But this poses the interesting dilemma of whether or not The Incredible Hulk live action television series of the 1970s was a true superhero show. There were no supervillains or superteams or sidekicks. Apart from the presence of the Hulk, the series seemed to be set in a thoroughly realistic world. What if we did not know that the Hulk was a lead character in Marvel’s line of superhero comics? Isn’t it possible that viewers of the show who did not read Marvel comics might have considered The Incredible Hulk to be a science fiction series, or even a horror series, since the Hulk is so obviously a variation on Dr. Jekyll and Mr. Hyde? Arguably, it was not until the later Hulk TV movies that guest starred Daredevil and Thor that the live action TV Hulk more clearly became a superhero series.

    Batman has no actual super-powers, but Coogan observes, he has the Mission and Identity, and “operates in a world brimming with the conventions of the superhero genre,” including supervillains, sidekicks, superteams, and the helpful authority figure, Commissioner Gordon. Here is where my own theory about non-superpowered superheroes comes into play. As I explained last time, Batman has adopted a persona and modus operandi that figuratively cast him as a superhuman being: he is metaphorically a bat in human form.

    In the case of the Fantastic Four, they have mission and powers, but Coogan contends that “elements of the identity convention [are] absent or weak” (p. 41): although they have codenames, they do not have secret identities. Coogan concludes that “The secret identity is a typical, but not necessary, convention for the genre” (p. 42). I would say that in the FF’s case, what is important is that the characters have real names and code names that signify the two sides of their lives: they are superheroes as well as people who are members of a family and have to contend with everyday problems. This duality is what is more important than actual secret identities, although a secret identity is often a practical measure necessary to ensure that the superhero can lead an everyday life as “one of us.”

    Coogan then provides an extended case study of Marvel’s Luke Cage, alias Power Man, who on first glance seems to be a 1970s-style blaxploitation hero with super-powers. Coogan notes that a superstrong character like Cage “could operate a detective/security agency within a science fiction or horror/SF milieu and not be considered a superhero” (p. 44). But Coogan then demonstrates in detail just why Cage is a true superhero.

    Cage has super-powers, and he acquires a code name, “Power Man,” which, as Coogan points out, not only denotes his superpowers, but includes the “racial subtext” of “black power” (p. 47). Oddly, Coogan overlooks the fact that Cage does not have a purely altruistic mission as most superheroes do: as the original title of his series stated, he is a “hero for hire,” a mercenary. Still, by this point, Cage has demonstrated he will not accept unethical assignments, and that he will risk his life to combat evil even when he isn’t being paid to do so.

    In Cage’s case Coogan makes an important point perhaps without fully realizing its significance. He observes that “The editors and writers at Marvel Comics took great care to place Luke Cage within the superhero genre by surrounding the character with superhero conventions and foregrounding these conventions” (p. 44). In the first story, a man who witnesses Cage stopping a criminal tells him that he “nailed him like a real super-hero!” Cage then goes to a costume shop where he acquires his familiar outfit. Although it does not look like a conventional superhero costume, Cage thinks of it that way, commenting, “It’s all part of the super-hero scene.” In a later issue Cage even adopts his codename “Power Man” explicitly in order to be taken as seriously as the more traditional superheroes.

    All of this suggests to me that another factor in determining whether or not a character is a superhero could be called “declaration of intent.” What Coogan has demonstrated here is that not only the editors and writers of the Luke Cage series, but also Luke Cage the character explicitly stated their intent that Cage would be a superhero.

    Reading Coogan’s book, I realized that there are other characters who do not strictly fit his three main criteria for superherodom, but who are unquestionably superheroes. Take Rogue of the X-Men. She has super-powers, and upon joining the X-Men, she accepted their mission (protecting “normal” humans from evil mutants, etc.) as her own. But her “identity” also seems weak. Not until her 2004 limited series, decades after her debut, was Rogue’s real name, Anna Marie, established, and her last name is still a mystery. According to Dictionary.com, her codename “Rogue” can mean “a dishonest, knavish person,” “a playfully mischievous person,” or “a tramp or vagabond.” The first and third definitions fit Rogue at earlier stages of her life, and the second only describes one aspect of her personality. So her codename doesn’t tell you much about her present personality and nothing about her powers.

    Her colorful skintight costumes suggest she is in the superhero business, but do not indicate her powers or mission or persona. Often she does not even wear an “X” insignia to denote her membership in the X-Men. (And what kind of insignia could possibly indicate her absorption powers?: A sponge?) She has changed costumes so often that one cannot identify specific colors with her costume as one can with Superman. Rogue’s iconic visual trademark is instead the white streak through her brown hair, but that indicates nothing that makes her a superhero.

    Not only does Rogue effectively lack a full “real name,” but she does not truly have a life apart from her role as a member of the X-Men. The personas of the victims of her absorption powers provided Rogue with a kind of alternate identities. Still, Rogue lacks the true sort of dual identity that conventionally characterizes the superhero.

    Obviously Rogue, as a super-powered member of the X-Men, is a superhero. But perhaps these inadequacies in “identity” are part of the reason that Rogue remains a supporting character in X-Men, and not a star. Rogue can star in occasional limited series, but not in her own ongoing series as Wolverine does. She is simply not as iconic a character as he is.

    In his book Coogan examines a number of characters, such as Adam Strange, the Punisher, and Shang-Chi, to determine whether or not they fall within the definition of superheroes. Inspired by his example, I decided to apply his approach to some other characters, in and out of comic books.

    What about DC Comics’ Zatanna? She has a costume, but it’s not a superhero costume. Her top hat, tails, and net stockings comprise a leggy feminine counterpart to the traditional stage magician’s costume. But like a superhero costume, Zatanna’s outfit denotes her biography, powers, and personality: she’s the daughter of a magician, wields magic herself, she’s a performer, and she’s sexy. Over the years there have been attempts to give her a superhero costume, but they’ve failed, in part because they did not convey her identity as well as her magician’s outfit does.

    Zatanna’s got powers, but she doesn’t have a codename or dual identity: Zatanna is her actual first name. As for mission, she is altruistic enough to fight alongside the Justice League, but she seems to spend most of her time as a stage performer; she doesn’t patrol cities looking for criminals as Batman and Spider-Man do. So just what makes her a superhero?

    I’d say it’s context. Coogan makes the intriguing point that Shang-Chi, the the protagonist of Marvel’s Master of Kung Fu, is “a martial arts hero operating in an older pulp-style universe as the son and enemy of Dr. Fu Manchu” (p. 55). I would add that Master of Kung Fu writer Doug Moench and artist Paul Gulacy updated that “pulp-style universe” into a world resembling that of the James Bond novels. However, Coogan asserts, when Shang-Chi operates as part of the Marvel Knights superhero team, he becomes a superhero. I’m not sure that membership in a superhero team is necessarily sufficient to make Shang-Chi a superhero; he still lacks actual super-powers, a codename, or a superhero-style costume. (Shang-Chi’s outfit is supposed to be traditional Chinese clothing.) But certainly being a member of Marvel Knights puts him in the superhero genre in those stories.

    Similarly, though the Punisher wears a costume, complete with chevron, and has a codename, Coogan believes that in his own stories he fits more into the subgenre of vengeful vigilantes that was founded by Don Pendleton’s The Executioner. And it’s true that even though the Punisher usually wears a costume, he has no super-powers and his solo stories usually are comparatively realistic crime stories, minus the exaggerations of the superhero genre. But when the Punisher appears in a superhero series like Daredevil or Spider-Man, Coogan contends that he too becomes a superhero (or, I’d say, a superantihero, or maybe a supervillain). Here I agree. When the Punisher interacts with superheroes, his own costume takes on more importance than it does in his solo stories, since it now marks him as one of the same kind as the likes of Spider-Man. Borrowing a metaphor from his colleague Randy Duncan, Coogan compares Shang-Chi and the Punisher to planetoids that can “get pulled by the gravity of writers and publishers into the superhero genre and out of their own genre systems” (p. 55).

    Coogan’s law of gravity applies well to Zatanna. First, Zatanna is the daughter of Zatara, a crimefighting magician from comics’ Golden Age, and who is not a true superhero but a knockoff of the comic strip character Mandrake the Magician. She was created to be Zatara’s younger, female counterpart, so she wasn’t truly conceived as being a superhero. Editor Julius Schwartz and writer Gardner Fox introduced Zatanna as a featured character in various superhero series: Hawkman, The Atom, Green Lantern, Elongated Man, and finally Justice League. She even became a member of the Justice League. So, following Coogan’s rule, Zatanna is a superhero because of the company she keeps. But significantly, Zatanna also functions well in DC’s Vertigo line of titles, not only because her powers are supernatural, but also because her costume is a variation on conventional formal wear, and does not necessarily mark her as a superhero. Hence, Zatanna is a superhero when she’s in a superhero story, but isn’t when she’s in a Vertigo book.

    How about the Spirit? His creator, Will Eisner, repeatedly contended that the Spirit was not a superhero. Interviewed in The Jack Kirby Collector #16 (1997), Eisner asserted that “They wanted an heroic character, a costumed character. They asked me if he’d have a costume. And I put a mask on him and said, “˜Yes, he has a costume!’ “ (Superman had debuted only two years before, in 1938, and was an enormous success.) So here is Eisner’s “declaration of intent” NOT to make the Spirit a superhero! But the author’s intent is not necessarily the decisive factor, as far as I’m concerned.

    Just giving the Spirit a mask doesn’t necessarily make him a superhero, either; he could be a masked avenger from the pulps, like the Shadow, or radio drama, like the Green Hornet, or even the comics, like the Golden Age Sandman in his original hat, suit and gas mask.

    How does Eisner’s Spirit fit Coogan’s three principal criteria? He has mission: the Spirit combats criminals purely for altruistic reasons. He’s not a member of the police force, and he makes no money off crimefighting. (Actually, I’m rather puzzled as to how he supports himself.)

    The Spirit also has a secret identity: his real name is Denny Colt. His codename, the Spirit, signifies his origin: seemingly killed by Dr. Cobra’s formula, Colt actually fell into suspended animation and then “returned” to life. One could say that the mysterious “Spirit” is haunting the criminals he pursues. The name “Spirit” might also suggest the character’s commitment to his ideals; he is not in crimefighting for material gain. (It occurs to me that the name “the Spirit” might even have been a knockoff of the name of the Saint, Leslie Charteris’s amateur sleuth who had been appearing in novels since 1928 and films since 1938, again only two years before the Spirit’s debut.)

    The Spirit’s costume does not signify his biography, powers, or mission. It’s not a typical superhero costume, anyway: it’s a conventional hat and suit, along with a mask and gloves, all blue, except for his tie, which is usually red.

    Ah, but here we can apply Coogan’s observation that a superhero’s costume typically has iconic colors, so that, for example, the combination of red, blue and yellow signify Superman. Isn’t the Spirit’s blue outfit similarly iconic?

    The Spirit, of course, lacks super-powers. Moreover, whereas, say, Batman is clearly superior in athletic ability and combat skills to most ordinary people. In contrast, Eisner repeatedly showed the Spirit getting beaten up, as if he were not that much better at fighting than his adversaries.

    Nevertheless, the Spirit’s origin story casts him as figuratively superhuman: as noted, he seemingly rises from the dead. Moreover, he continues the ghost motif by making his home underground in Wildwood Cemetery, as if he were an avenging spirit from the hereafter.

    Sometimes Eisner even depicts the Spirit as if he somehow has superhuman qualities. In reviewing Eisner’s story “Ten Minutes” about a hapless criminal named Freddy (in “Comics in Context” #68) I wrote, “But then Freddy sees the Spirit approaching in a mirror; the Spirit even calls Freddy by name. How does he know?” How did the Spirit know his name, or where to find him? I concluded, “This is the Spirit as the spirit of nemesis, all-knowing, unrelenting, inescapable.”

    Darwyn Cooke’s recent Batman/Spirit comic book surprised me by revealing so many similarities between the two heroes and their series: both have supervillains, secret underground lairs, fatherly authority figures in the police department, urban settings. In other words, Cooke emphasizes that the Spirit’s world has the same “preponderance of superhero-genre conventions” as Batman’s. Indeed (and here I issue a spoiler alert for the remainder of the paragraph), when the Spirit and Batman exchange masked identities towards the story’s end, Cooke makes his thesis plain.

    Moreover, the fact that the Spirit does not seem out of place interacting with Batman and his supporting cast of friends and foes may be an example of the “gravitational force” of the superhero genre. Even if the Spirit is not a superhero in Eisner’s stories, perhaps he becomes one when he interacts with Batman.

    If Eisner had lived long enough to see Cooke’s Batman/Spirit crossover, it would have been interesting to see how he would have reacted to it. Eisner did not always adamantly deny that the Spirit was a superhero. In the introduction to The Spirit Casebook, Eisner wrote that “The Spirit was for real; he was human, made of flesh and blood and therefore killable,” and yet also asserted that “He was simply a guy who had a perfectly acceptable trade–that of chasing and catching crooks. He was good at it. He got into the superhero business by accident; stumbled into it, you might say.” Just as Eisner perhaps stumbled into realizing that the Spirit is indeed a superhero.

    How about the successful new NBC series Heroes, whose title characters all possess superhuman powers? As far as Declaration of Intent goes, the show’s creator, Tim Kring, believes that Heroes is in the superhero genre. But, he told The New York Times (October 30, 2006), he had little knowledge of superhero comics, the prime source of superhero stories. “‘I was not a comic book nerd,’ Mr. Kring said, sipping an iced tea with lemonade in a restaurant near the studio lot here where Heroes is shot. ‘But the truth is that nowadays that world is so pervasive, especially when you have kids, that you go to movies in the summertime and that’s what you see. I didn’t really feel like I had to come from that world.’” (And just why do some people gratuitously insult part of their core audience?)

    So Kring taught himself about the superhero genre from film adaptations of comics series, rather than the primary sources themselves. Then it’s not surprising that his understanding of the genre is somewhat flawed. (Nonetheless, I’m amused to discover that the show’s official fan website, 9th Wonders, is done in the style of Stan Lee’s Marvel Bullpen Bulletins pages from the 1960s.)

    According to the Times article, Kring believed that “the idea of heroes” was “missing” from today’s world, and “That’s where the notion of superheroes came in, though he had no interest in anybody “˜donning a costume.’ Instead, he said, he wanted to make ordinary people suddenly extraordinary. “ Well, of course, Peter Parker was an “ordinary” person who became “suddenly extraordinary” when he gained the powers of Spider-Man, so in this respect Heroes isn’t different from traditional superhero sagas.

    How does Heroes fit Coogan’s three main criteria? Powers, yes. But identity, no. Although the super-powered characters keep their powers secret from the general public, they do not have secret identities, codenames, or costumes. More importantly, they don’t have heroic identities distinct from their everyday selves. Coogan mentions “the exaggeration inherent in the superhero genre” (p. 31). Part of that exaggeration lies in the concept that the adoption of alternate, heroic identities is a reasonable choice in the world of the superhero genre. In the world of Heroes, it seems, it isn’t.

    And what about mission? In Heroes some of the title characters are famously out to “Save the cheerleader, save the world,” presumably meaning saving New York City from being blown up, as has been prophesied. But these are only immediate goals. Another example of the larger than life exaggeration in the superhero genre is that the heroes are dedicated to career-long tasks of protecting other people and combatting injustice, at great risk to themselves and without recompense; there aren’t many people in the real world who are this selfless. As far as I know from the episodes I’ve seen, the title characters in Heroes don’t have that sort of ongoing mission as yet.

    To my mind, Heroes isn’t truly in the superhero genre; it’s actually a science fiction series. As far as superheroes are concerned, Heroes does not make the list.

    Next week I will turn to a particularly controversial question about who’s a superhero and who’s not: what about Buffy? And, for that matter, who’s a supervillain and who’s not?

    ADVERTISEMENTS FOR MYSELF
    Believe it or not, I have yet another book out. This is the Marvel Vault, from Becker and Mayer, and is a project similar to the Marvel Classic Super Heroes book I previously wrote for the company. Marvel Vault contains a history of Marvel Comics, written by Roy Thomas (who covered up to 1974) and myself (who did the rest), as well as reproductions of rare collectibles from the Golden Age onward. And the book is already in its second printing!

    -Copyright 2007 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #162: The Superhero Defined

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    cic2007-01-29.jpgOn January 10, 2007 The New York Sun ran an article titled “Bonding with a Superhero,” which turned out to be a review of Simon Binder’s book The Man Who Saved Britain, a study of James Bond. Is James Bond a superhero? The Sun copy editor who wrote that headline isn’t the only one who thinks so. The introduction to The Rough Guide to James Bond calls Bond “a superhero without superpowers,” a description that would place him in the same category as Batman and Captain America.

    Well, you might think, the people who labeled Bond a superhero haven’t thought seriously about what the word means. Nor has New York Post writer Brian Niemietz, who recently began a fashion article (Jan. 25, 2007) thus: “Joe Namath. Bruce Lee. Superman. Cher. All superheroes. All men in tights.” (Cher?)

    But then there’s the case of scholar John Shelton Lawrence, who, with Robert Jewett, wrote the book The Myth of the American Superhero (2002). In an interview for his publisher, Lawrence states that “Many of the great American superstars and superhero characters have built their franchises on roles that, like Spider-Man’s, show them circumventing laws and the leaders so that they can be saviors. Our book discusses Clint Eastwood, Mel Gibson, Sylvester Stallone, Charles Bronson, John Wayne, and many others.” (What, no Arnold Schwarzenegger?) Superman is on the cover of the book, but so is Eastwood in his Western guise as the Man with No Name. Lawrence even goes on to say, “We also discuss the more overtly religious program Touched by [an] Angel, which highlights psychological manipulation rather than violence. We don’t find Touched healthy either, because it is just one more way of dramatizing failed institutions and calling for intervention by disguised superheroes who will leave after they exercise their special powers.” If Lawrence has extended the definition of “superhero” to include not only Rambo and Western heroes, but the angels in the television series Touched by an Angel, then the term has become so broad as to lose any practical meaning. Is Harry Potter a superhero? Or Luke Skywalker? Or Aragorn? Or Jack Bauer? Or Dirty Harry? Or Yojimbo? Or Austin Powers?

    That’s one reason that Peter Coogan’s book Superhero: The Secret Origin of a Genre (MonkeyBrain Press, 2006) is a welcome and necessary addition to comics scholarship. Coogan’s name should be familiar to regular readers of this column, since he is one of the organizers of the Comic Arts Conference, an academic conference about comics that is held each year at the San Diego Comic Con. For many years he worked on his dissertation, which he revised and expanded into this Superhero book, whose principal purpose is to define the superhero genre.

    As Coogan writes, “The term superhero is often applied to all sorts of characters and people from Beowulf and Luke Skywalker to Tiger Woods and Michael Jordan. These applications come out of a metaphoric use of the term to describe characters and people who seem a step above others in their class, whether epic, science fiction, or sports.” Coogan notes that people metaphorically refer to George W. Bush as a “cowboy,” referencing the Western genre, but that “many people do not understand that referring to Tiger Woods as a superhero is similarly metaphoric. The difference [is that] the Western is well defined scholarly and popularly, but the superhero genre is not” (Coogan, Superhero, p. 259).

    This problem requires further explanation. Jordan and Woods are metaphorically superheroes because their athletic prowess is so far beyond that of ordinary people, or even of the majority of professional athletes in their field. But Woods and Jordan are not superhumans: they are actual people in the real world who cannot transcend the natural capabilities of a human being.

    Larger than life heroes of adventure fiction, whether it is Beowulf or a classic Western hero played by John Wayne, may not be explicitly portrayed as superhuman, but they nonetheless perform feats that real people would be unlikely to duplicate. For example, in the new season of 24, Jack Bauer arrives shortly after 6 AM from being tortured for twenty months in a Chinese prison; within the hour, terrorist mastermind Abu Fayed is jamming a knife into one of Jack’s nerve centers. But towards the end of the hour Jack kills his guard by biting his neck (Hey, was this an in-joke reference to Kiefer Sutherland’s role as a vampire in The Lost Boys?), and by the next hour Jack is back to racing around Los Angeles, battling terrorists, seemingly back at his physical and mental peak!

    In the case of Luke Skywalker, he literally, explicitly has super-powers, thanks to the Force. And so do the angels in Touched by an Angel, although their powers are supernatural in origin.

    So just how do we differentiate the characters whom we normally think of as superheroes, like Superman and Batman and Spider-Man, from these pretenders to the title? That is Coogan’s self-imposed mission: to provide “a look at that scholarly lacuna, an examination of the superhero genre as a genre” (Foreword p. iv) in order to “provide a basis for the study of superheroes and help to make more studies possible in the future” (p. 60).

    This is another reason that I find Coogan’s Superhero so welcome is that the current enthusiasm in mainstream cultural circles for comics tends to focus on alternative comics; in the main, with exceptions such as Watchmen, superhero comics, which make up the majority of American comic books over the last forty years, still aren’t taken seriously. So it is a joy for me to see Coogan devote this entire book to an academic (but highly accessible) study of the superhero genre: he simply accepts the idea that this body of work is worthy of serious study, without apologies or condescension. Although I disagree with it in certain areas, I believe that Coogan’s Superhero succeeds in being the essential basic text for studies of this genre. In clearly defining the genre, he better enables us to comprehend it.

    In the past I’ve wondered myself how exactly to define a superhero. The most obvious idea–that a superhero has superhuman powers–doesn’t work, inasmuch as the second best known comics superhero, Batman, has none. My solution was that a superhero is a protagonist who is either literally or figuratively superhuman: he or she either has super-powers or takes on the figurative aspect of the superhuman. For example, the Batman costumes himself as a bat: he is figuratively a bat in human form, and hence, figuratively, a being greater than an ordinary human being. Thus Batman is like a tribal shaman who dons a mask and costume resembling the appearance of an animal in order to figuratively take on that animal’s abilities. Similarly, Captain America has no super-powers (with a few minor exceptions: the “super-soldier serum” he took enabled him to survive for decades in suspended animation). But his costume and shield evoke the colors, stars, and stripes of the American flag. Figuratively, Captain America is the American flag in human form. Indeed, Captain America sees his mission as upholding and preserving what he considers American values. (Of course, there are also superheroes who are normal humans who wield artificial super-powers. Tony Stark dons the armor of Iron Man, whoch endows him with superpowers. Green Lantern has no physical super-powers, but commands the powers of his ring through metal concentration.)

    In classical mythology, figures like Hercules were demigods: sons an daughters of humans and gods, they were literally half-divine and half-human.
    Similarly, superheroes are combinations of the (literally or figuratively) superhuman and the (literally or figuratively) human.

    Spider-Man is Peter Parker, an otherwise ordinary human being who acquired superhuman powers. His is a typical case.

    But not all superheroes are literally human beings. Even the first, archetypal superhero, Superman, is an extraterrestrial, albeit one who looks exactly like an Earth human. Other superheroes include aliens who don’t look entirely human (the Silver Surfer, the Martian Manhunter), androids (the original Human Torch, the Vision), gods (Thor, Orion), and even animals (Mighty Mouse).

    Nonetheless, all of these non-human superheroes possess qualities that we associate with humanity. In most cases they look humanoid, if not exactly human: even Mighty Mouse is built more like a tiny human being than an actual mouse. Superman chooses to live among humanity as Clark Kent, an outwardly ordinary human being; the Martian Manhunter even uses his shapechanging powers to devise his own human persona, J’onn J’onzz. (In DC’s post-Crisis continuity, the Manhunter’s true form isn’t even humanoid, but, significantly, he shapeshifts into a green humanoid to serve as a superhero.) In Stan Lee and Jack Kirby’s stories, Thor literally became the human Don Blake in order to live among mortals. The original Human Torch and Orion may be an android and a “god,” respectively, but they look and act like humans with superpowers. When Jack Kirby introduced the Silver Surfer in Fantastic Four #48-50 (1966), the Surfer was an alien who discovered the value of humanity, and, arguably, began developing human emotions and sensitivity himself; significantly, Stan Lee subsequently retconned the Surfer into a very human-like alien who had been transformed into Kirby’s superpowered creation. Mighty Mouse has human intelligence and can talk (and sing); in Silver Age comics Krypto the Superdog had a human-level intellect, and on his animated TV series, he too can talk, even if humans can’t understand him. (Since in the Silver Age comics Krypto expressed himself through thought balloons, I thought of him as being like a superpowered Snoopy.)

    My own definition meant that I could even include Neil Gaiman’s Morpheus as a superhero. He is a superhuman protagonist of his series, he appears in human-like form, and one could regard Gaiman’s Sandman series as tracing Morpheus’s discovery of his own “humanity,” in the sense of his ability to empathize with others. At the beginning of the series the superhuman being Morpheus has been reduced to what his captor figuratively calls “a naked man in a cage.” At the series’ end Morpheus sacrifices his own life, and his successor as Dream is, significantly, a being who is simultaneously the former human Daniel Hall and Morpheus himself reborn, god and man as one. (I know that in his series Gaiman differentiates his Endless, like Dream, from “gods.” But if we specify only two categories, gods and humans, the endless fit into the former.)

    My definition decisively excludes the likes of Bond and Bauer and any hero played by John Wayne. However extraordinary James Bond’s talents may be, he is not presented as either literally or figuratively superhuman: he is a man with an ordinary name who is a salaried employee of the British government. Bond may have a codename, but he can’t dress up as a “007” the way that Bruce Wayne can costume himself as a bat in human form.

    My definition also enables me to differentiate between characters like Captain America and Nick Fury. Look at Silver Age Marvel stories by Lee, Kirby, and Jim Steranko, and you will find that Fury is capable of feats of combat that are just as spectacular as Cap’s. But Cap is a superhero, and Fury is not. Why? It’s a matter of self-presentation. As previously stated, Captain America is presented as the costumed personification of the American flag. But in Nick Fury, Agent of SHIELD, Lee, Kirby, and Steranko presented Fury as being as far from the conventional image of a glamorous Bondian superspy or a costumed superhero as possible. Lee and Kirby put him in ordinary business suits, not Bondian tuxedos; Steranko put Fury into skin-tight jumpsuits, but they still weren’t anything like superhero costumes. The point of the SHIELD series, which subsequent writers and artists appear to have forgotten, is that Fury is the proverbial fish out of water. Fury remains the unshaven, cigar-chomping, vulgar and unrefined, foul-mouthed (within Comics Code limitations), ill-mannered Army sergeant from Hell’s Kitchen, who has been thrust into a world of science fictional technology, costumed terrorists, and global conspiracies. Yet through his street smarts and the fisticuffs he learned growing up in the slums, Fury not only masters SHIELD but bests the likes of the Imperial Hydra. Fury is not a superman; he is the common man who triumphs over bureaucrats, elitists, and would-be dictators.

    While it was tempting to include Morpheus in the category of superheroes, I was uneasy about it, since if he is a superhero, he is of a very different sort than the costumed crimefighters we usually associate with the term. Moreover, my own definition would still include characters with superhuman abilities like Luke Skywalker and Harry Potter, and, alas, even those Touched by an Angel heroines.

    In defining the superhero I was focusing solely on the character of the superhero. What was eye-opening to me about Coogan’s book was that he looks not just at the character but at that character’s role and function in the story. Coogan is seeking not just to define the superhero but also to define the superhero genre. Hence, what makes a superhero is not just the character’s personal attributes but also the kind of story he or she is in. As Coogan states in his own definition, the superhero “is generically distinct, i.e., can be distinguished from characters of related genres (fantasy, science fiction, detective, etc.) by a preponderance of genre conventions” (p. 30).

    In formulating his own definition, Coogan refers to DC’s lawsuit against Victor Fox, who in 1939 published Wonder Man, whose title character was an imitation of Superman (and not to be confused with Marvel’s later character of the same name). The wonderfully named Judge Learned Hand, in ruling on the lawsuit, identified three defining characteristics of that new creation, the superhero. “These three elements–mission, powers, and identity,” according to Coogan, “establish the core of the genre” (p. 39).

    Hand stated that Superman and Wonder Man were each a “champion of the oppressed” who battles “evil and injustice” (p. 30). Coogan asserts that the superhero’s mission must be “prosocial and selfless” and “must not be intended to benefit or further his own agenda” (p. 31). Most superheroes do not combat wrongdoing in order to make money or gain some other kind of personal reward. Coogan points out that Hugo Danner, the protagonist of Philip Wylie’s 1930 novel Gladiator and a precursor of Superman, “uses his super-strength to earn a living as a circus strongman” (p. 31). Here’s another way of distinguishing Bond from a true superhero: however patriotic Bond is, he is assigned by his employer to combat the likes of Goldfinger.

    Coogan also maintains that the superhero has a “generalized mission” to safeguard all people from danger and to combat all criminals, and hence “to do good for the sake of doing good” (p. 254). If James Bond were fired by British intelligence, he presumably would not continue to combat international conspiracies on his own. Once Luke Skywalker and his allies overthrew the Empire, their mission was complete. But Bruce Wayne did not become the Batman to capture his parents’ killer, but to war on all criminals. In pre-Crisis continuity, when that killer, Joe Chill, was murdered, that did not make any difference to Batman’s commitment to continue fighting crime. Even more significantly, it was after he caught his uncle’s killer that Spider-Man chose to become a crimefighter. In the typical form of Joseph Campbell’s monomyth, the hero completes his mission and returns to his community. The superhero typically pursues a mission that will never end for him, as long as he is physically capable of continuing it: once the superhero captures one bad guy, he moves on to pursuing the next one.

    Coogan notes that this sort of mission is not unique to the superhero genre, and that it is shared by another of Superman’s precursors, the pulp hero Doc Savage. I’d add that Batman’s war on crime is just as endless as that of one of his own precursors, the Shadow, a crimefighting hero of both the pulps and radio, or that of another pulpish radio hero, the Green Hornet. Moreover, we can move beyond the pulps to find contemporary examples of the hero who does “good for the sake of doing good” in more contemporary material outside the superhero genre. Jack Bauer battles terrorists whether or not he is officially employed by CTU, the Counter-Terrorist Unit; in Season 6 he quits at the end of the 9 AM-to-10 AM episode, and then voluntarily resumes his mission once he sees the mushroom cloud from a nuclear bomb the terrorists set off. In the classic British television series The Avengers (see “Comics in Context” #52), John Steed may be a government agent, but Mrs. Emma Peel is described as a “talented amateur,” who therefore presumably combats threats to British security simply because she considers it the right thing to do. There’s even a tradition of the fictional gentleman detective, like Lord Peter Wimsey or The Thin Man‘s Nick Charles, who solves murders not for financial recompense but for the intellectual challenge and to right the scales of justice. So, as Coogan states, this sense of mission does not by itself separate the superhero genre from the others.

    Coogan’s next defining characteristic is superpowers, but, as I have already observed, superheroes need not possess actual superpowers. (Indeed, only one of the superheroes in Watchmen has super-powers.) Here I think my principle about superheroes either being literally or figuratively superhuman applies. And so does Coogan’s emphasis on the story in which the superhero protagonist appears. Batman has no super-powers, but some of his adversaries, like the shapeshifter Clayface, do, and they do not seem out of place in his stories. Captain America regularly battles superpowered opponents.

    It’s important that Coogan comments here on “the exaggeration inherent in the superhero genre” (p. 31). Coogan is referring specifically to superpowers, which don’t exist in the real world; elsewhere in the book he refers to “superhero physics,” meaning the ways in which scientific laws operate differently in superhero stories than they do in real life. (For example, just where does all that extra mass come from when Bruce Banner turns into the much larger and heavier Hulk?) I’d add that the “exaggeration” turns up in other forms as well. No one in the real world would dress up as a bat and devise all that high-tech equipment to fight crime for the rest of his life, but in the superhero genre, it is a reasonable choice of career. Hence even psychology is somewhat different in the world of superheroes. From Stan Lee onward, superhero writers have sought to show what would happen if superheroes existed in the real world. But despite any realistic elements, ultimately and necessarily the superhero genre portrays a world of the fantastic, far less naturalistic that of many other action-adventure subgenres.

    The superhero reader must accept these departures from strict realism as
    necessary conventions of the genre, just as the Looney Tunes fan accepts the convention that animals can talk (my colleague Fred Hembeck can’t accept that, so he’s not a Bugs Bunny fan), or the opera buff accepts the premise that people sing, rather than speak.

    One of those conventions that get in the way of some people’s acceptance of the superhero genre is the costume. The creators of the Smallville television series took as their guiding motto, “No flights, no tights.” (However, their version of Clark Kent eventually did fly, and this season they have introduced Green Arrow, in full costume; the demands of Superman history and the genre will out.) The makers of the X-Men movies outfitted them in undistinguished black uniforms rather than individualized, colorful costumes. SInce the villains in the first X-Men movie wore the same thing, there wasn’t even a visual distinction between the good guys and the bad guys. The absence of superhero-style costumes makes the X-Men movies look more like science fiction films, in visual terms, which, presumably, the filmmakers thought had a wider potential audience than superhero movies. And yet, the most critically and commercially successful Marvel movies are the Spider-Man films, which keep the title character in his familiar and distinctive red and blue costume. Maybe movie audiences aren’t as averse to costumes as filmmakers fear. (Unsurprisingly, Marvel Comics switched the X-Men into black uniforms after the first X-Men movie, but at least they had big “X” insignia, and inevitably Marvel ended up putting them back in superhero-style costumes. Similarly, in the 1980s Marvel put Spider-Man in a simple black costume with a white spider insignia, supposedly permanently, but thankfully, it did not last long.)

    Yet even Stan Lee and Jack Kirby initially decided not to put the Fantastic Four in costumes, in order to make the characters seem more realistic: Coogan quotes Lee as saying, “If our heroes were to live in the real world, then let them dress like real people” (p. 43). But as Coogan points out, Lee and Kirby quickly gave in to what Lee claimed was pressure from fan letters, and the F. F. acquired their costumes as soon as issue three. Even so, these costumes were simple blue uniforms, with the team’s “4” symbol as their only distinguishing feature. In the early 1960s Stan Lee seemed determined to find rationales for his new heroes wearing costumes. Iron Man’s costume was the source of his powers. The original X-Men all wore yellow and black (later blue) costumes that were effectively school uniforms. Spider-Man wore a fantastical costume because he initially went into show business. Thor’s costume was actually what passed for ordinary garb in Asgard. Doctor Strange’s robes suggest the Asian culture in which he trained, and his cloak and amulet are sources of mystical power. The Hulk just wore torn purple pants. The first new Marvel star who donned a superhero-style costume for crimefighting was Daredevil, the last of the major new heroes to be created in the early 1960s. By 1964, it appears, Lee had finally fully given in to the genre’s demands that superheroes wear distinctive costumes.

    According to Coogan, the third defining characteristic of the superhero genre is “the identity element,” which “comprises the codename and the costume, with the secret identity being a customary counterpart to the codename” (p. 32).

    This indicates that the superhero must have a “heroic identity” and a normal, everyday identity. Coogan focuses more on the heroic persona, but I believe that the other side of the dual identity may be almost as important. The dual identity fits my idea that the superhero is a contemporary version of the mythological demigod, who was half divine and half human. The typical superhero is superhuman in one identity, and is an ordinary human in his alternate persona. It is the superhero’s non-heroic identity, the fact that he identifies himself as being “one of us,” that presumably prevents him from using his powers to dominate “normal” people.

    Coogan holds that the heroic identity must express itself through the codename and costume: as he puts it, “heroic identities” must “firmly externalize either their alter ego’s inner character or biography” (p. 32).

    Hence, though the Scarlet Pimpernel pioneered the concept of the double identity in heroic adventure fiction, Coogan points out that “The Scarlet Pimpernel does not resemble the little roadside flower whose name he takes” (p. 32). Certainly the flower seems an unlikely symbol for the Pimpernel’s daring deeds, and though the Pimpernel is a master of disguise, he does not actually wear a distinctive costume that signifies his heroic persona.

    Johnston McCulley’s creation, Zorro, prefigures superheroes in many ways, including wearing a distinctive costume, and naming himself after an animal he has adopted as his personal symbol. But Coogan contends that “Zorro does not resemble the fox whose Spanish name he has taken, except perhaps in his ability to escape his pursuers” (p. 32). Well, certainly Zorro’s costume does not make him look like a fox, but Coogan has missed the main connection between Zorro and his personal fox totem: the fox, in fables, is the archetypal trickster, and Zorro is a trickster figure, as well. Not only does Zorro continually outwit his adversaries, but in the original The Mark of Zorro movie (1920), he even performs magic tricks in his everyday identity of Don Diego. Moreover, just as a real fox is a predatory animal, Zorro can be regarded as a figurative predator on evildoers. Certainly Zorro’s trademark “Z” is as much a symbol of his heroic identity as Superman’s “S” symbol or Batman’s bat symbol.

    Coogan credits the two leading pulp heroes, the Shadow and Doc Savage, with having names that express their character or biography: the Shadow is “a shadowy presence behind events” and “Doc Savage’s name combines. . .the skill and rationality of a doctor and the strength and fighting ability of a wild savage” (pgs. 32-33). But, Coogan declares, “A pulp hero’s costume does not emblematize the character’s identity” (p. 33), and though he acknowledges exceptions to this rule, Doc Savage and the Shadow are not among them.

    Then again, illustrator James Bama’s portraits of Doc Savage, with his close-cropped hair emphasizing his cranium, and his perennially ripped shirts, captures both the “doc’s” intellect and the “savage’s” combat ability. (Though Bama’s paintings came after the rise of the comics superhero, Doc’s ripped shirts go all the way back to the cover of Doc Savage Magazine #1 in 1933.) As for the Shadow, his black hat and costume not only make him look more like a living shadow, but black is also the symbolic color of death, which the Shadow metes out to criminals; the Shadow’s trademark red scarf adds the color of blood. Furthermore, the Shadow’s implacable, staring eyes and prominent, aquiline nose visually liken him to a bird of prey, hunting his victims, and this convey his personality. So Doc Savage and the Shadow were moving towards the idea of a costume which represents the hero’s personality and/or biography.

    As Coogan states, Superman and Batman each had both a codename and a costume that expressed his identity. Superman is indeed a superhuman man,
    and the “S” emblem on his costume symbolizes this fact. “Similarly, Batman’s costume proclaims him a bat man, just as Spider-Man’s webbed costume proclaims him a spider man. These costumes are iconic representations of the superhero identity” (p. 33).

    Borrowing a term from Jim Steranko, Coogan refers to the insignia on a superhero’s costume as a “chevron” and insists on its importance. “The chevron especially emphasizes the character’s codename and is itself a simplified statement of that identity” (p. 33). This makes sense. As one-time Superman editor Mike Carlin has pointed out, Superman’s costume is basically that of a circus strongman. It’s the chevron, the “S” insignia, that makes it a superhero costume, and perhaps the cape as well. “Capes” have become iconic signifiers for superheroes, as exemplified by the use of the term “cape killers” in Marvel’s Civil War.

    Similarly, it’s the “4” chevron that turns the Fantastic Four’s nondescript uniforms, which otherwise look like fairly normal clothing, into superhero costumes. The original X-Men’s 1960s uniforms don’t look like ordinary clothes, and the masks suggested they were superheroes, but it was the “X” insignia on their belts that expressed their identity. “X” suggested mystery, it was the first letter of founder Charles Xavier’s last name, and as Xavier explained in the first issue, each team member had an “x-tra” mutant power.
    In the case of the FF and X-Men, the chevron identifies the heroes as members of a team. Notice that Pixar’s The Incredibles (see “Comics in Context”#62) likewise puts its team members into similar costumes, each with an “i” chevron standing for “Incredibles,” and the final shot of the film, preceding the credits, is a close-up of Mr. Incredible’s chevron.

    Coogan points to Scott McCloud’s assertion in Understanding Comics that cartoons are more abstract than photorealistic pictures. Coogan states that “The superhero costume removes the specific details of a character’s ordinary appearance, leaving only a simplified idea that is represented in the colors and design of the costume” (p. 33). The chevron is a visual symbol of the superhero’s identity, and so is the costume. Even the colors become iconic symbols of the superhero’s identity. Coogan quotes McCloud directly: “Because costume colors remained exactly the same, panel after panel, they came to symbolize the characters in the mind of the readers” (Understanding Comics, p. 188). Hence, red and blue, and to a lesser extent yellow, are Superman’s colors.

    This suggests to me a reason why certain costumes changed color. Spider-Man’s costume was originally intended to be red and black, with blue highlights, but it soon evolved into red and deep blue; similarly, the original X-Men’s uniforms started out as black and yellow, and became blue and yellow. Perhaps the brighter red/blue and blue/yellow combinations made more impact on the readers in a color medium, and hence proved more memorable and iconic. Daredevil switched from a drab combination of yellow and black to red, which is not only more visually striking but also underlines the “devil” aspect of his name, just as his horns do.

    Coogan points out that a superhero’s body, if distinctive enough, can serve the same purpose as a costume. He quotes Stan Lee writing in his autobiography that in co-creating the Hulk, “Instead of a colorful costume, I’d give him colorful skin” (Lee, Excelsior! The Amazing Life of Stan Lee, p. 122). Stan Lee quickly altered the Hulk’s color from the dull gray of the first issue to bright green, which proved memorable and iconic: the Hulk has been called old Greenskin and the Green Goliath, indicating that the color is part of his identity. This explains why Marvel’s shifting the Hulk back to this gray color in the mid-1980s did not last. As I’ve stated in by “Rubber Band Theory of Cartoon Art” (see “Comics in Context” #75), if you stretch a character too far away from its core concepts, it will eventually snap back.

    Other superheroes whose distinctive physical appearances serve as the iconic equivalent of costumes include the Thing, the Beast, the Silver Surfer, and Metamorpho. Colossus and Nightcrawler of the X-Men don’t have costumes that proclaim their identity or biography, but Colossus’s metallic skin and Nightcrawler’s demonic physical appearance do.

    In contrast to the superheroes, Coogan asserts that the Shadow’s face “contains too many details to reach the level of the chevron’s abstraction” (p. 34). Perhaps this suggests a rationale for filmmakers’ aversion to superhero costumes. Live action film is less abstract than cartoons, and the iconic representation of a movie star’s persona is his actual face. But still, the Superman, Batman and Spider-Man movies demonstrate the iconic power of “abstract” costumes even in the realistic world of live action film.

    Coogan’s three defining elements–mission, powers, and identity–are extremely useful in distinguishing true superheroes from similar larger-than-life characters. Harry Potter and Luke Skywalker don’t have codenames, nor do they have costumes that express their identity. While they have goals (defeat Voldemort, defeat the Empire), they do not have lifelong missions like those of Superman (protect the Earth) or Batman (make war on all criminals). Morpheus lacks the prosocial mission, and though “Dream” is a sort of codename, it does not define a “heroic identity”. His black robes are not a costume that proclaims his identity; his helmet from the early issues perhaps did, but the series quickly discarded it. The angels from Touched by an Angel don’t come close to meeting the “MPI” standards.

    The three elements also may explain ways in which superhero movies and comics can go wrong. When filmmakers put the X-Men into those dreary black uniforms, they lost the characters’ iconic colors. Does the current trend of exposing superheroes’ secret identities, as with Spider-Man in Civil War, make sense considering the importance of dual identities to the genre?

    There are exceptions to Coogan’s rules, and there is another rule that I’ve picked up from another student of the superhero genre. And while I agree with Coogan’s definition for the superhero, I disagree strongly with his definition for the supervillain. Come back next week and you will see what I mean.

    ADVERTISEMENTS FOR MYSELF
    I have nothing new to publicize this week, but I thought instead I would address the criticism that I sometimes get that these columns are too long. On Thursday, January 25, I went to hear novelist Norman Mailer speak at a New York City Barnes & Noble. It was Mailer who wrote the 1959 collection of essays, Advertisements for Myself, whose title I have borrowed for this section of my column. At the reading, Mailer was asked how he knew when to stop writing. He replied that it was the same principle that he used in “boxing, Making love and climbing stairs”: when you’re “out of wind,” stop. Exactly right.

    Copyright 2007 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #161: Walt The Auteur

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    cic2007-01-21.jpgThe new Mary Poppins stage musical is playing in Manhattan at the New Amsterdam Theatre, the former home of the legendary Ziegfeld Follies. The interior of the theater, beautifully restored by the Walt Disney Company, is a miracle of Art Nouveau splendor: my only regret when I saw Mary Poppins there was that I didn’t have the opportunity to explore the theater itself as I did when I saw The Lion King musical there a decade ago. In the theater’s lobby and elsewhere, Disney has placed photographs of various performers who appeared at the New Amsterdam in the Ziegfeld days, from W. C. Fields to Louise Brooks. But what most impresses me about the lobby are the relief sculptures along the walls, illustrating scenes from Shakespeare’s plays and Wagner’s cycle of operas, The Ring of the Nibelung. In short, at the New Amsterdam one finds the juxtaposition of high art and popular art, which is the theme of this week’s column.

    Every year the Beat conducts a year-end survey at her blog and asks what the biggest story of that year was: I responded that for 2006 it was the considerable number of museum and gallery exhibitions devoted to comic and cartoon art. I’ve written extensively about the shows at the Jewish and Newark Museums and the Library of Congress. Here’s yet another one that I just learned about: “Il etait une fois,” translated as “Once upon a Time–Walt Disney: The Sources of Inspiration for the Disney Studios” which opened at the Grand Palais in Paris on September 16 of last year and just closed on January 15. The show reopens at the Montreal Museum of Fine Arts (or, if you prefer, the Musee des Beaux-Arts, Montreal) on March 8 and runs there until June 24.

    I doubt that I’ll be able to get up to Montreal to see it, and, as yet, there has been no announcement that the exhibition will travel to the United States. But an English language version of the show’s catalogue will be published by Prestel Publishing on February 28, and there are articles on the Internet that provide glimpses of the exhibit, such as the one at “Mice Age”.

    The fact that this Disney exhibition appeared at one of Paris’s leading museums but not in the United States seems to underline the old maxim that comics and cartoon art are taken more seriously in France than in America. But maybe France isn’t quite the enlightened paradise it may seem to comics aficionados from afar. I see that in the “Animated Views” interview with the show’s curator, Bruno Girveau, writer Ben Simon points out that “Bruno has fought long and hard to stage the show, coming up against the highbrow French art critics who were initially horrified to hear that, in the place which usually hangs works by Poussin and Chardin on the walls, he planned to excerpt Mickey Mouse clips!” Girveau contends that most of the critics liked the show once they saw it, but that those who didn’t like it could not get past their loathing of the contemporary Walt Disney Company to recognize the achievements of its founder: “So it’s difficult for them to forget all that ideology and see Disney as an artist.”

    In an article inspired by his viewing of the Grand Palais exhibition, Jonathan Jones, a writer for the British newspaper The Guardian, maintained that “to many people, buying a toy Pinocchio is as bad as feeding your child burgers” (Hey, wait a minute: I love hamburgers) and that “Hating Disney has become a cliche.” Jones asserts that “beneath the all-American facade, Walt Disney had a terrible secret: he was a true artist.”

    Moreover, Jones points out, as with any significant creative artist, one can find and follow personal themes that run through the body of his or her work. “You only have to watch a few Disney films, widely separated across the decades of his career, to recognize the consistent obsessions that can only have been the product of one man’s mind.”

    In his extraordinary new biography, Walt Disney: The Triumph of the American imagination (which I wrote about in last week’s column), Neal Gabler contends that Walt Disney had relatively little to do with the films, animated or not, that his studio made after Bambi (1942) until Mary Poppins (1964). It does appear that Disney did not devote anywhere near the degree of hands-on attention to those films that he did to the classics of the 1930s and early 1940s. But isn’t the real test of his involvement the degree to which the postwar films reflect his personal themes and concerns? When I heard Gabler speak about his book at the Barnes and Noble near Lincoln Center last December 5, he cautioned the audience that “as much as you might love” Disney’s 1950s animated films Alice in Wonderland (1951), Peter Pan (1953), Lady and the Tramp (1955), and Sleeping Beauty (1959), Disney himself has little to do with them. Has anyone done a serious critical analysis comparing the thematic content of the 1950s animated features to Disney’s earlier animated features? This is something that’s missing from Gabler’s book. Don’t most Disney aficionados sense, as I do, that the 1950s animated films reflect the same consistent artistic sensibility as the features from Snow White (1937) through Bambi, and that Walt Disney, even if he did not actually direct or write any of them, was the auteur of them all (to use the term from film criticism)? (I will concede that the 1960s animated features produced during the last years of Walt Disney’s life demonstrate increasingly less of his own sensibility.)

    Jones also argues that people do not look beyond the conventional stereotypical view of Disney’s work to give him credit for its true complexity of mood and vision. Jones points to the first “Silly Symphony” cartoon, Skeleton Dance (1929) “is American, deeply so, in the vein of Washington Irving and Edgar Allan Poe–a jazz-age honk of American gothic that brilliantly uses black and white silhouettes to create an archetypal midnight churchyard where the skeletons get out of their graves and dance.” Jones insightfully observes that “When Tim Burton does this sort of thing [as in The Nightmare before Christmas (1993) for the Disney studio, I presume], it’s hailed as a gothic subversion of the homeliness of Disney, but Disney subverted himself first.” And, illustrating his thesis that Disney’s personal obsessions, themes, and imagery persist through his oeuvre, Jones then notes that “When later he came to make Fantasia, the skeleton dance was echoed in the march of the mops carrying their buckets of water until Mickey chops, chops, chops them up.”

    The thesis of the “Once upon a Time” show is that in creating his great animated films, Walt Disney and his collaborators drew upon artistic influences from outside the animation medium. The Grand Palais’ website states that “Popular culture and highbrow culture typically ignore one another and the links between them have seldom been explored. Walt Disney’s feature-length animated films, from Snow White and the Seven Dwarfs in 1937, until The Jungle Book in 1967, are striking examples of reciprocal influence of these two cultures.” Note that the “Once upon a Time” show treats all the animated features the Disney studio produced during Walt Disney’s lifetimes as works of Walt Disney the auteur.

    According to the Grand Palais’ website “In 1935, Disney spent several weeks in Europe. . . . and took back to California as many illustrated books as he could, to build up a stock of images meant to inspire the Studios’ productions. . . .Original editions of the works of the illustrator J.J. Granville figured prominently, along with drawings by Gustave Doré and German artists such as Ludwig Richter Moritz von Schwind and Heinrich Kley. The English were represented by editions of Alice in Wonderland by Lewis Carroll and Peter Pan and Wendy by James M. Barrie, illustrated by Arthur Rackham or John Tenniel.”

    Likewise the exhibit finds links between live action films of the 1920s and 1930s and Walt Disney’s animated features. The website states that “German expressionist cinema had a more profound impact on Disney’s first long features: the influence of Friedrich Murnau’s Faust (1926) is omnipresent in several sequences of Fantasia,” notably the Night on Bald Mountain sequence. It seems that the Faust film too has a sequence in which a devil figure towers over a city while demons rise towards him. Over the last several years each time I’ve gone to see a rare screening of F. W. Murnau’s Faust at a New York revival theater, it’s been sold out. When Tower Records held its going out of business sale last year, the DVD of Murnau’s Faust was on my want list, but other bargain hunters had already snapped it up. Now that I know Murnau’s Faust was an influence on Fantasia (1940), I am even more intent on finally seeing it.

    Neither illustration nor film were widely considered to be serious art back in the 1930s and 1940s. But film is certainly considered an artform today, and illustration has increasing been gaining cultural respectability (see “Comics in Context” #132), and it does Walt Disney and his collaborators credit that they recognized their artistic importance well over a half century ago.

    Disney and his artists were also studying works that were then unquestionably in the realm of fine art. Like Gabler, “Once upon a Time” devotes considerable attention to Destino, Walt Disney’s 1940s collaboration with Surrealist artist Salvador Dali, which was finally completed in 2003 and will be released on DVD this year. According to the Grand Palais website, “Sleeping Beauty‘s castle was a cross between the illuminations of the Très Riches Heures du Duc de Berry, drawings by Viollet-le-Duc and the extravagant castles of Louis II of Bavaria. Forests took their inspiration from 15th-century Chinese painting, Japanese prints or American or English forests. Bird’s-eye views drew on the work of the American regionalist painters Grant Wood and Thomas Hart Benton. The influence of Gaspard Friedrich and Arnold Böcklin’s landscapes can be seen in Fantasia, and that of the Flemish and Italian primitives in the décors for Sleeping Beauty.” The exhibition even proposes that the “general silhouette” of the Wicked Queen from Snow White “seems to be derived from the column statue at the entrance to Naumberg Cathedral in Germany.” Not having visited the exhibit or read the catalogue, I cannot judge whether some of these resemblances between Disney’s animated films and works of fine art may be coincidental, but where there is this much artistic smoke, there must be fire.

    “Once upon a Time” appears to be arguing that if Disney and his artists studied so much artwork in other mediums, then their animated films must also be works of art. That doesn’t necessarily follow, but it does demonstrate that Disney and his collaborators had a more sophisticated appreciation of art than they have generally been given credit for, and that they had genuine artistic ambitions of their own.

    Reviewers of Gabler’s book have been amazed at his reminders of the high cultural esteem in which Walt Disney was held in his most creative period, the 1930s and early 1940s. Gabler recounts that Soviet film director Sergei Eisenstein “wrote that he was sometimes frightened watching Disney’s films–‘frightened because of some absolute perfection in what he does’ and because Disney seemed to know “˜all the most secret strands of human thought, images, ideas, feelings.’ Later, among other notables, architect Frank Lloyd Wright, novelist Aldous Huxley, and composer Igor Stravinsky would also visit [Disney and his studio]” (Gabler p. 204). Gabler notes that critic Gilbert Seldes, the champion of George Herriman’s Krazy Kat, wrote in Esquire in 1937 about that year’s Mickey Mouse cartoon The Band Concert “that none of “˜dozens of works produced in America at the same time in all the other arts can stand comparison with this one’” (p. 195). Gabler also quotes New York Times film critic Frank Nugent writing in 1937 that Snow White “is a classic, as important cinematically as The Birth of a Nation or the birth of Mickey Mouse” (p. 273). In 1943 Disney was even made a trustee of New York’s Museum of Modern Art. (MoMA did a wonderful Pixar retrospective recently, so why don’t they host “Once upon a Time” in New York?)

    This is indeed astounding: it seems that in the 1930s much of the cultural establishment was perfectly willing to recognize animation as art. In this chorus of praise for Disney, there is no sign of the prejudice that cartoon art is junk for kids that has been prevalent throughout my lifetime. Gabler chronicles how critics turned against Disney in the 1940s, and argues that Disney’s films had indeed suffered in quality. On the television program Theater Talk, shown in New York early January 13, Gabler theorized that the critics condescendingly considered Disney a latter-day “folk artist” and turned against him when he showed he had conscious artistic ambitions, as in Fantasia. I don’t know that either of these explanations is sufficient. Just why the cultural establishment turned so radically against Disney’s animated films in the 1940s and 1950s, and even animation in general (with exceptions such as the early UPA shorts, which were perceived as having what we might now call an indie sensibility) puzzles me. It also makes me wonder about the current new artistic respectability of the comics medium. Is this new attitude here to stay, or will a backlash eventually set in here, too?

    The greatest lesson I took from Gabler’s book is that Walt Disney, from the late 1920s into the early 1940s, thought and acted as a genuine artist, even if he did not use the term. “‘I can’t get into a rut or let my boys get into ruts,’ he would tell a reporter. “˜If we quit growing mentally and artistically, we will begin to die’. . . .Asked by one storyman if Walt felt they were taking full advantage of the cartoon medium, he riposted, “˜This is not the cartoon medium. It should not be limited to cartoons. We have worlds to conquer here. . . .We’ve got more in this medium than making people laugh” (p 300).
    With Fantasia (which was originally called The Concert Feature at the studio), Gabler declares, “This time he was explicitly bidding to join forces with high art and pry the cartoon from its origins in popular culture, where he felt it was doomed to be crude and juvenile. Walt would never have called himself an artist–he was too skeptical of culture and too plainspoken for that–but he did want to make art, if only because that was the natural evolution for him, and The Concert Feature was, he thought, certifiably art” (pgs. 300-301).

    This reminds me of Jules Feiffer’s contention that in the 1940s cartoonists working in comics, even Will Eisner, did not think of themselves as artists or of their work as art. At “The Golden Age of Comics,” a panel discussion held at the Jewish Museum last November 2, Feiffer explained that comics artists back then considered it pretentious and somehow unmanly to think of themselves as creating art. But the best of these cartoonists did indeed create art of enduring aesthetic worth, and examples of Golden Age artwork were hanging in the Museum as part of the exhibition “Superheroes: Good and Evil in American Comics.” Similarly, in the 1930s and 1940s Walt Disney may not have used the word “art” but that was what he was intent on creating through his animated films.

    As Gabler repeatedly shows, Walt Disney could be dictatorial, even tyrannical, and actually frightened his employees. In my experiences in the comics industry I’ve witnessed examples of how authoritarian bosses can wreck the morale of the creative end of a company. But another major point that Gabler makes about Walt Disney is how, in the 1930s and early 1940s, the studio’s most imaginative and innovative period, Disney more than compensated for his flawed people skills through impressing his co-workers as a visionary leader, even a “muse” according to Gabler (p. 242). “Despite the occasional griping and resentment that Walt was overbearing, mercurial, ungrateful, and impossible to please, all of which he was, no one at the studio doubted the overriding importance of his contribution” (p. 207). For one thing, “he was a superb storyteller, and Walt himself seemed to think it was his primary attribute” (p. 207). He was a master of gags and plot structure, and moreover, he had “the uncanny ability to inhabit the character and enter the situation” (p. 209). At story meetings Walt Disney would spontaneously perform the characters, and “everyone at the studio marveled ar his acting” (p. 209). Co-workers “cited Walt as an inspiration, setting standards, expecting perfection, drumming up enthusiasm, buoying spirits” (p. 210). “Finally, and perhaps most important,” Gabler concludes, “there was Walt’s ability not just to supervise but to coordinate the entire studio apparatus” to create a work of art along the lines he envisioned (p. 210-211). “Almost everyone at the studio admired how Walt, in either conducting then or flitting among them, forged them into a unit. . . .Among his employees, the sum total of all these attributes evoked unbounded admiration for the young man who possessed them” (p. 211).

    Gabler asserts that “By the mid-1930s the Disney studio operated like a cult, with a messianic figure inspiring a group of devoted, sometimes frenzied acolytes” (p. 212). This strikes me as too harsh an appraisal. I’m more kindly disposed, having glimpsed–and felt–in my own experience some of this sort of creative fervor that a community of young artists and writers can generate.

    What Gabler reveals about Walt Disney persuades me that Disney was a genuine creative genius. Yes, the word “genius” is too often applied to people who do not truly measure up in the strict definition of that term. But after reading Gabler’s book, I now believe that Disney was the real thing: a true genius, and most of his co-workers of the 1930s, consciously or unconsciously, seem to have recognized it.

    The Guardian‘s Jonathan Jones refers to the Mary Poppins movie as “this magical, and totally unAmerican child’s-eye vision of London as one of the films on which he lavished most attention, a film he was obsessed with making for 20 years, and turned into his final testament. If you want to know the real Walt Disney, watch Mary Poppins.” Gabler believes that Disney saw himself in the character of George Banks, the workaholic executive who rediscovers the child within himself. In last week’s column I delved further into this idea. Gabler recounts how as he grew older and his studio grew larger, Walt Disney increasingly became a corporate executive rather than a creative visionary. But towards the end of his life, Disney found renewed energy and inspiration in working on Mary Poppins. Gabler quotes Karen Dotrice, who played one of the children, as describing Disney as being “like a big kid” (p. 598). The parody court martial of Mr. Banks by the bank executives turns out to be an exorcism of the repressed, stodgy, corporate side of his personality. Banks’s old self dies, and a new self is born, who, appropriately, initially acts like a giddy “big kid” and returns home to “go fly a kite” with his family. Last week I wrote that this reminded me of the section of Gabler’s biography in which he describes Disney’s own midlife crisis: his disillusionment with animation and filmmaking following the studio strike and the financial failures of ambitious films like Fantasia. Disney discovered a new enthusiasm for trains big and small, and Gabler significantly refers to “the kind of delayed childhood he was now enjoying” (p. 475).

    Mr. Banks seizes the day and finds his own “delayed childhood.” But despite what New York Times critic Edward Rothstein says (Nov. 20, 2006), he doesn’t remain in emotional childhood, though the movie does not underscore this point. While flying the kite with his family, Mr. Banks encounters other bank executives who are also flying kites. (Mr. Banks’ psychological regeneration appears to have spread to his whole community.) They inform him that Mr. Dawes, Sr.. the ancient personification of the heartless world of the bank, has died, but though Mr. Banks immediately expresses regret, the other executives, including Mr. Dawes Sr.’s own son, aren’t at all unhappy about it. Mr. Dawes, Sr. died happy, as a result of laughing convulsively (and levitating, like Mary Poppins’ Uncle Albert) over the bad joke Mr. Banks told him (also from the Uncle Albert scene). Unlikely as it seems, the bank executives seem to think that Mr. Dawes, Sr.’s cheerful demise outweighs Mr. Banks’ alleged responsibility for the panic, and so they offer Mr. Banks a new, higher position at the bank, which he gratefully accepts.

    So Mr. Banks hasn’t ditched the responsibilities of adulthood, making a living and supporting his family, after all. Following the Joseph Campbell monomyth, Mr. Banks has undergone symbolic death (of his old workaholic, emotionally inhibited self) and rebirth (as a man more in touch with his emotions, a better husband and father, and even a more successful banker). It makes a certain sense that psychological rebirth would entail a brief return to symbolic childhood (flying the kite) before resuming the role of adult.

    Watching the movie again in December, I had not remembered the death of Mr. Dawes, Sr. and was amazed by the insertion of this dark note (even if the executives make light of it) into the film’s concluding festive mood. (A more noticeable disturbance of the general festivity comes with Mary Poppins’ acknowledgment that she has been utterly forgotten by their children in their joy at reconnecting with their redeemed father and mother. If Mr. Banks has regained his job and family, Mary Poppins has lost hers, for the moment, anyway. Suddenly I see Mary Poppins flying off at the end of the movie as an image similar to that of the door closing upon John Wayne at the end of The Searchers [1956]: each is a protagonist whose success in reuniting a family results in his or her own exclusion from it.) In effect Mr. Banks has inadvertently murdered Mr. Dawes, Sr. by telling him that killer joke. (Comedians do talk about “killing” the audience by making them laugh, an idiom that presumably helped inspire Monty Python’s “killer joke” sketch.) Here’s the mythic motif of the new ruler rising to power by slaying the old, only flimsily disguised. The new generation (well, middle-aged), represented by Mr. Banks, has seized power from the declining older generation, represented by Mr. Dawes, Sr.. But it’s significant that Mr. Banks did not intentionally seize power: he was not motivated by greed or ambition, but merited success by discovering his true self. Moreover, whether or not Disney and his collaborators intended it, Mr. Banks “slays” the old tyrant, thereby symbolically overcoming death, not by brute force but by a work of popular art, however humble, that embodies the spirit of comedy: a simple joke.

    On one level, the death of Mr. Dawes, Sr. could have represented for Disney his triumph over the bankers who for so long had controlled his fate and prevented him from doing the work he wanted. On another level, the death of Mr. Dawes, Sr. could represent the “death” of the side of Walt Disney that accepted corporate thinking but was also cruel and insensitive to his subordinates. Whether any of this was conscious on Disney’s part is a mystery.

    The Mary Poppins stage musical handles the Banks/bank subplot very differently: there is no Mr. Dawes, Sr. and therefore no implication that Mr. Banks is an unwitting murderer. The revision suggests that Julian Fellowes, who write the stage version’s book, may also be aware of the parallels between Walt Disney and Mr. Banks. Rothstein describes Fellowes’ version thus: Mr. Banks “ends up learning. . . that it is far better to approve loans for a kind factory builder who boasts of having no collateral other than his workers, than for a selfish oaf who simply plans to make money. Eventually everyone is convinced by Mary Poppins that anything is possible if you let it, nothing is ever set in stone, and that everyone should have fun and do good works. They join forces in a paean to this narcissistic cartoon of liberalism.” How about that last line? Rothstein succeeds in sounding like Stephen Colbert on one of his rants, except that Rothstein means it. What happens in the stage version is that Mr. Banks turns down a loan to a financial manipulator who has no goal greater than increasing his own wealth, and instead approves a loan to a visionary entrepreneur who intends to build a business that will benefit his workers as well as himself. In other words, the man who gets the loan is like the young Walt Disney himself, a man of vision who values and rewards his workers. In approving this loan, Mr. Banks demonstrates to the audience that he has a heart and thus the potential for redemption. But Mr. Banks is taking a gamble with this entrepreneur, and In the stage version, it is because the bank’s hierarchy disapproves of this decision that Mr. Banks’ job is in jeopardy. But at the show’s end it is revealed that the gamble paid off, and the visionary entrepreneur proved to be wildly successful. Now the bank’s promotion of Mr. Banks makes more sense. Doesn’t the entrepreneur’s success mirror the ultimate financial success of Walt Disney himself? Isn’t the attitude that Mr. Banks takes towards the loan in the stage musical just the sort of attitude that Walt Disney would have wished the banks would have taken towards him in the 1940s?

    Walt Disney did not remain stuck in his “delayed childhood” either. His passion for trains unexpectedly led him in a new creative direction. He wanted to build train tracks at his studio, then he wanted to build a small village that the train could travel around, and, ultimately, he conceived of Disneyland, a creation that rivals his animated features in importance. So that’s why that old-fashioned train chugs around Disneyland’s perimeter; this explains the monorail as well.

    In Disney’s Mary Poppins, both the movie and the stage version, flight becomes a symbol of transcendence, of rising above the rut in which one finds himself and achieving a new freedom. When Mr. Dawes, Sr. learns to laugh, he levitates. Liberated from the self-imposed structures of his old self, Mr. Banks flies a kite. As for Bert and Mary Poppins, they don;t have to achieve liberation; they already have it. Bert and his fellow chimney sweeps in the movie are propelled out of the chimneys like rockets. In one of the high points of the stage musical, Bert, played by Gavin Lee from the original London production, dances up the side of the proscenium, and then upside down along the top. (It’s true! And without the trickery employed by Fred Astaire when he danced on the ceiling in the 1951 movie Royal Wedding. This is really happening!)

    Now there’s one of the advantages of sitting up in the balcony of the New Amsterdam. Broadway prices have skyrocketed over the last several years: and now a normally priced orchestra seat can cost $110 and “premium” seats can cost twice or even four times as much! Thankfully, the New Amsterdam holds a very large number of seats, and so the balcony seats can be had for reasonable, and even surprisingly inexpensive, prices. So, sitting up towards the top of the theater, I had a really good view of Bert’s dance up, across, and back down the proscenium. But there was an even bigger surprise in store.

    At the end of the first act of the Mary Poppins musical at the New Amsterdam, she rises above the stage in flight, holding onto her umbrella, in the iconic image from Mary Shepard’s original illustrations from P. L. Travers’ book and from the end of the movie. Well, I wondered, why did they choose to use what I would have thought would be the climactic special effect of the show only halfway through? They must have something more spectacular in mind for the finale.

    And so they did. At the very end Mary Poppins again rises into the air, holding her umbrella. But this time she ascends outward over the audience, and to everyone’s amazement, rises higher and higher, and passed directly in front of the balcony, virtually right in front on my own seat, and little more than arm’s length away from me, and continued to ascend until she made her exit, somewhere at the very top of the theater! Now that is an unforgettable coup de theatre! (And I am almost as amazed by the fact that Ashley Brown, the actress playing Mary Poppins, somehow managed to get back on stage mere moments later for the curtain calls!)

    ADVERTISEMENTS FOR MYSELF
    “1986: The Year That Changed Comics,” my yearlong lecture series at the Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art in Manhattan, finally comes to an end on Monday evening, January 22, with Neil Gaiman’s first work in comics, Violent Cases, illustrated by Dave McKean. (It was actually published in 1987, but I figure they must have been working on it in 1986.) MoCCA and I are discussing possibilities for other lectures–either one-shots or series–that I could do there in the future. But for now, this is the last of my monthly MoCCA talks, so if you’re in the area, please stop by. (It’s free!)

    Copyright 2007 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #160: Banks’ Holiday

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    cic-20070112.jpgThe triumph of Neal Gabler’s voluminous, thorough and fascinating new biography, Walt Disney: The Triumph of the American Imagination (Alfred A. Knopf, 2006), is that it so fully humanizes a figure whom many of us previously knew either from his public image, as the benign, fatherly host of his weekly television series, or as the enigmatic and sometimes dictatorial executive of later books on animation.

    In fact, there is one anecdote in Gabler’s vast tome that should allow any of us in the comics business to identify with DIsney. “Walt would recall an incident that happened on the back platform of the train when he first headed west to Los Angeles. He was making conversation with a man there who asked what Walt did. . . . “˜I make animated cartoons,” Walt told him, which was met with a steely disdain that Walt never forgot and that had led him to resolve that someday his cartoons would be afforded the same respect as live features” (p. 271).

    As regular readers know, I’m associated on a volunteer basis with the Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art in New York City, and one of the perks of being a museum staffer, albeit unpaid, is that I receive free admission to other museums. So last month I visited a Manhattan art museum, which shall be nameless, and presented by MoCCA ID card at the admissions desk. The man behind the counter read the name of the museum and scrunched up his face into an expression of, yes, steely disdain for the idea of a museum dedicated to, of all things, cartoons. Thanks to Gabler’s book, I can now console myself with the knowledge that even Walt Disney had to experience this prejudice against the artform. (And to be fair, last year I showed my MoCCA ID card to a woman at the admissions counter for the Whitney Museum of American Art, and she not only burst into enthusiasm, but asked if she could bring her art students to visit the museum. So, yes, the cultural climate is changing, if not as widely as I might hope.)

    Back in 2005 I wrote a number of columns about Lincoln Center’s retrospective of musical animated cartoons, and commented on how various people in animation were interested in the figure of the conductor (see “Comics in Context” #109 and 110). Mickey Mouse plays that role in The Band Concert (1935), among other cartoons, and as the Sorcerer’s Apprentice in Fantasia (1940), “conducts” the seas and the heavens as if they were orchestra members. Of course, at the end of that section of Fantasia, Mickey famously shakes hands with Leopold Stokowski, two conductors united. I suggested that Walt Disney, among others, regarded the conductor as a symbol of the filmmaker, directing the creation of a work of art.

    How rewarding to learn from Gabler’s book that I was right on target with Disney! “Walt himself compared the cartoons to a symphony, with him as the conductor who took all the employees–the storymen, the animators, the composers and musicians, the voice artists, the ink and paint girls–and got them to “˜produce one whole thing which is beautiful’” (p. 210).

    There is a great deal to say about Gabler’s biography of Disney, but this week I want to concentrate on the light it casts on a subject I wrote about a few weeks ago: Mary Poppins, in its incarnations as P. L. Travers’ original book, Walt Disney’s 1964 film adaptation, and the new stage musical on Broadway, based on both (see “Comics in Context” #158). Last time I concentrated on Ms. Poppins herself, but this time I’m turning to a character who is barely present in the original book, but who has the principal character arc in the movie and stage musical: Mr. George Banks, the father of Mary Poppins’ charges, Jane and Michael. As Variety theater critic David Rooney referred to Mr. Banks in his review of the Broadway version (Nov. 16, 2006) as “George whose sensitization is the story’s central journey.” In the course of the movie and play he changes from what writer Caitlan Flanagan called “a martinet banker” in her Dec. 19, 2005 New Yorker article about Travers, whose signature song in the stage version is “Precision and Order,” to an emotionally open and loving husband and father.

    The Mr. Banks arc is the Disney studio’s invention. Travers’ original book is episodic: Mary Poppins takes the children on one adventure after another, until finally we reach the end of the book and she leaves. The redemption of Mr. Banks gives the story of the movie and stage musical an overall structure. Moreover, through developing the character of Mr. Banks, Walt Disney and his collaborators on this family movie gave the adults in the audience someone with whose problems they could identify.

    It also solved another problem. As Flanagan explains, “The story of Mary Poppins depended on the premise that it was normal for a middle-class family to employ. . .a servant to raise the children. But to a large segment of Disney’s intended audience this idea would be bewildering or, at least, cold and unpalatable.”

    Travers expressed surprise at the movie’s notion that Mr. Banks was a bad father. Flanagan quotes her as writing, “What wand was waved to turn Mr. Banks . . . . from an anxious, ever-loving father into a man who could cheerfully tear into pieces a poem that his children had written?” But Flanagan earlier related that Travers’ father died when she was ten, that her mother was irresponsible, and that as a girl Travers turned instead to her unmarried Aunt Ellie, who “bossed everyone around, but her fierceness disguised a kindness she would have been embarrassed to admit” and who was the obvious model for Mary Poppins. Moreover, Flanagan asserts that “the fate of children whose parents can’t take care of them – haunted her [Travers] for the rest of her life.”

    Of Travers’ Mary Poppins books, I’ve only read the first, and it gives me the impression that Mr. and Mrs. Banks pay little attention to their children and are perfectly content to let Mary Poppins take the lion’s share of raising them. The children’s adventures with Mary Poppins thus become ventures into a secret world to which their parents are oblivious. So Walt Disney’s interpretation of Mr. Banks as a rather distant father seems reasonable to me. Richard Sherman, who with his brother Robert wrote the songs for the Mary Poppins movie, worked on its story with Walt Disney, and told Flanagan they realized, “You could make the father emotionally absent.” Hence, he told her, “We made it a story about a dysfunctional family,” Sherman said. “And in comes Mary Poppins – this necessary person – to heal them”

    Gabler points out that Walt Disney had been considering doing a Mary Poppins movie since the 1940s, and when the movie finally was being made, “Walt was energized. . . .It had been years since Walt was so personally invested in a film. . . he obviously connected with the film in ways that he had not connected with the studio’s recent releases” (pgs. 598-599).

    How did he connect? Gabler explains that Disney’s great early feature films, like Pinocchio (1940) and Dumbo (1941) are about children achieving maturity, taking on the “hallmarks of adulthood.” In contrast, he says, “Mary Poppins was a kind of reversion to childhood before responsibility, or, rather, a reaction to it. In a household that encouraged them to suppress their antic spirits and behave like adults, Poppins taught the children joy. . . If his earlier films had spoken to young Walt Disney’s need for empowerment, Poppins spoke to the older Walt Disney’s predicament as a corporate captain burdened with duties. . . ” (p. 599).

    It makes sense that as he grew older, the films that Walt Disney considered personal projects would change. I observed a similar phenomenon with George Lucas’s Star Wars movies (see “Comics in Context” #86). The original Star Wars trilogy, made by a young man, who, when he started them in 1977, was still striving for success, were about empowerment; they also embodied a young man’s optimism. The later trilogy, made by an older, successful man, who has become “a corporate captain” like Disney, reflects disillusionment, shows a new concern with mortality, and even approaches tragedy; the “New Hope” is left to the next generation, represented by the births of Luke and Leia at the end of Revenge of the Sith (2005). In contrast, Disney holds on to his optimism in Mary Poppins: the true central character, Mr. Banks, emerges from disillusionment into spiritual regeneration.

    Gabler asserts that Walt Disney “could certainly identify with Mr. Banks, the stodgy banker who has a child lurking inside him, and with Mary Poppins, the magical nanny who manages to emancipate that child” (p. 599). This is certainly true, and Gabler is particularly perceptive in recognizing that Disney could identify aspects of himself with more than one character in the story.

    If Walt Disney, consciously or unconsciously, molded Travers’ Mary Poppins into his own spiritual autobiography of sorts, then there are further depths to be plumbed.

    As many reviewers of Gabler’s book have remarked upon, Walt Disney was unconcerned with money except as a means for financing his future projects. But he was forced to become concerned about it. Astounding as it may seem to us today, when they are all nearly universally regarded as classics of America popular culture, Pinocchio, Fantasia (1940), and Bambi (1942) were all failures in their initial releases, and the Disney studio would have gone bankrupt if not for the film projects it undertook for the government during World War II. Moreover, as the Disney studio grew, it inevitably lost the sense of community it had in its earlier days, especially after the animators’ strike of 1941. Gabler describes Disney’s “transformation from a heedless entertainer to a cautious corporate leader” (p. 442) who “even looked different. The boyish young Walt Disney had dressed casually and flamboyantly,” but now “his suits were more likely to be solid blue or gray and conservatively cut. . .” (pgs. 441-2). One reason for all this, Gabler explains, was “the need to make films without also making mistakes. The studio couldn’t afford the risk.” Gabler maintains that Disney was growing more conservative anyway, in part “possibly” due to the fact that “he was in his mid-forties and no longer a reckless young visionary” (p. 442).

    Mr. Banks, of course, by Travers’ own admission, is dedicated to making money: “Now, the City was a place where Mr. Banks went every day–except Sundays, of course, and Bank Holidays–and while he was there he sat on a large chair in front of a large desk and made money” (p. 4).

    As his name suggests, the movie’s Mr. Banks’s ties his sense of identity to his job. In his book Gabler shows how bankers thwarted Disney’s dreams ands ambitions in the first decades of his studio. For example, after the strike, an executive of the studio’s creditor, the Bank of America, “concerned about what he saw as Walt’s profligacy,’ “ordered the studio to restrict itself to the production of shorts,” and moreover demanded “the creation of an “˜executive committee,’ including a bank representative” to govern the studio. “In effect, the studio was no longer Walt Disney’s fiefdom, He was now under the control of the businessmen” (p. 376). Did Disney the artist feel that by increasingly conforming to the demands of the corporate world, and indeed by making himself over into a conservative corporate executive, that he had joined the enemy’s side?

    Whether motivated by the need to make money or by his artistic ambitions, Disney was quite a workaholic who had trouble tearing himself away from his own figurative desk. Gabler quotes animator Ward Kimball about a train trip he took with Disney: “No matter what you were talking about, he’d get back to this goddamn studio. . . .He wanted to talk about it. This was HIM. This was his SEX! This was EVERYTHING. . .The orgasms were all here” (p. 473).

    It appears that Disney was indeed sublimating his libido into his work, at the expense of his family life. Gabler makes clear that Disney was emotionally distant from his wife, though he was quite close with his daughters. “But as much as he cherished his girls, and enjoyed spending time with them, there was something solitary about him when he wasn’t at the studio–something self-absorbed and distant” (p. 462). Gabler states that “Walt seemed to realize that he was hopelessly addicted to work at the expense of family and friends” (p. 282).

    There, too, is a link between Walt Disney and the movie’s Mr. Banks, who, as Sherman observed, is “emotionally absent” from his family. The stage musical goes even further. As Ben Brantley put it in his Nov. 17, 2006 review of the stage version for The New York Times, “Mr. Banks. . .learns to stop recoiling when his wife tries to kiss him and to value quality time with the kids over making money.”

    I also wonder if Disney, consciously or not, saw himself in Mr. Banks, not only in Disney’s relationship with his children, but in Disney’s relationship with his employees. Gabler perceives a paternal quality in Disney’s attitude towards the people who worked at the studio. At its best, in the 1930s, “if this was paternalism, it was paternalism in service of a higher principle. . . .He wanted an organization in which everyone would be selfless and happy” (p. 241). But Gabler also shows, especially as time went on, that Disney could be a martinet who terrified his employees. In Mr. Banks, before and after his transformation, perhaps we see Disney the distant, tyrannical “parent,” and Disney the benign, caring “father” to his staff.

    Gabler also tell us that Disney “always loved to forge people into a happy unit” (p. 240). That’s what Mr. Banks does at the end of the movie, when he reconciles with his family and invites them to join him in his new pastime of flying a kite. Here too is one of the links between Walt Disney and the character of Mary Poppins. Even if he didn’t do it enough, Disney loved spending time with his daughters, and Mary Poppins takes the children on one magical adventure after another. At the movie’s end, Mr. Banks, the character who more clearly represents Disney himself, takes on Mary Poppins’ role of companion to his children, and so there is no more need for her, and she departs.

    As a worker of magic, which often amazes and entertains the children, Mary Poppins can also be regarded as metaphorically representing the creative artist, making yet another connection between her and Disney himself. Bert is specifically identified in both Travers’ book and in the Disney movie as an artist, and one who creates a world within his painting with characters that come to life. So Bert effectively deals in animation, like Walt Disney himself.

    I also wonder if Disney, consciously or not, saw himself reflected in Mary Poppins’ characteristic sternness. Gabler shows repeatedly that Walt Disney was a difficult man to know, had few friends, did not show emotional warmth towards his employees, and, indeed, intimidated his staff, and could be cruel to people. Yet Gabler also makes clear that Disney had this “paternal” side and, at least before the strike, took unusual steps to promote his employees’ welfare and happiness. So could Disney have identified with his version of Mary Poppins, who masks her genuine caring for the children behind her forbidding facade? (Even Travers notes, when Maia, the star that took human form, parts from Mary Poppins, that Jane and Michael “could see in Mary Poppins’ eyes something that, if she were anybody else but Mary Poppins, might have been described as tears. . . “ [p. 194].) Mary Poppins’ severe demeanor could be used to rationalize always treating children sternly and never betraying emotion. So it is a relief that Disney’s Mary Poppins film ultimately depicts the transformed Mr. Banks’s open affection for his wife and children as its ideal. Mary Poppins, hiding her true feelings beneath a stern manner, was a necessary transitional figure in the family’s evolution, and is sent on her way once their “dysfunction” is cured.

    There is yet a fourth figure in the movie who may resemble a side of Disney and who is missing from the stage musical: the head of the bank, Mr. Dawes, Sr., an extraordinarily ancient man who can barely stand upright. (The closing credits reveal that Dick Van Dyke, who plays the young, spry Bart, doubles in the role of Mr. Dawes, Sr.. Van Dyke is unrecognizable beneath the banker’s old age makeup, and proved far better at altering his voice in this role than he was at adopting a Cockney accent for Bert. Surely I am far from the only person who, on first seeing the movie, did not realize that Van Dyke played the elder Dawes until the closing credits.) This is a man on the brink of death, who maintains his hold on the reins of power well past the time he should have passed them on to a new generation, namely Mr. Banks’s. Death thus symbolically rules the bank, whose vast emptiness might resemble a mausoleum.

    Despite Mr. Banks’s loyalty to the bank, the elder Mr. Dawes and his hierarchy show no loyalty in turn to him. In the movie Mr. Banks falls from his masters’ favor through sheer accident. When Mr. Banks brings his children to the bank and encourages Michael to open an account, Michael, understandably cowed by his surroundings, vehemently refuses. A customer overhears, leaps to the conclusion that something must be wrong with the bank, and her panic spreads, causing a run on the bank. For adults in the early 1960s who remembered the 1920s and 1930s, this sequence would conjure up the fears they felt during the Great Depression. Significantly, Frank Capra made two films that dramatized a similar situation: in American Madness (1932), a rumor foments panic and a run on the protagonist’s bank, and in It’s a Wonderful Life (1946), there is another fear-driven run on George Bailey’s savings and loan. In each of these Capra movies, the hero’s friends loyally rally to his support and prevent him from going under. In the Mary Poppins movie Mr. Dawes, Sr. and the rest of the bank’s hierarchy blames Mr. Banks for the panic and decide to fire him, or, to continue the death analogy, to terminate his employment. (Mr. Banks accepts responsibility for his children’s actions, but of course, the children were not really to blame. It’s the nameless customers who really started the panic, but they cannot be identified, and Mr. Dawes, Sr. and company apparently need a scapegoat.)

    In the movie, before returning to the bank to face the judgment of his superiors, Mr. Banks morosely ponders his imminent fate: to have his career cut short while he is in his “prime.” Again, this evokes memories of the Depression for Disney’s generation. For Disney himself it may have alluded to the times when his studio nearly went bankrupt, a fate that might have put an end to his career and artistic dreams. Pointedly, on his way to the bank, Mr. Banks passes by the Bird Woman who feeds the pigeons on the steps of St. Paul’s Cathedral (which is near the “City,” London’s banking district). Gabler reports that towards the end of his life, Disney would repeatedly summon the Sherman Brothers to play the song about the Bird Woman, “Feed the Birds,” for him. “Whether Walt related to the song because he related to the old woman’s loneliness, or whether in a life of grand gestures he appreciated her small one, or whether he recognized in her his own mortality, or whether the woman simply reminded him of his own mother, he never said. . . .But hearing the song, he would always cry” (p. 618). These all seem good explanations, and Gabler’s mention of mortality fits in with the idea of the bank as the realm of death.

    The Bird Woman is also a rather pathetic figure of destitution, and therefore may represent to Mr. Banks the specter of what he fears lies in wait for him once he has been terminated. Moreover, she is an icon of charity, feeding the birds despite her own poverty. Now that Mr. Banks is on the brink of financial ruin, he is himself in need of charity, but seems to realize he will find none from his judges at the bank.

    Despite Disney’s reputation for sugar-coating reality, it should be no surprise that his great films include moments of disturbing darkness, from the notorious death of Bambi’s mother to Mr. Banks’s descent into despair. Gabler quotes Disney as stating that “Life is composed of lights and shadows, and we would be untruthful, insincere, and saccharine if we tried to pretend there were no shadows” (p. 398).

    Clearly Disney could identify with Mr. Banks as the potential victim of a bank, just as he had been in real life. But if Mary Poppins was in part a psychodrama for Disney, then Disney may well have been the oppressor as well as the victim. Consciously or not, perhaps Disney saw part of himself in Mr. Dawes, Sr. According to Gabler, even before the studio strike, but as pressures from the Bank of America grew on him, Disney “displayed no hint of sentiment when it came to newer employees, especially as his dream of utopia faded under the glare of economic realities. . . .Walt thought nothing of firing someone who had outlived his usefulness, calling it “˜weeding out marginal people,’ or getting rid of “˜deadwood’” (p. 353). After the strike, Gabler reports, “Beyond the fear he inspired, Walt now displayed a vindictiveness occasionally even bordering on cruelty. . .” (p. 379). How bad did it get? This bad: Gabler quotes the recently deceased Richard Fleischer (who was not only a director who worked for Disney but was the son of his former rival Max) as recalling Disney telling him, “every once in a while I just fire everybody, then I hire them back in a couple of weeks. That way they don’t get too complacent. It keeps them on their toes” (p. 540). Mr. Banks identified himself with the bank until the bank turned against him. Through the elder Mr. Dawes, did Disney consciously or subconsciously recognize that his insensitivity towards employees mirrored the Bank of America’s coldness towards him?

    In the movie when Mr. Banks arrives at the bank to face his reckoning, he is subjected to a parody of the expulsion of a disgraced military officer: parts of his businessman’s “uniform,” such as his bowler hat and umbrella, are ritualistically ruined. It’s funny, but there is a dark edge to the scene; the man is being humiliated and symbolically reduced to nothing.

    Thus expelled from a harsh adult world, the movie’s Mr. Banks abruptly, giddily reverts to a kind of childhood, babbling “Supercalifragilisticexpialidocious,” telling a bad joke, and otherwise recapping motifs from earlier scenes involving Mary Poppins. It reminds me of Scrooge’s happy hysteria on awakening on Christmas Day, or George Bailey’s own delirious euphoria, following their respective visions. Soon Mr. Banks is rushing back home to go flying a kite with his children.

    Now that I have read Gabler’s book, Mr. Banks’s new enthusiasm for flying kites makes me think of Disney’s own passion for trains. Gabler tells how in the 1940s Disney’s artistic dreams were thwarted by a combination of factors, including the commercial failures of Pinocchio, Fantasia and Bambi; the strike that wrecked the studio’s sense of community; the financial constraints imposed on the studio by the bank; and even his sense that due to high costs and lack of sufficiently talented people, he could no longer make animated films that could equal his great work of the 1930s and early 1940s. Gabler reports that Disney’s wife Lillian “once claimed that after the war Walt had come close to another breakdown like the one he suffered in 1931, because he was working too hard, she said, though the better explanation was that he was depressed from his work showing so little result. . . ” (p. 465). Gabler aptly titles this chapter of his biography “Adrift.”

    But then Disney became fascinated, even obsessed, with trains: models, miniatures, and full size versions. “The train, like the animation, was to be all-consuming,” Gabler writes, “his escape from the animations, as the animations had been intended as an escape from reality” (p. 467). The trains became a substitute for animation as the object of his creative energies: “He had an object on which to lavish his affection. He had the pleasure of doing work exactly as he wanted and an opportunity to exercise the control that he had lost” (p. 467). This in turn led to Disney’s building a new house for himself, “where he could lay track for the railroad that consumed him” (p. 474). “The new house was partly a project, something to hold Walt’s attention, partly a haven to replace the studio as the trains had replaced the animation, and partly a way to secure himself against the assaults of the world by retreating to his family” (p. 474). That’s what Mr. Banks does when he is expelled from the bank: he returns to his family, who, he now recognizes, will still accept him even when the business world does not. Mr. Banks’s kite parallels Disney’s train.

    In his piece about Mary Poppins for The New York Times (Nov. 20, 2006), critic Edward Rothstein contends that the Mary Poppins movie “treated adulthood as if it should be another form of childhood. . . Life would be better if parents allowed themselves to dance like chimney sweeps and fly kites in the park. They shouldn’t just pay more attention to their children; they should become more like them.”

    And here is Rothstein’s key observation: “The movie’s liberatory spirit is, of course, out of the heart of the 1960s.” Now that is startling. What we think of the free-spirited Sixties is really the late Sixties. The Mary Poppins movie was released in 1964, and conventional wisdom, then and now, regarded Disney as conservative in outlook. But Rothstein’s observation fits with Gabler’s argument that “though Walt Disney was made to seem conservative–had made himself seem conservative because it fit the cultural ethos of the time–in his films, at least, he may not have been so very conservative after all, nor the barrier against the new America that he was often purported to be” (p. 615). Gabler contends that Disney’s movies “were surprisingly modern in outlook and not quite as innocuous as even Walt had declared them to be. The rock-ribbed Republican. . .also suspected authority and often questioned it, hated money and its acquisition, was wary of materialism, detested affectation. . . and all of those values had found their way into his movies and quite possibly into the mind-set of the generation who had been weaned on them” (p. 614). In the late 1960s the idea of turning one’s back on the establishment, rejecting the pursuit of materialism, and “dropping out” of the 9-to-5 life had become familiar and trendy; the movie version of Mr. Banks had already done all of this in 1964.

    Back on Dec. 5 in his blog, Neil Gaiman wrote, “And of course Mary Poppins is not — in the books — actually “˜practically perfect,’ although that’s her own opinion of herself. She’s conceited, dangerous, implacable and a force of nature. She teaches the Banks children nothing as banal as moral lessons, and I don’t believe that anybody is really emotionally transformed in the books, except for a handful of lucky people in the stories who are given the ability to run away from their lives or are set free from some kind of physical imprisonment (and that occurs more in the stories that Mary Poppins tells the children than in the stories themselves).” But those stories-within-stories supply thematic justification for Mr. Banks’s emotional transformation.

    Reading the first Mary Poppins book, I was taken with Mary Poppins’ tale of “The Dancing Cow” (in Chapter 5), concerning a Red Cow who “was very respectable” and who “always behaved like a perfect lady” (Odyssey paperback edition pgs. 66-67) and devotes herself to raising a succession of children. In other words it appears that she exactly lives up to society’s conventional standards of behavior for women back when P. L. Travers wrote the book: be ladylike and a good mother, and aspire to nothing else. Travers informs us further about the Red Cow that “All her days were exactly the same” and that “she felt that she could ask for nothing better than for all her days to be alike until she came to the end of them” (p. 67). It seems like a living death by boredom.

    However, Travers continues, “adventure. . .was stalking” the Red Cow (p. 67). One night, to the Red Cow’s own surprise, she “stood up suddenly and began to dance. She danced wildly and beautifully and in perfect time. . . .” The abruptness strikes me as being much like the movie’s Mr. Banks’ sudden shift from despair into childlike merriment. In each case pent-up emotions that they were not even aware of burst forth. Mr. Banks had previously thought that kite flying and words like “supercalifragilisticexpialidocious”: were silly, and the Red Cow tells herself, “I always thought dancing improper, but it can’t be since I myself am dancing. For I am a model cow.” And Mr. Banks, the proper businessman, similarly finds himself flying a kite.

    Moreover, just as Mr. Banks’ new euphoria verges on a hysterical lack of self-control, the Red Cow discovers that she is now unable to stop dancing. That’s the result of having repressed their inner drives for so long. I suppose that P. L. Travers made her cow red in homage to Hans Christian Andersen’s tale of “The Red Shoes,” whose wearer likewise cannot stop dancing. (So this is The Red Hooves?) It might seem as if the Red Cow will meet as tragic an end as Andersen’s heroine: in continual motion, the Red Cow cannot sleep and can barely eat. Nevertheless, she confesses, “it’s rather a pleasant feeling. . .as if laughter were running up and down inside me” (p. 73). The source of the Cow’s problem is a bright fallen star that has gotten caught on one of her horns. (Once again, the laws of science prove to be hogwash in Mary Poppins’ world.) The local King advises the Red Cow to try dislodging the star by jumping over the moon, as in the nursery rhyme. The Red Cow protests, “I am a decent, respectable animal and have been taught from my infancy that jumping was no occupation for a lady” (p. 75). Nonetheless, she overcomes her inhibitions, makes the jump, and it works: the star falls off, her dancing ceases, and she returns to her responsibility, the Red Calf, and “soon began to live her life just exactly as she had lived it before” (p. 78).

    And this doesn’t work. The Red Cow “began to feel uncomfortable and dissatisfied” and realizes that she misses dancing and “the happy feeling the star had given her” (p. 78). It gets worse: she loses her appetite, “her temper was atrocious. And she frequently burst into tears for no reason at all” (p. 78). (Reminds me of Disney’s own anger and depression.) Finally, the Red Cow embarks on a quest to find another fallen star. (If Victoria Page in the 1948 The Red Shoes movie begged, “Take off the Red Shoes,” the Red Cow wants their equivalent put back on.) But this happened “long ago” according to Mary Poppins (p. 66), and the Red Cow hasn’t found another fallen star yet.

    This fable may reflect Travers’ own ambiguous feelings about discipline, responsibility and propriety on one hand, and emotional release and self-expression on the other. As in “The Red Shoes,” the pursuit of pleasure to excess is destructive, but one lesson one might take from the Red Cow’s story is that once you free yourself from inhibition to follow your inner voice, it’s a mistake to go back to repression. The Red Cow’s story also suggests that you cannot count on more than one such opportunity for emotional freedom.

    Mr. Banks follows this principle by seizing the day at the movie’s and the musical’s endings, and I will have more to write about both Poppins and Disney next time.

    ADVERTISEMENTS FOR MYSELF
    There will be another Big Apple Con (http://www.bigapplecon.com/) at the Penn Plaza Pavilion (401 Seventh Ave. at 33rd St.) in Manhattan on Friday, January 19 and Saturday, January 20. I’ll be there on Saturday, when I’m scheduled to help interview Doom Patrol co-creator Arnold Drake and She-Hulk writer Dan Slott.

    Copyright 2007 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #159: The Da Vinci Comics Code

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    cic2007-01-05.gifSince I last wrote about the Library of Congress’s “Cartoon America” exhibition (in “Comics in Context” #157), the show has been extended until February 24, 2007, and I’ve also discovered the Library’s online version of the exhibit. The Library does not have the rights to display online all of the artwork in the show, but you can find a number of the pieces I previously described, including the Bambi concept drawing, the Betty Boop model sheet, the New York cartoons by Peter Arno and James Thurber, the Winsor McCay Gertie the Dinosaur drawing and Dream of the Rarebit Fiend strip, and the Charlie Brown soliloquy in Charles M. Schulz’s Peanuts.

    “Cartoon America” poses a very basic question to the viewer, which is made explicit in the interview with editorial cartoonist Pat Oliphant in the accompanying book Cartoon America: Comic Art in the Library of Congress (edited by Harry Katz and published by Harry N. Abrams). In an interview (p. 244) Oliphant says, “it’s a wretched word, cartooning, Without being precious, when you talk about cartooning, you don’t know what sort of cartooning you’re talking about. Are you talking about Disney? Are you talking about gags? Are you talking about illustrations? It’s an all-encompassing word, which drives me crazy.” What, then, is cartoon art?

    Originally, as Wikipedia states, the term “cartoon” meant “a full-size drawing made on paper as a study for a further drawings, such as a painting or tapestry. “ During the Renaissance, an artist who was going to paint a fresco would first do a full-scale drawing–the “cartoon”–as a guide. Hence, you may see preserved “cartoons” of this sort by Leonardo or Raphael exhibited in museums.

    Claypool Comics editor/writer/artist Richard Howell recently told me that cartooning involves “economy and exaggeration.” As we use the term nowadays, “cartoon” usually means a drawing that entails a degree of caricature, usually for humorous purpose, or an animated film. An editorial cartoon can be entirely serious, but it usually is drawn using caricature, exaggerating human features. Although an animated film need not necessarily be funny, it is popularly called a cartoon, just as comic books are called “comic,” even though most of them nowadays deal in genres other than comedy. As for “economy,” this word suggests that cartooning, even if it does not involve caricature, involves drawing figures and objects in a simplified manner rather than with detailed realism.

    So, is caricature a determining factor in whether or not something is cartoon art? This is something I wondered while exploring a new show at the Metropolitan Museum of Art, “Glitter and Doom: German Portraits from the 1920s,” which is dominated by expressionist works by Max Beckmann, Otto Dix, and George Grosz, and runs till February 19, 2007 (You can find an online version of this exhibition here). Most of these portraits are heavily caricatured, reflecting the artists’ opinions of German society in the years preceding the Nazis’ rise to power. These are all paintings and drawings, which the Metropolitan displays as works of fine art, but are they also arguably cartoons?

    But can you have cartoons without caricature? In the Cartoon America book (p. 248) the veteran editorial cartoonist Oliphant laments that “The great ones [cartoonists] could really draw, going back to [James] Gillray and [William] Hogarth… I grew up believing that cartooning was a noble profession. Unfortunately, these days nobody seems to care much about drawing. It’s a great loss to the profession. We have a whole state of cartoons that pay no attention at all to drawing. Like these people have never seen Charles Dana Gibson.” Gibson was best known for his “Gibson Girls,” drawings of beautiful “modern” women of the first years of the twentieth century; although Gibson’s work isn’t in the “Cartoon America” show, it does turn up in the book (see pages 14, 22 and 246). But there’s no trace of caricature in these drawings, which are done in a very naturalistic style, even if the women are idealized figures. Isn’t Gibson an illustrator rather than a cartoonist? Yet Gibson was included in the cartoonists’ “Hall of Fame” on Mort Walker’s Museum of Cartoon Art, and the “Cartoon America” show has an entire section devoted to illustration.

    This section has illustrations that involve a considerable degree of “cartooniness,” such as a “Raggedy Ann and Andy in the River“ by their creator, Johnny Gruelle (1880-1938). But other illustrations on display are wholly realistic, including a drawing (circa 1937) of Davy Crockett and settlers by Dean Cornwell (1892-1960), who was included in the Dahesh Museum’s “Stories to Tell” show on the Golden Age of American illustration (see “Comics in Context” #132).

    Then there are illustrations in the show that fall somewhere between these two poles. In “Alcohol, Death and the Devil“ (circa 1830-1840) by George Cruikshank (1792-1878), the illustrator of many of Charles Dickens’ novels, the fantastic figure personifying Alcohol–a scrawny man whose head is a skull, topped by serpents like Medusa’s–is nonetheless portrayed realistically enough to seem an ominous menace. The Devil, hovering behind Alcohol, has a simple, caricatured face that makes him seem more humorous than dangerous, and their potential victims, in the background, are drawn as simple cartoon figures, most of whom have only blank ovals for heads. (After visiting the Library of Congress, I went over to the National Gallery of Art, and there, in an exhibition titled “The Artist’s Vision: Romantic Traditions in Britain,” I found another Cruikshank piece. So here is an artist who has been claimed as both a practitioner of cartoon art and a creator of fine art!)

    In her 1918 work “Uncle Sam’s Girl-Shower” (Cartoon America p. 144 and here), pioneering female cartoonist/illustrator Nell Brinkley (1888-1944) comments on young women coming to work in Washington D. C. during World War I by depicting them floating down from the sky on the left of the picture. In a large panel to the right of center, one of Brinkley’s young women converses with Uncle Sam, a tall, elderly man who here is dressed in a conventional suit rather than his familiar stars-and-stripes costume. The women’s round, youthful faces with their simplified features are not only endearingly cute but are arguably cartoonish, but their figures and clothing are drawn quite realistically, in what the show’s website calls “a distinctive, fine-lined drawing style.” Moreover, Brinkley naturally portrays Uncle Sam as an old man that one could meet on the street in real life..

    The handsomest piece in this section is a 1922 story illustration (“The phone rang, and Hugh leapt to answer it.”) (Cartoon America p. 23 and here) by James Montgomery Flagg (1877-1960), another artist who was included in the Dahesh show. Husband Hugh’s smug sense of triumph is so broadly portrayed in his face and body language that it crosses the dividing line into caricature. But the emotions of his wife Polly, who seems vulnerable and beleaguered, are portrayed more subtly, and her face looks more naturalistic than her husband’s. Indeed, apart from Hugh’s broad facial expression and stance, the couple and their surroundings are drawn quite realistically. Flagg’s nuanced delineation of shadings and textures through fine linework seems to belong more to the world of fine art than to cartoons, which we tend to associate with broader strokes of the pen.

    The Cartoon America book includes two pieces by the Punch caricaturist Sir John Tenniel (1820-1914), who is best known today for his classic illustrations for the original editions of Lewis Carroll’s Alice books. Though neither of the Library’s pieces come from those books, Tenniel follows a similar strategy in them, juxtaposing the real and the unreal, the naturalistic and the caricatured. In “A Contented Maid” (1894) (p. 53), a rather dowdy, but relatively realistically drawn woman, is led past a naturalistic background by a pompous man who incongruously wears what seems like a jester’s costume. Through his exaggeratedly proud facial expression, gesture and stance, Tenniel “cartoons” this unlikely suitor. In the other example, “The Old Story” (1884) (p. 51), the division between the real and the caricatured is even stronger: here Red Riding Hood, realistically drawn, encounters the wolf, who stands upright and wears a full suit of clothes, including a top hat, and, like a good British gentleman, carries an umbrella. As he did with the White Rabbit and other talking animals in the Alice books, Tenniel pulls off the feat of turning the wolf into a caricature of a man while still making him look realistic enough to fit into the same naturalistic world as the human being in the picture.

    Since we’re investigating the connection between caricature and cartoon art, it’s appropriate that one of the six segments into which the “Cartoon America” show is divided is entitled “Caricature,” including works by theatrical caricaturist Al Hirschfeld and political caricaturist David Levene.

    In this section is a striking 1954 “Self-Portrait” (Cartoon America p. 229) by New Yorker artist Saul Steinberg (1914-1999), who depicts himself holding a bottle of ink in his right hand and a pen in his left, drawing an elaborate, calligraphic series of curlicues where his head should be. Steinberg is presenting his artwork, his creations, as his identity. He is suggesting that his head is full of artistic imagery. A possible implication is that the Steinberg of the picture has drawn his body as well, suggesting that he is his own creation: he has devised his own persona as artist: Max Fleischer’s Koko the Clown comes “Out of the Inkwell,” and in this picture, so does the artist. Perhaps Steinberg is suggesting that he has no identity apart from his work, an idea with dark implications. Since the calligraphy is more beautiful than the seemingly crudely drawn body, perhaps he is suggesting that art is superior to nature. This is a simple picture, which on the surface seems intended only to amuse, and yet it inspires so many interpretations.

    Here too can be found a 1743 etching by the British artist William Hogarth (1697-1764), whom the website calls “the father of English caricature,” entitled “Characters & Caricaturas” [sic] (Cartoon America p. 29 and here), in which he depicts over a hundred faces. The website explains that “Hogarth distinguished between characters (faces drawn from nature) and “˜caricaturas” (faces with exaggerated and grotesque features).” To demonstrate his point, along the bottom of the etching Hogarth drew copies of handsome faces by Raphael; alongside copies Hogarth drew of grotesquely caricatured faces by Leonardo da Vinci and another Italian Renaissance artist, Annibale Carracci. In his preface to the Cartoon America book, its editor Harry Katz asserts that “American cartoon art evolved from varied historical sources” including “Renaissance grotesques drawn by Leonardo da Vinci and Pier Leone Ghezzi [and] the English and French print satirists of the eighteenth century,” a category that includes Hogarth and James Gillray. (I reviewed the New York Public Library’s Gillray retrospective back in “Comics in Context” #72.)

    Consider: Leonardo is one of the foremost geniuses in human history, who turned his hand to numerous forms of the arts and sciences, and it also turns out that he is one of the fathers of modern cartoon art!

    Perhaps the biggest surprise that the Cartoon America book will have for readers is its revelation of how many significant figures in the history of fine art worked in cartoon art. In the book’s “A Brief History of American Cartooning,” which is actually lengthy and rewardingly informative, Katz explains that “It was the Englishman William Hogarth who, between 1720 and 1760, revived the art of caricature from the Renaissance, elevating comic art to an unprecedented seriousness of purpose.” (p. 29).

    Hogarth is a key figure in the history of comic and cartoon art in another way, which Katz misses but which Scott McCloud pointed out in his landmark book Understanding Comics. Hogarth was renowned for creating series of pictures which told a continuous story, such as his Marriage a la Mode, six paintings which today hang in the National Gallery, London, from which Hogarth made engravings. Such sequences of pictures by Hogarth were pioneering examples of what Will Eisner termed “sequential art,” the form more popularly called comics. According to the website Hogarth did “Characters and Caricaturas” in 1743 for the “subscription ticket” for the Marriage a la Mode engravings.

    Katz credits “the first political cartoon published in America” to one of the nation’s Founding Fathers: Benjamin Franklin, whose celebrated cartoon “Join, or Die” was published in The Pennsylvania Gazette on May 9, 1754 (shown in Cartoon America, p. 24). It pictures a snake broken into segments representing the pre-revolutionary American colonies. The cartoon doesn’t display any great drawing ability; what makes it powerful is its metaphorical concept. Franklin’s point is that the colonies must join forces to combat their adversaries in the French and indian War; otherwise the “snake” will perish.

    Though the snake has represented evil since the Book of Genesis, Franklin’s serpent was widely adopted by American patriots as a symbol of their country, including Paul Revere, whom Katz credits as another significant figure in the history of American cartooning. But the example of one of Revere’s cartoons (which he actually copied from a sketch by his brother) that Katz reprints in the Cartoon America book (p. 9) once again raises the question of what a cartoon is. “The Bloody Massacre,” first published on March 28, 1770, is a depiction of the infamous Boston Massacre of American patriots by British redcoats. The composition is fine, but the architecture in the background is drawn far more skillfully than the humans in the foreground. Revere isn’t practicing caricature here, but merely demonstrating the limitations of his primitive skill at drawing the human face and form.

    A friend of mine suggested to me that there is a difference between cartooning as a style and the cartoon as a format. But just what makes this a cartoon? Isn’t it rather a 1770 equivalent of today’s courtroom sketches, an effort to record an actual event through realistic illustration, a skill in which Revere was severely lacking?

    Making the connection between 18th century British cartooning and American cartooning clear, Katz points out that Gillray himself adopted Franklin’s image of the snake as a symbol of America for his 1782 cartoon about the British defeat at Yorktown, the final battle of the American Revolutionary War (p. 28).

    Another important figure in fine art whom Katz credits as a significant influence on the history of cartoon art is France’s Honore Daumier (1808-1879), who is renowned for utilizing caricature for social and political satire.

    A clear example of Daumier’s mastery of cartoon art is “Le ventre legislatif,” translated as “The Legislative Paunch” (Cartoon America, p. 118), created in 1834 as a print for subscribers to a journal called (appropriately) La Caricature. In it Daumier caricatures members of the French legislature as a collection of grotesques: smug, self-satisfied, bad-tempered, and obese. One of the legislators in the front row has an enormous, beak-like nose, making him look like a vulture wearing human clothing. That’s an image that later political cartoonists will use.

    But another print for La Caricature which Katz includes in the Cartoon America book (p.119) involves no caricature whatsoever. This is “Rue Transnonain, le 15 Avril 1834″ (which you can also find here), which depicts the aftermath of an incident in which French troops invaded a building suspected of housing an assassin and slaughtered the inhabitants. In this picture, all naturalistically portrayed, are several of the victims, notably the corpse of a man in a nightshirt lying on the floor, atop a small, dead child, with blood streaming from its head onto the floor. Daumier isn’t joking here: the power and the horror of this lithograph lie in its utter realism.

    It’s not “cartoony” in the least, but I suppose one might call it an editorial cartoon, in that it is a drawing that comments on a political issue of its time.
    But is every drawing–or print or painting–that makes a political point a cartoon? Is Pablo Picasso’s Guernica (1937), which criticizes the Nazi bombing of the town of Guernica during the Spanish Civil War, a cartoon? I’ve always thought so, since it involves caricature-like distortions of form. But what about Eugene Delacroix’s painting, Liberty Leading the People (1830)? I’d say no, and there’s no caricature involved, yet it uses a symbolic figure at its center, the woman representing Liberty, the same device traditionally employed by editorial cartoonists.

    Katz contends that Daumier was an influence on another major figure of the fine art world, the American artist Winslow Homer (1836-1910), and reprints his 1856 print, “Arguments of the Chivalry,” which records the notorious incident in which a Senator from South Carolina, Preston Brooks, beat his fellow Senator, Massachusetts’ Charles Sumner, with a cane in an argument over slavery (Cartoon America p. 37). This, too, seems to me to fit into the same area as courtroom sketches; Homer draws the people naturalistically, without any satiric exaggerations, and I cannot count this piece as a cartoon. If this is a cartoon, then any drawing on a political subject is a cartoon, and the term “cartoon” loses its distinctive meaning.

    Nonetheless, the Cartoon America book makes the point that there have been important figures in the fine art world who have also created cartoon art. Katz reprints pieces that are clearly cartoons by the Ashcan School painters George Luks (p. 50), who also worked on The Yellow Kid, and John Sloan (p. 60), as well as a drawing by Stuart Davis which straddles the border between cartoon art and illustration (p. 63). One could describe Davis’s simplified, stylized graphic approach towards elements in this drawing as moving towards abstraction and moving towards cartooning with equal justice. Remember that in the “Masters of American Comics” show, co-curator John Carlin often described aspects of its cartoons as abstract.

    In his essay about Lyonel Feininger’s comics work in the Cartoon America book, Art Spiegelman writes that “Only a handful of American painters of the period dabbled in cartooning–George Luks’ work on The Yellow Kid comes to mind–but lots of esteemed European modernists–Picasso, Toulouse-Lautrec, Gris, Kirchner, Kupka, and Grosz, to name just a few–drew cartoons for publication either at the beginnings of or throughout their careers” (p. 134). There are Picasso’s and George Grosz’s names again.

    The full title of the last of the six divisions of the “Cartoon America” exhibit is “The Ungentlemanly Art: Political Illustration,” and the brochure explains that Art Wood, the editorial cartoonist who compiled the collection from which the show is drawn, used the term “illustration” “to describe the enormous talent and craft that went into a work of art produced to capture a moment in time.” This just further muddies the waters as far as drawing a distinction between cartoon art and illustration, as well as possibly suggesting that these “political illustrations” are somehow superior works of art to gag cartoons or comic strips. the pieces on display in this segment of the show all engage in either the “exaggeration” or “economy” that marks them clearly as editorial cartoons.

    Among them is a piece by the great 19th century editorial cartoonist Thomas Nast (1840-1902), who not only popularized the elephant and donkey as symbols of the Republican and Democratic parties, but even defined the visual image of Santa Claus; all of these are examples of the power of cartoon art to affect the culture.

    The Nast cartoon in the show, “The Crown Covers a Multitude of Shortcomings“ (1888), mocks former Senator and Republican Presidential candidate James G. Blaine for his “crowning folly”. Nast cruelly undercuts Blaine’s considerable political stature by portraying him as a fat, ungainly figure with unkempt hair who seems to have a misshapen leg and walks with a cane. A sign behind him ironically refers to “a step in the direction of free trade”: Nast’s Blaine looks as if he might topple over if he took another step. To the left of Blaine, Nast has drawn a crown atop the derriere of some unidentified animal, as if Blaine had created a Bizarro World in which crowns no longer rest atop the heads of regal leaders.

    There is a more celebrated and powerful Nast cartoon in the Cartoon America book (p. 45), “Let Us Prey” (September 23, 1871), in which he caricatures his most notorious target, the corrupt New York political leader William M. “Boss” Tweed and his cronies as vultures with human heads, as if they were 19th century versions of the Harpies of Greek mythology.

    Contemporary political cartoonist Patrick Oliphant paid homage to Nast with his cartoon in the show, “Waiting for Reagan” (1982), in which he portrays various right wing critics of President Reagan as human-headed vultures. Oliphant’s version is arguably eerier, since he gives them eyes without pupils, surrounded by heavily shadowed sockets, rendering even their human faces inhuman. The Cartoon America book includes a 1965 cartoon, for which Oliphant won a Pulitzer Prize, showing Ho Chi Minh holding the corpse of a North Vietnamese civilian, in what may be an allusion to Michelangelo’s Pieta (p. 260).

    Most contemporary editorial cartoons that I see today are gag cartoons, but when I was growing up, my favorite editorial cartoonist was Herbert L. Block, alias Herblock (1919-2001), who worked in the Nast tradition of visual metaphor. Starting his career in 1929, he moved to The Washington Post in 1946 and continued drawing cartoons for that paper until his death at the start of the 21st century. Growing up, I would borrow Herblock’s books of collected cartoons from my local library to teach myself about history since World War II, and I looked forward to the publication of a new collection every presidential election year.

    There is a Herblock cartoon in the “Cartoon America” show and more in the book. But I was pleasantly surprised to discover on arriving at the Library of Congress that it was running a show of his work, “Enduring Outrage: Editorial Cartoons by Herblock,” which runs through January 20, 2007 in its aptly titled “American Treasures” gallery (and which has an online version). After his death, the Herb Block Foundation donated 14,000 of Block’s finished cartoons and over 50,000 of his preparatory sketches to the Library of Congress; “Enduring Outrage” presents only a select handful of this massive collection.

    Herblock’s symbolic figures can be familiar ones. In “The Gray Plague“ (January 29, 1967) he uses the traditional image of the Grim Reaper, a skeletal, robed figure carrying a scythe, to critique the potentially lethal effects of air pollution. What makes this cartoon powerful is the unusual way he uses the Reaper, who becomes a gigantic figure amid modern skyscrapers, towering above gridlocked traffic. Smoke pours from chimneys, and Herblock’s shading all through the cartoon suggests an atmosphere thick with smog and smoke. A cloud hovering above the street is labeled “Air Pollution,” and the Grim Reaper, likewise rising from the street, himself seems like an ominous cloud that has taken a macabre form. With his scythe, the Grim Reaper represents Death come to harvest the victims of pollution; he is a medieval figure within a contemporary setting.

    Another cartoon about pollution, “The Drums” (March 21, 1979), demonstrates the darkly ironic side of Herblock’s sense of humor. Here the Grim Reaper beats the tops of metal canisters marked “Radioactive Wastes” and “Toxic Chemicals,” as if he were playing bongo drums, as the contents of other dangerous canisters leak out into a lethal stream. The medieval image of the “Dance of Death” links Death with rhythmical movement, as if to music; here Herblock updates the musical metaphor.

    The most famous symbolic figure that Herblock created is a modern version of the Reaper: Mr. Atom, an anthropomorphic atomic bomb with a sinister brow, a five o’clock shadow, and hairy hands, making him look like a brutal, potentially violent thug. The image may seem obvious, but again, Herblock’s greatness lies in his inspired uses of this imagery. In a May 14, 1963 cartoon, Mr. Atom looms over the globe, placing his left hand upon it, as if it were his possession. With his right hand he snuffs out a candle, labeled “Test Ban Hopes.” In clever touches, the candle has already virtually melted into a pool of wax, and the puff of smoke from its extinguished flame takes the form of a mushroom cloud from an H-bomb explosion. The cartoon’s title, spoken by Mr. Atom, is a quotation from Shakespeare’s Macbeth: “. . .Out, out brief candle! LIfe’s but a walking shadow. . . .” The line is a chilling description of mortality. The epic scale of Herblock’s cartoon, picturing the Earth, shifts Shakespeare’s line from referring to Macbeth alone to involving all of humanity; simultaneously Shakespeare’s words lend Herblock’s darkly humorous cartoon a sense of profound drama.

    Herblock could not only chill his readers but also shock them. His January 13, 1993 cartoon “Bosnia“ echoes Daumier’s “Rue Transnonain, le 15 Avril 1834.” Block’s cartoon shows the corpses of a woman and a baby, with a pool of black blood linking their heads. The woman has been impaled by two enormous weapons: a knife marked “Milosevic Serbs” and an umbrella (such as British gentlemen traditionally carried) labeled “World Leaders.” In other words, Herblock blames not only the brutality of the Serbs but also the inaction by the proper, respectable diplomats and politicians of the rest of the world. Surprisingly, the woman’s body is half-naked. Perhaps Herblock was trying to emphasize her vulnerability (as Daumier did with the man in his nightshirt) or was alluding to the sexual assaults on women during the Bosnian war. Or perhaps Herblock was alluding to the fine art tradition of painting mythical or symbolic figures as partly or wholly nude, as with the topless figure of Liberty in Delacroix’s Liberty Leading the People. Block’s woman, after all, represents all the Serbs’ victims in the war in Bosnia.

    Herblock’s work is not just “enduring outrage” but “enduring art”: though he was responding to topical events, his work continues to be relevant to the present.

    Take, for example, his January 28, 1968 cartoon which shows Uncle Sam, literally up to his neck in water, holding a rifle above his head as he makes his way through a swamp labeled “Asia.” Herblock’s subject at the time was the Vietnam War, but the cartoon could equally serve as a comment on America’s current involvement in Iraq.

    Consider, too, another cartoon, from May 29, 1987, that involves no fantastic figures or settings, and nowadays takes on new relevance. Lying on a floor is a newspaper with the headline, “‘I think it’s better if the Iranians go to bed every night wondering what we might do.’–Reagan.” Herblock instead shows us a man , wearing a button labeled “U. S.” lying in bed in a darkened room lit only by his eyes, staring out in sleepless worry and dismay.

    So there are certainly many rewards to be found in the Library of Congress’s two current shows on cartoon art. There are many pieces I haven’t described, including fine examples in the comic strips section of Milton Caniff’s Terry and the Pirates (from 1942), Al Capp’s Li’l Abner (1943), Roy Crane’s Wash Tubbs (1935), Harold Gray’s Little Orphan Annie (1962), Johnny Hart’s B. C. (1969), Lynn Johnston’s For Better or for Worse (1983), Richard Outcault’s Buster Brown (a 1907 Sunday strip in which he meets Outcault’s Yellow Kid!), Alex Raymond’s Secret Agent X-9 (1934), and Cliff Sterrett’s Polly and Her Pals (1933).

    Yet although James H, Billington, the Librarian of Congress himself, bids us to “prepare to laugh, wince, and wonder at the best of the best of American cartoon art” in his foreword to the Cartoon America book (p. 10), there is a canyon-sized gap in both the show and the book. Where is the original artwork from comic books?

    DC Comics president Paul Levitz contributed a brief essay about comic books to the catalogue, but discusses them principally as objects of nostalgia. The book’s editor, Harry Katz, concedes in his afterword that “More work needs to be done toward acquiring drawings for Underground Comix, comic books, and graphic novels.” (p. 307). No kidding. How can a national collection of cartoon art lack any original artwork by Jack Kirby, to name just one of the missing? Since the American comic book as we know it began in 1935, the Library has seventy-two years worth of the history of this artform to catch up with. Aside from animation, comic books and graphic novels have arguably become the most significant form of cartoon art in the last few decades. Yet neither the “Cartoon America” show nor the book betray a real sense that they have missed out on something important. Katz’s “A Brief History of American Cartooning” concentrates almost entirely on editorial cartoons and comic strips. How strange that the show and the book keep trying to incorporate illustration under the heading of cartoon art while nearly ignoring the comic book medium. Art Spiegelman, Trina Robbins, and Chris Ware turn up as essay writers in the Cartoon America book, but it contains none of their own artwork.

    A seeming exception to this exclusion of comic book work is a chapter on the “Cartoons of 9/11.” Here are striking works by comic book artists Kieron Dwyer, Peter Kuper, and Sue Coe. There is a powerful piece by Will Eisner, “Reality 9/11″ from 9-11: Emergency Relief (2002), showing a man watching the devastation at Ground Zero on television: blood drips from the TV set, smoke billows out from the picture tube, and the man seems covered in ash (p. 303). There is even Alex Ross’s cover for DC Comics’ 9/11 Vol. 2 (2002), showing Superman and Krypto looking up in admiration at a poster of police, firemen, and medical workers (p. 306).

    But except for a Doonesbury 9/11 strip, all of the comics art reprinted in this chapter are single panel works, not sequential art at all! Indeed, these single panels are really editorial cartoons that were published in comic books rather than newspapers.

    The Alex Ross cover poses a final quandary regarding the definition of cartooning. Ross usually works in a style of heightened photorealism, influenced by illustration, and devoid of the “exaggeration and economy” associated with cartooning. In works like Marvels, Kingdom Come and the current Justice, Ross demonstrates that it is entirely possible to do comics that are not cartoon art.

    ADVERTISEMENTS FOR MYSELF
    To my surprise Marvel has just published yet another Essentials volume of The Official Handbook of the Marvel Universe, this one reprinting the 1989 Update limited series, on which I was the principal writer. An even bigger surprise was that, just in time for Christmas, I received a reprint royalty check for an Essentials volume of the Handbook! And I had resigned myself to never getting anything more out of any of these reprint books than a complimentary copy! Well, I was going to recommend that you buy the new reprint volume anyway, and now I have even more motivation to do so!

    I also recommend that you visit the blog of my friend and fellow former Marvel writer Peter B. Gillis, who just posted some characteristically insightful reflections on the current state of superhero comics, inspired by our encounter on Christmas.

    -Copyright 2007 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #158: Jolly Holiday

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    cic2006-12-15.jpgWith the approach of the holiday season, I found appropriate entertainment by going to see the Walt Disney Company and producer Cameron Mackintosh’s new Mary Poppins stage musical, which opened in London in 2004, and which arrived on Broadway at the New Amsterdam Theatre this fall. Based on both P. L. Travers original Mary Poppins books and the 1964 Disney movie, the stage musical is another retelling of the tale of the proper but mysterious nanny with supernatural powers who takes charge of the children Jane and Michael Banks.

    As I did with Disney’s Tarzan Broadway musical (see “Comics in Context” #133), I used the occasion of attending the Mary Poppins musical to finally read P. L. Travers’ first Mary Poppins book, originally published in 1934. I expect that by now far more people know Mary Poppins from the Disney movie, which I’ve seen several times, most recently the ABC Family Channel telecasts on December 11, than from Travers’ six books about the character.

    But I have long been aware of the recurring complaint about the Disney film: that Walt Disney, actress Julie Andrews, and their collaborators, turned Travers’ severe and rather forbidding Mary Poppins cheerful and sugary sweet. Cultural critic Edward Rothstein reiterates the point in his article in The New York Times (Nov. 20, 2006), pointing out that Travers’ Mary Poppins “often had a look of “˜fury,’ who “˜snaps,’ and “˜sniffs’ and “˜retorts.’ That Mary Poppins “˜never wasted time being nice.’” In her article about Travers in the December 19, 2005 issue of The New Yorker, Caitlin Flanagan writes that Mary Poppins “is, in fact, very often “˜angry,’ “˜threatening,’ “˜scornful,’ and “˜frightening.’” On the other hand, Disney’s Mary Poppins announces early on on the film that she is “never cross.”

    So I watched the Family Channel telecast with this in mind. For most of the film Andrews’ Poppins is haughty and strict, as the character is in the book. Disney’s Poppins does not behave quite as unpleasantly as Travers’ can. The book states that Mary Poppins is “frightening” (Odyssey Classics paperback, p. 12), and at one point Mary Poppins “regarded” her young charge Michael “with something like disgust” (p. 116). But, for example, consider the scene in the movie in which Mary Poppins visits her Uncle Albert, who levitates to the ceiling when he laughs. Mary Poppins’ friend Bert and the two children she is nannying, Jane and Michael Banks, find his laughter contagious, join in, and are soon levitating upwards as well, while a severe Mary Poppins seethes with disapproval at this supposedly improper behavior. This scene is adapted reasonably faithfully from the first book, and here Disney’s and Travers’ versions of Mary Poppins exactly coincide. (This scene, and its memorable song, “I Love to Laugh” are not in the Broadway musical, perhaps because it would require five people in flight harnesses at once, or perhaps because it would dilute the theatrical impact of Mary Poppins’ flying at the end of each act.)

    The reputation of Disney’s kinder, gentler Mary Poppins seems to me to be founded on three key sequences, which are all so memorable that it’s not surprising that they eclipse the scenes in which Andrews performs more in Travers mode. First, there’s the song “A Spoonful of Sugar,” which, as the lyrics say, helps the medicine go down. This too turns out to be based on an incident in the first book, in which Mary Poppins administers medicine to Jane and Michael, which turns out to taste delicious. But whereas in the book Mary Poppins wears a “stern” expression and gives Jane “a warning, terrible glance” (p. 12), in the movie Andrews’ Poppins is smiling and beaming with happiness as she sings. Her manner fits the point of the song, and, actually, there seems to me to be a contradiction in the book between Travers’ sweet-tasting medicine and the sour temperament of her Mary Poppins. If medicine should have an appealing taste, then why shouldn’t a nanny have a pleasant disposition? By the same logic, wouldn’t that make the children more willing to obey her? Or is Travers making a more complicated point with the medicine? Is she saying that just as something necessary but unpleasant, like medicine, should paradoxically taste good, then Mary Poppins, who takes the children on wonderful adventures, should have an unpleasant manner in order to create a kind of balance?

    Rothstein insightfully pointed out that Travers’ Mary Poppins “is a caricature of the most authoritarian form of adulthood” and that “In part this reveals how children perceive adulthood.” He explains that children must obey their parents, and yet the children recognize that with adulthood comes a “realm of magical freedom” they do not yet have. I compare this to the theme of maturation in the superhero genre: for example, the boy Peter Parker, who is dutiful to his aunt and must obey his tyrannical boss, becomes Spider-Man, with superhuman abilities that give him a freedom to rise above society’s restrictions.

    Rothstein argues that “Discipline is required for the magical realms to be revealed; it is what makes freedom possible. Without the one, there is meaningless fantasy; without the other, there is heartless rigidity.” Here too there is a similarity to the superhero genre, in which, traditionally, the protagonist has both a “civilian identity,” in which he is a part of society and accepts its restrictions on his behavior, and a superheroic one, in which he has abilities and freedom exceeding those of ordinary people, but nonetheless devotes them to the service of society. The most famous of the superheroes is both Superman and Clark Kent. To be only Clark Kent would doom him to a life of “rigidity” he could not transcend; to be only Superman would mean leading a “meaningless fantasy” life without grounding in everyday humanity. Mary Poppins has extraordinary magical powers, and yet she works as a nanny, using them in caring for children. Similarly, her friend Bert, as we shall see, may have magical powers of his own, but instead devotes himself to art (in the book, movie and musical) or to serving society as a chimney sweep (in the movie and musical).

    Although Cameron Mackintosh promised P. L. Travers before her death that his stage version of Mary Poppins would be truer to her character, if you have a singing, dancing Mary Poppins, then the battle to make her consistently stern and authoritarian has already been lost. The other two sequences in the movie that present a sunny, cheerful Mary Poppins are the adventure in the world within Bert’s sidewalk painting, full of singing and dancing (with the songs “It’s a Jolly Holiday with Mary” and “Supercalifragilisticexpialidocious”) and the “Step in Time” song and dance number with Bert and his fellow chimney sweeps on the rooftops of London.

    The “Jolly Holiday” sequence is surprisingly faithful to a chapter of the book, in which Mary Poppins and Bert do indeed enter a world within his painting, find themselves dressed in fancy clothes, and are served tea in the woods by a waiter (but not by penguins, which Walt Disney contributed to the film). Moreover, in Travers’ book Bert is clearly Mary Poppins’ boyfriend, and their adventure in this alternate world is just as clearly a date. My biggest surprise is that in this chapter, which is only the second in the book, Travers has Mary Poppins’ stern persona entirely melt away. She speaks “softly” (p. 18) and “brightly” (p. 19); she is described as “pleased” (p. 23). Even the book’s insistence that Mary Poppins is rather plain (and therefore does not look like Julie Andrews) is undercut in this chapter by Bert’s awestruck reaction to her in her new finery: “Then he gulped and said: “˜Golly!’” (p. 22).

    There has been some controversy in the New York City media about the end of Act I of the musical, in which toys come to life and menace Jane and Michael, who have been naughty. I don’t know how I would react to seeing this if I were a small child, but from my adult perspective it didn’t seem at all disturbing. What I found strange was the musical’s treatment of “Jolly Holiday.” Mary Poppins, Bert and the children do not enter Bert’s painting, presumably because that would be a hard thing to stage. Instead the park transforms into a more colorful setting, Mary Poppins and Bert reenter in handsome new costumes, and statues in the classical style, including one of the god Neleus, come to life and join in the dancing. (Neleus’s statue is from one of Travers’ later Poppins books.) The strange thing is that Neleus and the other statues are virtually nude. (They’re actually in skin-tight costumes and body paint, and naughty bits remain covered, but the effect is still that of semi-nudity.)

    Perhaps this wouldn’t bother Travers. In the first Mary Poppins book a star named Maia appears on Earth as a human child, and Travers emphasizes that “the child had practically no clothes on, only a light wispy strip of blue stuff that looked as though she had torn it from the sky to wrap round her naked body” (p. 183). Mary Poppins is started by the sight, but Maia is unconcerned by her near-nudity, and perhaps Travers means us to be unconcerned as well.

    It seems weird and perhaps a little disturbing to watch performers in Edwardian costumes cavorting with semi-nude figures in front of an audience full of families with small children. But, as I said, Mary Poppins and Bert are obviously on a date of sorts, so I suppose that Neleus and the semi-nude female statues provide a libidinous subtext.

    My initial reaction to reading this chapter was that it gave Walt Disney all the justification he needed to presenting the merry, beautiful, singing and dancing Mary Poppins of the “Jolly Holiday” sequence. Since this is how she behaves around her boyfriend Bert, then it would also make sense that his presence would induce her to join in the merriment in “Step in Time.” Watching the movie again, I noticed that after engaging in dancing in “Step in Time,” Andrews’ Mary Poppins abruptly and amusingly reverts to her usual staid persona, holding up her hands and turning her face in exaggerated disdain when the other chimney sweeps offer to keep dancing with her.

    My second reaction was to realize what the difference is between Travers’ and Disney’s versions of the “Jolly Holiday” sequence: in Travers’ version the kids aren’t there. Travers makes the point that this happens on Mary Poppins’ day off, so she has dropped the staid, stern persona she otherwise uses in her dealings with the Banks family and virtually everyone else.

    So why did Travers do this as early as Chapter Two? Presumably it was to alert the reader that there was more to Mary Poppins’ personality than the strict disciplinarian in the rest of the book. To build upon Rothstein’s reasoning, this chapter speaks to children’s partial awareness that adults have a side to their lives apart from dealing with kids. To continue my analogies with the superhero genre, it shows that Mary Poppins has a “secret identity” of sorts. Actually, she has a multi-leveled identity. Mr. and Mrs. Banks, and the world at large, think of her as an ordinary woman, with a proud, severe manner. She allows the children to see that she has magical powers, but, in the book, does not allow them to see more than the strict authority figure side of her personality. Bert gets to see a softer side of her personality, and notice that Mary Poppins’ other self comes complete with a fancy costume. And then there are suggestions, as we shall see, that Mary Poppins is something other than human.

    This reminds me of one of my favorite characters in Charles Dickens’ novels, though one who I think is generally overlooked: Mr. Wemmick from Great Expectations. At the office Mr. Wemmick has a grim, severe, emotionless manner, and characteristically keeps his jaw locked in an unpleasant expression. At one point Mr. Wemmick brings Pip, the protagonist, to his home, and Pip notices that with every step they take away from the office, Mr. Wemmick’s jaw loosens by another degree, and his demeanor and facial expression become more relaxed and sunnier: he transforms into a different, happier, more outgoing self. His home looks like a miniature castle, and it’s like a playhouse where he lives with his Aged Parent. Staying with the Wemmicks is like one big party, but when Pip and Mr. Wemmick head back to the office, Pip observes that with every step Mr. Wemmick’s face and demeanor settles back into the rigid persona he uses in the business world.

    Rothstein asserts that Jane and Michael “learn that “˜Appearances are Deceptive.’ They learn, that is, that there is a split between the inner life and outward appearance, between the magic of Mary Poppins and her thoroughly adult facade.” As Rothstein points out, after they have one of their encounters with the supernatural, Mary Poppins continually insists to the children that no such thing happened. This happens in the book, the movie, and the musical. The children are puzzled by Mary Poppins’ denials, but perhaps the point that she is trying to make is that they should not tell the adults what happened. It’s like the way that in her Harry Potter books, J. K. Rowling’s wizards hide the existence of the supernatural from the ordinary people, the “muggles” (see “Comics in Context” #148).

    Like the secret identity motif in the superhero genre, this “split,” as Rothstein calls it, reflects the truth that an individual can have a public side and a private side to his personality. Justifying such a split, as Rothstein does, can have negative effects. It could provide a rationale for people who belong to one ethnic minority to try to “pass” as members of the majority, or for gays to remain in the closet, or for anyone to refrain from challenging the opinions of the majority. When Stan Lee wrote The X-Men, being mutants was the title characters’ secret “inner life”; they posed as ordinary humans in their “outward appearance,” their everyday identities. When Grant Morrison took over X-Men, he “outed” Professor Xavier and the others as mutants; the new idea was that mutants should no longer hide what they were, but be proud of their “inner” selves. (See “Comics in Context” #28.)

    I find Travers’ attitude towards the “split” somewhat disturbing. She seems to be not only defending the stereotypical British emotional reserve, but taking it to an extreme. Why shouldn’t Mary Poppins express affection for the children in her care, or even smile at them? It’s as if Travers was justifying adults’ emotional withdrawal from their children, as long as they can tell themselves that their “inner selves” actually care about them.

    In her New Yorker article Caitlin Flanagan describes Travers’ “formidable maiden great-aunt, Helen Morehead. Aunt Ellie, as she was called, bossed everyone around, but her fierceness disguised a kindness she would have been embarrassed to admit.” Aunt Ellie is an obvious model for Mary Poppins, but the original book never suggests that Mary Poppins feels embarrassed about admitting kind feelings towards the children; only at the book’s end, when she leaves presents for them before flying off, does Travers imply that Mary Poppins feels any fondness for the children. Notice that Flanagan also notes about Travers’ story meetings for the film with songwriters Richard M. and Robert B. Sherman, “Travers, whose youthful self-confidence had gathered over the years into an oppressive self-righteousness, interrupted, corrected, bullied, and shamed them.” Sound like anyone we know?

    On the other hand, there are other ways in which a “split” between one’s public and private personas is natural, harmless, and even good. A lawyer or a doctor might well be, say, an amateur rock musician or even a comics collector in his or her spare time. A husband and wife have to be proper and respectable when they are working in the office, but may well have a passionate sex life at home that is no one’s business but their own. So Mary Poppins insists that the children behave in a proper manner in their everyday life, but also enables them to experience an “extraordinary adventure,” as Travers calls it (p. 187) from time to time.

    In various classic children’s stories there is a threshold that one must cross to travel from the real world from the fantasy world. Hence Alice tumbles down the rabbit hole or passes through the looking glass; Dorothy is swept up by a tornado that deposits her in Oz; Wendy joins Peter Pan in flying from London to Neverland; the Pevensie children enter the wardrobe and exit into Narnia. Some more recent examples of fantasy tales don’t draw such a sharp boundary between the real world and the fantasy world. Neil Gaiman’s Neverwhere (see “Comics in Context” #18) exists within London; even so, most of it seems to be out of sight underground, notably in London Underground stations. In J. K. Rowling’s Harry Potter series wizards and witches are an unsuspected part of the general population, and the supernatural can manifest itself in the everyday world. (Take, for example, the magical night bus at the beginning of Harry Potter and the Prisoner of Azkaban.) Even so, Rowling also follows the convention of separating the real and fantasy worlds. Hence, in the first book (and film) Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone, Harry and Hagrid pass through a secret entrance into Diagon Alley, a shopping and banking area for wizards that the non-magical people, the “muggles,” know nothing about. Similarly, in a train station Harry has to run straight at–and into–a post to emerge on the platform for the train to the wizards’ school, Hogwarts, a platform that seems to lie in some other dimension. Of course, the Rowling books mostly take place at the isolated location of Hogwarts, and although there are various means by which wizards can get there (the train, a flying car, etc.), as yet there is no indication that it is accessible to any muggles. The teleportational “portkey” in Harry Potter and the Goblet of Fire serves as another means of transcending the boundary between the real and the fantastic.

    Mary Poppins–the original book, the movie, and the musical–also makes use of the magical threshold device in the form of Bert’s sidewalk painting, through which Mary and Bert magically travel into the world it pictures. But this is an exception. Otherwise Poppins makes the point that there is no division between the real and the magical, and that most people are simply unaware of the marvels around them. Mary Poppins acts as the children’s guide to these wonders. She brings them to visit her Uncle Albert (in the book and movie), who levitates himself when he laughs, and (in the book and musical) to visit Mrs. Corry, who is apparently thousands of years old, both of whom live right in London. (In the book, however, Mrs. Corry’s shop disappears as soon as the children leave it, suggesting that they had crossed some sort of magical threshold without knowing it.) Statues in the park come to life (in a later book and in the musical). Animals, such as the dog Andrew (in the book and movie) speak their own language, which Mary Poppins understands; in the local zoo (in the book) the animals can even speak English (but don’t do so in front of people other than Miss Poppins and her charges). As noted, in Chapter 11 a star, Maia, one of the Pleiades, appears in the form of a human child and goes Christmas shopping in London. The title of a new song in the musical, “Anything Can Happen,” is entirely appropriate.

    The world within Bert’s painting, in the book and movie, challenges conventional notions of reality. Here is a world imagined and portrayed by an artist, which Mary, Bert and, in the movie, Jane and Michael, can physically enter; it is literally an alternate reality. Presumably Bert’s other paintings are also portals into different fantasy worlds. The “real” world, therefore, is only one of many.

    Moreover, an artist can create one of these alternative realities. Bert thus represents P. L. Travers, or for that matter Walt Disney, or any writer of fiction, or any artist. On the literal level of the Mary Poppins story, I wonder if Bert is meant to have magical powers, just as the title character does. In the movie Bert attempts to transport himself and the children into his painting but fails; exasperated, Mary Poppins then transports all four of them into the alternate world. This suggests that Mary Poppins is the only one with magical powers. At another point in the film, Mary Poppins magically manipulates things in the children’s room to tidy it up, and Jane finds herself similarly able to levitate objects by snapping her fingers. So it seems Mary Poppins can enable other people in her presence to perform magical feats. On the other hand, the movie’s Mary Poppins scolds Bert for failing to enter the painting, thereby implying that he could do so but somehow did it wrong. In the book Bert transports himself and Mary Poppins into the world of the painting, and she is repeatedly surprised by what she finds there. This makes Bert a magician too. The musical endows him with magical powers too, enabling him to dance up the wall of the proscenium and, upside down, along its top during “Step in Time,” thereby reenacting onstage what Fred Astaire did (thanks to a set within a turning wheel) in the movie musical Royal Wedding (1951).

    Watching the Poppins movie recently set me wondering. Leaving the “Jolly Holiday” sequence within Bert’s painting aside, it all clearly takes place not in the real London, or even on a backlot area designed to look like London, but very clearly on studio sets. When I first saw the movie, I probably just accepted these sets as reality; nowadays the artificiality of Disney’s Poppins world is all too obvious to me. How do most people who see the movie react? Do they notice the difference between these stage settings and reality? Are we supposed to? Are the settings of the Mary Poppins movie meant to look so theatrical, thereby providing a postmodern reminder to the viewer that this story is an artificial construct, a kind of modern fairy tale? As with all musicals, the fact that characters will segue from ordinary speaking to singing and dancing reminds us of the artifice. Moreover, in the movie (and again in the play) Bert acts as narrator, directly addressing the viewers with variations on his “Chim Chim Cheree” song. So there’s not really so wide a gap between Mary Poppins the movie and Mary Poppins the stage musical.

    Something that fascinated me on viewing the movie again was the “Jolly Holiday” sequence, in which Mary, Bert and the children interact with animated characters. It’s always clear who’s real and who’s animated. But look at the settings in this sequence. Often I was not certain what was part of the set where the actors were performing and what was part of a painted background that the animation department inserted into the footage. The melding of the real and the unreal is surprisingly seamless; in fact the painted backgrounds here look more real to me than the stage sets in the pure live action portions of the movie.

    The week before I had watched the Turner Classic Movies interview with Stanley Donen, director and/or choreographer for many classic movie musicals (including Royal Wedding), who, among other things, talked about asking Walt Disney to help create a sequence for Anchors Aweigh (1945) in which Mickey Mouse danced with Gene Kelly; Disney refused, so MGM’s William Hanna and Joe Barbera did the sequence with Jerry (from the Tom and Jerry cartoons) instead. Famous as that sequence is, I thought Dick Van Dyke’s dance with the animated penguins in the Poppins film topped it, and I wondered if Disney had consciously intended to outdo the Anchors Aweigh sequence. Then I realized that in having real people interact with animated characters in a “cartoon” world in Poppins, Disney had returned to the premise of his pre-Mickey silent series Alice in Cartoonland. With the “Jolly Holiday” sequence, Disney had come full circle in his career in animation.

    So the segment of the book and film that takes place within Bert’s painting provides an alternate, fantasy world that is equally as “real” as the everyday world. But the book goes far further than the movie or the musical by suggesting that not only is there no division between the real and the fantastic, but that reality, as most people perceive it, is an illusion. It is the fantasy world that is the real one.

    Chapter 9 of the book is “John and Barbara’s Story,” about Jane and Michael’s infant siblings. As in Sheldon Mayer’s Sugar and Spike, babies can communicate with each other in their own language, which seems to be meaningless gurgling to adults. Travers went further than Mayer: the babies can also talk with a starling, with the wind, and even with sunlight. Travers’ world is an animist one, in which it seems that everything is alive and sentient. This chapter makes the point that infants quickly lose the ability to understand the language of animals, the wind and the light, and even each other. The youngest babies are still attuned to the voices of the natural world; adults are separate from it. Mary Poppins, of course, can still communicate with the non-human world; she is, as the book puts it, “the Great Exception.” This “fantasy” world, in which everything is alive and talks, is the real one in Travers’ book; it is simply that adults, with that one Exception, can no longer perceive it.

    One might say that the book’s Mrs. Corry (who also turns up in the musical) is the world’s oldest woman, since she claims to remember when Columbus discovered America and to have encountered William the Conqueror. However, she claims to be “˜”quite a chicken compared to my Grandmother.” Even so, Mrs. Corry says, “I remember the time when they were making this world, anyway, and I was well out of my teens then” (p. 122). In Little Orphan Annie Harold Gray created a similarly long-lived character, Mr. Am, who with his long beard resembles Santa Claus and, perhaps, may actually be God. Maybe Mrs. Corry is divine, too. At her shop Jane and Michael obtain “slabs” of gingerbread, each with “a gilt paper star.” That night they watch as Mrs. Corry, her two daughters, and Mary Poppins glue gilt paper stars onto the sky. “What I want to know,” Jane wonders, “is this: are the stars gold paper or is the gold paper stars?”

    Now this seems to contradict the Christmas chapter, in which Maia the star appears on Earth as a young girl. The idea of stars taking human form also turns up elsewhere. For example, in the 1980s Peter Gillis co-created Cloud, a now forgotten character for Marvel’s Defenders, who was actually a nebula who could take the form of either a teenage girl or a teenage boy. (As you can see, Cloud was a pioneering character for gender issues in mainstream comics.) So stars can be children as well as gold paper. But it seems that in the Mary Poppins book they are not what science tells us they are: massive balls of superheated gas many light years away. In our world science is real and magic is illusion; in the Poppins book it’s the other way around. The sky isn’t even that far above our heads: Mrs. Corry and Mary Poppins can reach the firmament by climbing a ladder!

    And if Mrs. Corry and Mary Poppins can hang stars in the sky, does that make them goddesses? Does Mrs, Corry recall when “this world” was made because she helped make it? And her phrase “this world” implies that there are others. Perhaps Bert, who can create alternate realities, is a god of sorts. (In both the book and the movie, the world Bert creates is apparently destroyed when the rain washes away his painting. Is this like Noah’s Flood?) But goddess-like characters predominate in the book; Maia, Mrs. Corry, and especially Mary Poppins.

    For those who know Mary Poppins from the movie, the strangest vision of her in the book comes in the chapter set at the zoo, when her birthday falls on the night of a full moon and the animals, who speak English, all leave their cages. (There’s a penguin in this chapter, although it seems from Neal Gabler’s biography that Walt Disney got the idea to put penguins in the movie because they reminded him of waiters.) Jane and Michael enter the “Snake House,” where “All the cages were open and the snakes were out–some curled lazily into great scaly knots, others slipping gently about the floor. And in the middle of the snakes, on a log that had evidently been brought from one of the cages, sat Mary Poppins” (p. 166). The largest of the snakes, a Hamadryad cobra, seems ancient, with a face “more wizened than anything they had ever seen,” is acknowledged as the king of the beasts (not the lion, significantly), and calls Mary Poppins his “cousin.” The Hamadryad slithers towards Mary Poppins, “And when he reached her, he raised the front half of his long, golden body, and thrusting upwards his scaly golden hood, daintily kissed her, first on one cheek and then the other” (p. 167). Now consider that snakes have a phallic shape, go back and reread that part about “thrusting,” and this scenario becomes even more bizarre.

    The Disney movie may hint that Mary Poppins might be a kind of angel: she first appears seated on a cloud. But in the book’s zoo sequence, she seems more like a pagan nature goddess, surrounded by the beasts of the wild and consorting with serpents. The chapter is named after the full moon, suggesting a link between Mary Poppins and lunar goddesses like Diana or Hecate. Is the zoo after hours a latter-day Eden, with Mary Poppins as an Eve who chose the serpent as her companion? The Hamadryad’s references to her as his “cousin” may imply that she is somehow a serpent herself, or perhaps that she is a shapeshifter who can appear as a woman or as a serpent. In her New Yorker profile of Travers, Caitlin Flanagan pointed out that Mary Poppins first appears in the original book “as a shape hurled against the front door in the midst of a gale, [which] assumes the form of a woman.”

    FOR MYSELF
    As usual, “Comics in Context” takes a two week break for the holidays, and will return on the first Friday of January 2007. I will not only be writing more about Mary Poppins but also about “Cartoon America” at the Library of Congress. In the interim, if you want to read more about “Cartoon America,” check out my report for Publishers Weekly’s Comics Week (http://www.publishersweekly.com/article/CA6399160.html?nid=2789).
    Copyright 2006 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #157: Our Nation’s Cartoons

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    cic2006-12-08.jpgFrom its founding right through the end of the twentieth century, The New York Times would not run comics and did not even employ an editorial cartoonist. Presumably the Times considered comics and cartoons too déclassé for a serious, proper newspaper like itself, in contrast to its tabloid competition. The flagrant exception to the Times‘ rule were Al Hirschfeld’s caricatures of Broadway and Hollywood performers in the Arts and Leisure Section, but Hirschfeld reportedly considered himself an “illustrator,” not a “cartoonist.” In the School of Visual Arts’ current Jules Feiffer retrospective, there is a comics page that Feiffer did for The New York Times Sunday Magazine in 1974 that is satirically presented as the kind of comics the Times would run if it ran comics: titled “Hodgkins of State,” it is an (intentionally) deadly dull policy discussion by two members of the foreign service.

    But now look at this year’s annual Holiday Books issue of The New York Times Book Review (Dec. 3, 2006). On the list of the “100 Notable Books of the Year” is Alison Bechtel’s Fun Home: A Family Tragicomic, which the Times helpfully classifies as a “graphic memoir,” solving the problem of what to call a book in the graphic novel format that deals in nonfictional autobiography. Ivan Brunetti’s An Anthology of Graphic Fiction, Cartoons, and True Stories, including work by Daniel Clowes, Robert Crumb, Art Spiegelman, and Chris Ware, receives a review that takes up two entire pages. (The “Speak: Nine Cartoonists” exhibition in New York City earlier this year served as a preview of this book. See “Comics in Context” #122.) The author of this review, David Hadju, writes that “If anyone really qualifies as the voice of the current literary generation, he or she could well be using the language of cartoons, captions and word balloons.” There is a “Holiday” roundup review headed “comics,” covering Will Eisner’s New York: Life in the Big City, Marjane Satrapi’s Chicken with Plums, and a new volume of George Herriman’s Krazy & Ignatz, among others, written by Douglas Wolk, one of my colleagues at Publishers Weekly’s Comics Week. (It is a pleasure to see the Times assign a comics review to someone who actually has a background in writing about the medium.) Another “Holiday” roundup, on “Drawings,” includes not only a collection of the work of Saul Steinberg, who long ago was welcomed into the precincts of high art, but also caricaturist Drew Friedman’s book Old Jewish Comedians, and a book called The Sweeter Side of R. Crumb, which, by Crumb’s own description, contains “adorable, heartwarming, and lovingly rendered drawings.” This makes me think of the “lovingly rendered” drawings of women I was surprised to find in the Crumb section of the “Masters of American Comics” exhibit (see last week’s column). Scott McCloud classifies Crumb as an Iconoclast, who strives to convey truth about life rather than artistic craft and beauty; perhaps this book shows not just the sweeter but the Classicist side of Crumb. This Holiday Books edition also includes reviews of Neil Gabler’s massive new biography of Walt Disney (about which I will have more to say next week) and Linda H. Davis’s biography of Charles Addams. There’s even a critique of a book called Presidential Doodles: Two Centuries of Scribbles, Scratches, Squiggles and Scrawls from the Oval Office. And meanwhile the Times continues to run a weekly comic by Seth in its Sunday magazine section.

    A decade ago the Times would have run reviews of biographies of Disney and Addams. Regardless of whether or not one admires his work, Disney is recognized as a major figure in American popular culture. Moreover, back in the twentieth century some forms of comics and cartoon art had more cultural respectability than others. One of those categories was the cartoons in The New Yorker, including those by Addams, who donated his artwork to the New York Public Library, which for years has been displaying them in their own gallery (see “Comics in Context” #72). Even when I was a child my local library in a Boston suburb carried book collections of editorial cartoons (including those by Herblock), histories of newspaper comic strips, a 1940 coffee table book about the making of Disney’s Fantasia, and even some collections of comic strips, notably Walt Kelly’s Pogo, whose political satire won it cultural respectability, as Doonesbury would receive later.

    Still, the considerable amount of space that this year’s Holiday Books issue of the Times Book Review devotes to comic and cartoon art is mightily impressive. In his review of Brunetti’s anthology, Hajdu writes that “Among the events that helped establish jazz as a serious art was the concert “˜From Spirituals to Swing,’ staged at Carnegie Hall in 1932,” which “brought together an eclectic array of African-American musicians. . . in the same hall famous for presenting Stokowski, Toscanini, and their high-toned like.” Hajdu believes that Brunetti’s book serve the same purpose for comics. To my mind, Yale University Press’s publication of the Brunetti book is merely one of a number of events in 2006 that mark the comics medium’s transition into cultural respectability. This issue of the Times Book Review is another, and “Masters of American Comics” may be the foremost.

    It’s not just the museums and galleries of New York City that have been celebrating the comics medium this year. The Friday after Thanksgiving I made a day trip down to Washington D. C. to visit the Library of Congress to see its current exhibition “Cartoon America: Highlights from the Art Wood Collection of Cartoon and Caricature,” which runs through January 27, 2007. In connection with the show, Harry N. Abrams has published the book Cartoon America: Comic Art in the Library of Congress, edited by Harry Katz, the former head curator of the Library’s Prints and Photographs division, which includes original cartoon artwork. The Abrams book has a format similar to that of Yale University Press’s Masters of American Comics catalogue; there is a long essay about the history of comics, in this case by Katz, followed by an array of essays, mostly about individual artists, by an extraordinary lineup of contributors. Whereas the Masters book was a catalogue of the show of the same name, the Cartoon America book does not limit itself to examples of the Wood collection on display, but deals with the Library’s entire range of holdings in original cartoon and comics art.

    The book jacket for Cartoon America features a knockout illustration by Richard Williams (not the animator of the same name), showing Mount Rushmore redone with the faces of Charlie Brown, Ignatz, Bill Griffith’s Zippy the Pinhead, and Popeye; the original art is included in the exhibition. It’s a gag kidding the elevation of American comics and cartoons into the realm of serious art, but that elevation is real. The introductory wall text for the exhibit, by its co-curators Sara W. Duke and Martha H. Kennedy, reprinted in its brochure, declares that “The Art Wood Collection of Cartoon and Caricature. . .is a jewel among the Library’s special collections. . . .”

    But, enjoyable as Williams’ redesign of Mount Rushmore is, do Charlie Brown, Ignatz, Zippy and Popeye really convey the full range of American “comic art”? Something seems missing.

    In the foreword to the Cartoon America book, James H. Billington, the Librarian of Congress himself, writes that “Few people realize that the “Library of Congress is home to one of the world’s great collections of original cartoon art.” He explains that “The library began to collect and preserve cartoons and caricatures within decades of its founding in 1800, recognizing their value as vehicles of social and political commentary and as original works of art” (p. 7). This is highly prescient and admirable, although Billington’s description suggests that the Library’s primary interest was in editorial cartooning.

    James Arthur “Art” Wood, Jr. is a longtime editorial cartoonist who was also a major collector of cartoon art, compiling what Billington calls “the most comprehensive private collection of original historical American cartoon art known to exist” (p. 7). In 1995 Wood opened the National Gallery of Caricature and Cartoon Art in Washington, D. C. to exhibit his collection to the public; however, due to lack of funding, it closed merely two years later. (Maybe one of the gallery’s problems was publicity: I had heard about it but was never able to find out where it was.) So, instead, Wood donated his collection to the Library of Congress in 2000, which, according to Katz, “more than doubled the Library’s already outstanding cartoon art holdings. . . “ (p. 13). Billington states that the Library has also recently acquired other “notable collections” in cartoon art besides Wood’s.

    “Cartoon America” is very different from the “Masters of American Comics” exhibition. “Masters” is, as Times critic Holland Cotter put it, a “masterpiece show” (Fri., Nov. 24), dealing solely with fifteen artists whom it presents as the most accomplished practitioners of the medium; the selection of works, the wall texts and, even more so, the catalogue make strong analytic arguments for the visual greatness of the Masters’ works. Though virtually all the works in the “Cartoon America” show merit exhibition, they are not all on such a high level of achievement. For example, the section about comic strips includes an example of Cathy Guisewite’s Cathy, which would be no one’s choice as a miracle of graphic mastery and beauty; its virtues lie elsewhere, in its wit and perceptiveness. (Now here’s a prime example of McCloud’s Iconoclast school.) The curators included an example of Bil Keane’s The Family Circus, which is infamously banal as both writing and art; I could only justify that on historical and sentimental grounds.

    Whereas “Masters” narrowed its focus to little more than a dozen cartoonists, “Cartoon America” seems to aim for a more encyclopedic approach to American cartoon art. Billington writes of Wood, “Over time he compiled an extraordinary collection encompassing virtually every aspect of the genre and every era of our nation’s history” (p. 7). (By “genre” Billington means presumably means “medium,” though his choice of words may be revealing.) In the brochure Duke and Kennedy write that the 102 original artworks in their show reveal “the vitality of an innovative and evolving art form that includes political illustrations, gag cartoons, comic strips, illustrations, animation, and caricature.” Something big still seems to be missing from this encyclopedic survey, though, as we shall see.

    Not having been to Washington D. C. since the last century (i. e., 1999), I was looking out for changes, but found few. Well, there was that colossal new building across the Mall from the East Building of the National Gallery of Art; that turned out to be the new National Museum of the American Indian. Just as surprising were the new traffic lights. When the “walk” signal goes on, a lower screen displays numbers that steadily count down towards zero; then the flashing red signal turns on, and another countdown begins, indicating how many seconds are left till the light turns solidly red and the traffic recommences. This had the effect of making crossing the street seem like an episode of 24: if I didn’t make it across in time, would the street blow up? And the countdowns, in turn, reminded me that this was my first visit to Washington D. C. after the 9/11 attacks. Another reminder was the long, slow security line at the public entrance to the Library of Congress’s Thomas Jefferson Building, complete with metal detector and X-ray machine. So, once I got through security, should I fasten my seat belt and wait for the Jefferson Building to take off? Do they still serve beverages?

    The Jefferson Building is actually a monumental and magnificent Beaux-Arts edifice, whose Great Hall is an astonishing, almost overwhelmingly elaborate visual extravaganza of grand staircases, sculpture, murals of mythological and allegorical figures, and inscriptions about the value of wisdom. The “Cartoon America” show has been given a place of honor, along two opposite sides of the Great Hall.

    I started with the “Animation” section, which not only displays artwork from classic animated films, but also features a video monitor showing corresponding sequences from the actual films.

    Here was a drawing of Winsor McCay’s Gertie the Dinosaur backing away in surprise from a woolly mammoth; Gertie was the first great example of character animation that conveyed personality. This drawing was actually a tracing, made circa 1980, of McCay’s 1914 original.

    Here too was a model sheet for Max and Dave Fleischer’s Betty Boop (see “Comics in Context” #116 and 117), labeled as being from 1932-1934. This looked to me like Betty after the movie industry’s Production Code started being enforced in 1934: her dress, with its high neckline, looked considerably more proper and her trademark garters were gone. Nevertheless, she was still in a minidress: in terms of fashion she was thirty years ahead of her time. Oddly, the video monitor showed the scantily clad pre-code Betty from Boop Oop a Doop (1932), fending off the advances of an obese circus ringmaster.

    A highlight of this section was a “preparatory drawing” from the Fleischers’ Popeye cartoon Females Is Fickle (1940), showing Popeye, like a more combative Jonah, trapped inside a gigantic, semi-transparent jellyfish and punching his way out: this single drawing captured the dynamism of the full animated sequence, shown on the video monitor.

    Here too were cels and watercolors for Disney’s Snow White and the Seven Dwarfs (1937) (pgs. 15, 25), The Sorcerer’s Apprentice from Fantasia (1940) (p. 194), and Dumbo (1940). The most impressive Disney piece was a remarkable pastel for Bambi (1942) done by Tyrus Wong as a concept sketch, showing Bambi’s father, the godlike stag known as the Great Prince, standing between barren trees, atop a rocky crag (p. 191). The trees are in silhouette, the sky is gray, and the enormous rock is cast into deep shadow, but the godlike stag is lit by an aura of light, and seems almost to blend into it, and to glow.

    The only other animation studio represented is MGM’s, through 1940 model sheets for William Hanna and Joseph Barbera’s Tom and Jerry (p. 197). But what about Tex Avery’s great MGM animated shorts, and, for that matter, Warner Brothers’ Looney Tunes and Merrie Melodies? Mickey Mouse is in this show, but not Bugs Bunny; Hanna and Barbera made it in, but not Chuck Jones. And what about UPA and the whole history of American animation since the 1940s? (If you want to pick up where “Cartoon America” leaves off, go to New York City to see “Saturday Morning,” the Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art’s comprehensive current exhibit on television animation.) Wood’s tastes in animation seem to have frozen in 1942, so the Library has a great deal of work to do to catch up in collecting animation art. But no, this isn’t what I mean when I say that something big is missing from the “Cartoon America” show.

    Next came the section designated “Gag & Single Panel Cartoons,” and the examples on display ranged considerably in quality. Particularly interesting was a cartoon by Peter Arno (1904-1968), a “close variant” of which appeared in the September 19, 1936 issue of The New Yorker. It shows a group of apparently prosperous people, one of whom, according to the caption, is saying, “Let’s go to the Trans-Lux and hiss Roosevelt.” So these would be wealthy conservatives, probably Republicans, of the time, who were opposed to Franklin Delano Roosevelt’s New Deal programs to aid the masses who were impoverished by the great Depression. They’re heading to the Trans-Lux, a movie theater in Manhattan, to hiss at FDR when he appears onscreen in a newsreel. I suppose the contemporary equivalent would be cheering Rush Limbaugh or Bill O’Reilly on as they lash into liberals on talk radio or Fox News. The people in this cartoon are obsessed: they’re going to the movies, not to watch the feature film, but to sneer at FDR, who isn’t actually even there. Moreover, weirdly, Arno has placed these middle-aged and elderly characters in costumes, as if they’re going to a masquerade; what’s especially noticeable is that their legs are in tights, which is not particularly age-appropriate. Is the cartoon’s point that these reactionaries are letting go of their inhibitions, both about exposing their physiques and expressing their hatred for FDR? Or that they’re playing at politics like overage children playing dress-up? Is the cartoon even hinting that there’s something decadent about indulging in this petty political meanness?

    Perhaps the ultimate extreme in what Scott McCloud calls the Iconoclast “tribe” of cartoonists is represented by the cartoons of the legendary New Yorker prose humorist James Thurber. In the Cartoon America book another celebrated New Yorker contributor, novelist John Updike, writes an amusing essay titled “Technically Challenged Carefree Ineptitude: James Thurber.” Updike points out that a childhood accident cost Thurber one of his eyes and damaged the other, causing his vision to continue to deteriorate in his adult life. Hence, Updike asserts, Thurber’s “development as a picture maker was arrested at a lively primitivism” (p. 216). Thurber’s limited sight provides a reasonable excuse, although I suppose he may simply have had limited talent as a draftsman regardless of the condition of his eyes. Updike further contends that “some of his best-known cartoons. . .were the product of a carefree ineptitude” (p. 216). He reports that Thurber himself confessed that when he tried to draw a seal astride a rock, the drawing came out looking like a seal inexplicably peering over the headboard of a bed, which proved to be one of his most memorable images (reproduced on pgs. 217 and 221). In other words, Thurber, through his lack of graphic skill, created happy accidents, and his far superior writing ability transformed these graphic lemons into lemonade.

    Even so, Thurber’s ability to visually delineate the emotions of his characters can be no accident. In both the show and the book (p. 220), there is a cartoon, circa 1934, that Thurber drew on lined paper, like that of a schoolboy’s note pad. A bald man, his eyebrows furrowed angrily, his upper teeth bared, stretched menacingly over a nude woman, lying prone in the traditional position of an odalisque in art. The man’s left arm curves, as if it has no elbows, and ends in two visible fingers: it resembles not a human arm, but a serpent with mouth agape. His right arm and hand look more like a wing as if he were a bird of prey hovering over his victim. Nonetheless, Thurber’s childlike drawing style, and the man’s baldness, somehow deprive him of a sense of the menace: it’s something like Elmer Fudd posing as Don Juan. As for the odalisque, her face is rather plain, and she seems not frightened by the stalker but casual and nonchalant. “Oh, Mr. Benholding,” she says, “I never saw that look in your eyes before,” a romantic cliché made laughable by the absurdity of the picture. Updike contends that Thurber’s cartoons “were libidinous to an extent that pushed The New Yorker‘s youthful prudery to its limit” (p. 216). This cartoon is indeed about sex, but the joke lies in the contrast between the intense passion being evoked and the comical, sexless ordinariness of the potential lovers.

    Though Updike refers to Thurber’s “technically challenged style,” he also points out that Thurber was able to use his graphic limitations to genuinely artistic ends: “His more crudely amateurish successors in minimalism demonstrate by contrast how dynamic and expressive, how oddly tender, Thurber’s art was” (p. 220). If Thurber is indeed an Iconoclast cartoonist, he’s an Iconoclast whose style I like, and this, along with Thurber’s comedic vision, is why. Remember that the “Masters” show called Charles Schulz a “minimalist.” Looking at Thurber’s simple figures and the strong, effective facial expressions and body language he gives them, it’s easy to see a connection between Thurber’s cartooning and Schulz’s.

    Next I arrived at the “Comic Strips” section of “Cartoon America,” where several of the Masters reappeared. My favorite piece in the entire exhibition is E. C. Segar’s Sunday, May 12, 1935 page of Thimble Theatre Starring Popeye (which, alas, was not reprinted in the Cartoon America book). Popeye only has a cameo role in this Sunday page, whose strengths are actually more verbal than visual. This Sunday page’s central figure is instead trickster and hamburger obsessive J. Wellington Wimpy. The Popeye animated cartoons, which play down the importance of dialogue, have never done justice to Wimpy; this Sunday page demonstrates what makes him a great character in his own right.

    At the outset Olive remarks to Popeye that “I’ll bet you Wimpy has desert madness–probably raving around saying poetry.” Indeed he is, addressing a desert flower sprouting from a cow’s skull out of a Georgia O’Keeffe painting. Maybe the proper comparison is to Hamlet with Yorick’s skull, for this Sunday page primarily consists of Wimpy’s rhyming soliloquy on his own mortality. “Oh, flower of death. . .so frail, so red/Growing from a thing so dead/Even as I will be quite soon/Merely bones “˜neath sun and moon.” Wimpy’s flowery doggerel is amusing, but he is nonetheless talking about a serious matter that one does not expect to find in a comedy strip like Popeye’s. And Wimpy goes on: “Ah, well/’Tis not for me to break the spell/ That links all things in a mighty plan/That cannot be changed by laws of man.” Now he’s talking not only about the inevitability of death, but about man’s helplessness against fate, and the “mighty plan,” presumably conceived by God, that governs the universe! Yet not even these cosmic concerns can ultimately overrule the dominant passion of Wimpy’s life. He tells the flower that “we both crave meat”; the skull out of which it grows is from the animal that is the source of hamburger meat. The subject of Wimpy’s soliloquy shifts from man’s role in the universe to the hamburger’s role in his diet, and reaching the climax, he finally collapses out of what seems a combination of his frustrated carnivorous passions and his own longwindedness. This is one great strip.

    There was also a brilliant Peanuts Sunday from January 20, 1963 (p. 213). It too takes the form of a soliloquy, but in this case Charles Schulz devises a facial expression for Charlie Brown that reflects each psychological turn he takes in this extended monologue. After the introductory top tier of panels, the strip begins like a musical composition, sounding the theme: “Oh, how I hate these lunch hours!” says Charlie Brown, sitting alone, looking unhappily into his lunch bag. Shunned by the other kids, lunch hours just remind him of how much he is disliked; “During class it doesn’t matter,” he will tell us, presumably because then he is surrounded by other kids and can pretend he’s part of the community. He seems trapped in an endless cycle of unchanging, dreary lunch hours. Even the lunch in the bag offers no surprises that would break the monotony: “Peanut butter again.” Charlie Brown fantasizes about his unattainable ideal, the nameless little red-haired girl he loves from afar, and a moony expression comes over his face. But it abruptly vanished, as Charlie Brown’s own insecurities overwhelm him. He finally succumbs to despair: “Rats! Nobody is ever going to like me.” And he finally walks off, his lunch uneaten, as the composition closes by repeating the initial theme: “Lunch hour is the loneliest hour of the day.” The cartooniness of Schulz’s art style and the small, mundane scale of some of Charlie Brown’s concerns (e. g., peanut butter for lunch) render the sequence humorous, but as my recounting minus pictures should show, this soliloquy is simultaneously quite sad. It’s this balance between the humorous and the heart-rending that characterizes Schulz’s work at its best, as it is here.

    In his essay on Schulz in the Cartoon America book, comics historian Robert C. Harvey makes a point about another balance that Schulz created in Peanuts, which I had noted in a previous column (see “Comics in Context” #66): the opposition between Charlie Brown’s melancholy and Snoopy’s joie de vivre. Harvey puts it particularly well: “against this. . .assessment of the human condition, Schulz balanced the fantasy life of Snoopy, a blithe beagle whose seeming brilliant success at every endeavor reassures us that life is not only about disappointment and endurance. It is also about dreams and the sustaining power of the imagination” (p. 214) Does Charlie Brown represent Schulz as the everyman who endures the mundane sufferings of everyday life, while Snoopy represents Schulz as artist, who finds joy in his own imaginative creations?

    There’s a good example of Winsor McCay’s Dream of the Rarebit Fiend from 1906 in the show, but again, unfortunately, not in the book. A cranky man seated at the end of a trolley informs us that “I always like to sit in the corner of a car; then I don’t have people tramping all over me.” But as one passenger after another enters and sits down, the curmudgeon finds himself wedged into a corner. Then the trolley somehow turns ninety degrees, and the crank finds himself at the bottom of the trolley, being crushed by the weight of the other commuters, whereupon he wakes from his rarebit-induced nightmare.

    The “Cartoon America” McCay work that I most liked, however, is not in the Library of Congress show but in the book. Co-curator Martha Kennedy wrote a brief essay for the Abrams book called “Winsor McCay’s Political Cartoons.” There is a long tradition in editorial cartoons of using symbolic figures, like the Democratic donkey and the Republican elephant which Thomas Nast popularized. McCay went much further with this, creating what Kennedy calls “allegories or parables set in otherworldly, fantastical settings” (p. 148). In my view McCay elevates political and social situations of his time to the level of myth.

    For example, in the first cartoon accompanying her essay, from the 1920s, a man labeled as “Mental and Moral Courage,” who appears to be a giant, looks into the stormy heavens at lightning bolts labeled as “War,” “Depression,” “Calamity,” and “Discouragement” (p. 149). Notice that these menaces include not only external perils (“War”) but also threats to psychological well-being (“Discouragement”). Below this picture is a remarkable tier of five small panels, each showing living creatures violently battling one another: first two scorpions, then two sloths, then two roosters, next two dogs, and finally two human boxers. Kennedy interprets this series as “emphasizing man’s ability to overcome physical, animal passions.” I disagree: I interpret the sequence as contending that humanity is prey to the same aggressive behavior as these vicious lower animals. I suspect McCay means to contrast the battling boxers with his giant of “Mental and Moral Courage,” who he shows quietly observing the lightning bolts, presumably deciding on the best course of action to take, rather than simply charging in with unthinking violence.

    The next cartoon, “Wheels of Industry,” also from the 1920s (p. 150), shows four giants, who dwarf Uncle Sam, the embodiment of America; these titans wear short skirt-like costumes and sandals, making them look like figures out of ancient Greece or Rome. These giants are labeled “Steel,” “Electric Power,” “Ford,” and “General Motors,” and they are pulling some sort of enormous mechanism with a huge wheel labeled “Industry.” Thus the great economic power of early twentieth century America takes on mythic proportions.

    So does its crime. In the architectural fantasy of “City Crime Skyline,” circa 1930 (p. 150), a skyline of skyscrapers includes a brobdingnagian bottle marked “Bootleg Whiskey,” a colossal gun, labeled “Crime,” and a tower that might also be an immense syringe, marked “Dope.”

    In the last cartoon, “Fame, Fortune, Wealth” (p. 151), circa 1928 (significantly, just before the great stock market crash), a veritable ocean of people surrounds a dinosaur-sized pig, who is draped with jewelry, and labeled “Fortune Wealth.” Kennedy correctly observes that “the pig alludes to the sin of gluttony and biblical admonitions against the worship of idols and false gods.” The gargantuan hog reminds me of the gigantic beasts of sword-and-sorcery tales. It’s also like Richard Wagner’s dragon Fafnir and other such creatures that obsessively guard treasures, literal monsters embodying greed. But McCay pointedly makes his beast no awe-inspiring dragon, a fit adversary for heroes. Instead McCay casts the monster of greed as a repulsive swine, rendering the people who swarm around it pathetic and deluded. The true heroes are the relatively few in the background who are scaling a difficult, rocky incline to reach a Parthenon-like edifice marked “Fame,” by which McCay surely means the reward for honorable achievement, and not mere celebrity.

    I will continue my report on “Cartoon America” in a few weeks; next week is my annual Christmas column, followed by the annual holiday break. As for the mystery of what’s missing from the “Cartoon America” exhibit, if it’s not already obvious, here’s a clue. I recommend you read fellow Quick Stop columnist Fred Hembeck’s November 24, 2006 tribute to the recently deceased pioneering comic book historian Dr. Jerry Bails over at his blog. As Fred said, “Every single one of us who, over the last forty odd years, made the effort to sit down and write something serious (or even not-so-serious) about the once neglected funny book genre–whether in a crudely printed fanzine, a mass produced coffee table volume, or simply on our very own blogs–owes a deep debt of thanks to Dr. Jerry Bails.”
    ADVERTISEMENTS FOR MYSELF
    Now on sale in your local comics stores is the first issue of The Official Handbook of the Invincible Universe, an encyclopedia of the characters in Robert Kirkman’s superhero series Invincible, done in the style of the original Official Handbook of the Marvel Universe. Since I was one of the principal writers of the Marvel Handbook, I was invited to contribute to the Invincible Handbook: the biographies of the various Guardians of the Globe are mine. An impressive lineup of artists was recruited to do the illustrations. It was a fun project to do, and I suspect it’ll be a fun book to read, even if you’ve never seen Invincible before.

    Copyright 2006 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #156: Canon Fodder

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    cic2006-12-01-01.jpgSometimes when I spend weeks working on a certain topic for this column, there are moments of serendipity.

    For example, currently on Saturday mornings, Turner Classic Movies has been running the 1950 Columbia serial Atom Man vs. Superman, in the course of which Superman is projected into an extradimensional void called “the Empty Void.” Superman thereupon appears in ghostly form on Earth, unseen by the people there. Did this serial, I wondered, inspire the later creation of the Phantom Zone in the comics?

    But the serendipity occurred after last Saturday’s (Nov. 25) last episode of the serial concluded. Next TCM showed one of its “One Reel Wonders,” an episode of the MGM short subject series called The Passing Parade. This installment was titled People on Paper, and turned out to be about leading comic strip artists of the mid-20th century. So there, captured on film, were several of the men honored as “Masters of American Comics” by the museum exhibition of the same name: Milton Caniff (Terry and the Pirates), Chester Gould (Dick Tracy), and Frank King (Gasoline Alley), as they looked in their prime. There too on film were Dick Calkins (Buck Rogers), Al Capp (Li’l Abner), Hal Foster (Prince Valiant), Harold Gray (Little Orphan Annie), and Chic Young (Blondie). Had I not been taken by surprise, I would have taped this short. I had never before known this short subject existed, and I suspect neither do most comics historians.

    On the day before (Friday, Nov. 24), one of The New York Times‘s art critics, Holland Cotter reviewed the new exhibition “Africa Comics” at the Studio Museum in Harlem and remarked that “I guess there are people who still can’t fit the idea of “˜art’ and “˜comics’ into the same frame. But why? If handmade, graphically inventive, conceptually imaginative images – which describes practically everything in this show – aren’t art, what is?” Cotter refers to these “people” as if they are a handful of artistic reactionaries who have fallen behind the times and are out of step with contemporary thinking. Yet when I started “Comics in Context,” a little over three years ago, the Times neither reviewed nor reported on nor ran comics regularly. The Times ran an obituary for comics artist Dave Cockrum, the co-creator of The X-Men‘s Colossus, Nightcrawler and Storm, on Wednesday, Nov. 28, only two days after his death. Twelve years ago it took the Times several weeks before it noticed the passing of Jack Kirby. The cultural shift regarding comics has happened very quickly, though I suspect it is not as widespread as Cotter assumes.

    By the way, I heartily recommend Peter Gillis’s beautifully written tribute to Dave Cockrum. Here are the key lines: “In a better world, Dave, once he was in the place where the universe had intended he should be, should have just continued to do whatever he wanted, because whatever he wanted was just so right. But that’s not the way the Comics Industry works.”

    Cotter continues, “In any event, Pop Art and all that followed it long ago wiped out the notion that comics are one-liner sight gags good only for the “˜funny pages.’” As I’ve pointed out before, the conventional wisdom about Pop Art was that artists like Roy Lichtenstein and Andy Warhol had transformed supposedly trashy, banal imagery from the comics into true art. The 1960s Batman TV show remains Exhibit #1 in the case of mainstream culture’s attitude towards comics in the era of Pop Art. Now I am beginning to wonder if the growing artistic respectability of comics will lead to revisionist art history, with people contending that art critics and scholars have been taking comics seriously for decades.

    In passing Cotter comments that “”˜Masters of American Comics,’ the ambitious historical survey split between the Jewish Museum in Manhattan and the Newark Museum, is truly a masterpiece show.” Indeed it is, and it’s noteworthy that now two Times critics have highly praised the show. (The first was senior art critic Michael Kimmelman)

    It was through another serendipitous event that I found the key for writing about the last lap of the “Masters” show. On Monday, Nov. 20 cartoonist and comics theorist Scott McCloud, author of Understanding Comics and Reinventing Comics, gave a lecture at New York University as part of his year-long “50 State Making Comics Tour“ to promote his latest book, Making Comics (HarperCollins, $22.95).

    During his presentation McCloud expounded on one of the major ideas from his new book, that there are what he calls four basic “tribes” of comics artists. (See “Understanding Comics Culture” in Making Comics, pages 229-239).

    First there are the Classicists, whom he characterizes by “the devotion to beauty, craftsmanship and a tradition of excellence and mastery,” showing panels by Hal Foster, Colleen Doran, and P. Craig Russell in his book as examples.

    Next are the Animists, who are characterized by “the devotion to the content of a work, putting craft entirely in the service of its subject,” so that “the teller of the story all but vanishes in the telling.” In the book he presents as examples panels by Jack Kirby (from Fantastic Four), Lynn Johnston (from her comic strip For Better or for Worse) and Dan DeCarlo (of Betty and Veronica).

    Then there are the Formalists, who have a “devotion to comics itself, to figuring out what the form of comics is capable of,” and who experiment with that form. In this category McCloud includes Will Eisner (in his NYU presentation), Art Spiegelman (in the book), and himself.

    Finally, there are the Iconoclasts, who aim above all for “honesty, authenticity, and a connection to real life”; McCloud points to Robert Crumb’s and Harvey Kurtzman’s work as examples. That seems to describe the Iconoclasts’ philosophies more than their visual style. My take on what McCloud is getting at is this: the Iconoclasts are less concerned with conventional notions of beauty and craft, nor with formal innovation nor with working within conventional story genres. Hence their visual style may look rough or primitive, because they “see art primarily through life’s lens” in McCloud’s phrase: art becomes the means to their end of conveying their ideas about life.

    McCloud states that his “four tribes correspond roughly” to psychologist Carl Jung’s “four proposed functions of human thought.” Hence McCloud links Classicists to Sensation, Animists to Intuition, Formalists to Thinking, and Iconoclasts to Feeling.

    McCloud writes that “most comics creators” would like to achieve “goals from all four of these groups.” He also observes that a comics artist can display “a strong attraction to two of these ideals”: in the book he classifies Caniff as both an Animist (since he makes storytelling primary) and a Classicist (due to his “impeccable compositions”).

    With regard to these four sets of values, McCloud states that “usually, you can tell which one burns brightest for a given creator, and there’s almost always one of the four that burns rarely or not at all for them.”

    To McCloud’s great credit, he does not contend that one of the four “tribes” is superior to the others. After all, there are many supporters of Iconoclast and Formalist comics who take a condescending attitude towards the genre comics favored by Animists and Classicists, as any issue of The Comics Journal will demonstrate.

    McCloud’s theory of “tribes” should also serve to remind critics to be humble. If no “tribe’s” artistic philosophy is superior to the others, then no “tribe’s” point of view contains the whole truth about comics. To state that “one of the four. . .burns rarely or not at all” for someone suggests that he or she may have a blind spot. There are some comics that he or she does not “get,” but that may be true for everyone.

    But how does McCloud’s theory of tribes apply to people other than comics artists? For example, what about museum curators who delve into comics?

    The “Masters of American Comics” museum exhibition and its catalogue from Yale University Press are primarily Formalist. That explains why Hal Foster and Alex Raymond (Flash Gordon), both considered such titans of the artform, were not included in the show: they are first class Classicists. When co-curator Brian Walker stated that “storytellers” such as Carl Barks and Walt Kelly, who were not considered graphic innovators, were excluded, he was saying that they were primarily Animists. Nonetheless, some Animists made it in. Co-curator John Carlin confessed that E. C. Segar (Popeye) was not an innovator but was included because of his mastery of conveying character and comedy. In the catalogue, while Carlin describes “formal” aspects of Caniff’s work, his text primarily praises Caniff as a storyteller. But if Carlin is attracted to two of McCloud’s “ideals,” then they would be Formalism and Iconoclasm, which accounts for the inclusion of the last four Masters in the show: Robert Crumb, Art Spiegelman, Gary Panter, and Chris Ware. (Spiegelman dropped out of the exhibit’s New York engagement, so I won’t discuss him this week, but I have previously written about his work in “Comics in Context” #59, 60, 61 and 64.)

    I don’t entirely agree with McCloud’s classification of Eisner as a Formalist. True, in his role as comics theorist and teacher, Eisner pursued the formalist concern of studying the visual language of comics. In emphasizing Eisner’s innovative splash pages for The Spirit, the “Masters” show portrays him as a Formalist. But I recall hearing Eisner say, “I don’t want to be in the graphic novel section” of a bookstore (see “Comics in Context” #6). He wanted his books shelved alongside prose novels; this suggests that the story content was more important to Eisner than the visuals. Apart from Eisner’s experiments with splash pages and such, isn’t The Spirit really an Animist work, in which the dynamic visuals primarily serve to convey the story? Is the reason why Eisner’s graphic novels were mostly excluded from the show that they are so Animist?

    McCloud correctly classifies Kirby as an Animist, but the “Masters” show brings out other aspects of his work. In focusing on Kirby’s experimentation with “patterning,” the “Masters” show reveals his Formalist side. In writing about the sculptural, monumental look of the figures of Galactus, the Silver Surfer, and the Thing on display, I was viewing Kirby as, in part, a Classicist.

    How does McCloud’s theory of tribes apply to a critic like myself? Considering that I taught a course at NYU called “Comics as Literature” and that I argued a few weeks ago that the essence of comics is storytelling, it’s clear that I am primarily an Animist in my approach to the visual dimension of comics: the art serves the story. As someone who spends part of most Saturdays visiting art museums, I’m also a Classicist, who appreciates sheer beauty and craftsmanship. (My original title for “Comics in Context” #132, about the Dahesh Museum’s show of classic American illustration, was “Gallery of Glory.”) My training in the comics business is also Classicist. When I interviewed artists John Romita, Sr. and John Romita, Jr., both Marvel mainstays, at the recent Big Apple Con, they both emphasized storytelling above all. Looking at the formal aspects of comics artwork does not come automatically to me, but I can do it, I find it interesting, and I appreciate the Masters book for providing guidance to me in this approach. The flame that “burns rarely or not at all” for me is that of the Iconoclasts. There are major exceptions. I enjoy Harvey Pekar’s American Splendor, which tends to use Iconoclast artists (see “Comics in Context” #64, 73). I admire Crumb’s work, though I simply do not become as enthusiastic about it as I do about the work of most of the earlier Masters. But I am left cold by many alternative cartoonists who take an Iconoclastic approach, as with the work in the “Speak: Nine Cartoonists” gallery show earlier this year (see “Comics in Context” #122, which I originally, pointedly titled “Gallery of Gloom” before IGN changed it). When I visited the “Masters” show with Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art president Ken Wong, I surprised him by telling him I didn’t “get” Panter’s work. Now I know that it’s outside my tribe: I’m an Animist/Classicist.

    This is how I react to the visual side of comics, but how does McCloud’s theory of tribes apply to the writing side of the medium? McCloud says that Animists are intuitive. That applies to my first reading of a comic, when I’m just looking for its entertainment value. But as any reader of “Comics in Context” knows, I take a highly analytical approach to evaluating the writing of comics, delving into the mythic and literary archetypes underlying characters and plots. This makes me a Formalist, which McCloud associates with “thinking” in Jung’s “functions of human thought.” It’s clear that I’m also a Classicist, since I value the traditional genres in comics and cartoon art. So with regard to the writing side of comics, I’m a Classicist/Formalist.

    With regard to writing, too, the flame that “burns rarely” for me is that of Iconoclasm, but not because I’m averse to “honesty, authenticity, and a connection to real life,” as McCloud puts it. For one thing, I think that fantasy can comment honestly and seriously on real life; one of comics’ strengths is its ability to create and utilize metaphors for reality. My real aversion to much of Iconoclast comics is due to the attitude that many Iconoclast comics writers take towards reality. As I stated in my review of the “Speak” show, Crumb’s work stood out from the rest in the “Gallery of Gloom” because he leavened his observations with comedy rather than miring himself in depression and despair like the others. McCloud writes that the Iconoclasts look at life “warts and all”: in too many cases, I contend, they fixate on only the warts.

    So, as I moved through the “Masters” show, once I exited the Eisner and Kirby room, I was entering increasingly alien territory.

    Next came Harvey Kurtzman (1924-1993), the creator and original editor and writer of MAD, and the only one of the Masters whom I have not previously written about. This section had the most appalling case of mislabeling in the entire show: here was the cover to MAD #12, featuring a characteristically grotesque female face drawn by Basil Wolverton, that was even signed by Wolverton, and yet the accompanying label attributed it entirely to Kurtzman! A nearby vitrine held various stages in the creation of “Little Annie Fanny in Greenwich Village” for the September 1963 issue of Playboy, credited on the label to Kurtzman, Will Elder, and Russ Heath: there are pages drawn in pen and ink, then a version in colored pencils and watercolor, and finally the printed pages. But the labels don’t explain what the specific roles of each of the three artists were in crafting this strip. The Masters book makes the matter clearer (pgs. 116-118), but still does not sufficiently explain the collaborative process for the benefit of those who don’t know who did what. Another annoyance is the labeling for pages from the story “3-Dimensions!” from MAD #12 (June 1954). Both the show’s labeling and the book (p. 114) credit the pages to Kurtzman and Wally Wood, but again without explaining the nature of the collaboration. (Did Wood draw over Kurtzman’s layouts?) Considering that Wood is a major figure in comics history who could himself have been included as one of the Masters, it seems unjust that the show and book treat him as an unexplained footnote to Kurtzman’s saga.

    For me the highlight of the Kurtzman section were examples from his EC war comics. The “online slide show” accompanying Kimmelman’s Times review of “Masters” includes the opening page of “Air Burst!”, illustrated by Kurtzman, from Frontline Combat #4 (February 1952). (See here, or Masters pgs. 113 and 271.) In his essay in the Masters catalogue, Village Voice film critic J. Hoberman points out that “Kurtzman’s war comic books showcased his boldest, most abstract drawing. The thick line and copious use of black suggest gouged-out woodcuts. . .” (p. 272). These thick, dark outlines of the figures contribute to this “abstract” element by emphasizing them as simple shapes: the fleeing North Korean soldiers in the first panel are basically ovals with smaller ovals as heads. The emphatic outlines also focus the readers’ attention on the figures’ overall body language and movement. Those two soldiers in the top panel aren’t standing up straight: their backs curve forward, as if they are crouching while at the same time they run forward, as if trying to hide from the bombs bursting overhead.

    The “Masters” show and the book (pgs. 110-111) include the entire war story “Corpse on the Imjin!”, illustrated by Kurtzman, from Two-Fisted Tales #25 (February 1952), which Carlin analyzes in detail in the catalogue (p. 112). I was particularly impressed by the way in which an American soldier and a North Korean soldier, battling each other, combine into what becomes a single, united, heavily outlined shape, which could be regarded as semi-abstract, as the American forces his foe under the surface of the river to drown. The Korean’s blood escapes into the water, turning it not red but in Kurtzman’s rendition, black: it is as if the American were plunging his adversary into a black void. Kimmelman declared this combat sequence “turns hand-to-hand combat into pure visual poetry. It’s a model of economy and dark human truth and, above all, of how the best comic artists organize and pace drama and text across a page.” Despite stating elsewhere in his review that the essence of comics was abstraction, Kimmelman recognizes that comics is visual storytelling, too. McCloud may class Kurtzman as an Iconoclast, and he is the progenitor of that school, but Carlin, Hoberman, and Kimmelman perceive his Formalist aspect and salute him as a master visual storyteller as well. So I still felt at home looking over his war comics pages.

    Carlin writes that “One of Kurtzman’s most enduring attributes was his development of the self-reflexive, ironic aspect of modern comics. . . .” (p. 114). By this Carlin doesn’t just mean Kurtzman’s parodies of other comics in MAD, or even inserting characters representing the writer and artist into MAD stories, but also his satirical use of the conventions of the comics medium itself. Hence, the aforementioned “3-Dimensions” story ends with the characters toppling out of a panel into blank space on the page; the final page of the story is entirely blank. I am reminded of similar postmodernist stunts in Tex Avery’s animated cartoons (e. g., the Wolf running seemingly right off the frame of the film into a white void). At another point in “3-Dimensions!”, a “hole” is drawn onto a page, enabling characters to see and step through to a following page; whether he was aware Kurtzman had done it or not, John Byrne used a similar gag decades later in The Sensational She-Hulk.

    The next Master is Robert Crumb (born in 1943, and the first Master who is still alive), about whom Carlin asserts, “no one before Crumb made comics that were so directly about themselves and their own mental state” (p. 125); this made his work revolutionary, pioneering underground comix and spawning the alternative comics movement.

    A particularly interesting selection in the book is “The Many Faces of R. Crumb” from XYZ Comics in 1972 (pgs. 124-125), in which Crumb draws himself in many different guises, each representing a different side of his personality. Carlin writes that this illustrates Crumb’s “fractured sense of self” (p. 126). To me it also suggests, consciously or not, that the many different characters in Crumb’s work might all be based on aspects of himself, and that this by extension may be true for all writers.

    I was quite surprised upon seeing a Crumb sketchbook on display. Alternating with drawings of Fritz the Cat were pencil studies of women, which, unfortunately, are not reproduced in the catalogue. Though Crumb is well known for drawing large, massive, formidable females, who seem to simultaneously embody male lusts for and fears of the opposite sex, these sketchbook drawings, softly modulated in pencil, were surprisingly, appealingly beautiful. Here, unexpectedly, was Crumb the Classicist. But as Francoise Mouly points out in her essay in the catalogue, Crumb is a man of seeming contradictions.

    Next I advanced into the Gary Panter (born in 1950) section and found myself amidst nearly pure Iconoclasm. All of the Masters from McCay through Kurtzman were creating their work for a general audience, even if, in the cases of Kirby and Kurtzman (at EC), that audience was then considered to consist of children. With Crumb this began to change: originally his underground work was sold through head shops to a niche audience. Spiegelman and the alternative school that followed in his wake aimed at an even more elite audience. As Carlin puts it, “It was not until the contemporary era. notably in [Spiegelman’s] RAW magazine and the artists it helped to promote and nurture, that the graphic character of the comics overtly became as important as story and character. Comics became “˜art’ in a deliberate manner rather than sneaking in through the backdoor of popular culture.” (p. 140). Through its selection of Masters, the show seems to imply that this is the Formalist/Iconoclastic route that comics with claims to be museum-caliber art took after the 1960s. But as McCloud would surely argue, Formalism and Iconoclasm are merely two of the four value sets of comics. To dismiss post-1960s Classicist and Animist comics is a mistake.

    With Panter the Classicist ideal of beauty and mastery of traditional craft is abandoned. Carlin refers to Panter’s “scratchy line work” and writes about Panter’s Jimbo Meets Rat-Boy (1979) that “The lettering and line work are deliberately crude and filled with scribbles and seeming mistakes that take on an artful pattern in spite of themselves” (p. 140). You can see for yourself in a page from a later work, Jimbo Is Stepping Off the Edge of a Cliff! from Jimbo circa 1988 (Here, or Masters p. 149). Carlin contends that “The new jagged approach he pioneered created a sense of psychological expression in comics. . . “ (p. 140), and that Panter “expresses himself through the character of his line” (p. 158). It’s like the distortions of expressionism taken to the extreme limit, and the emotions being expressed range from angst into sheer horror.

    My Classicist sensibility finds no ground to stand within this ultimate Iconoclasm. But it’s not just the look of Panter’s comics that dissatisfy me, but also the worldview of his writing. Describing the “postapocalyptic world” of Panter’s tales, Carlin writes that “Panter took his stories out of this world into a future that is actually closer to the way we live now than we are willing to express. Jimbo wanders a wrecked zone where nuclear explosion is a metaphor for modern America” (p. 146). I’m not “willing to express” it because I don’t believe it. I simply do not share this utterly negative and nihilistic vision of modern America or contemporary life.

    Ironically, I very much like Panter’s work as art director for the 1980s television series Pee-Wee’s Playhouse. In part it’s because his work there on three-dimensional objects has solidity rather than this “scratchy” quality Carlin describes. It’s also because the Playhouse work is in the service of comedy, rather than the over the top apocalyptic despair of his comics work.

    The last of the Masters, Chris Ware, was born in 1967, making him a post-Boomer, the only Master younger than myself. With his elaborately, intricately designed division of his comics pages into panels, Ware is very much a Formalist. But in his catalogue essay, novelist Dave Eggers argues that Ware is, in effect, a Classicist as well: “I think it’s beautiful in the way that [novelist Vladimir] Nabokov’s work is beautiful. In both cases it’s clear that the creator believes in beauty for its own sake, and, more crucially, is capable of creating beauty anywhere and always” (p. 312). Moreover, Eggers believes that “Ware looks fondly back to a time before modernism crushed almost all of art’s flourishes, eccentricities, and organic forms. But instead of simply reappropriating old forms, he channels the past by sublimating it, creating a style that, in the end, is sui generis. . . . “ (p. 316).

    Carlin, however, emphasizes Ware’s Formalism. Animism has been left behind: Carlin maintains that Ware addresses his audience “in an ironic way that never lets us forget we are reading comics. We don’t get lost in the story the way we do in Spiegelman’s Maus or Crumb’s comics.” (p.158) I’d say that Ware achieves this Brechtian effect through his unusual methods of designing the page, leading the reader’s eye through the narrative by an unconventional route., forcing him to pay attention to the Formal aspects of the art.

    Carlin asserts that “Ware’s comics express emotional content through form and design more than just story and dialogue” (p. 154). He quotes Ware as explaining that King’s “Gasoline Alley changed a lot of my thinking about comics. It made me realize that the mood of a comic strip did not need to come from the drawing or the words. . . .The emotion came from the way the story itself was structured” (p. 158). Referring to Ware’s character Jimmy Corrigan, Carlin helpfully observes that “Ware and Jimmy were both abandoned by their fathers when they were very young and then met them briefly in later life without resolving anything before their fathers died. The sadness behind this disconnect is played out as much in the way that the form of the story breaks down time into discrete elements as in the psychology of the characters” (p. 158)

    But Carlin goes further and contends that “Ware uses form and design. . .to find new ways to tell stories and reveal human emotions that are appropriate to his generation. In other words, Ware’s abstractions, combinations of apparently ephemeral elements, and lapses in logical continuity are all part of how people now experience the world around them.” I don’t: I’m a believer in logic and tradition, and Ware seems not only to value tradition (as in his respect for King’s work) but also to prize order and structure, perhaps more than any of the other Masters. Eggers writes that “Ware’s work is the most elaborate and the most controlled example of the comics medium yet produced. . . “ (p. 312). As a Classicist I look for constants in the realm of literature and art: qualities which enable classic works to remain vital and relevant through time. The “Masters” show demonstrates that we can relate to the works and ideas of writer/artists from forty, fifty, or even a hundred years ago. I have my doubts that the Younger Generation is this mysterious mutant race that sees life entirely differently than their forebears, or that, even with the omnipresence of mass media that Carlin cites, that life has somehow radically changed in its essentials. Ware may have a new and unusual perspective on the world, but that doesn’t mean that everyone of his generation thinks the way he does. Just look at the rest of contemporary mass culture.

    Kimmelman writes that Ware has “a singular, melancholy vision.” Referring to King’s influence on Ware in his Rusty Brown strip, Carlin writes that “Ware brings out the sadness and emptiness of contemporary experience in a way that never came to the surface in King’s work” (p. 162). Here too I disagree. Why is “contemporary experience” characterized by “sadness and emptiness”? Most of King’s strips in the show date from the 1930s, the period of the Great Depression, when the world was moving towards war. That seems to me to be a sadder and emptier time for America than the early 21st century. There are always people who lead sad and empty lives, and always people who lead happy and fulfilling ones. My problem in relating to Ware’s work is that it seems mired in depression and despair. As Carlin says, Ware borrows formal devices from King’s work, but not King’s humor or optimism. Carlin points out that Jimmy Corrigan seems modeled on Charlie Brown, but that Schulz’s character is “caught between wonder and worry” (p. 158). Jimmy is left only with the worry, but that leaves out the other half of life.

    Eggers observes about Ware that “no amount of success or acclaim seems to diminish the self-flagellating with which he punishes himself” (p. 315). One of Ware’s pieces at the Jewish Museum ironically advised readers how to “Ruin Your Life: Draw Cartoons,” thereby dooming yourself to “decades of grinding isolation.” In this piece Ware broke the cartoonist’s career into four steps: “1. Get to work. 2. Realize Your Mistake. 3. Envy the Other Arts. 4. You Will Not Be Compensated.” Looking this over, I thought to myself: this guy’s work is hanging in a museum. Just how bad can his career be?

    In the Timesonline slideshow, Ware is represented by “Superman Suicide,” two panels from Jimmy Corrigan, the Smartest Kid on Earth (2002) in which a man costumed as a superhero, rather than flying, falls between two panels to his death on the street (p. 162). In two later panels (not in the slide show but on p. 163), Jimmy looks, perhaps disconsolately, at the spot on the street where the corpse had lain. Carlin calls the superhero in Corrigan a “signifier of lost illusions” (p. 162). The costumed man’s death is an iconic image of defeat, of humankind’s failure to rise above the “sadness and emptiness” of the world.

    But you may recall that a superhero falling from a great height to his death on a street below is how Alan Moore and Dave Gibbons started Watchmen, and then they went on from there, to depict a world in which disillusion and despair coexist with spiritual renewal and even the miraculous. Theirs is a more complex and rounded vision of “contemporary existence” than Ware’s.

    If you read the Masters of American Art book, don’t skip over the footnotes section. Both there and in the main text, Carlin discusses many cartoonists besides the fifteen Masters, including Alex Raymond, Carl Barks, Walt Kelly, Al Capp, Carmine Infantino, Steve Ditko, Daniel Clowes, Frank Miller, and more. It’s as if they were receiving honorary mentions. According to the “Masters” panel at the San Diego Con, Art Spiegelman has already suggested doing “Masters of American Comics II.” I hope that they will, and feature other important comics artists. Or perhaps the “Masters” show will inspire other museums to organize exhibits honoring other comics artists. With luck, this is only the beginning of comics in American museums.

    ADVERTISEMENTS FOR MYSELF
    If you want to read more about Scott McCloud’s talk at NYU, you can read my online report for the
    Nov. 28, 2006 edition of Publishers Weekly’s Comics Week. For the Nov. 14 Comics Week, I wrote about the Jewish Museum’s panel on the Golden Age of Comics, featuring Golden Age cartoonists Jules Feiffer, Irwin Hasen, and Jerry Robinson.

    I’ve written another, entirely different article about the late Mark Gruenwald in Michael Eury’s Back Issue #19, now on sale from TwoMorrows Publishing.

    My first lecture on Alan Moore and Dave Gibbons’ Watchmen for “1986: The Year That Changed Comics” at the Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art in New York City was the best attended of the series. (You can read about it here) I will conclude my analysis of Watchmen with another lecture at MoCCA on Monday, December 4 at 6:30 PM.

    -Copyright 2006 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #155: Two American Masters

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    The unexpected and astonishing deluge of museum and gallery shows dealing with comics and cartoon art continues in the New York City area. One that I hadn’t mentioned before is “The Masters Series: Jules Feiffer,” a retrospective at the School of Visual Arts’ Visual Arts Museum, continuing through December 2. Each year SVA chooses a different artist to honor in its Masters series: Feiffer appears to be the first cartoonist so honored. But perhaps this isn’t so surprising. For decades comic strips dealing in political satire, such as Feiffer’s, Walt Kelly’s Pogo, and Garry Trudeau’s Doonesbury, have been the exceptions to the cultural establishment’s attitude that comics are junk. Only three years ago the New-York Historical Society staged its own Feiffer retrospective, “Julz Rulz: Inside the Mind of Jules Feiffer.”

    cic2006-11-17.jpgBut I was surprised, four separate times, on my recent visit to the Brooklyn Museum. The introductory wall text for one of its current temporary exhibitions, “Tigers of Wrath: Watercolors by Walton Ford,” stated that “The satirical edge Ford adds recalls artists such as Pieter Brueghel the Elder (Dutch, circa 1525-1569), J. J. Granville (French, 1803-1847), and Robert Crumb (American, born 1943).” In content and visual style Ford has nothing to do with Crumb: Ford is really doing postmodern riffs on John James Audubon’s paintings of wildlife. But yes, Crumb and Ford are both satirists, and I was pleased to see one of the “Masters of American Comics” cited in a museum exhibition of painting.

    The Brooklyn Museum was simultaneously staging another temporary exhibition showing how another form of popular culture had risen into the precincts of fine art: “Graffiti Basics.” Here I was surprised again: a section of this exhibit was titled “Comics and Cartoons.” Here the wall text asserted that “Comics and cartoons have inspired many graffiti artists, Their works often appear to be single panels taken from comics. . . .The artist Crash (John Mathis) is illustrative in this regard. “˜From colorful faux wallpaper to Marvel Comics,’ he writes, “˜this was my youth.”

    Later the text declares, “As with comic book heroes, the alter-ego of graffiti artists is often a simplification of the person’s identity.” The text continues, “In both comic books and graffiti art, simplified characters allow the viewer to identify with the people in the story.” At first reading, this struck me as nonsense. Is the uncredited text writer referring to comics superheroes? Starting with Stan Lee, superhero comics writers have used the dual identity convention to dramatize the complexity of the hero’s psyche. Typically, the hero’s dual identity represents two sides of his personality. Moreover, whether they are dealing with superheroes or other protagonists in their comics, Alan Moore and Neil Gaiman, to name two prominent examples of contemporary comics authors, unquestionably deal in complex characterizations.

    I wonder if the uncredited text writer is actually referring to Scott McCloud’s Understanding Comics, in which he theorizes that comics readers can more easily identify with a simply drawn, caricatured figure, like Scott’s own comics version of himself, than with a highly detailed, realistically drawn human figure.

    In either case, the curators of “Graffiti Basics” are right in perceiving a link between comics and the panel-like pictures drawn by graffiti artists.

    References to comics in art museums are surprising, but finding actual comic books on display is even more startling. The Brooklyn Museum is also currently holding an exhibition called “Looking Back from Ground Zero: Images from the Brooklyn Museum Collection,” marking the fifth anniversary of the September 11, 2001 attack on the World Trade Center. Most of the at works on display are photographs. But in one display case, I found a comic book open to a double-page montage of the devastation at the World Trade center site and the heroically depicted rescue workers, titled “Impossible Acts. . . “, drawn and inked by Neal Adams. It was a magnificent work of illustration, and it certainly belonged in the exhibit. However, I winced upon reading the accompanying label, stating the title of the 2001 comic book on display: Heroes: The World’s Greatest Superhero Creators Honor the World’s Greatest Heroes (see “Comics in Context” #61). I have no problem with the understandable praise for the policemen, firemen and others who dealt with the disaster, but I was appalled by Marvel’s self-congratulatory bombast in referring to its team of comics pros, which was thoroughly inappropriate in the context of 9/11. Notice that Marvel even gave the comics people top billing in the subtitle over the “world’s greatest heroes.” (And then there’s the question of whether the writers and artists who worked on Marvel’s Heroes book really do comprise all of “the world’s greatest superhero creators,” and how many of them actually did help create major superheroes.) I found myself wondering how and whether Marvel, and indeed mainstream comics, will adapt as comics come under greater scrutiny from art critics, scholars and curators, who will have little tolerance for such chest-thumping grandiosity.

    Nearby was another display case, containing a copy of Art Spiegelman’s 9/11 graphic novel In the Shadow of No Towers (see “Comics in Context” #59, 60 and 61), open to one of Spiegelman’s own double-page spreads. Spiegelman’s self-deprecating irony towards himself in No Towers came as a relief after Marvel’s blatant self-promotion. Moreover, whereas the Neal Adams spread was really a single illustration, the Spiegelman spread was comprised of narrative sequences of panels. In other words, here were actual comics on display.

    This set me thinking about yet another change in the status of comics in the early 21st century. For decades comics speculators have been driven by the notion that, given enough time, collectible comic books can be sold for many times their original cover price. This conventional wisdom, of course, led to the comics bubble and bust of the 1990s. Yet now the Brooklyn Museum is exhibiting a comic book that is only five years old and a graphic novel that is merely two years old. The museum isn’t showing the original art for these comics, but copies of the actual printed comics themselves.

    In his New York Times review of the “Masters of American Comics” show at the Jewish and Newark Museums, Michael Kimmelman writes, “The show includes one of Mr. [Will] Eisner’s drawings for a “˜splash,’ or title, page of his Spirit strip, and the printed version of it, each of which has its own aura, and raises the issue central to comic art: What is an original?”. In other words, since Eisner created Spirit stories specifically for reproduction in newspapers, are his drawings the real “original,” or is it any of the mass produced printings in the newspapers in which the stories first appeared?

    Although the “Masters” show is dominated by the actual drawings by the artists it celebrates, there are many printed comic books and pages from actual newspaper comics sections on display as well. In the Brooklyn Museum show there are printed comics that are half a decade old or less. In other words, I realized, any printed comic book in my personal collection–or yours–should it be judged to be of sufficient artistic merit, is potentially the museum exhibit of tomorrow. (However, I doubt that the Brooklyn Museum paid more than cover price for the two comics it is exhibiting.) Art museums attempt to persuade important collectors of fine art to donate their collections to them in their wills. Will the time come when museums and libraries seek to become the heirs of longtime comics collectors, too?

    Over the last four weeks I’ve covered the Newark Museum’s portion of “Masters of American Comics,” covering the history of the newspaper comic strip from Winsor McCay to Charles Schulz. This week I move to the latter portion of “Masters,” which is currently at the Jewish Museum in Manhattan, and covers comic books, beginning with the work of Will Eisner (1917-2005). Chronologically, Eisner precedes Schulz in entering comics, but co-curator John Carlin states in Yale University Press’s Masters of American Comics catalogue that “The Spirit was the most important bridge between newspaper comics and comic books” (p. 94). After all, each Sunday version of The Spirit was a seven-page comic book story that was originally published in newspapers.

    It can be revealing to get fresh perspectives on familiar subjects. On one of my visits to the Jewish Museum to see “Masters,” I went with Gina Misiroglu, my editor on The Supervillain Book, published by Visible Ink Press (which should now be available in bookstores). I pointed out to her a splash page featuring Eisner’s most notorious femme fatale, P’Gell, from the May 25, 1947 Spirit story “Il Duce’s Locket” (on page 251 of the Masters book and in The New York Times“online slideshow” for “Masters” at
    ). Gina commented that P’Gell looked to her like the young Lucille Ball, who, she pointed out, was a “sex symbol” in movies in the 1940s before becoming more famous as a screwball comedienne on TV in the 1950s. That’s true about the pre-TV Lucy, as you can see in movies like the MGM musical Ziegfeld Follies (1946), and once Gina had mentioned it, I too saw the resemblance between the young Ms. Ball and P’Gell, at least in this vintage splash page. If Eisner intended this, it’s another sign of how The Spirit was influenced by the movies of the 1940s.

    Only last year the Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art (MOCCA) in lower Manhattan staged “Will Eisner: A Retrospective,” a far more complete survey of his career than the “Masters” show currently provides. (MOCCA published a catalogue of the show, so you can see for yourself.) The MOCCA retrospective was roughly evenly divided between The Spirit and Eisner’s pioneering graphic novels from the last three decades of his life. Some of the same pieces of original art have now turned up in both shows, including the notorious splash page of the Spirit spanking Ellen Dolan, which should give pause to anyone who claims to detect a feminist sensibility in The Spirit. But I was surprised to find that the “Masters” section on Eisner is entirely devoted to The Spirit, with the sole exception being the opening pages of his first graphic novel, A Contract with God (1978) (see “Comics in Context” #69), with its near-Biblical deluge of “Eisnerspritz” (Masters p. 257). According to “Masters” co-curator Brian Walker, the show emphasizes visual design over story content. It is in the Eisner section that this divergence becomes most clear. Carlin states in the catalogue that “Eisner developed the language of comic books in much the same way that McCay perfected the formal language of comic strips” (p. 94). The show appears to be arguing that it was in The Spirit that this development took place and Eisner proved to be a visual innovator in the comics medium. By implication, Eisner did not make further visual innovations in his graphic novels; that seems to me to be a reasonable judgment. Yet by virtually ignoring Eisner’s graphic novels, “Masters” likewise ignores Eisner’s continuing evolution as a writer in the latter part of his long career. Significantly, Kimmelman dismisses Eisner’s graphic novels in his review: “Mr. Eisner’s later career as a graphic novelist. . .led him toward maudlin stories ruminating on God, but before that, he set a standard for the industry.” (Though Kimmelman seems unaware of this, most of Eisner’s graphic novels are not about theology. Oddly, Kimmelman also calls Eisner the “master of the sweatshop,” as if he had spent his career helping to run the Eisner-Iger studio, although neither The Spirit nor the graphic novels were created via such impersonal assembly line methods.) I wonder if, eventually, it will be The Spirit, not his graphic novels, that will emerge as Eisner’s primary legacy to the artform.

    Despite the emphasis on visual style over literary content, the “Masters” show includes the original penciled and inked pages for several complete Spirit stories, including perhaps the most famous, “The Story of Gerhard Shnobble” from September 5, 1948 (pgs. 98-99). (See “Comics in Context” #68.) Now, since comics art is designed for mass reproduction, you may wonder, as I have, what the point is in seeing the original artwork rather than the printed pages. There is certainly an advantage at seeing the artwork at the size at which it was drawn, not the smaller size at which, so often, it has been reproduced. The overhead shot in which Shnobble leaps off a roof into a virtual canyon formed by towering skyscrapers gains in vertiginous power when viewed in its original dimensions.

    Although Carlin misses the obvious analogy between Milton Caniff’s visual storytelling and the cinema, he sees the connection in Eisner’s work: writing in the catalogue about “Shnobble,” Carlin observes that “Eisner’s arrangement [of panels] conveys the sense of drama and movement in the rooftop the same way editing would in a well-crafted film.”

    A good number of the Eisner pages selected for “Masters” appear to have been chosen because they further exemplify the show’s continuing theme of metafiction. For example, Eisner puts himself in The Spirit as its artist in the splash page for the May 3, 1942 story “Self-Portrait” (p. 246), which is also part of the Timesonline slideshow. Another complete Spirit story on display, “Li’l Adam, the Stupid Mountain Boy” (July 20, 1947), satirizes not only the comic strip Li’l Abner and its strip-within-a-strip, Fearless Fosdick, a parody of Dick Tracy, but also Abner creator Al Capp (“Al Slapp”) and Tracy creator Chester Gould (“Hector Ghoul”), whom Eisner draws to resemble their respective characters, thereby implying that a cartoonist’s hero is an idealized projection of himself (as Eisner repeatedly confessed about the Spirit). Eisner also throws in “Homeless Brenda” as a jab at Little Orphan Annie. (The Masters book includes only a single page from this story, on page 253.) When the Spirit questions Dick Tracy lookalike Ghoul, meant to represent Gould, about a strip resembling Gould’s Dick Tracy, one of The Spirit comic’s competitors, Eisner has led us down a twisted labyrinth of levels of reality, indeed.

    My favorite Eisner piece in the show (which, alas, is not reproduced in the Masters book), is the splash page for the 1949 Spirit story “Dolan Walks a Beat.” Temporarily demoted, Commissioner Dolan, wearing a police officer’s uniform, walks past a billboard. The billboard contains its own comic strip, a narrative sequence of three panels, each featuring the Spirit; in the last panel, the Spirit stares in shock at the demoted Dolan. It’s another case of a comic strip within a comic strip, but in a different sense than Fearless Fosdick, who is merely a fictional character in the “reality” of Li’l Abner’s world. The Spirit is a real character in his series, and so is Dolan. Yet in this splash, the Spirit appears to be confined to a reality that exists merely as a comic strip on a billboard within which Dolan exists! This is an effect that one could only achieve in the comics medium.

    Though Carlin wrote the main text for the Masters book, various other writers were invited to contribute appreciations of specific Masters. The only failure among these fifteen essays is Raymond Pettibon’s incoherent piece about Eisner. Pettibon rants about comics fans (“Although comic books are made for reproduction, while comics fans are not”) and even The New York Times’ coverage of the Iraq war, while managing not to provide the least insight into Eisner’s work. When Pettibon submitted this essay to the editors, their proper response should have been “No.”

    Kimmelman concludes his “Masters” review with accolades for Jack Kirby (1917-1994): referring to Kirby’s Marvel series of the 1960s, Kimmelman writes, “Their radicalism was plain to see. Being visual space busters, they have done more or less for the art of comics what Cubism did for painting.”

    That’s high praise indeed, but justified, given Kirby’s dynamic reinterpretations of the human figure moving through the space within comics panels. Pablo Picasso was the co-creator of Cubism, but elsewhere in his review, Kimmelman declares that “As for Mr. Crumb, he’s still the Picasso of comics. . . .” Crumb wasn’t a revolutionary “space buster” like Kirby, so in that regard the comparison of Kirby to Picasso makes more sense. However, Kimmelman is claiming that Crumb is “the Picasso of comics” specifically in the sense that he believes Crumb is “the unavoidable influence on all younger artists” in comics, as Picasso is in painting. But Kimmelman is making an unjustified supposition about comics. Crumb probably is an “unavoidable influence” on alternative cartoonists who follow in the tradition of the underground comix of the 1960s, and perhaps even on contemporary newspaper humor cartoonists. But how much influence does Crumb have on the action-adventure comics published by DC, Marvel, Image, Dark Horse and the rest? In this realm Kirby has long been the “unavoidable influence,” although that influence seems to be waning somewhat due to the strong influx of manga into the American comics market. But Kimmelman’s error is understandable considering the “Masters” show’s implicit thesis about comics history, as we shall see.

    In the Masters book Carlin sometimes goes overboard in praising Kirby. Carlin states that in his comics Kirby was “creating heroes and myths that were the cornerstones of American pop culture from the 1940s through the 1970s” (p.101). One problem with this assertion is that Kirby collaborated with Joe Simon and Stan Lee in creating most of these characters and stories. Later in the text Carlin explicitly refers to the Lee-Kirby collaboration and declares that “It influenced not only other comic book artists but sixties culture as a whole” (p. 104).

    As someone who grew up reading Lee-Kirby Marvel books, I can assure you that they were not “cornerstones” of pop culture in their time. Can Carlin really mean to suggest that Kirby’s comics had more influence on American pop culture over those four decades than movies or rock music or television? Millions of people, mostly kids, read those comics, but the culture at large disdained superhero comics. If you were still reading comics in high school and college, you risked being mocked by your classmates, who considered them to have “outgrown” the medium. Whatever influence Marvel Comics had on the culture remained under the radar until the recent explosion of movies based on Marvel characters. It’s wonderful that Carlin, Kimmelman, and other scholars and critics are starting to treat comics as an artistically significant medium. But let’s not get so carried away that we indulge in revisionist history without factual foundation.

    Carlin also contends that Kirby’s The New Gods influenced “George Lucas’s Star Wars series, which combined Kirby’s cosmic space opera with complex Westerns, notably John Ford’s The Searchers“ (p. 104). Kirby has Darkseid and the Source; Lucas has the “dark side” and the Force. Kirby’s Orion, like Lucas’s Luke Skywalker, turns out to be the villain’s son. So that connection seems clear. But just how does Luke Skywalker resemble The Searchers‘ protagonist, the racist, violent loner Ethan Edwards? Or is Carlin possibly talking about Anakin Skywalker’s devolution into Darth Vader (who is, of course, a lookalike for Kirby and Lee’s Doctor Doom)? Note to Carlin: Lucas has acknowledged the influences of Alex Raymond’s Flash Gordon and Akira Kurosawa’s The Hidden Fortress (1958) on the Star Wars movies.

    Even worse, in briefly discussing Steve Ditko in the Kirby section of his text, Carlin not only excludes Stan Lee from any part in creating Doctor Strange, but asserts that the Doctor Strange series “dealt directly with drugs. . . .” (p. 104). Just where in any of Lee and Ditko’s Doctor Strange stories do drugs appear? Can it be that Carlin subscribes to the assumption, devoid of proof, that Lee and Ditko had to have been taking drugs to come up with the surreal worlds pictured in Doctor Strange? Was Winsor McCay high on rarebit? (And couldn’t one draw an analogy between Doctor Strange in Ditko’s occult dimensions and Little Nemo visiting Slumberland?) Is there any evidence that Lee or Ditko regarded Doctor Strange’s journeys into occult realms as metaphors for drug trips?

    Then Carlin asserts that “some people recognized that Ditko took the baroque elements of Spider-Man’s distinctive red-and-blue costume and webbing and developed them into free-floating, psychedelic designs.” So Dormammu’s Dark Dimension is based on Spider-Man’s webbing? Isn’t it more likely that Ditko had seen work by Salvador Dali and other Surrealists?

    Carlin also stumbles into the familiar mire of attempting to divide the credit for their collaborations between Lee and Kirby. Carlin declares that “Stan Lee wrote the story outlines and some of the dialogue, but Kirby created the casts and the conceptual layout for each title” (pp. 101-102). What does Carlin mean by “some of the dialogue”? Perhaps Carlin has learned that Kirby wrote border notes on the pages he drew, describing the action and often what the characters were talking about. But really, the dialogue for the books Lee did with Kirby reads no differently than the dialogue for books that Lee did with Ditko or any other artist. The style of dialogue is consistent throughout the books that Stan Lee is credited as scripting; that’s the proof that he came up with more than “some” of the dialogue.

    Stan Lee has long admitted that Kirby came up with the Silver Surfer on his own (although Lee surely deserves credit for creating the Surfer’s style of dialogue and hence much of his personality). But that does not mean that Kirby “created the casts” for all the comics he did with Stan Lee. And what the hell does “conceptual layout” mean?

    The Kirby sections of both the “Masters” show and the book suffer from insufficient comprehension of the collaborative process in creating mainstream comic books. For example, in describing part of the “Galactus Trilogy” (from Fantastic Four #48-50, 1966), Carlin points to a panel featuring the “radiating effect of feathered lines and brilliant colors that was one of the hallmarks of Kirby’s style.” Feathered lines, yes, but did Kirby have any influence over the coloring? As editor Lee would have assigned the colorist. And who was the colorist anyway?

    This leads to a serious problem with the “Masters” show. The first piece on display is a handsome portrait of Captain America from Captain America #109 (January 1966), credited on the accompanying label to Jack Kirby and Syd Shores (Masters p. 259). Presumably Kirby drew it and Shores inked it, but this division of labor is not explained either on the label or in the Masters book. Neither the show nor the book ever explains the role of the inker. Worse, most of the labels for the Kirby pieces at the Jewish Museum do not list the inker. Of course, that information is easy to find, either in the original comics, or online, or from asking authorities on Kirby’s work. In some cases, the artwork on display is a splash page, complete with credits, and the inker’s name still doesn’t make it onto the label! The forgotten man of the “Masters” Kirby mini-retrospective is inker Joe Sinnott, although he and other inkers do get credited in the attributions in the Masters book. One could also argue that Stan Lee as scripter and co-plotter and the various letterers of the Kirby pages on display should also be credited on the labels. Since there are also numerous printed comics on display in the show’s Kirby section, perhaps the colorists for those pages and covers likewise deserve credit.

    While there are many original Kirby pages on display at the Jewish Museum, there are also numerous printed comics pages on display from the Galactus Trilogy and from Lee and Kirby’s finest single issue story, “This Man, This Monster!” From Fantastic Four #51 (1966). Presumably the original art from these stories was unavailable. Not only does the show display original printings of Lee-Kirby stories, but it also exhibits copies of Marvel Treasury Edition, which reprinted their Fantastic Four tales in larger, tabloid size. Having expected to see only original artwork, I found myself wondering, does this mean that a longtime comics collector could stage a museum exhibit about Kirby or another Silver Age artist, simply by using original copies of 1960s comics? In the Masters book I see reproductions of printed comics pages attributed to “Private collection.” Most of the comics artwork in my book Marvel Universe for Harry N. Abrams was reproduced from books in my own collection. In retrospect, maybe I should have listed each picture as being from “The Peter Sanderson Collection.”

    Despite my various qualms, I am favorably impressed by the treatment of Kirby in the “Masters” show and book. As he did with Eisner, Carlin praises Kirby’s cinematic style of storytelling, commending “his ability to link individual panels into a unified effect, unfolding like an action sequence in a well-made movie” (p. 101).

    In discussing the Galactus Trilogy, Carlin rightly states that “Kirby and Lee raised this simple story into a great contemporary myth by doing two things that greatly influenced later comic book adventures. First, they grounded their characters in a world that was tangibly real and morally complex.” This is true of all of Lee and Kirby’s work in the 1960s, and indeed of Lee’s work with Ditko and his other collaborators during that decade. Carlin continues, “Second, they experimented with a number of new visual devices, including a higher degree of intentional patterning elements than previously found in comic books” (p. 102). This implies that Lee and Kirby actually sat down and consciously thought out and discussed how to work abstract visual elements into their stories. I suspect that Kirby worked more intuitively than that, and that Lee simply had the good taste to appreciate and accept Kirby’s visual innovations. Nonetheless, I am grateful that Carlin draws the reader’s attention to just such visual patterning in the pages from Fantastic Four #49 and 50 showing the Human Torch’s journey through space to Galactus’s worldship and back (pp. 103, 107). The book (p. 105) also runs one of Kirby’s amazing photo collage pages (from Fantastic Four #48, 1966) without comment, though it certainly deserves some (as well as providing another link with Picasso, who also worked with collages).

    The highlight of the Kirby section of “Masters” may be an extraordinary double-page spread from Devil Dinosaur #4 (July 1978) (p. 266 and here). I don’t know what this story was about, but the spread is dominated by what looks like Devil Dinosaur’s gigantic, demonic twin, whose body is covered by semi-abstract patterning, who leaps up against a typically semi-surreal Kirby skyscape, which in this case includes giant glowing eyes that seem to have drifted in from Ditko’s Doctor Strange. In his essay in the Masters book, contributing writer Glen David Gold recalls Eisner telling him that he thought Kirby was “not pursuing some aesthetic ideal” in his work. Then Gold showed this spread to Eisner, who then conceded, “Okay, I might be wrong” (p. 261). Eisner had made the mistake of thinking that genre fiction, including adventure comics fantasies, could not be vehicles for personal expression and serious artistic achievement.

    I also am very pleased with Gold’s insight that the Silver Surfer not only is “Jesus Christ to Galactus’s God,” which I knew, but is also Adam, banished from space–the Surfer’s version of Paradise–to the world of mortal man (p. 262). Gold also confirms my belief that that magpie Roy Lichtenstein’s painting “Image Duplicator” was semi-duplicated from an image drawn by Kirby in X-Men #1 (p. 261).

    Another Kirby piece included in the show, the book (p. 100), and the Times online slideshow exemplifies the dominant impression the Kirby comics pages in this mini-retrospective left me with. This is the cover for Fantastic Four #50 (May 1966), a rather simple composition with a large figure of the Silver Surfer on his board, faces of three members of the Fantastic Four, and an inset panel of the fourth member, the Torch, at college. At first I wondered why this rather simple composition was selected for display. But looking at this cover as well as other Kirby originals in the Masters book makes clear his skill for using seemingly simple means to give figures like the Surfer a sense of power, to render them iconic, to give them a sculptural look (as if they were figures of Greek gods), and an aura of monumentality.

    Carlin sums up, “The combination of Lee’s metaphysical plotting, Kirby’s forceful stylization, and their combined love of unlikely heroes made their work the best the medium had to offer” (p. 104) This time Carlin is giving Kirby too little credit for co-plotting, but it’s rewarding to see him confirm that Stan Lee was right in the 1960s when he called Fantastic Four “The World’s Greatest Comic Magazine.”

    Kirby influenced so many comics artists who followed in his wake, but neophytes to comics would not know that from the “Masters” show. The saga of the mainstream comic book tradition comes to a stop in the “Masters” show with Kirby. From this point onward, “Masters” follows a parallel line of development, which leads from Harvey Kurtzman’s MAD through Robert Crumb’s pioneering underground comics to the alternative comics of today. Certainly no subsequent comics artist has surpassed Kirby in mainstream comics, but is it right for the exhibit to give the impression that not only newspaper comic strips but also mainstream comic books ceased being creatively vital and innovative after the 1960s?

    In his review Kimmelman notes, “comics aficionados will argue about which masters have been grievously excluded from the show. (Where’s Charles Burns? Daniel Clowes? Lynda Barry? Milt Gross? Jules Feiffer? Alex Raymond?)” Apart from comic strip legend Raymond, most of the artists Kimmelman names would be considered closer to the Kurtzman-Crumb family tree of comics. It’s as if the “Masters” show left him with the impression that no one of interest continued and built upon the comics tradition of Caniff and Kirby.

    For years PBS has been running a documentary series called American Masters. Recently shown episodes included profiles of architect Frank Gehry, artist Andy Warhol, dancer Gene Kelly, television journalists Edward R. Murrow and Walter Cronkite, playwright Arthur Miller, director Elia Kazan, filmmaker Preston Sturges, and television writer Rod Serling. As this comics exhibition proves, cartoonists can be American Masters too? How long do you think it will be before American Masters gets around to doing a show about Will Eisner or Jack Kirby?

    ADVERTISEMENTS FOR MYSELF
    This weekend, from Friday, November 17 through Sunday, November 19, the Big Apple Convention will present its annual National Comic Book, Art & Sci-Fi Expo at the Penn Plaza Pavilion (across from Penn Station) in Manhattan. I’ll be interviewing John Romita, Sr., and John Romita, Jr. on Saturday and artist Michael Golden on Sunday.

    Copyright 2006 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #154: Master Class

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    On my first visit to the half of the “Masters of American Comics” exhibition that is at the Jewish Museum in Manhattan, I was accompanied by Ken Wong, the president of the Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art. At one point while we were there we encountered a lecturer giving a group a guided tour of the exhibit. Listening in, it soon became evident to Ken and myself that this woman was in over her head: she may have been knowledgeable about the usual sorts of drawing and painting that one finds in a museum, but not about the sequential art of comics. As they entered the section devoted to Robert Crumb’s work, she told her group. “I haven’t read up on Crumb.” Well, why not? Isn’t that the proper preparation for lecturing about him?

    But more importantly, she was describing the artwork on display as single images, missing the point that the essence of comics is visual storytelling through a succession of images. (Of course, Ken and I were animatedly discussing the works on display, and afterwards Ken told me that he noticed that some of the other visitors to the exhibition were listening to us! Well, after all, we know what we’re talking about with regard to comics.)

    “Masters of American Comics” undertakes the formidable task of persuading the world of art museum professionals and visitors that comics should be taken seriously as art. This exhibition therefore is meant to teach people a new way to see, to open their eyes to understanding and moire deeply appreciating an artform which they may well have previously underestimated. But the show offers little guidance to visitors, who run the risk of missing the point just as that tour guide did.

    There is no audio guide tour for “Masters” at either the Jewish Museum or at the Newark Museum, where the first half of the exhibit is currently housed. At each museum there is a lengthy introductory wall text to the show as a whole, and wall texts that introduce each artist. Labels for the individual works restrict themselves to listing the artist, the means by which the work was created (pencil, or pen and ink, and the like), the source (where the work was originally printed), and the name of the lender. The labels do not identify the characters portrayed, not do they explain the storyline, of which the individual page or strip is an excerpt. More importantly, the labels do not direct the viewer’s attention to any particular aspect of the works; hence, the labels do not inform the viewer why the curators chose to include these particular examples of the artists’ work. And sometimes, as we shall see, the labels are wrong about what they do say.

    Picking up where I left off last time in my travel through the Newark Museum’s half of “Masters,” proceeding chronologically through the history of the comic strip, I now come to the first of the Masters whom I have seen in person, the late Milton Caniff (1907-1988), creator of Terry and the Pirates and Steve Canyon. His introductory wall text correctly declares Caniff to be “one of the greatest storytellers ever to work in the comics medium.”

    The wall text continues, “Caniff’s characters, in contrast to the predictable behavior of most adventure heroes, had multifaceted personalities. . . .” (This line comes from page 84 of co-curator John Carlin’s text for the Masters of American Comics catalogue, published by Yale University Press.) I think it was comics writer Don McGregor who once observed that Stan Lee did for superhero comic books what Caniff had done three decades earlier for the adventure comic strip. Each man wreaked a revolution through endowing the cardboard character types of adventure melodrama with multidimensional characterization.

    But who are Caniff’s characters? Caniff did Terry and the Pirates from 1934 to 1946, and Steve Canyon‘s prime was in the late 1940s and 1950s. How many visitors to “Masters” who are under the age of sixty will know what the premise of Terry and the Pirates is, or will even know who Caniff’s most famous creation, the Dragon Lady, who appears in this show, is? Surely museum visitors could better appreciate the Terry and Canyon strips on display if they were given some background information about the series and their characters. There is a reason for the title of my column: comics should be placed in context. But the wall text provides no help in this regard, and Carlin’s text in the catalogue does little better.

    On the other hand, journalist Pete Hamill’s essay about Caniff in the catalogue not only clearly explains who Canyon and Terry‘s main characters are, but also vividly conjures up the atmosphere of Terry at its height, with mystery, exoticism, danger, and romance. Hamill points to Caniff’s own comparison of his comic strips to the picaresque novels of past centuries: a series of adventures in which supporting characters appear, disappear, and then return, just as people we know may do in our own lives. (Cervantes’ Don Quixote and Henry Fielding’s Tom Jones are classic examples.) I especially like Hamill’s observation that Caniff’s “women were his finest creations, each distinct, all with sophisticated emotional lives, all exuding erotic possibilities” (p. 232). This is a matter that Carlin himself does not even address.

    One of the Terry Sunday strips in the show (November 27, 1940, on pages 82 and 83 in the book), depicts Terry and another character, Dude Hennick, just after they have buried the latter’s girlfriend. This is an impressive work even if one does not know anything about the characters except what this particular Sunday reveals. Later in the book (p. 114) Carlin asserts that “Caniff’s art is compromised by his sentimental themes.” This is unfair. Similarly to the Dick Tracy funeral sequence I described last week, Caniff uses subtlety, indirection, and understatement to evade the traps of superficial, sentimental excess and to simultaneously convey deeper, dramatic emotion. Caniff distances the reader from potential bathos by repeatedly portraying Terry and Dude in long shot, and once even from far overhead. Caniff also repeatedly casts them into deep shadow. This particular Sunday strip is a prime example of what Hamill calls the “dense, impressionistic brushstrokes” (p. 232) to create what Carlin terms the use of “chiaroscuro” (p. 78), meaning the contrast between light and deep shadow. (Though this style, which Caniff’s friend Noel Sickles devised and Caniff perfected, is often called impressionistic, I prefer Carlin’s term, since Impressionism in painting signifies a bright color palette, and not the ominous black areas of Caniff’s artwork.) Even when Dude and Terry are depicted in closeup, Dude shows a stone-faced stoicism, while the younger Terry only subtly betrays his sorrow in his eyes and mouth. Significantly, Dude is in long shot when he looks at the grave for the last time, his emotions unreadable from the panel’s foreground.

    In the catalogue Hamill explains that when Dude’s girlfriend, Raven Sherman, was “suddenly, brutally killed,” “her death was unprecedented in comic strips and set off an outbreak of grief among millions of readers.” To continue the analogy with Marvel, Raven’s death was comparable in dramatic impact to the death of Gwen Stacy in Amazing Spider-Man in 1973. Each woman’s death marked a revolution in adventure melodrama in its particular comics format. Readers expected that the romantic heroine, however much she was endangered, would always be rescued; the deaths of Raven in an adventure comic strip and of Gwen in a superhero comic book dashed those expectations. These stories put readers on notice that happy endings were no longer mandatory. They thus signaled a new level of realism and even demonstrated that adventure comics melodrama could achieve the level of tragedy. But someone previously unfamiliar with Caniff’s Terry would learn none of this from the “Masters” show.

    Carlin called his section of his catalogue text about Caniff, “Milton Caniff–Master of Suspense,” giving the cartoonist the same title associated with Alfred Hitchcock. Indeed, in both a wall text in the show and in the catalogue (pgs. 84-85), Carlin writes that “Similar to filmmaker Alfred Hitchcock, Caniff took an already established medium and broadened its palette in a manner that significantly changed the way subsequent artists have worked. They both introduced depth of field, atmospheric lighting, and novel perspectives or camera angles to suggest dramatic points of view.” The second sentence overstates the case for Hitchcock: it’s true about Hitchcock’s camera angles, but he borrowed his “atmospheric lighting” from the German Expressionist films of the 1920s and 1930s, and the true cinematic innovators regarding depth of field were Orson Welles and Gregg Toland in Citizen Kane (1941). But Carlin’s basic point is correct: as he wrote earlier in the book (p. 78), Caniff “developed the vocabulary of realistic suspense to its classic form.”

    Carlin also asserts that, like Hitchcock’s films in their influence on the French New Wave directors of the late 1950s and 1960s, Caniff’s work had a “delayed impact” on what Carlin calls “new wave” comics artists of the 1960s. Carlin claims that “Caniff inspired Harvey Kurtzman and Jack Kirby to create the comic books produced by EC and Marvel, which highlighted the new wave of comics art” (p. 85). This is misleading in numerous ways.

    First, Carlin is linking Kurtzman and Kirby to the 1960s. But Kirby started in comics in the late 1930s, and co-created Captain America in 1941, when Caniff’s Terry was in its heyday, and Kurtzman did his innovative EC work in the 1950s, when Steve Canyon was still surging along. I agree that Kurtzman’s war comics and Kirby’s adventure comics show the influence of Caniff’s visual storytelling. Indeed, two daily Canyon strips in the show (August 21 and September 9, 1947, Masters p. 237) feature dynamically staged fight scenes that put me in mind of Kirby action scenes. But was Kurtzman consciously motivated to write his anti-war EC stories in response to Caniff’s gung-ho war sagas? How could Caniff’s work possibly bring about Kurtzman’s creation of MAD? Just how did the comparatively realistic Terry and Canyon inspire Kirby to create Marvel superhero comics? And didn’t Stan Lee have something to do with creating the Marvel superhero comics of the 1960s? In fact, didn’t Lee hire Kirby to collaborate with him on these books?

    Another example in the show of the need for context is Caniff’s great Sunday Terry strip for December 29, 1946 (Masters p. 85), which The New York Times ran in its online “slideshow” accompanying art critic Michael Kimmelman’s rave review of “Masters”. Here Terry, the boy hero of the 1930s who has grown up into a military pilot, bids farewell to a woman named Jane, who is leaving for Australia. Except for its first panel, the last two tiers of the strip are free from dialogue. Jane walks away from Terry through the snows of winter (the season of endings), stops, rushes towards him, they embrace and kiss, and then, overwhelmed by emotion, she leaves once more. Caniff’s simple but powerful staging provides a superb lesson in visual storytelling that any viewer, whatever the extent of his or her background in comics, can easily comprehend. The sequence also demonstrates Caniff’s masterful dramatization of emotion. When Jane runs towards Terry, it is in an overhead long shot, distancing the viewer from the characters’ feelings. This makes the impact of the panel showing their passionate embrace, in medium close-up, more powerful. Then Caniff pulls back to a long shot: we can see that Jane has her hand to her face in a gesture of anguish, but we are too far away to see her facial expression. Thus Caniff dramatically evokes emotion, but lets it subside before he runs the risk of falling into sentimental excess. Terry is even further away in the long shot, so his emotions are unreadable. Though literally speaking the reader’s viewpoint is in front of Jane, and Terry is behind her, Caniff has figuratively placed us in Terry’s psychological position: she is leaving both Terry and the reader behind. Jane’s plane takes off, and Terry trudges off through the snow towards the sunset (or sunrise?), in a variation on a standard final shot for ending a film (notably in Chaplin’s work), as he passes a poster for a New Year’s Eve party reading “Ring Out the Old, Ring In the New.” But the mood cast by the farewell scene and by the shadows in the final panel is one of melancholy.

    This Sunday strip is powerful just on the level of its literal meaning. But wouldn’t it deepen the museum viewer’s appreciation if he or she were informed by the label that this is also Caniff’s final Terry strip? Terry would be continued by other hands while Caniff went on to create Steve Canyon, a strip he would own. Hence this final Terry is as close as Caniff came to doing metafiction in this realistic strip: the emotion of Terry and Jane’s farewell also represents that of Caniff parting from the Terry strip.

    Had the label for this 1946 Sunday strip stated that it was Caniff’s last Terry, perhaps the curators would not have mislabeled two 1947 Canyon dailies in the show as Terry strips. In one of them, Canyon is even called by name! (All Terry and Canyon strips are properly identified in the book.)

    Museum visitors are on their own in studying Caniff’s more complex visual storytelling methods in a car chase sequence from the Terry dailies from November 25-30, 1940 (p. 80). But Carlin does a superb job of analyzing the sequence, panel by panel, in the catalogue. I found it rewarding to see what Caniff himself would probably have considered techniques of his craft now being described as the visual strategies of museum-worthy art.

    My approach to this sequence is to analyze it in cinematic terms, studying Caniff’s “camera angles,” composition, and “editing” as he shifts from one “shot” to the next. It has been claimed that the “decompressed” storytelling in contemporary comic books is an attempt to make them cinematic. But what is more truly cinematic: the interminable talking heads sequences of current comic books, or Caniff’s mastery of dynamic action, shifts of visual perspective, and his equivalent of rapid editing?

    Carlin describes Caniff’s “cinematic” methods, but he also points out design elements in the sequence. Carlin can go too far: he asserts that “The entire sequence is held together obliquely by a thread that runs through it in the form of the serpentine line” (p. 79). But he locates only four examples of this serpentine line in three strips out of the entire six. Moreover, how could the original readers perceive a continuing design element like this running through the sequence when they saw each strip printed a day apart from the next? The technique of a recurring design element makes more sense within the confines of a single installment. For example, in the November 28 strip Carlin points out a white stripe which appears along the bottom of each panel, and finally turns into a road in the final panel. Carlin contends that “The abstract diagonals of car forms, roads, rivers and streams give the strip a strong sense of design that created the suspenseful impact of the story’ (p. 79). I am not persuaded that such design elements created the suspense, rather than the aforementioned more cinematic methods, but they certainly contribute to the beauty of the sequence, and I’m grateful that Carlin points them out. By showing me how to see in as new way, the Masters book is doing its work.

    Hamill states in his essay that Caniff’s work was “widely imitated by two generations of cartoonists” (p. 229), in other words, from the 1930s into the 1960s. Yet despite the fact that Caniff, as Carlin says, established the visual vocabulary for action-adventure comics, how aware of Caniff’s work have subsequent artists doing adventure comic books been? I rarely see comic book artists of the last thirty-five years listing Caniff as an influence. My impression is that the work of Alex Toth and Frank Robbins, artists who were unmistakably influenced by Caniff, are more appreciated by comics professionals than by the comics readership at large. (When Bruce Timm mentioned Toth as an influence on stage at this year’s San Diego Con, there was not one clap of recognition from the audience.) If post-1960s comic book artists are influenced by Caniff, it is usually indirectly, through his influence on Kirby, and even Kirby’s influence, once ubiquitous in superhero comics, has drastically diminished in recent years under the growing domination of “decompressed” storytelling and manga.

    The saga of the American comic strip comes to a close at the Newark Museum with Charles M. Schulz (1922-2000), the creator of Peanuts. Of all the classic comic strips at the Newark Museum, many of which were quite famous in their heyday, Peanuts is the only one that maintains that level of popularity in the 21st century, thanks to continuing reprints in newspapers, reruns of the classic TV specials, and licensing ranging from greeting cards to Met Life commercials. (I expect that even Popeye is less well known to today’s kids than he was to Baby Boomers; like Looney Tunes, his animated cartoons have been exiled to appearing on Boomerang.)

    Schulz’s introductory wall text at the Newark Museum proclaims him to be “the most influential cartoonist of the post-war era.” This is an overstatement, but if the Museum had limited the accolade to the world of American newspaper comic strips, it would unquestionably be true. (In the world of postwar American comic books, Jack Kirby would likely be “the most influential cartoonist.” And somehow I doubt that Schulz was “the most influential cartoonist” for manga; wouldn’t that honor go to Osamu Tezuka?)

    In the Masters book Carlin asserts that “By the late 1940s the size and printing quality of newspaper comics diminished dramatically. . . “ (p. 86). This may be somewhat misleading: I can recall that in my early childhood Prince Valiant still took up a full page of a Sunday broadsheet newspaper. But it appears that from the beginning, Schulz labored under sharp restrictions on the size of Peanuts, and usually each daily consisted of four small panels. Carlin states that Schulz utilized the limitation to his advantage, becoming a “master of minimalism.” In his superb essay in the catalogue, Patrick O’Donnell, creator of the comic strip Mutts and a friend of Schulz, perceptively describes each four-panel Peanuts strip as a “graphic haiku” (p. 244).

    An example of Peanuts in the show (Sunday, October 13, 1968), the catalogue (p. 245) and the online slideshow may even be Schulz’s joke about people who dislike a minimalist approach to art, including his comics. Linus is drawing a simple picture of a row of trees, but his sister Lucy declares, “That’s not art.” She insists on his adding more and more–a lake, a waterfall, a deer, and a multicolored sunset, making it sound like a vast Hudson River School canvas of the mid-19th century–and then shouts, “That’s art!” with such force that it literally turns Linus the Artist upside down.

    In the book Carlin states that Schulz’s “visual minimalism was perfectly in keeping with the style of its times–shoebox skyscrapers, color-field painting, black-and-white TV, early rock “˜n’ roll, and frozen dinners” (p. 88). This seems to me a one-sided view of the 1950s and 1960s, when Peanuts originated and rose to its creative peak. These were also the time of Cinemascope movie epics and unprecedented postwar prosperity for the middle class, permitting them to buy big houses and cars in the suburbs: how does this relate to minimalism? In animation the 1950s were the heyday of the UPA Studio, which pioneered limited animation and preferred strong, stylized, often minimal visual design to attempts at detailed naturalism. In both regards UPA was reacting against the Disney studio. Wouldn’t it make more sense to compare Schulz’s minimalism (in both visual design and characters’ “movement”) to UPA’s? In his essay O’Donnell points out the influence that Segar and Herriman had on Schulz. Is it more likely that Schulz was part of a generational rebellion against the illustrative realism of comic strips by Hal Foster and Alex Raymond (who aren’t in the “Masters” show) and was attempting to recapture the “cartooniness” and simplicity of Krazy Kat and Popeye?

    Carlin explains that “the minimalism that defines Peanuts forces its readers to focus on subtle nuances rather than broad actions or sharp transitions. . . . Everything is kept in the same minor key so that the simplest turn of a line can transform a character’s expression. . . “ (p. 88). O’Donnell compares Schulz’s work to Japanese poetry; through the use of the term “minor key,” Carlin likens it to music. Carlin goes on to observe that “by 1960 Schulz went even further by routinely drawing strips that repeated the same image in every panel, with subtle variations. . . .By maintaining the image from frame to frame, Schulz shifts our focus from action to the subtle inner psychology of his characters” (p. 88). (I wish that Carlin did not sometimes substitute the word “frame” for the correct term of “panel.”)

    A Sunday strip from August 14, 1960, illustrates Carlin’s points. It presents Lucy, Charlie Brown, and Linus lying atop a small hill, looking upward at the clouds. (It’s a classic triangular composition.) As Linus describes how some clouds “look to me like the map of the British Honduras,” Charlie Brown raises his head with a deadpan expression, with two dots representing his eyes, that nonetheless subtly indicates his surprise and perhaps puzzlement at what Linus said. (This also may represent a subtle breaking of the fourth wall, since Charlie Brown is effectively looking out at the viewer, perhaps inviting our sympathy for his reaction, as Oliver Hardy used to do after Stan Laurel instigated yet another fine mess.) Charlie Brown puts his head back down in the succeeding panel, But in the next panel, when Linus claims he sees clouds resembling the stoning of St. Stephen and the Apostle Paul, Charlie Brown raises his head again, and this time Schulz drew curved lines next to his eyes, indicating that his surprise and bewilderment have sharply increased. But as Carlin said, this is “inner psychology”: Charlie Brown does not manifest these emotions in action or in dialogue. He turns his head when Lucy asks him what he sees in the clouds. Then, in the last panel, as if returning to the dominant key, Charlie Brown again places his head down, as he calmly delivers the punch line: “Well, I was going to say I saw a ducky and a horsie, but I changed my mind.”

    This Sunday strip makes an interesting pairing with the previous Sunday strip I described, in which Lucy rejects the simplicity of Linus’s original drawing. But in the second Sunday I don’t get the sense that Schulz is ridiculing Linus’s imaginative interpretation of what he sees in the clouds. Rather, Schulz seems to me to be acknowledging that there can be more to something than a surface interpretation might indicate. Here Linus is again portrayed as an imaginative artist, who sees more and further than the everyman Charlie Brown.

    Carlin states that Schulz’s repetition of the same image, with slight variations, “shifts our focus from action” to the characters; “inner psychology.” But one could see how, in less talented hands than Schulz’s, this stratagem could shift the readers’ attention from the visual aspect of the strip to the dialogue, and hence a strip could become a visually inert sequence of talking heads. It seems to me that in this Sunday strip about clouds, Schulz skillfully choreographs the “slight variations” in the image so that the reader focuses on them–on Charlie Brown’s changing head movements and subtly changing facial expression, and the psychological reactions they express–equally as much as on the dialogue. Looking around the room with Peanuts art at the Newark Museum, I was struck by how much Schulz actually has his characters move from panel to panel, in contrast with the conventional wisdom that he basically repeats the same image over and over.

    I take issue with the book’s contention that Peanuts always remains in the same “minor key.” Look again at the Sunday in which Lucy critiques Linus’s drawing, in which Schulz quietly builds to the next to last panel, in which Lucy shouts “That’s art!” and Linus suddenly flips head over heels, as if hit by the force of an explosion. Now there’s an abrupt shift into a major key, before Schulz returns in the final panel to calm, as Lucy quietly delivers the anticlimactic punch line: “Sometimes it takes a layman to set these people straight.” Now that I’m writing this, it also reminds me of Caniff’s minimalist treatment of Terry and Jane’s intense emotions in the panels on either side of the panel in which their passions “explode” in their tight embrace.

    Then there is a sequence in the Masters book from June 9-13, 1958 (p. 90), set during a baseball game, in which Charlie Brown ends up standing immobile, panel after panel, looking upward, waiting to catch a fly ball. Schulz moves to a close-up as Charlie Brown, with only a dot for an eye and no visible mouth, thinks to himself that if he catches the ball, his team will “win the championship, and I’ll be a hero!” Then in the next panel, he thinks, “If I miss it, I’ll be the goat!” and that curved line appears around his eye, indicating inner stress. In the following panel Charlie Brown tells himself, “I can hear it now. . . “˜Charlie, the goat, Brown!’” Here Schulz moves back to the medium close-up with which he began the daily, showing Violet and Lucy, the two women most likely to call Charlie Brown “the Goat,” and Schulz adds a line to Charlie Brown’s face that indicates a tightly clenched mouth, indicating his growing inner sense of impending disaster.

    After this long build-up, the explosion has to take place: the emotions must be released. Inevitably, Charlie Brown, in keeping with his role as the archetypal loser, drops the ball. Lucy immediately bursts into wailing, Schroeder and a visibly upset Patty shout their dismay (in large, bold letters), and in panel three the entire team, their mouths wide open, joins Lucy in a chorus of wailing. There’s nothing minimal about this. Even when Schulz returns to relative calm in the last panel, in which he typically had team manager Charlie Brown understate his reaction in dialogue (“It depresses a manager to see his team cry. . . .”), Schulz drew Charlie Brown looking far more emotional than he did previously in this four strip sequence.

    Speaking of E. C. Segar’s influence on Schulz in his essay, O’Donnell says that “Knowing that Popeye could meet Eugene the Jeep and Alice the Goon gave Schulz the freedom to make Snoopy a WWI flying ace” (p. 243). Looking at the Sunday, Feb. 13, 1966 strip in the catalogue (p. 241), in which World War I aerial ace Snoopy makes his way through the French countryside, I thought instead of two other Masters in the show: Winsor McCay and Frank King.

    Supposedly, on a literal level, Snoopy is merely fantasizing his adventures as a World War I pilot. But his imagined world is visualized as real: Schulz shows us one of the abandoned trenches, complete with barbed wire, and a sign to Pont-a-Mousson. At one point Schulz shows us Snoopy’s familiar doghouse, which Snoopy, in the midst of his fantasy, calls “a small French farm house.” But once Snoopy goes inside, it really does seem to be a French farm house, with a table, lighted candle, and even a window! In other words, like Nemo entering Slumberland, or Skeezix entering the world of his daydreams, Snoopy is depicted as entering a fantasy world. This obviously is the forerunner of Calvin’s fantasy worlds in Bill Watterson’s Calvin and Hobbes. And the final panel of this Peanuts Sunday shows Snoopy asleep in bed, as if to make the connection with Little Nemo clear.

    An even more explicit representative of the artist than Linus in Peanuts is Schroeder, Schulz’s boy virtuoso pianist. Schroeder might even be Schulz’s metaphor, conscious or unconscious, for the cartoonist as artist: Schroeder plays a child’s toy piano, but somehow he can get it to produce Beethoven’s masterworks.

    Two strips that pair Schroeder and Snoopy, one from April 27, 1990 in the Newark Museum, and another from September 14, 1986 in the book (p. 93), show Schulz venturing into metacomics territory. In the 1990 strip Schroeder plays his piano, and, as usual, Schulz represents the music by means of upper and lower musical staffs bearing notes. We see the staffs again at Snoopy’s doghouse, where bones replace the notes. Just what is going on here? Does Schulz mean to suggest that Snoopy is imagining his own musical staffs, but that Snoopy is interested not in music but in his own appetite? Hence, Snoopy’s “art” is all about food. Or have the musical staffs somehow become physical objects, on which Snoopy can hang bones as if they were ornaments on a Christmas tree?

    In the 1986 strip Snoopy is asleep atop Schroeder’s piano, as Schroeder plays his music, which again is represented by notes on musical staffs. Snoopy awakens and inadvertently places his head between the upper and lower staffs as he yawns. Snoopy then walks off, taking the staffs with him. Schroeder grabs the upper staff, and the lines connecting it to the lower staff stretch like rubber bands. Then Schroeder lets go, and the upper staff snaps back, knocking Snoopy down as the notes fly into the air. Snoopy hangs the notes (some of which are now bent) back on the staffs, which are now quite crooked, places it above the piano, and falls asleep once more, as Schroeder looks at it with a minimalist expression. perhaps denoting a placid sort of wonderment.

    In this case the staffs and the notes seem not only to have become solid objects, but have also seemingly lost their original purpose of denoting music. (What would the severely dented notes and staff sound like? Yet Schroeder has stopped playing the piano, so presumably these “signs” have ceased denoting musical sounds.) Schroeder and Snoopy inhabit a world in which one of the visual signs of comics language–musical notes and staffs–are as “real” as they are. Presumably, then, at least in strip installments like these, Snoopy ands Schroeder know they themselves exist in a comic strip. This is a gag that could only be done in the comics medium. It’s as if the word balloons over their heads had physical reality for the comic strip characters, as, actually, sometimes happened in Walt Kelly’s Pogo. (Once Kelly’s turtle, Churchy La Femme, even went around shooting the balloons.)

    With Peanuts the Newark Museum’s portion of “Masters” and the show’s history of comic strips come to an end. (Will Eisner’s Sunday Spirit sections not only started before the 1950 debut of Peanuts, but are really more like comic books than newspaper strips.) The implication is that Schulz was the last true “Master of American Comics” who worked in newspaper comic strips. “Masters” co-curator Brian Walker is aware of this implication and expressed his concern in an interview: “I think one of the biggest differences I have from the Spiegelman/Carlin canon is that I don’t really believe that newspaper comics died at some point or that they were completely eclipsed by what is going on now, beginning with underground comics. I still think there are cartoonists doing incredibly creative work in newspapers these days.”

    But has there been anyone who started in newspaper comics after Schulz who matched him and many of the other Masters as an innovator in visual storytelling and design? I don’t know that there has been. Still, is it right to give museumgoers the impression that comic strips stopped being a creatively vital artform after the creation of Peanuts?

    So, as you shall see next week, the Masters show moves on to the Jewish Museum, the history of American comic books, and even more questionable assumptions about the evolution of the comics medium.

    ADVERTISEMENTS FOR MYSELF

    Becker and Mayer has recently published Marvel Classic Heroes, a book written by myself, recounting the history of Captain America, the Hulk, Spider-Man, and Wolverine, which comes in a box including statuettes of the aforementioned heroes. Looks to me like the sort of thing that would make a good Christmas present!

    My lecture series “1986: The Year That Changed Comics,” finally reaches the high point of that fateful year on Monday, November 13. That’s when I tackle the first six issues of Alan Moore and Dave Gibbons’ Watchmen, starting at 6:30 PM at New York City’s Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art.

    Copyright 2006 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #153: Top Drawers

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    That redoubtable comics news blogger, the Beat, regularly refers to “the comics-loving New York Times,” and that description is largely apt. Last year The New York Times Sunday Magazine inaugurated its new section “The Funny Pages,” including a weekly comic strip by a prominent alternative cartoonist, each of whom does a story that runs for several months: the first contributor was Chris Ware, who was followed by Jaime Hernandez, and currently by Seth. Though it would have seemed highly improbable even two years ago, Times readers are now accustomed to regularly seeing writer George Gene Gustines’ news reports on the superhero genre, in comics and other media.

    cic2006-11-03.jpgBut then on October 30, 2006, the Times ran an article by television reporter Bill Carter with the headline “It Doesn’t Take a “˜Comic Book Nerd’ to Create a Superheroes Hit.”

    I write my own titles for this column, but I have learned that generally in the world of magazines and newspapers, editors rather than writers devise the titles for articles. So perhaps, you might think, Carter and his subject, Tim Kring, the creator of the new NBC series Heroes, did not thus disparage the audience for comics. But you would be wrong. “”˜I was not a comic book nerd,’ Mr. Kring said,” according to Carter’s article. It’s just amazing that it has not occurred to Mr. Kring that it is not good public relations to disparage much of your core audience.

    I suspect that I see a trend emerging. As the mainstream becomes more interested in comics and graphic novels, some of these newcomers to the medium will feel obligated to distance themselves from those of us who have known and appreciated comics as an artform all along. The newcomers will position themselves to appear as discerning observers with good taste; we will still be stereotyped as nerds and geeks.

    Mr. Carter seems not to think highly of the comics audience, either. He writes that “With an audience of 14.3 million on Oct. 23, more than the comic-obsessed are watching now.” Would these be the television-obsessed, then? Or does Carter only consider aficionados of art forms he thinks are outside the mainstream to be obsessives?

    Carter also asserts that “The world Mr. Kring comes from seems almost antithetical to the comic traditions. He was a religious-studies major who somehow turned that interest into a master’s degree in filmmaking.” So Kring has a background in mythology and in visual storytelling. That seems to me to be a proper foundation for writing superhero stories.

    Of course there remain that large contingent of comics buffs who glory in being stereotyped as nerds and geeks. For example, on November 1, 2006, the venerable TV soap opera Guiding Light, with cooperation from Marvel, ran an episode in which one of the characters gained super-powers and became a costumed heroine called, of course, the Guiding Light. Marvel did a tie-in comics story, written by Jim McCann, who told the Times’ Gustines (October 31, 2006) about “writing the sound effects for Wolverine’s unleashing his claws and Spider-Man’s shooting his webs. He said, “˜I geeked out typing SNIKT and THWIP.’” This isn’t the most felicitously phrased statement to be immortalized in cyberspace, either.

    The Guiding Light episode and the success of Heroes both demonstrate that a taste for the superhero fiction that originated in comics is not confined to some supposed subculture of social misfits. Carter quotes Kevin Reilly, the president of NBC Entertainment, as stating that in Heroes, “We have the only real hit of the fall, and it’s growing.” In the same article Kring says about comics that “the truth is that nowadays that world is so pervasive, especially when you have kids, that you go to movies in the summertime and that’s what you see.” This is becoming part of the mainstream in American entertainment.

    How far does this cultural shift extend? The last time that I visited the Metropolitan Museum of Art, I stumbled across a new temporary exhibition titled “Series and Sequence: Modern Photographs from the Collection.” Each display in this exhibit consisted of a series of photographs that were taken by the same photographer and that were meant to be shown in a specific sequence. As the introductory wall text stated, these were “groupings that highlight serial progression and narrative sequence and thus go against the traditional authority and autonomy of the single image.” These “groupings” may not have been cartoon art. Only one of these series, a set of photos by Chris Burden, recording his encounter with a woman, actually told a story. Each photo in another series was accompanied by a sheet of paper with a typed description. Hence, this sequence combined words and pictures. But all of the series in this exhibition were indeed “sequential art,” to use Will Eisner’s term for describing comics.

    I quite like the Metropolitan’s assertion that in these examples of sequential art “go against the traditional authority and autonomy of the single image,” by which the Museum presumably means the conventional paintings, drawings and photographs exhibited in museums. That is an intriguing approach to looking at comics.

    Upstairs the Metropolitan’s galleries for drawings, the Museum was temporarily exhibiting illustrations from children’s books of the late 19th and early 20th centuries by artists including Maxfield Parrish, Howard Pyle, Arthur Rackham, and an artist whose work I hadn’t known, Peter Newell, the illustrator of a 1902 edition of Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland. Perhaps this was a response to the Dahesh Museum’s show of classic American illustration earlier this year (see “Comics in Context” #132). It may also be further evidence that the best of popular culture, given sufficient passage of time, becomes incorporated into the canon of high art.

    The works by Newell, Pyle and Rackham were efforts at conveying a story through pictures. Looking over these displays, I found myself reflecting that the first great Master of American Comics, Winsor McCay was a contemporary of Newell and Pyle. Why shouldn’t McCay be exhibited at the Met, too? (Actually, I recall seeing a McCay collection in the Met’s book shop over a decade and a half ago.)

    On this same visit to the Metropolitan, I looked through another new temporary exhibit, “Coaxing the Spirits to Dance: Art of the Papuan Gulf.”
    One label stated regarding Papuan ritual dances that “During these performances, spirits entered the masks and possessed the dancers, allowing them to do remarkable things.” This is why I like museum exhibits of tribal masks and costumes. They serve as reminders that the masks and costumes of superheroes are modern counterparts to the masks and costumes of ancient tribal religions.

    Sequential art. Illustrations for children’s books. Masks. Thirteen years ago the Met did a retrospective of drawings by Honore Daumier, the 19th century French illustrator and caricaturist. Three years ago the Met did a retrospective about Philip Guston, whose later paintings were quite cartoonlike, noted in its wall texts that Guston was influenced by George Herriman’s Krazy Kat, but failed to show any examples of Herriman’s work (see “Comics in Context” #20). I wonder how long it will take the Metropolitan to put together the puzzle pieces and do an exhibition about comics.

    The bad old days are not so long ago. Take the case of Roy Lichtenstein, the late Pop artist who is best known for creating variations on comics panels. Back in “Comics in Context” #4, I recalled the Solomon R. Guggenheim’s 1993 Lichtenstein retrospective, whose introductory wall text commended him for appropriating images from sources that, it claimed, had no artistic value, including comics, and converting them into art.

    Thanks to Colleen Doran’s blog (for Oct. 18, 2006) and an article in The Boston Globe, I learned about art teacher David Barsalou’s “Deconstructing Roy Lichtenstein” website. (It’s here, but I warn you, if you’re on dial-up, it’ll take a long, long time to load.) Barsalou has been tracking down the comic book and comic strip panels that Lichtenstein used for source material, and posts them next to reproductions of Lichtenstein’s work on his website. The results are eye-opening.

    The Globe quotes Jack Cowart, the executive director of the Lichtenstein Foundation, as saying, “Barsalou is boring to us.” Here is yet another example of a person who does not comprehend how to talk to the news media. He comes off sounding like a stuffed shirt caricature of an academic who finds people outside his elite circle tedious. But Cowart does deign to respond: “Barsalou’s thesis notwithstanding, the panels were changed in scale, color, treatment, and in their implications. There is no exact copy.” That’s true, but to look at the Lichtensteins side by side with the original source material is to realize that Lichtenstein unmistakably copied the essential figure drawing and all or much of the composition of these works from the original comics. Much of the artistic vitality and power of Lichtenstein’s pictures comes directly from their sources in comics (including work by such important figures as Carl Barks, Joe Kubert and Russ Heath; I’ve even spotted a Lichtenstein that seems adapted from Jack Kirby). The Globe article points out that in the music world this would be called “sampling,” which, an intellectual property attorney quoted in the piece says, “is considered stealing.” I would add that in the comics world it’s called “swiping.” Cowart protests that “Nobody seemed to raise this issue way back when.” Ah, but now mainstream culture has started taking the comics medium seriously, and Lichtenstein is being found out. (Indeed, to my taste, certain Lichtensteins on Barsalou’s website are inferior to the original comics sources as artwork.)

    Cowart also declares that “We are all in favor of having the drawers and writers receive as much credit as humanly possible.” The “drawers”? What, are they furniture or underwear? Can’t Cowart bring himself to call the people who drew and inked the original comics “artists”? And if the Lichtenstein Foundation is so concerned with crediting the “drawers” of the source material, why didn’t they already do what Barsalou is doing now?

    Right now, the Whitney Museum of American Art is holding an exhibition called “Picasso and American Art,” demonstrating how Picasso’s work influenced many major American artists of the 20th century. There are Lichtenstein works in this show, hanging alongside the Picassos that inspired them. Hence viewers can see for themselves exactly what Lichtenstein took from Picasso and how he changed it to suit his own purposes. So here’s an idea for a retrospective: “Lichtenstein and American Comics.” Why not hang Lichtenstein paintings alongside reproductions of the comics he used as sources? The Museum of Modern Art’s “High and Low” show in the early 1990s paired some examples of Lichtensteins with comics, but I’m proposing using this compare-and-contrast scenario for an all-Lichtenstein show. Such an exhibition would ideally set viewers thinking about the artistic merits of the original comics as well.

    Even as museums and galleries grow more interested in comics as the new century progresses, I wonder how much 21st century comics artwork will be available for eventual exhibition? In an October 22 entry on her blog, Colleen Doran reflects on how lettering, coloring, and even, increasingly, inking is done on computers now, and how publishers increasingly prefer artwork to be delivered via discs. “Since so many artists aren’t even really doing inks anymore – they are sketching their work and tweaking it in Photoshop – I wonder about the values of comic art,” she writes. “I’ve heard some collectors say they have trouble finding hand lettered art directly on the page, and classic comic art with lettering and inking, is becoming very attractive.” This echoes the warnings sounded on the “Brush Masters” panel I moderated at one of the Big Apple Conventions last year (see “Comics in Context” #132).

    You can see original comics art. complete with inking and lettering, at the “Masters of American Comics” show that I have been covering for the last two weeks. Another of the virtues of this exhibition is that it never condescends to the comics medium, to the individual artists whose work is displayed, or to comics aficionados. (The sole exception is an essay by a contributing writer to the Masters of American Comics catalogue, as you shall see.)

    The show is currently divided between the Jewish Museum in Manhattan and the Newark Museum in New Jersey. When I left off last week I was still making my way through the Newark Museum’s galleries, where work by classic comic strip artists is displayed.

    The next Master in the show is Frank King (1883-1969), the creator of Gasoline Alley, which has been going through a critical rediscovery and reappraisal. In books about comics that I read decades ago, Gasoline Alley seemed most notable for defying the convention that comics characters never aged, or did so extremely slowly: King’s strip presented a community whose members aged in real time.

    One claim that the “Masters” show makes for Gasoline Alley in a wall text is well over the top: “Gasoline Alley is the Our Town of the comics pages, and the family history that has unfolded in its panels for more than 80 years reads like the Great American Novel.” Most of the Gasoline Alley I’ve read was done after King’s death, and I only know King’s own work from individual Sundays and daily strips, not from entire story arcs. Nevertheless, I find the idea that King’s Gasoline Alley reads “like the Great American Novel” hard to swallow. Is it really on a level with the novels of, say, Nathaniel Hawthorne, Herman Melville, Mark Twain, Henry James, F. Scott Fitzgerald, Ernest Hemingway, or William Faulkner? Certainly none of the individual strips in the exhibit’s King section show any trace of that level of literary quality. Even the comparison to Thornton Wilder’s Our Town goes only so far, since the last act of Wilder’s drama, set in a graveyard among the spirits of the deceased, reveals the play’s deep and dark foundation of pessimism about the brevity of existence. From the examples on display, King’s Gasoline Alley seems genuinely sunny in comparison. (Similarly, Krazy Kat‘s desert setting reminds New York Times art critic Michael Kimmelman of Samuel Beckett in his October 13, 2006 “Masters” review, but Herriman’s work is free from Beckett’s underlying despair.)

    “Masters” co-curator John Carlin more persuasively contends in the wall text and the catalogue that King “was one of the last newspaper artists to follow his [Winsor McCay’s] lead” (Masters p. 61). This is demonstrated by King’s early strip Bobby Make-Believe, which was obviously inspired by Little Nemo. In a 1918 Sunday page in “Masters” Bobby imagines himself ascending through the clouds, becoming gigantic and walking on the moon and Saturn’s rings, and even riding the tail of a comet, before returning to reality (p. 210).

    I notice two major differences between this particular Sunday strip and Nemo. Nemo falls asleep and has dreams which are beyond his conscious control. In contrast, Bobby is daydreaming: he is consciously imagining what he sees. Nemo is repeatedly awed by the wonders he witnesses in Slumberland, and often terrified by them, causing him to awaken. In this installment, at least, Bobby, who seems to have a short attention span, is quickly bored by the marvels he conjures up for himself, as if he were a creative artist who did not value his own talents.

    Although on weekdays Gasoline Alley dealt with homey realities of everyday life, “King’s Sunday pages,” Carlin states, are “filled with unexpected fantasy and visual inventiveness” (p. 61).

    Some of the show’s Gasoline Alley Sundays follow the Nemo/Bobby pattern. In the Sunday, August 19, 1934 strip (p. 62) Skeezix, then a boy, observes the reflection of the sky in a lake, and then imagines himself entering this “upside-down world” and flying/swimming about among the clouds and birds flying upside down. In the Sunday, June 28, 1931 page (p. 219), Skeezix actually does dive into the lake, whereupon he imagines seeing fish as big as he is: has he shrunk or have the fish grown gigantic?

    I am less impressed than the curators by two pages in which Skeezix’s adoptive “uncle,” Walt, takes him for “our annual walk among the autumn colors” (Sunday, November 4, 1928 and Sunday, October 20, 1929, pgs. 216-217). The colors on these two newspaper pages on display have faded with time, but studying the reproductions in the catalogue, I doubt that even when the pages were new, I would have found these pale yellows and dull oranges for autumn leaves appealing; I’ve seen far more vivid coloring done in comics even within the limitations of four-color printing.

    More interesting to me is the return of the show’s “metafiction” theme. In the 1928 strip Skeezix, here not yet a teenager, talks about his hobby of painting, and Walt uses the example of the autumn leaves to teach Skeezix about color. “Nature is the best teacher of color,” he tells Skeezix; “See there–she uses the contrast of orange and blue for a startling picture.” But of course Walt and Skeezix are actually part of a picture themselves, drawn by King, and presumably colored by him as well. King is explaining his ideas about color and line to the reader through Walt’s lecture to Skeezix. In one panel, King even breaks the illusion of reality. Walt and Skeezix seem to be standing in a void, looking at islands floating in an orange sky. Look more carefully and you may detect that King intends that the islands are rising from a lake, and the sky (with a setting sun, as the final panel makes clear) and its reflection in the water both have an orange hue. But King did not draw a line dividing the water from the sky, so it looks as if Walt and Skeezix have entered some orange void, as if they were Doctor Strange traveling through one of Steve Ditko’s surreal dimensions.

    Throughout this 1928 strip Walt speaks of Nature as the creator of the effects of color around them, as if Nature were a sentient being. Perhaps in referring to Nature, Walt and King actually mean God. King is the artist who created the world of Gasoline Alley and the natural vistas in this sunday strip, and God is the artist who created the real world, which King here presents as the highest work of art. Speaking of Nature (or God), Skeezix says in the last panel, “She paints better than I can,” presumably speaking on behalf of King.

    In the 1929 Sunday, Walt looks about at the autumn colors and exclaims, with surprisingly stylized language for an everyday man, “Oh, that I were a poet and could put into words the thrill of these toasted avenues!” (Well, the word “toasted” doesn’t work.) He continues in the next panel, “I wish I was an artist so I could fix this fleeting splendor on a canvas!” But of course King is an artist and a writer (if not a poet) as well. But the point of this Sunday strip seems to be King’s confession, through Walt, of his inability–and perhaps that of any human–to fully capture the beauty of nature. Walt says, “If I could paint it, people would never believe it.”

    In a November 30, 1930 Sunday page (p. 66) the leaves have almost all fallen from the trees, and Walt and Skeezix wander through a dark, ominous landscape that suggests the darkening days of late fall. Carlin asserts that the heavy dark lines King uses for the trees and ground in this Sunday “mimic woodcuts” (p 64). But he doesn’t mention that Walt actually says so at the start of the strip: “Here we are, Skeezix, in the style of the old woodcut pictures.” In other words, Walt and Skeezix are aware that they are cartoon characters, drawn into a comic strip! To my mind, the deep blacks and stylized drawing style of this sequence reminds me of Expressionism. I am particularly struck by the dark, overhanging clouds in one panel, which King represents as masses of disconnected black dots, surrounded by a white halo of light, against a dark sky consisting of black horizontal lines.

    Two other Sunday strips in the show combine the Bobby Make-Believe daydream motif with this concept of Walt and Skeezix walking through a picture. In the May 10, 1931 Sunday (p. 60), Walt and Skeezix use a compass to draw circles, and King fills the backgrounds of the panels with complex patterns of concentric circles. Skeezix decides to “make an outdoor picture with a compass,” whereupon Walt and Skeezix walk into a version of the outside world with strong curved and circular shapes: round trees, a rainbow, undulating ground, enormous oval leaves, and finally a huge setting (or rising?) sun. The strip ends with Skeezix claiming, “I draw better circles than Nature does.” Skeezix can’t outdo Nature/God at color, but here King is pointing out that the perfect circle does not exist in nature, and hence is man’s creation.

    In the November 2, 1930 Sunday (p. 67), Walt and Skeezix are looking at a modern painting when Skeezix decides they should enter the world of the picture. And so they do, wandering amidst an expressionistically distorted landscape, and finally encountering a monkey with a Cubist face. Walt dislikes what he calls “modernism” from the start, and Skeezix ends up agreeing, but presumably King is actually paying homage to modern painting by doing the day’s strip in this style. In the final panel Skeezix says, “That was an awful dream, Uncle Walt! Or was it a dream?” So is this a strip in the style of Bobby Make-Believe, in which Walt and Skeezix imagine this expressionistic world? Is this distorted world a modernist version of one of Nemo’s nightmares? Or is this another example of Walt and Skeezix knowing they are in a comic strip and traveling into drawings done in a different style?

    What most seems to impress King’s latter-day admirers are the Sunday strips which consist of a single large background, like a beach, which King then divides up through a grid of panels. One or more characters might then wander from panel to panel across this otherwise static landscape. One example of this, a Sunday page from August 19, 1934, is not in the book, but is part of the online “slideshow” that accompanies Michael Kimmelman’s “Masters” review in The New York Times. Carlin observes in the book that “These pages are shown from an aerial perspective, similar to that found in many Japanese paintings and prints” (p. 64). So it seems that some American comics were influenced by Japanese art long before the current infatuation with manga. These King pages, with the panel grid superimposed over a single background, strike me as cinematic: it’s as if the “camera” pans from panel to panel, often following an “actor” as he makes his way through a setting.

    The next Master is Chester Gould (1900-1985), creator of Dick Tracy, whose
    title character Carlin calls “perhaps the best known and most iconographically potent comic character aside from Mickey Mouse” (p. 74). Even leaving aside the objection that Mickey began in animation, what about Superman? And do contemporary readers really know Tracy, whose strip’s glory days were over a half century ago, more than Charlie Brown?

    But Carlin is correct in focusing on Gould’s skill in visual iconography: Dick Tracy is the literally square-jawed detective, a visual symbol of relentless righteousness and avenging justice, who is pitted against evil that takes the form of what Carlin calls “the best collection of grotesque villains ever assembled” (p. 74). (That last quotation could use a little tweaking: it’s definitely the best collection of grotesque villains created for a newspaper comic strip. Carlin does not mention Dick Tracy‘s obvious influence on Batman, whose hero was also square-jawed in the 1940s and 1950s, and whose rogues’ gallery may have been partly inspired by Tracy’s.) I admire Robert Storr’s observation in his essay in the catalogue that “in a fallen world such as the one Gould posited, primal abominations constantly reasserted their hold in ever viler forms” (p. 226). It is as if evil in Tracy’s world is like the mythical Hydra, with many heads–Flattop, Pruneface, and the rest of these monsters in bizarre human forms. Storr refers to Gould’s “urban eschatology” (p. 226), implying that Tracy is an avenging angel doing battle with these demonic figures who threaten to transform the city he protects into hell on Earth.

    Carlin also correctly states that Gould’s “way with the contrast between black and white. . .closely paralleled film noir” (p. 74), whose heyday coincided with that of the Tracy strip. The look of American film noir was influenced by the German Expressionist films of the 1920s and 1930s, and in his review Michael Kimmelman quotes Art Spiegelman as calling Gould’s style “blueprint Expressionism.”

    Gould could create astonishing effects: in a July 17, 1943 daily (p. 223) he places the menacing figure of Mrs. Pruneface in silhouette, streaked by slanted white lines representing the driving rain of the literal storm that has broken out about her.

    The Times slideshow presents a Sunday page from August 4, 1957 (p. 71), which creates a mood of foreboding by casting a mountainside into deep shadow and a young woman with a gun into ominous silhouette. In the final panel Tracy is shot directly in the forehead (shown in enlarged version on pgs. 72-73). Gould walks the edge here: there is no blood or gore shown, but the bluntness and explicitness of the violence is still shocking. (And how Tracy survived this, I have no idea.)

    These examples suit the reputation of Gould’s Dick Tracy. But the example of Gould’s work in the show (but, alas, not in the book) that most impressed me was a daily strip from March 27, 1952 that was set at a funeral. The first panel shows a cemetery behind a fence. In the second panel Tracy, a woman and another man, who are partly concealed (perhaps Tracy’s wife Tess and detective partner Sam) stand together on the left, facing off-panel, while a large tree dominates the right side. The third panel has a black silhouette (a tombstone?) to the left (paralleling the tree in the previous panel), and a tombstone, clearly shown, to the right, with figures of mourners in the background. The concluding panel shows the back of someone’s head–Tracy’s adopted son Junior, I think–with a word balloon, “I’ll always love you.”

    This sequence makes such a sharp contrast with that panel of Tracy getting shot in the head. In that Sunday page Gould confronted us with the violence head on (so to speak). But in this funeral sequence Gould works through subtlety and indirection, focusing on objects–the tombstones, a tree, a fence–rather than on people. Whereas he could have shown us Junior Tracy’s face wracked by sorrow, perhaps even weeping, instead Gould shows us the back of his head. Instead of going in for the open show of emotion that we might expect, Gould avoids the traps of sentimentality and cliche, and mutes the emotional tone of the scene. In doing so, Gould instead captures the somber, even numb mood that so many mourners actually do experience at funerals, which, after all, take place after the initial shock of the loved one’s death. This is a brilliantly done sequence, and gave me new insight into Gould’s work, which is just what a museum retrospective for a familiar artist should accomplish.

    Considering that Art Spiegelman pulled out of the show, we are now seven Masters down with eight more to go. To be continued next week.

    ADVERTISEMENTS FOR MYSELF

    On Monday, November 6 at 7:00 PM, contributing writers Tom De Falco, Dan Wallace and I will be doing a signing of DK’s new Marvel Encyclopedia at Barnes & Noble’s store in the Chelsea section of Manhattan (675 Sixth Avenue at 22nd Street). The Beat informs me that the Encyclopedia is on BookScan’s graphic novels best seller list (and it’s not even a graphic novel). Come one, come all!

    You can find my report on the United Nations’ “Cartooning for Peace” seminar in the October 31, 2006 edition of Publishers Weekly‘s Comics Week.

    Copyright 2006 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #152: “Ott Krittik” At Work

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    According to a writer named Brian Braiker in Newsweek (Oct. 30, 2006), “There was nothing new in… exhibiting cartoons even back in 1974, when Mort Walker, the creator of cic2006-10-27.jpgBeetle Bailey, founded the Museum of Cartoon Art…. But to “˜establish a canon of… the most influential artists working in the medium’? That’s the mission of “˜Masters of American Comics,’” the landmark exhibition which I began reviewing last week.

    Perhaps Braiker never visited the Museum of Cartoon Art (whose founder, Mort, not incidentally is the father of Brian Walker, co-curator of “Masters”) when it was still in Port Chester, but it had a “hall of fame” gallery which, in effect, was an attempt to establish a pantheon of the greatest artists in the cartoon art medium, including many of those honored by the “Masters” show.

    One major difference is that the Museum of Cartoon Art (which is currently homeless), the Words and Pictures Museum (permanently closed) in Northampton, Massachusetts, San Francisco’s Cartoon Art Museum, and New York City’s Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art (both institutions still alive and kicking) all operated outside the mainstream establishment of art museums and art scholarship.

    According to one of the Masters, Art Spiegelman, the show originated in his reaction to what he considered the condescending attitude towards comics that was taken by the Museum of Modern Art in its notorious 1980s exhibition “High and Low.” In 1992 he invited curators from the Metropolitan Museum of Art, the Museum of Modern Art, the Whitney Museum, the Library of Congress and other institutions to his studio to show them slides of the work of over twenty cartoonists and propose a museum exhibition that would treat comics seriously as an artform. Two years later, one of the attendees, Ann Philbin, on becoming head of the Hammer Museum in California, started work on what became the “Masters” show. The unspoken subtext of Spiegelman’s story is that obviously the representatives of the other museums were not sufficiently persuaded that comics were art. “I have all sorts of issues with the idea that a [Roy] Lichtenstein painting of a comic-book panel is art, but the original comic panel it draws on is not considered art,” Spiegelman said in the Nov. 28, 2005 issue of Time. (However, thanks to a recent donation of cartoon art, the Library of Congress is mounting its own show this fall.

    So “Masters” is indeed groundbreaking. Spiegelman also said in that same issue of Time, “What comics are going through is like a civil rights movement,” says Spiegelman. “This museum show will help.” Braiker claims that “the idea of ivory-tower cred seems anathema to this most outré of outsider arts.” But comics are simply following the same path to cultural and scholarly respectability that other forms of popular culture have over the centuries. As critic Richard Corliss observed in his review of “Masters” for Time (Nov. 28, 2005), “Like Hitchcock thrillers and rock ‘n’ roll, comics are obeying the tidal pull of pop culture. What was once forbidden is now mainstream; what was once junk is now classic.”

    But at the panel about the “Masters” show at this year’s San Diego Comic Con (see “Comics in Context” #145), the question was raised whether people might assume that the fifteen cartoonists saluted by the exhibition were the only ones who were worthy of being placed in this canon of great comics art. Brian Walker said, “I hope this group of fifteen isn’t set in stone.”

    The “Masters” canon has already come under sharp criticism for excluding female cartoonists. That charge seems to me to derive more from political correctness than serious artistic considerations. What worries me is that I believe the selection of this canon of Masters implies a viewpoint on the evolution of the comics medium that unjustly eliminates the work of numerous comics professionals, male and female, from consideration, as I hope to show in future installments.

    During its East Coast engagement, the first half of the “Masters” show is being held at the Newark Museum, and when I left off last week, I had begun a discussion of the work of the second Master in the show, Lyonel Feininger, creator of the early 20th century strips The Kin-der-Kids and Wee Willie Winkie’s World.

    The introductory wall text for the Feininger section of the show states that “The flat color schemes and open spaces of his pages were inspired by his fascination with Japanese prints. . . .” Perhaps this is so, since many Western artists have been inspired by Japanese prints since Japan began trading with the West in the mid-19th century. But aren’t the “flat color schemes” also a necessity imposed by the four-color printing methods used by newspapers and formerly by comic books? As for the “open spaces,” they are present in certain panels of the Feininger comics on display, such as the broad triangular forms representing rooftops in a Kin-der-Kids from September 9, 1906 (page 188 in the Masters of American Comics book). But in other cases Feininger’s panels look crowded, or even a whole page, like “The Triumphant Departure of the Kids in the Family Bathtub” (The Kin-der-Kids, May 6, 1906, Masters p. 36). That’s not necessarily a bad thing, either: that page bursts with energy, as the Kids’ bathtub, a fleet of tugboats and an ocean liner all set sail, as an animate Statue of Liberty waves goodbye.

    The Feininger page in the show that has the most “open space” is part of the
    the online “slide show” accompanying New York Times art critic Michael Kimmelman’s review of “Masters”. On this April 29, 1906 Kin-der-Kids page (p. 186 in the catalogue) Feininger’s self-caricature stands on a slate-grey floor against a white void. He portrayed himself as a puppeteer, with the cast members of Kin-der-Kids dangling from strings. Here is another example of a theatrical metaphor in early comics, with the comic strip likened to a puppet show, controlled by an unseen figure behind the stage, and the further implication that the cartoonist is a performer, who acts through his “puppets,” the characters in the strip. Each of the puppets bears a tag identifying him, and so does the puppeteer himself, whose tag reads, “Your Uncle Feininger.” This might even imply that Feininger’s self-caricature is yet another puppet, a public image as a fatherly storyteller, created by the unseen artist.

    I prefer the rambunctiousness of the Kin-der-Kids pages to the fairy tale milieu of Wee Willie Winkie’s World. As “Masters” co-curator John Carlin points out in the show’s catalogue, everything in Wee Willie Winkie’s World is alive and anthropomorphized. In a September 23, 2006 page (p. 38) enormous storm clouds with faces loom over a house, whose windows become terrified eyes. Here I am reminded of the “Pastoral Symphony” sequence in Walt Disney’s Fantasia (1940), which also has clouds with faces that blow gale-force winds, and in which Night is a goddess spreading her vast cloak across the sky. For my taste, though, Feininger’s stylized fantasy world in Wee Willie Winkie runs a poor second to Winsor McCay’s dream worlds in Little Nemo, which he presents in such persuasively detailed, concrete reality. I agree with Kimmelman in finding Feininger’s comics “a little lusterless sandwiched between Nemo and George Herriman’s great Krazy Kat.”

    As usual, Carlin’s interest is in the cartoonist’s visual design for a page, emphasizing lines and shapes that can be regarded both as representational and as abstract elements. In the Sunday, September 16, 1906 Kin-der-Kids (p. 39), he contends that the waterspouts in the panels on the left side of the page form a “serpentine” line running from the bottom to the top of the page. I am more impressed with the waterspouts in the panels on the right side of the page, which seem to me to form a single funnel growing in size from the top of the page until it nearly fills the final panel.

    In the Masters book Carlin asserts that “the run of Willie Winkie can be read as a prototypical graphic novel” (p. 40). Is it stretching the definition of “graphic novel” too far to refer to a series of Sunday comics pages this way? Later in the book, in his essay on Milton Caniff, journalist Pete Hamill reveals that “Caniff told me that he thought of the strip [Terry and the Pirates]–and his later creation, Steve Canyon–as a kind of picaresque novel, a form as old as Don Quixote“ (p. 232). Is a graphic novel necessarily a work of comics that is created specifically to be published in book form? It seems fair to me to consider Watchmen and V for Vendetta to be graphic novels, even though they were originally published in serialized “pamphlet” format. Moreover, following their original publication, new readers have experienced them as books, not as monthly comic magazines. So could Caniff’s Terry be considered a graphic novel, or each months-long story arc as an individual graphic novel?

    Carlin justly praises the design of the show’s Krazy Kat Sunday page from Sept. 12, 1937 (p. 51). In the top left corner is a small panel featuring Ignatz Mouse, on his eternal quest to hurl bricks at Krazy Kat, determined that he will not be thwarted again by his nemesis Offissa Pupp: “He’ll not foil me, that Kop.” In the top right corner is a panel of the same size, with Offissa Pupp vowing “He’ll not fool me, that mouse.” But Ignatz, hiding in the base of a cactus plant in that same panel, already has. The rest of the page consists of a gigantic panel, stretching from the top middle to the bottom, and, as Carlin notes, dominated by the vertical column of the cactus, shown at its full height. It looks like an obelisk, or Washington’s Monument, in contrast with the flat ground below. Ignatz is triumphantly at the top, dropping the brick, as if he were Galileo experimenting with gravity, as the oblivious Krazy, who considers these bricks as love tokens, leans nonchalantly against the bottom of the tree, saying, “He’ll not fail me, that dollink.” In the catalogue (Kat-alogue?) Carlin states that the play of words with “foil,” “fool,” and “fail” is a pun; I see the parallelism in the three characters’ lines of dialogue as a kind of poetry.

    And there along the bottom of the page is a row of footlights, as if this were taking place onstage. Carlin compares it to a “theatrical presentation.” I’d go farther: it’s as if Krazy, Ignatz, and Pupp were a team of comedians performing their vaudeville act for the audience: their inexhaustible variations on the gag in which Krazy gets clobbered. Standing center stage, with his/her (Krazy’s gender is uncertain) name at the top, Krazy is the star of the show. The towering cactus and the simple setting are like a stage set, with the night sky like a black backdrop.

    Krazy, Ignatz and Pupp are therefore presented as actors playing roles in the comic strip. The same conceit underlies Friz Freleng’s 1940 animated short You Oughta Be in Pictures, in which Daffy Duck manipulates Porky Pig into confronting Looney Tunes producer Leon Schlesinger (shown in live action) and quitting, or, in more recent decades, Who Framed Roger Rabbit (1988) and Looney Tunes: Back in Action (2003), which purport that animated characters are actors working at Hollywood studios. The same basic idea recurred in comics when Li’l Abner would visit Al Capp, or Pogo characters would refer to their creator Walt Kelly, or the She-Hulk would complain to her unseen writer/artist John Byrne.

    Hence, a further implication of this Krazy Kat Sunday is that the unseen Herriman is the writer/director, putting on a show for the audience reading their newspapers at home in the 1930s–or perusing a museum exhibit in 2006.

    In reading comics, we ordinarily suspend our disbelief and pretend that static lines on paper are actually living, moving characters; hence, the panels become windows into their world. Herriman’s footlights subvert this convention: we’re no longer looking at characters in a real world but at actors on a stage. Herriman has reminded us that Krazy Kat is an artificial construction, and, of course, if we take a step further, we remind ourselves that Krazy Kat is really a drawing in a newspaper.

    To continue the theatrical analogy, Carlin’s approach in the Masters book is Brechtian: he stands back from the story the comics tell, and even from their attempts to visually represent reality, and insists on regarding them as if they were abstract works comprised of line, shapes and (often) colors.

    Kimmelman asserts that Krazy Kat’s desert setting anticipates the work of Samuel Beckett, presumably meaning the play Waiting for Godot. As Godot demonstrates, Beckett also loved slapstick humor and vaudeville-style comedy routines, and I suppose that Ignatz’s brick throwing is the way by which he, Krazy and Pupp pass the time in the strip’s desolate landscape. But there’s no sense of comedy staving off despair and emptiness in Krazy Kat as there is in Godot.

    In his essay on Herriman in the catalogue, cultural critic Stanley Crouch points out that Krazy Kat‘s desert milieu was inspired by Monument Valley, the site where John Ford shot so many of his Westerns, and asserts that the desert is “especially American” because it is “the harsh landscape” for “brutal conflicts,” presumably meaning the wars with Indians (p. 197). That may be true for Ford, but I can’t swallow the idea that Krazy Kat alludes to violence worse than being hit by a brick which is as harmless in this strip as a custard pie. Monument Valley might also be the inspiration for the terrain in Chuck Jones’s Roadrunner cartoons. Maybe Jones and Herriman (whose Krazy Kat cast also includes a coyote) simply regarded the desert as the simplest of naturalistic settings. Despite the way that Herriman’s backgrounds shapeshift from panel to panel, their simplicity does not distract from the performances of his lead characters. Hence Herriman is practicing a sort of graphic minimalism, making him a forebear of Charles Schulz’s Peanuts.

    What most interests me about the Krazy Kat strips in the “Masters” show is the “metacomics” theme that runs throughout the exhibition. In the Sunday page for June 11, 1939 (p. 48), Ignatz finds a brush and a bottle of ink, and sets about drawing a cartoon of himself. As Carlin notes, Ignatz is repeatedly depicted in Krazy Kat as an artist. So Herriman may be signaling his identification with this trickster character: he draws himself, or an aspect of himself, into the strip as Ignatz, just as Ignatz draws himself. Ignatz starts out by drawing a cartoon panel, but it seems that he is also drawing a canvas in thin air, thereby creating it. Moreover, as I said before, a comics panel is like a window into another world. So Ignatz, as artist, creates another reality, just as Herriman is the creator of the world of Krazy Kat. The characters and things that Ignatz draws onto this canvas appear in red ink, whereas the “real” world of Krazy Kat appears in conventional black outlines. This contrast further suggests that the world of Ignatz’s drawings is a distinctly separate level of reality.

    Offissa Pupp stops by and acts as audience (and, in his role as law enforcer, potential censor?) for Ignatz’s art. The “cartoon” Ignatz that “real” Ignatz draws changes position from one of Herriman’s panels to the next. (It’s getting complicated here.) Is “real” Ignatz drawing a comic strip, and each new panel replaces the previous one? Or is Herriman suggesting that “real” Ignatz is creating an animated cartoon, whose characters move once they are drawn, as in Max and Dave Fleischer’s Out of the Inkwell series, to which “real” Ignatz’s ink bottle could be an allusion? Or are the Ignatz and Krazy that “real” Ignatz draws existing in an alternate reality?

    “Real” Ignatz completes his cartoon, which shows “cartoon” Ignatz throwing a brick at Krazy. This seems to be “real” Ignatz’s foremost goal and pleasure in life, so perhaps Herriman is suggesting that artists draw what they desire, what makes them happy. As if feeling satisfied and fulfilled, “real” Ignatz starts walking away, while Offissa Pupp remains rooted to the spot, staring at the cartoon-within-a-cartoon.

    In the next panel, as if he were Matisse responding to seeing a Picasso, Offissa Pupp reacts to Ignatz’s cartoon by drawing his own, titled “JAIL,” portraying Ignatz behind bars. This, of course, represents Pupp’s own foremost goal in life. But he is oblivious to what is happening behind him: “real” Ignatz is throwing a brick at Krazy, just as his counterpart did in the cartoon-within-a-cartoon. Thus life, in the Krazy Kat universe, mimics art.

    So “real” Ignatz’s cartoon was actually a declaration of his intentions, which he then accomplished in “real” life. You could also read “real” Ignatz’s cartoon as a prophesy of the future, which comes to pass in the next panel. Likewise, Offissa Pupp is drawing what he intends to accomplish. This too is a look into the future, because what Krazy Kat reader doubts that “real” Ignatz will soon end up back in jail for this latest brick-throwing incident?

    But you could also read this particularly Sunday strip as trickster Ignatz pulling a new con on Offissa Pupp. It’s like that standard Bugs Bunny gag in which Bugs tricks an adversary into mechanically repeating the same action over and over. Offissa Pupp becomes so fixated on “real” Ignatz’s drawing of himself clobbering Krazy that the hapless policeman preoccupies himself with punishing “cartoon” Ignatz by drawing “cartoon” Ignatz in jail. Having thus distracted Offissa Pupp, “real” Ignatz is free to clobber the “real” Krazy.

    The con artist is a particularly American form of the trickster archetype, which reappears in the “Masters” show as E. C. Segar’s J. Wellington Wimpy, and also as Charles Schulz’s Lucy. In his essay in the catalogue, Mutts creator Patrick McDonnell points to Krazy Kat’s influence on Schulz (p. 243). Isn’t Lucy pulling the football away from Charlie Brown year after year Schulz’s possibly intentional version of Herriman’s endless variations on Ignatz’s brick tossing?

    Along the bottom of this Sunday Krazy page runs a narrow panel that serves as an afterword to the main story. Krazy, Pupp, and Ignatz all watch a bird who is staring at a painting of a tree, as a big drop of saliva drops from his beak. “But he’s an “˜ott krittik,’ ain’t he?” asks Krazy. “Yes,” replies Pupp, “but he’s also a woodpecker.” Granted this epiphany, Ignatz responds, “ah-h.” Herriman may be making the point that an art critic’s personal psychology influences his response to a work of art. Or maybe this can even be seen as a reproach (over sixty years in advance) to Carlin’s approach to comics as “abstract” works: Herriman may be reminding readers not to ignore the representationalist aspect of the work.,

    Next in the “Masters” show comes E. C. Segar, creator of Thimble Theatre Starring Popeye, whose very title continues the analogy between comics and theater.

    Carlin’s discussion of Segar in the Masters book has its problems. Take for example his description of what he calls a “brilliant sight gag” in the genuinely great “Plunder Island” story arc in Thimble Theater‘s Sunday pages in 1934. In one installment Popeye hides in a barrel because his enemy, the Sea Hag, has ordered Wimpy to behead him. “Several weeks later,” in another Sunday page (July 1, 1934), Popeye plays dice with the Sea Hag to determine ownership of the treasure of Plunder Island; the Hag desperately wagers everything she has, even her clothes, and ends up wearing “the same-style wooden barrel that Popeye hid in weeks earlier” (p. 58). Well, Segar may have intended the irony, but I doubt that he expected it to get laughs from readers. A comedian doesn’t deliver a punch line several weeks after the set-up, which by then the audience has forgotten.

    Likewise, Carlin claims that “Segar’s humor came straight out of Mark Twain, who also balanced exaggerated tall tales and a perfect ear for everyday speech with dark themes that undercut his laugh-out-loud stories” (p. 55). There are similarities, but I doubt there was a “straight out” connection. Twain’s “tall tales” went so far as to include time travel in A Connecticut Yankee in King Arthur’s Court, but in that novel he characteristically brings a subversively ironic treatment to the romance of Arthurian legend. Amidst all the comedy of Thimble Theatre, Segar created a genuine American hero of larger-than-life proportions in Popeye, a successor to the likes of Pecos Bill. I suspect that Segar used Popeye as a seafaring traveler to create a satirical version of the adventure stories of the 19th and early 20th centuries, complete with fantasy elements: hence not only searches for hidden treasure and Popeye’s famed quest to find his long-lost Pappy, but also mythical kingdoms (Spinachovia), magical animals (Eugene the Jeep), strange savages (the Goons), and even an evil witch (the Sea Hag).

    More importantly, Segar deals in exaggeration in creating the personalities of his most significant characters, whereas Twain aimed for realism. One can imagine Tom Sawyer and Huckleberry Finn being real people in a real world, but Popeye, Wimpy and company are inescapably cartoons, not only in their caricatured physiques but in their characterizations. Robert Altman and Jules Feiffer’s live action Popeye movie (1980) did not work, and perhaps there was no way that it could.

    Carlin correctly agrees with comics historian Bill Blackbeard’s recognition that Popeye is a proto-superhero. (In a Sunday October 11, 1936 strip in the show, and on page 54 in the book, Popeye lifts up an entire house, without the aid of spinach.) But then Carlin goes on, “At the same time Popeye is a much more complex and sympathetic character than the later superheroes, who tend to be somewhat stiff and colorless” (p. 58). How much “later”? Once Stan Lee and his colleagues revolutionized the superhero genre in the 1960s, this was unquestionably no longer true.

    Feiffer’s own appreciation of Segar and Popeye in the Masters book is far more successful. Feiffer makes the case that Popeye is the heroic representation of the American spirit that remained “undaunted” by the Great Depression of the 1930s: “Popeye was the forgotten man: uneducated, unsophisticated, untamable” (p. 208). More surprisingly, whereas I always thought that Popeye’s distinctive way of talking reflected his lower class background and lack of formal education, Feiffer regards it as a sign of something else: “His mangled English pulsated with the vital spirit of immigrant America. . .” (p. 208). Best of all, Feiffer identifies Popeye’s true peers: Segar’s “Popeye stands with the best of his thirties competitors, who happened not to be comic strip characters but movie clowns: W. C. Fields and the Marx Brothers” (p. 208). They portrayed larger than life characters, too.

    My main disagreement with Feiffer’s essay is with his blanket condemnation of Popeye’s entire history in animation, though Feiffer rightly praises the performances of voice actors Jack Mercer and Mae Questel as Popeye and Olive Oyl. Feiffer is also right about the uninspired Popeye cartoons produced by Paramount’s Famous Studios in the 1940s and 1950s, which smoothed over the rough edges that make Popeye’s personality interesting, devolving him into a postwar suburban bourgeois.

    But I think Feiffer is unfair about the Max and Dave Fleischer Popeye cartoons of the 1930s, which keep the title character irascible and irreverent (especially through Mercer’s seemingly improvised asides). Feiffer disdains the formula that the Fleischers devised for Popeye: the Popeye-Olive-Bluto triangle, and the seemingly magical ability of spinach to boost the hero’s strength in time of need. But within the seven or eight minutes allotted to one of these animated cartoons, the Fleischers understandably couldn’t undertake one of Segar’s elaborate narratives (although they tried with the search for Pappy in the 1938 short Goonland).

    I think it’s also worth exploring why the Fleischers’ formula proved so successful. If Popeye is indeed a hero born of the Great Depression, as Feiffer argues, then the key moment in the Fleischer cartoons, when Popeye declares “That’s all I kin stand, I can’t stands no more” (a forebear of Bugs Bunny’s “Of course you know this means war” and even Droopy’s “You know what? You got me mad.”), downs the spinach, and lets loose, dramatizes the urge of the forgotten man to fight back against everything that holds him down. Feiffer dismisses the cartoons’ spinach as “steroids”; I see it more as an objective correlative for Popeye’s will power, stimulating the burst of adrenaline he needs to win.

    The best Fleischer Popeye cartoons don’t necessarily adhere to formula; take the cases of Goonland and The Jeep (1938), in which Bluto never appears. And even the better Fleischer cartoons that use the triangle can ring imaginative variations on the theme, just as Krazy Kat did with its own formula. For example, the Fleischers’ celebrated A Dream Walking (1934) is less about Popeye competing with Bluto for Olive than about the three of them rhythmically sleepwalking along a vertiginous network of girders in a skyscraper under construction, in a triumph of visual design John Carlin would appreciate.

    This gives me the opportunity to mention two of the last cartoons I still haven’t written about that I saw at the Film Society of Lincoln Center’s 2005 retrospective of musical cartoons, “I Love to Singa” (see “Comics in Context” #100, #136 and many others in between). In the two color featurettes Popeye the Sailor Meets Sindbad the Sailor (1936) and Popeye the Sailor Meets Ali Baba’s Forty Thieves (1937) shown there, the Fleischers rework their formula by recasting Bluto as characters out of the Arabian Nights. Popeye becomes not only an explorer but an American venturing abroad to combat foreign enemies. Following the 9/11 attacks, the sight of Popeye taking on Arabian adversaries takes on new resonance. Significantly, Popeye’s final, triumphant battles against his foreign opponents are accompanied on the soundtracks by John Philip Sousa’s “Stars and Stripes Forever.” In these featurettes the Fleischers seem to be consciously portraying Popeye as a modern American mythic hero, who can stand up to and overcome morally corrupt mythic figures of older cultures. Sindbad even turns Popeye into a monster slayer, placing him in a tradition that goes back to Gilgamesh.

    In the Masters book Carlin states that “Segar did not invent graphic comic strip conventions or experiment with them the way that Herriman and McCay did. Segar simply showed how rich and supple those conventions could be in terms of creating believable characters and stories. . .” (p. 56). In other words, in this case Carlin shifts from his usual emphasis on visual design to what I consider the true essence of the comics medium: visual storytelling.

    Even so, I suspect that Carlin underrates Segar as visual innovator. Where would Robert Crumb be without Segar, whose drawing style clearly influenced his? In “Masters” I was pleased to see examples of Segar’s “topper” strip for the Sunday Thimble Theatres, Sappo, which began as a rather dull domestic comedy, but flared into life with the addition of science fiction elements courtesy of the aptly named Professor O. G. Wottasnozzle. Apart from his sizable snozzle, the Professor, bald with a long beard, could be a relative of Crumb’s Mr. Natural. The henpecked Sappo’s wife, who towers over him, could be a forerunner of Crumb’s own unusually large women. Segar’s standard face for extras in Thimble Theatre could be the visage of Crumb’s Flakey Foont.

    Going through the Segar section of the exhibit, I was struck by the sheer dynamic force power of the shots of Popeye punching his opponents. These panels reminded me of the work of Jack Kirby, who was once an in-betweener at the Fleischer studios. In the Masters book you can find shots like this on pages 59, 204 and 205, but what most impressed me was a series of Sunday Thimble Theatre strips that are at the Newark Museum but not in the catalogue. Running from April 26 through May 24, 1931, they depict Popeye in a boxing match, full of such Kirbyesque power. The sequence also demonstrates Segar’s visual inventiveness. At one point Popeye is hit so hard he sails into the air, and we follow his flight through a series of panels, as if they were successive framers on a film strip, until he lands atop a spectator in the audience. In another panel Segar deploys multiple images of Popeye to indicate the speed and ferocity of his punches. Segar also portrays the audience as a sea of identical round heads, creating a near-abstract effect.

    Some Popeye strips on display also echo earlier parts of the exhibit. An enormous drawing of Eugene the Jeep hovers atop the panel grid of the Sunday, August 9, 1936 Thimble Theatre page (p. 209) like the moon with the man’s face in the December 3, 1905 Little Nemo (p. 176). There’s also a Sunday Thimble Theatre from August 23, 1935 (p. 205), which I’ve discussed previously (in “Comics in Context” #63), in which, to test Popeye’s love for her, Olive masquerades as a man (not difficult, considering her build) and claims to be her own suitor. Enraged, Popeye clobbers her. Dazed but happy, Olive tells herself, “He loves me,” as if she were Krazy Kat right after being hit by a brick.

    Like so many cartoon characters, Segar’s are far more resistant to physical injury than real people are. For example, Popeye withstands a hail of bullets in an April 7, 1932 daily strip (p. 206). Even so, the comedic sadism in this particular Sunday strip is startling. In a daily strip from August 21, 1935 on display (but not in the book), Popeye has become “dictipator” of a small country but is disappointed that “Me sheeps”–his subjects–“ain’t got no sense.” As you can see, unlike the animated Popeye, Segar’s Popeye, as Feiffer notes, is “untamable”: though a hero, he has a violent temper and even a will to power.

    At the Newark Museum I overheard one woman, who was looking at the Herrimans, comment to her companion, “Is this really for kids? Look at the vocabulary?” There are plenty of people who haven’t yet gotten the memo that comics aren’t just for kids. As Spiegelman told Time, maybe this museum show will help. We will continue making our way through “Masters” in next week’s column.

    ADVERTISEMENTS FOR MYSELF
    It’s here at last! DK Publishing has released its Marvel Encyclopedia, for which I was a contributing writer. Profusely illustrated in full color, it’s the perfect Christmas gift for any Marvel aficionado. Not only will you enjoy reading it, but it is so large and massive that you could use it for weightlifting exercises! A treat for both the mind and the body!

    Copyright 2006 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #151: The New Old Masters

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    cic2006-10-20.jpgHas the fine art world’s growing interest in comics and cartoons achieved critical mass? If not quite yet, it is certainly rapidly getting closer, as evidenced by the surprising number of shows devoted to comic and cartoon art this fall in New York City, the capital of the American art world, and its vicinity.

    At the top of the list is the large traveling exhibition “Masters of American Comics,” which is a collection of mini-retrospectives for fifteen cartoonists whose careers together span the history of the artform in the Twentieth Century and into the Twenty-First: Winsor McCay (Little Nemo in Slumberland), Lyonel Feininger (The Kin-der-Kids), George Herriman (Krazy Kat), E. C. Segar (Thimble Theatre Starring Popeye), Frank King (Gasoline Alley), Chester Gould (Dick Tracy), Milton Caniff (Terry and the Pirates), Charles Schulz (Peanuts), Will Eisner (The Spirit), Jack Kirby (Fantastic Four), Harvey Kurtzman (MAD), Robert Crumb (Mr. Natural), Art Spiegelman (Maus), Gary Panter (Jimbo) and Chris Ware (Jimmy Corrigan).

    Curated by art scholar John Carlin and comic strip historian Brian Walker (see “Comics in Context” #66 and 71), the “Masters” show debuted last year in Los Angeles, where it was divided between the Hammer Museum and the Museum of Contemporary Art. The exhibition moved to the Milwaukee Art Museum before arriving in the New York City area, split between the Jewish Museum, several blocks up the street from the Metropolitan Museum of Art, and the Newark Museum in New Jersey.

    Yale University Press has published the handsomely designed catalogue for the show, which not only includes reproductions of the artwork and a lengthy treatise by co-curator Carlin, but also features a commendable assortment of essays about the individual Masters by a wide array of non-academics, including jazz critic Stanley Crouch on Herriman, cartoonist (and screenwriter for the 1980 live action Popeye movie) Jules Feiffer, journalist Pete Hamill on Caniff, Mutts creator Patrick McDonnell on Schulz, Village Voice film critic J. Hoberman on Kurtzman, Simpsons creator Matt Groening on Panter, and novelist Dave Eggers on Ware.

    Regular readers of this column will recall my report on the “Masters of American Comics” panel held at this year’s San Diego Comic Con (see “Comics in Context” #145).

    And there’s lots more. Accompanying the “Masters” show at the Jewish Museum is “Superheroes: Good and Evil in American Comics,” an exhibit of original artwork from superhero comics of the “Golden Age” of the 1940s, curated by one of that period’s leading figures, Jerry Robinson (see “Comics in Context” #141). Like the “Masters” show at both museums, “Superheroes” will run through January 29, 2007.

    The “Masters” show has inspired controversy since all of the cartoonists selected for this honor are male. But this fall New York City hosted two exhibits of work by female cartoonists. The Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art has staged “She Drew Comics: 100 Years of Women Cartoonists,” curated by Trina Robbins, which continues into early November. The Adam Baumgold Gallery on 74 W. 79th St. just closed its fall show, “Telling Tales: Contemporary Women Cartoonists” (curated by Dan Nadel and including works by Roz Chast, Phoebe Gloeckner, Aline Kominsky-Crumb, and others), which followed its late summer show, “Jules Feiffer: The Strips, 1960-2000.”

    Aside from the African-American George Herriman, all of the cartoonists in the “Masters” show are white, but “African Comics“ opens at the Studio Museum in Harlem on November 15 and runs through March 18, 2007.

    Until October 21 the Society of Illustrators is running a thirtieth anniversary retrospective of comics published by Fantagraphics (including works by Daniel Clowes, Frank Frazetta, Bill Griffith, Jaime Hernandez, Stan Sakai, and Chris Ware) at its Museum of American Illustration in midtown Manhattan.

    Even the United Nations has turned its attention to cartoon art. Thanks to the Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art getting me in, on Monday, October 16, I attended “Cartooning for Peace,” a day-long series of seminars with political cartoonists from around the world serving as panelists. The introductory speech was made by the Secretary-General himself, Kofi Annan, whom I would previously have considered the least likely person to turn up at an event I covered in my column. (How much more evidence do you need for a cultural shift in attitudes towards cartoon art?) “Cartooning for Peace” is also the name of an exhibit of political cartoons by these artists that is currently being held in the United Nations’ Visitors’ Lobby before embarking on a world tour. (You can also see these cartoons at www.cartooningforpeace.org.)

    It may be coincidental that so many exhibits on cartoon art are being held at once in New York City. But this isn’t simply a phenomenon restricted to the fall of 2006. Last winter the Museum of Modern Art staged its exhibition of Pixar animation art (see “Comics in Context” #120) and the Pratt Manhattan Gallery featured “Speak: Nine Cartoonists” featuring work by Crumb, Spiegelman, Ware and others, even including Gasoline Alley‘s Frank King (see “Comics in Context” #122). This year on December 1 the Morgan Library and Museum opens “Saul Steinberg: Illuminations“, featuring the work of the late New Yorker artist whose drawings can be classified as either illustrations or cartoons; this exhibit closes on March 4, 2007. The Baumgold Gallery will also be opening a Steinberg show. On the day that the Morgan’s Steinberg show closes, the Museum of Modern Art will open “Comic Abstraction: Image Breaking, Image Making,” billed as an exhibit of work by artists who utilize the “visual language of comics”. (Whether MoMA will deign to display work by actual professional comics artists in this show, I do not yet know.)

    It’s not just New York City that has caught comics fever. On November 2, “Cartoon America: Highlights from the Art Wood Collection of Cartoon and Caricature“ opens in the great hall of the Thomas Jefferson Building of the Library of Congress in Washington D. C.. The Library recently acquired this collection, which includes works by Feiffer, Feininger, Herblock, Herriman, King, McCay, Schulz, Steinberg, and James Thurber, as well as animation art from Disney classics including Fantasia (1940), and arrays them alongside work by Honore Daumier, the 19th century French illustrator and caricaturist who has long been accepted into the pantheon of fine art.

    Back in New York City, the Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art will stage its own exhibit of animation art, “Saturday Morning Cartoons,” opening on November 18 of this year. And this seems the appropriate time and place to announce that I will be co-curating an exhibition on the career of Stan Lee that will open in February 2007 at the Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art. Right now MoCCA is looking for people who are willing to help sponsor the show and collectors who would be willing to lend original artwork from 1960s Marvel comics for display. If any of you are interested, please contact me through the e-mail address for this column (comicsincontext@aol.com).

    But if a cartoon art exhibit falls in a forest, and The New York Times ignores it, did it make a sound? The Times reviewed the Pixar and “Speak” shows last winter, but it has so far ignored all of the fall shows except for “Masters,” which opened on September 15 at the two New York area museums but did not get reviewed by the Times until Friday, October 13. Still, it’s obvious that the Times Arts and Leisure department would put a higher priority on reviewing some of the other high profile art shows on more widely accepted subjects, such as “Cezanne to Picasso” at the Met and “Picasso and American Art” at the Whitney.

    And then there’s the problem of the geographical separation of the two halves of “Masters.” The show was divided between two museums in Los Angeles, but Southern California has a car culture; New York City doesn’t. New Yorkers like myself don’t have cars and rely on public transportation instead. It is difficult enough to persuade a Manhattanite to venture into the dreaded outer boroughs; mounting an expedition to Newark, New Jersey would be closer to inconceivable. (It is indeed a lengthy trip, though there are commuters who must do it every workday.) The exception would be going to the Newark Airport, one of the three airports in the metropolitan area; I’ve been to Newark Airport, but I can’t recall ever having been to Newark proper before. Besides, New Yorkers tend to regard Newark, and New Jersey in general, as uncool. (I’ve spent time in some picturesque sections of the state; then again, I’ve also traveled through industrial areas of New Jersey which Peter Jackson could have used for Mordor.) So I suppose that means that a Manhattanite would be more likely to go to Newark Airport in order to fly to London than he would to go to Newark in order to visit, well, Newark.

    I’m not just kidding about New Yorkers’ reluctance to visit the Garden State. It even seems that one of the reasons that Art Spiegelman, who helped organize “Masters,” withdrew his own work from the show was that he believed that New Yorkers wouldn’t expend the time and trouble to travel all the way out to Newark to see the first half of the show.

    So I can understand that it might take the Times a while to send one of its art critics to museums in two separate cities to cover the same show.

    But the Times review was well worth the wait. It was the paper’s lead art critic, Michael Kimmelman, who reviewed the exhibition, and he declared that “”˜Masters of American Comics’ is a landmark and a pleasure. For many people, I suspect, it will be a revelation too.” (Oct. 13, 2006). It clearly was a revelation to him. Kimmelman was also wise enough to recognize his own limitations in exploring a form of art he wasn’t knowledgeable about and to bring along an expert to guide him: Spiegelman himself played Virgil to Kimmelman’s Dante as they descended into (gasp!) Newark.

    If you follow the link to Kimmelman’s review, you’ll also find the “slide show” of highlights from “Masters,” several of which I will discuss in the course of my own review. Strangely, the Times “slide show” offers two Eisners and two Kirbys, but no examples of work by Crumb, Herriman or Segar.

    I managed to decipher the mysteries of PATH trains and New Jersey Transit sufficiently well to make my own way to the Newark Museum, sans guide, to see the first portion of the “Masters” show: McCay through Schulz. The principal factor in determining how to divide the exhibition between two museums, whether in California or the New York area, seems to be chronological. Jack Kirby started in comics before World War II, but his best work began in the 1960s, so his work was in the Jewish Museum. “Masters” featured some of Chester Gould’s late Dick Tracy strips from the 1960s, but Gould created Tracy in the 1930s and his great period began in the 1940s, so his work was in Newark.

    However, Will Eisner did The Spirit in the 1940s, before Charles Schulz’s creation of Peanuts in the 1950s, but “Masters” placed Schulz with the earlier cartoonists in Newark, while assigning Eisner among the later cartoonists at the Jewish Museum.

    Hence, the Newark portion of “Masters” dealt with the evolution of the American comic strip, from McCay to Schulz. The Jewish Museum’s portion of the exhibit instead chronicled the history of comic books, starting with not only Kirby’s Golden Age work for actual comic books, but also Eisner’s Spirit sections, which were effectively short comic books, for Sunday newspapers, and culminating with Chris Ware’s graphic novels.

    Of course “Masters” begins with Winsor McCay (1869-1934), who is generally regarded as the first genius of both the comics artform and animation. The Newark Museum’s introductory wall text for the McCay section (written by John Carlin?) asserted that “Winsor McCay did for comics what D. W. Griffith did for movies and Louis Armstrong did for music: he transformed mechanical reproduction into a creative medium for self-expression.” The comparison with D. W. Griffith works for me, since Griffith is universally acknowledged as film’s first creative auteur. I’m not so sure about the reference to Armstrong. Did the wall text’s writer meant to imply that McCay, Griffith, and Armstrong were each the first in his medium to create great works of personal expression? Is that true about sound recordings? What about, say, Enrico Caruso?

    Kimmelman interrupts his own discussion of McCay in his review to ask, “Did I mention that Mr. McCay, in his ultra-finicky way, drew like a dream?” That’s a felicitous phrase, since dreams were McCay’s primary subjects: the fantasy worlds dreamed by the title character of Little Nemo in Slumberland and the proto-Twilight Zone nightmares that overtake the hapless sleeping adults in Dream of the Rarebit Fiend. But Kimmelman is pointing out to the reader that McCay was a master of the craft of realistic illustration. McCay’s prowess in delineating reality in naturalistic detail makes the fantastic elements of his strips look real.

    Hence I find it somewhat misleading for Carlin to state in the Masters of American Comics book that “though most Americans were not fully aware of modern art until the Armory Show in 1916″–and actually, I expect that the majority of Americans in 1916 paid no more attention to cutting edge art then than they do today–“they had already seen the essence of modernism in McCay’s comics without knowing it. McCay utilized many of the hallmarks of modernism–figures in motion, twentieth-century machines, and urban architecture–in much the same way as later Cubist and Futurist painters.” But from Cezanne onward, the early figures in the history of modern art were veering away from naturalism, distorting the reality they depicted. McCay’s illustrative realism and his mission to make the fantastic look naturalistic clearly stands at an opposite pole from, say, Picasso’s efforts to deconstruct reality through Cubism. Strictly defined, abstraction does not depict reality at all, yet however much they may metamorphose in his work, McCay was drawing real people and things–and fantastic people and things as if they were just as real. Even in a page included in the show (Feb. 2, 1908), in which McCay impossibly stretches the heads and bodies of Nemo and his companions into fun-house mirror reflections of themselves, McCay is still working from a foundation in reality: what the human figure actually looks like.

    McCay’s work is “abstract” only in the sense that, as the examples in the exhibition show, he paid strong attention to shapes and other design elements in constructing his work. Hence, in a Dream of the Rarebit Fiend page (Sunday, Feb. 9, 1913) that is excerpted on the web page with Kimmelman’s review, the dreamer, a man in formal wear, is running along the street when suddenly, in panel 2, the street curves upward both at the left and the right, distorting the shapes of the tall buildings rising from the street. The dreamer runs like a mouse on an exercise wheel, as the curved street recedes from one panel to the next, until it becomes a multicolored circle, reminiscent of what one might see through a kaleidoscope.

    Similarly, consider the Little Nemo in Slumberland page (Sunday, Dec. 3, 1905) that is included in the Times slide show. The topmost panel not only includes Morpheus, the King of Slumberland (looking quite different than in Neil Gaiman’s Sandman), but also introduces this page’s circular motif in the form of the moon with a face. But this isn’t a benign Man in the Moon but instead looks vaguely sinister.

    The next tier consists of four panels of equal size, the first showing the boy Nemo sleeping in bed. The conventional look of these panels denotes the mundane nature of Nemo’s reality in contrast with the dreamworld. However, these four panels actually show Nemo’s transition from reality into the dreamworld, as his bed rises from the floor and drifts into the night sky.

    Such step-by-step changes from panel to panel must be what Kimmelman meant when he wrote that McCay’s work “married something of [Eadweard] Muybridge’s stop-action photography with Lewis Carroll.” This four-panel segment also exemplifies the Newark Museum’s wall text’s statement that McCay’s “successive action sequences anticipated later experiments in film animation.”

    The large middle section of the page is divided into four panels in which the spherical moon, its mouth ominously agape, steadily grows closer and larger with each succeeding panel, while Nemo’s bed rocks about in the air and falls apart, leaving him helpless to escape the oncoming threat. This middle section of the page is dominated by an immense, circular drawing of the face/moon, enveloped within an oval, thus becoming a fifth panel. This becomes the centerpiece of the entire page, bringing the circle motif to its culmination. (I wonder if this sequence might have been inspired by the sequence of a moon with a face in Georges Melies’ famous 1902 short film A Trip to the Moon.)

    Nemo was shown in square panels in the first tier. In the next four panels, Nemo appeared in rectangular panels, which were invaded by the curvature of the central oval enclosing the moon; the page design thereby dramatizes how this seemingly threatening fantasy world is disrupting Nemo’s sense of reality. In the central oval, Nemo appears within the circle formed by the face/moon: he has been swallowed up by the fantasy world.

    Here the face/moon abruptly turns into a kind of stage set: the servant of Morpheus emerges from the moon’s mouth, as if it were the gateway to a castle, or the backdrop of a theatrical set, to invite Nemo to the king’s court.

    In the final tier of panels, the face/moon continues to grow, frightening Nemo, but it is now so large that its full size cannot be encompassed by an individual panel. The panels have returned to square shape, indicating that Nemo is making the transition back to reality, and in the final panel Nemo indeed wakes up from this latest of his nightmares.

    As the wall text asserts, “McCay brought an abstract formal dimension to comics, which added to the theatrical action that one sees through the panels. This technique allowed the page to be read both as a story told over time and a relation of design elements printed on a page.” This is true, and the use of the moon as backdrop in that central panel is evidence that McCay was alluding to theater. This seems to be a recurring motif in early strips: E. C. Segar created Popeye for a strip called Thimble Theatre.

    But in his review Kimmelman went further, maintaining that McCay’s comics panels “magically blended to make a collective cogent abstraction out of the page: the essence of comics art.” Here we run into trouble.

    As readers of Scott McCloud’s Understanding Comics know, the essence of comics is visual storytelling. Will Eisner renamed comics “sequential art”: the art of conveying a narrative through a sequence of pictures. Kevin Eastman named his comics museum (which is now unfortunately defunct) the Words and Pictures Museum; actual words aren’t necessary to comics, but a narrative is.

    In my writing and lecturing about comics, I deal with comics as literature, emphasizing the narrative, but I try to take care to show how visual imagery plays its part in expressing the themes and characterization. “Masters” goes in the opposite direction. In an online interview I have quoted in a previous installment, “Masters” Brian Walker explained that his fellow co-curator “John [Carlin] helped me understand in the beginning that, in this type of [museum] environment, you really have to search for examples of work that are the most visual – graphically powerful. . . . I’m probably a little more content-oriented, and he’s probably a little more form-oriented.” Walker said at the San Diego “Masters” panel that comics storytellers were not included in the show if they were not considered to be important visual innovators “in layouts or design.”

    This emphasis on visual design over visual storytelling isn’t a major problem in evaluating the work of McCay, whose narratives usually seem primarily to be pretexts for his visual experimentation.

    One of the themes of the “Masters” exhibition appears to be a metafictional approach to comics: comics that are about the comics medium, which draw attention to themselves as fictional constructs, and which draw attention to and play with the conventions of the form.

    For example, the show includes a noted example of McCay’s strip Little Sammy Sneeze, a series which, even more than Herriman’s Krazy Kat, sought to wring infinite variations out of a single basic gag: like Clark Kent in the October 5, 2006 episode of Smallville, aptly titled “Sneeze,” Sammy wreaks destruction whenever he unleashes one of his catastrophic nasal discharges. In this particular example (Sept. 24, 1905), Sammy is pictured within square panels with thick black borders. This time when Sammy sneezes, he shatters the panel borders, and in the last image in the sequence, he sits bewildered among the fragments of the broken borders.

    Similarly, in a Dream of the Rarebit Fiend from April 7, 1907, the dreamer finds himself increasingly covered by ink blots from the unseen cartoonist’s leaky pen.

    The McCay pieces in the exhibition were well chosen, and include examples from such celebrated Little Nemo sequences as “The Palace of Ice” and “Befuddle Hall,” with its vertiginous architecture. It was a particular pleasure to see exhibited here the original art for the Little Nemo Sunday page (Sept. 29, 1907) in which the title character and the Jungle Imp, both at giant size, clambers over Manhattan skyscrapers to arrive at the bank of the East River. Art Spiegelman included this particular installment in his book In the Shadow of No Towers (see “Comics in Context” #60), and since then, Neil Gaiman reprinted it in his 2006 short story collection Fragile Things.

    The “Masters” show also has the same page of Lyonel Feininger’s Kin-der-Kids, “The Kin-der-Kids Abroad: Triumphant Departure of the Kids in the Family Bathtub!!” (May 6, 1906), that Spiegelman ran in No Towers (see “Comics in Context” #59). But this isn’t the original art for the page. In fact, there are only a few examples of the show of Feininger’s original art for comics; most of what is on display are actual newspaper pages on which Feininger’s Sunday comics were printed.

    I was surprised to learn from the labels that these newspaper pages were lent to the “Masters” exhibition by the Museum of Modern Art, to which Julia Feininger had donated them. During its long history the Museum of Modern Art has mostly overlooked comics, but the Museum clearly made an exception here inasmuch as Feininger went on to become an important painter of the early 20th century.

    I presume that “Masters” used so many newspaper pages for the Feininger section because the original art for these strips was unavailable. These pages reminded me of a question raised by the Dahesh Museum’s show “Stories to Tell: Masterworks from the Kelly Collection of American Illustration” earlier this year (see “Comics in Context” #132). Since these illustrators specifically designed their work to be reproduced in magazines and books, it can be argued that the reproduction is the true artwork, and not the original drawing or painting. The same argument could be made about comics.

    Feininger only worked in comics for nine months in 1906 and 1907, creating two strips, The Kin-der-Kids and Wee Willie Winkie’s World. One of the pages with a Wee Willie Winkie strip on display was dated Sunday, September 23, 1906, and there I was at the Newark Museum on Saturday, September 23, 2006, looking at it exactly a century later.

    “Masters of American Comics” is such a large and important exhibition that I cannot hope to do it justice in a single week’s column, so I will continue my review of the show next week.

    LINKS IN THE GREAT CHAIN OF CYBERBEING
    In response to my memorial to the late Mark Gruenwald last week, Peter B. Gillis, once writer of such Marvel series as The Defenders, The Eternals (the unjustly forgotten 1980s revival), The Micronauts and Strikeforce Morituri, has created his own beautifully written an insightful tribute to Mark on his blog. Peter focuses on Mark as a visionary in his approach to Marvel’s fictional universe. If you look further down the section of his blog devoted to comics, you will also find Gillis’s homage to the late, great artist Alex Toth, whom he knew personally. There is also Gillis’s tribute to Charles Schulz, which takes the form of a story about what happened to the lead Peanuts characters when they became adults: it is everything that Dog Sees God, the recent off-Broadway play about the Peanuts characters as teenagers, should have been but wasn’t (see “Comics in Context” #120).

    But don’t just read the sections of Peter Gillis’s blog that are about comics. He also does incisive political commentary and even offers (very) short science fiction stories for your perusal. His blog is one of the smartest and richly, masterfully written blogs I’ve ever come across. Read it and you too will wonder why the comics industry was foolish enough to let him leave the field.

    Former Movie Poop Shoot contributor Scott Tipton has already done just what I have been advocating lately: a thematic analysis of Mark Gruenwald’s body comics stories apart from Squadron Supreme. You can find Tipton’s perceptive survey, titled “Because It’s Right: Ethics and the Work of Mark Gruenwald,” here.

    I’ve written approvingly twice about the Star Wars Fan Film Awards (see “Comics in Context” #5 and #142), so it should not surprise you that I also enjoyed the very similar “Green Screen Challenge” on Comedy Central’s The Colbert Report. In this case fans constructed CGI videos around footage of the noble Stephen Colbert demonstrating his prowess wielding a lightsaber in front of a green screen. Even George Lucas himself joined the competition, as we learned on the October 11, 2006 episode (to be rerun on October 25). But it was Bonnie Rose, a freelancer here at Quick Stop Entertainment, who triumphed, and I suggest you read her memoir of her experience.

    Finally, three cheers for Quick Stop’s Fred Hembeck, whose Cartoon Fred makes his long overdue and dependably amusing return to the pages of Marvel comics in the new Stan Lee Meets Spider-Man one-shot. It’s proof that exile from the House of Ideas need not last forever!

    Copyright 2006 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #150: Remarkable

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    cic2006-10-13 01.jpgIn each full year since I started writing this column, I’ve done a report on a memorial commemorating the passing of an important figure in the artform of comics. There was Julius Schwartz in 2004 (in “Comics in Context” #32) and Will Eisner in 2005 (in “Comics in Context” #80 and #81), each of whom had spent over half a century in comics and lived very long lives. This year I’m writing about someone who suddenly died when he was only halfway through his career. My friend Mark Gruenwald, writer of Captain America for ten years and editor of Marvel’s Avengers line of comics, who eventually rose to become the company’s senior executive editor, abruptly succumbed to a cardiac attack on August 12, 1996 at the age of only 43.

    There were two memorials for Mark in New York City in 1996. The first, at the Ethical Culture Society, was held shortly after his death. Then there was another, held at the New York Film Academy, which was less an occasion for mourning than a celebration of his life. In retrospect, it also now seems to represent the end of an era. This second memorial was attended by an enormous number of people, more than the Schwartz memorial and far, far more than Eisner’s. It now seems to me to have been the last great gathering of the Boomer generation of the New York comics community. Not just Marvel but the whole American comics industry has changed radically over the subsequent decade. There are now few people still on staff at either Marvel or DC who knew Mark.

    But those of us who did know him haven’t forgotten. Including this one, I have written three articles about Mark this year. One will run in TwoMorrows’ Back Issue magazine. I did another, dealing with Mark’s creation of The Official Handbook of the Marvel Universe, for the forthcoming Handbook to the alternative superhero series Invincible; this article may appear in a possible paperback collection.

    This year I’ve been holding a lecture series called “1986: The Year That Changed Comics,” at the Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art (MoCCA, at www.moccany.org) in downtown Manhattan. I scheduled my talk about Mark’s finest series, Squadron Supreme, for August since Mark had died ten years ago that month. I suggested to MoCCA that we could also hold a tenth anniversary tribute for Mark, and contacted his widow, Catherine Schuller, who liked the idea. As the lecture date (Monday, August 7) approached, I e-mailed invitations to various friends of Mark’s in the comics business, and encouraged them to invite still others.

    The result surpassed my expectations. The night of August 7 became a reunion for so many former Marvel staffers from the 1980s and 1990s, and the museum, which resembles a small art gallery in size, had a standing room only crowd. On his blog (http://www.marvel.com/blogs//entry/383) Marvel editor Tom Brevoort, who attended, observed that “Only Mark could bring together so many expatriate Marvelites after so many years.”

    In my “1986” series usually I spend two hours lecturing about that evening’s books, but this night I cut my talk about Squadron Supreme down to a tenth of that length, knowing that the Marvel veterans in the audience far outnumbered the students. But I made my major points nonetheless: that although it was overshadowed in 1986 by works like Watchmen and The Dark Knight Returns, Mark’s Squadron Supreme was also an important reevaluation of the superhero myth. Squadron also proved prophetic for the future development of the genre, and foreshadowed such works as Kingdom Come and even Identity Crisis. Since the superhero is a specifically American construct, then Squadron is an American tragedy, about how people dedicated to the benefit of humanity, with all good intentions, nonetheless compromise their own morality and subvert American ideals and liberty. As I said that night, Squadron takes on new relevance during the current conflict in Iraq. With luck someday I will have the opportunity to write at length about Squadron, a work that is still underappreciated.

    As Mark himself once wrote:
    Mark’s Remark: “I admit it. The fiction I write is primarily intended for juveniles. But just because it’s for juveniles doesn’t mean it has to be valueless. I try to imbed my juvenile adventure stories with values I believe in, values that transcend the genre. Sometimes I succeed.”

    Then I turned the evening’s proceedings over to Catherine, who had a surprise for the audience: just a short time before, she had discovered that “sixteen years before he died,” Mark “wrote his own eulogy.” He even specified the music he wanted played: the Beatles, Pachebel’s Canon, and Richard Wagner’s “Ride of the Valkyries.”

    Mark’s Remark: “Another of the things that make life worth living: music.”

    Then Catherine began reading Mark’s eulogy, which began with a greeting, “Hello, friends; you know who you are.” Mark went on to assure us that he still existed. “I believe in life, death,” an “afterlife” and an “afterdeath.” He believed that there is “a creative intelligence” that is “above us.” Although Mark said he believed there was “no personal God,” meaning a God who takes interest in each of us personally, but speculated that “perhaps” there were also “higher powers” who did. (I’ve hypothesized the same idea.) Mark contended that there was “no purpose in being,” by which he meant an inherent purpose, and that it was “up to all of us to find [the] highest purpose we can aspire to.”

    In his case “I believe in love,” and asserted that he had “done good here and there for others,” and had given “a bit more than I’ve taken.” Further, “I’ve not as a whole done anything that has given me remorse.”

    Stating that “a long time ago I became aware of my mortality,” Mark said he had written this “message” to be “read instead of religious hoopla.” He encouraged us to “feel free to laugh” during the reading of this eulogy: “If you went before me, I’d laugh at your jokes, too.”

    As for his “personal image” of the hereafter, Mark wrote that “I’ll be in a hazy dreamworld,” adding, “much like the one I left.” He envisioned that in the hereafter he would see the “spirits of all those who I’ve loved” who had died before him, and listed a series of names, including his cat Nanda Parbat. (Appropriately, this cat was named after a mystical land in the DC Comics series Deadman.) “I hope all these people are there in the afterlife,” Mark wrote, “and it starts with a welcome party.” Among the people he hoped would be on the guest list were “Moe, Curly, Shemp, and Larry”; Groucho Marx; Rod Serling, the creator of his favorite TV series, the original Twilight Zone; Boris Karloff; Dada artist Marcel Duchamp; Snorri Sturluson, who first compiled the Norse myths (and who was a primary source for Walter Simonson’s run writing and drawing Marvel’s Thor); and Abraham Lincoln and Benjamin Franklin (apt choices for the longtime writer of Captain America).

    After the party, Mark hoped he would “go on an adventure” with a late friend and his cat Nanda, and “then on I go until entropy comes.”

    Mark wrote that the “main difference” between life and death is that “Death lasts a lot longer. Life is too thin: I wish life were a lot thicker.”

    In conclusion, Mark observed that “I’m beyond caring right now” but “I thank you one last time for being part of it,” his life. He stated that “What I miss most in life is Sara,” his daughter, and closed by telling the assemblage that “you people were good people,” who were “great to know.”

    Mark’s Remark: “Another of the things that makes life worth living: hearing your child say something she learned from you.”

    Then Sara herself went to the lectern to speak, no longer the small girl whom we remember, but a tall, grown woman who has become an artist, and had a show of her work a few years ago. She reminisced about her father as a “master of stories”: he read all of L. Frank Baum’s Oz books to her. (That makes sense to me: Baum created his own highly detailed fictional universe, just as Marvel has.) More than that, Mark created stories of his own to tell Sara, which she called “Gru narrative.”

    She then recounted one he told her when she was a “small child,” about a magic bracelet of many colors, each of which represented a different power: red for super-speed, blue for flight, purple for invisibility. The magic bracelet was used to defend the “light side” of Earth from the “dark side.” But “the bracelet was lost for thousands of years,” during which time “people forgot” about such things as “centaurs” and “magic,” and “strip malls replaced castles and dragon’s lairs.” But then one day the bracelet was found, and, Sara said, showing it off on her wrist to us, “I have been the bracelet’s loyal guardian ever since.”

    Sara explained that with “every story he told. . .it was like it was real.” She continued, “I really believed in this bracelet,” and told us that Mark “also told stories in which I used the bracelet” to perform good deeds.

    Mark’s Remark: “To be as alive as it’s possible to be, you must wonder like a child, feel like a teenager, and think like an adult.”

    Next up was Mike Carlin, who began his long career in comics as Mark’s assistant editor at Marvel. He started his talk by saying that the “second Catherine said she had found this eulogy,” he remembered a time years ago when “Mark asked me to housesit his apartment” while he was away. If anything dire was to happen to Mark, he had instructed Mike to find this “special book.” Mike and his Marvel cohorts Eliot Brown and Jack Morelli did indeed find the book. “As she was reading it,” Mike told us, he realized, “holy shit, I already read this.” It was the eulogy, and back then, Mike said, he, Brown and Morelli “just never stopped laughing at the name Snorri Sturluson.”

    Mike next started commenting on a series of slides made from photos taken back in the 1980s, “B.C.–Before Catherine.” First there were shots of Mark’s office at Marvel. “Mark, he was a weirdo,” Carlin said affectionately., “He insisted on all the desks in the room” being totally clear of papers or anything else. (This is true: my own desk was stacked with neatly arranged piles of paper, but I could tell that Mark quietly disapproved.) “He didn’t want telephones on the desk,” Carlin continued, so they put them in the desk drawers. “Now all my phones are out,” Carlin told us, but “nobody calls.”

    Mark’s Remark: “Life goes on, whether we’re in it or not.”

    Next came a slide from Michelle Marsh Day, which is now a legend among Marvel employees of the 1980s. Michelle Marsh is a beautiful news anchorwoman who had a long career in New York City television, and at one point her face adorned posters around the city advertising her local news show. As Mike Carlin recalled, Mark took a fancy to the poster and said, “I’ll give you a dollar if you get me another one.” Eventually he spent eighty to ninety dollars on Michelle Marsh posters that Marvel personnel surreptitiously removed from subway stations and other sites, and he was “wallpapering his office with them.” (This was but one of the unusual decorating themes Mark chose for his office; at another point his office was decorated to resemble a medieval dungeon.) Finally, Carlin recounted, they “cut them up” and staged a “secret surprise party” one afternoon, in which the Marvel staff crammed into Mark’s office and donned Michelle Marsh masks made from the posters. This was Michelle Marsh Day, recorded for posterity on videotape.

    Mark’s Remark: “Gruenwald’s second rule of comedy: If something is not funny the first time, by the fiftieth time you repeat it, it will be hilarious.”

    As the slide show continued, Mike Carlin reminisced about how he, Mark and Eliot would spend “sleepover weekends” at the Marvel offices to work on The Official Handbook of the Marvel Universe. (In case you’re wondering, I stayed home writing entries, though I spent many late weeknights at the office working on the Handbook in later years. People who have subsequently undertaken comics encyclopedia projects with which I’ve been involved never comprehend beforehand how much time and work they take. The fact that Mark and company spent entire weekends at the office should give you some idea.)

    “Mark threw a pie fight for my birthday,” Carlin told us. (Now you see why Mark wanted the Three Stooges at his welcoming party in heaven.) “He used real whipped cream” for the pies, though they then discovered it “doesn’t come out of your clothes.”

    Mark’s Remark: “Men: if you can find a woman who really likes the Three Stooges or old Twilight Zones, don’t let her out of your life.”

    Long before the rise of digital video and the age of YouTube, Mark was a video maven. The slide show also included a picture of Mark in costume as Weebwo (I am uncertain of the proper spelling), a “character from the future,” which, Carlin explained, then meant the 1990s, who appeared on Cheap Laughs, a sketch comedy series that Mark, Mike and Eliot produced, wrote and acted in for public access cable TV in New York.

    Mike Carlin summed up by saying of Mark, “He was my best friend” and “gave me a shot at getting into the comic business.” He added, “It’s crazy to me that it’s ten years later,” meaning since Mark’s death. Carlin recommended that we “go check out” the “Mark’s Remarks” columns that Gruenwald used to write in Marvel Age and other comics. Carlin said Mark would “write Marvel Age columns about his thinking processes,” and though they were “ostensibly about editing,” they were about “how he got through the day.” He’s right: “Mark’s Remarks” were like a blog before there were blogs, covering not only comics but also more personal matters. You can find many of these columns posted online at http://www.geocities.com/mh_prime/, including the one from Marvel Age #100 which I borrowed the quotations in this week’s column.

    Mark’s Remark: “If something’s worth doing, it’s worth doing with all the energy you can bring to it.”

    As you can surely tell by now, Mark was a dynamo of creative energy, who wasn’t satisfied with simply doing his day job from 9 to 5. Why did he work so hard and so much? Carlin told us, “I always felt subconsciously he knew he didn’t have as much time” as the rest of us. “He left a big mark on a lot of people,” Mike said, apparently unaware of his inadvertent pun (which Mark would have appreciated). Carlin asserted, “He affected way more things than you’ll ever know about.”

    Mark’s Remark: “I wish that when I was young somebody had told me that time goes by more quickly the older you get.”

    Then Mike Carlin read a message from comics editor/writer Denny O’Neil, who hadn’t been able to attend in person: Mark had been his assistant when O’Neil was an editor at Marvel, and later Mark edited O’Neil’s run writing Iron Man. O’Neil wrote that “Only now after ten years” was he “beginning to realize what a loss Mark was.” O’Neil declared Mark to be “a near perfect assistant” and, quoting the title of one of Tom Wolfe’s books, called him “a man in full.” O’Neil closed by saying, “I think of him often.”

    There was also a message from O’Neil’s wife, Marifran, who wrote that, like Catherine, she had only “met Mark closer to his end.” But she recalled Mark’s marriage to Catherine as the “most joyous wedding I ever attended.”

    Mark’s Remark: “Gruenwald’s first rule of Halloween costumes: A costume should totally disguise one’s appearance.”

    Marifran also noted, “I remember his bag lady impersonation” at the first comics industry Halloween party she attended, when he “didn’t utter a sound.” Presumably this was one of the Halloween parties that John Byrne used to hold. Each year there would be a different theme, and in this particular year we were instructed to come in a costume that made us completely unrecognizable. This was harder than it seemed. I found this parrot mask that completely concealed my head (and wore it with a normal suit), but as soon as I walked in, Ann DeLarye Gold (then the wife of DC editor Mike Gold, and looking quite fetching in full makeup and costume as one of the cats from the musical Cats), happily exclaimed, “Peter!” However, Mark loved Halloween and took Halloween costumes quite seriously. His bag lady disguise really was nearly impenetrable, and he didn’t make a sound to prevent anyone from recognizing his voice.

    Mark’s Remark: “I caution people against meeting writers whose work they admire. Once you find out the guy’s a slob in real life, how can you not let that color your impression of his work?”

    The next speaker and his friends weren’t disappointed by what they learned about Mark from this evening’s tribute. This was Mike Fichera, who introduced himself as one of the “new generation” of writers for the new Official Handbook of the Marvel Universe projects that Marvel has lately been producing. He was one of three of these writers who came to New York specifically to attend this tribute, including Anthony Flamini and Michael Hoskins, and spoke on their behalf. He said they “feel really fortunate to be following in Mark Gruenwald’s footsteps.” He said that as a “kid” he had been fascinated with “mythology” and was interested both in the Argonauts and that latter day mythic hero, Spider-Man. But then he discovered that “the Marvel Universe was much larger than just Spider-Man” from reading the Handbook during a six hour flight he took in 1984. “I ate it up,” he recalled. It was through the Handbook he learned about the X-Men, although, he said, his father threw out his first X-Men comic, thinking “X-Men” meant X-rated. To see the Marvel Universe presented “as a whole” and “cohesively” was “inspirational to me.”

    Today, Mike Fichera told the audience, the Handbook writers are based on places ranging from Australia to Florida to Calgary to England, and when faced with a problem writing the Handbook they ask themselves, “What would Gru do?” He said it was their “big regret” that “Mark couldn’t be part of our team” since “his passion, his love for the characters. . .lit our flames.” (You can find their photos of the tribute at http://www.flickr.com/photos/23781769@N00/sets/72157594230827210
    and http://www.flickr.com/photos/43412863@N00/sets/72157594232021137).

    Next up was former Marvel editor (and current PaperCutz editor) Jim Salicrup, but I need not recap what he said in detail because Fred Hembeck included Jim’s entire speech in his own recent tribute to Mark over at “The Fred Hembeck Show” Episode 72 (http://asitecalledfred.com/?p=1546). I like Jim’s observation that Mark “was sort of a combination of Bill Murray and Jack Nicholson: the bad boy with that endearing twinkle in his eye.” And I especially liked Jim’s closing tribute: “Mark’s life was a constant expression of his humor, compassion, love and spirit. As much as I enjoyed Mark’s comic book work, I think Mark himself was his greatest creation.” That echoed Denny O’Neil’s concluding statement in his speech at the New York Film Academy memorial to Mark: that Mark’s greatest artwork was his life.

    Mark’s Remark: “If I didn’t exist, I’d have to invent me.”

    The next speaker was master inker Tom Palmer, who had started at Marvel at the close of the Silver Age. He said he had met Mark when he “asked if I would work on an Avengers issue with John Buscema.” Palmer said he “wound up doing ten years.”

    Palmer recalled how once he was in Mark’s office back when Howard Mackie was Mark’s assistant. There was a closet full of boxes. Then in came one particular freelancer. “The next moment there were boxes everywhere,” Palmer said, and the boxes landed atop this unnamed freelancer. afterwards Howard put the boxes back. Palmer told us he learned that “Mark had one box” that was the “key box,” and “when people he didn’t like came in,” he would pull the key box, and the avalanche would commence. And what did Tom Palmer think? “I like this guy. He’s the guy I grew up with. We got very close.” Then Palmer brought his talk to an end, explaining that he “didn’t want to talk too long” because he would “get emotional.”

    Mark’s Remark: “Sometimes I wonder if the haircut I wear now is going to embarrass me when I look at a picture of myself ten years from now.”

    This was just the first example of the evening of Mark Gruenwald as prince of pranksters, the foremost trickster of the Marvel Universe. This was the topic of our next speaker, former Marvel editor Glenn Herdling, who began by pointing out the difficulty in resurrecting Mark via cloning. Herdling reminded us that Mark was cremated and they “put his ashes in comic books.” (Following Mark’s wishes, his ashes were mixed with the ink used in printing the original run of the Squadron Supreme trade paperback. This is true.) “Nothing organic remains,” Herdling declared, pausing, “except–“ and he held up a familiar-looking ponytail, as if it were a long lost relic. “How did I come by this?” Herdling asked, cupping his ear when he didn’t think we responded loudly enough.

    Mark’s Remark: “If we can’t kid each other, who can we kid?”

    The tale “goes back to around 1991, our first ski trip to Vermont,” comprising Glenn, Mark, and their fellow Marvel editors Ralph Macchio and Fabian Nicieza. “Mark has something planned,” Herdling tells us. Before the trip, “Mark goes around the office with envelope in hand,” asking both men and women to donate some of their hair to his scheme. “Fabian was battling chronic baldness,” Herdling said, and Mark “wanted to place a whole bunch of hair on Fabian’s pillow when he woke up.”

    So, during the ski trip, while Fabian was taking a shower, Mark and Glenn emptied the envelope onto his pillow, but “it wasn’t enough.” So they got additional hair out of bathroom drains and used a hair dryer on it. “Mark was ecstatic,” Herdling reported, noting his willingness to “go that extra length for a practical joke.” Then Fabian walked in, and Mark said, “Fabian, we’re just looking at your pillow here.”

    “Next year,” Herdling continued, “we had to outdo ourselves.” This time “Ralph didn’t come” and an assistant editor took his place. This time Mark brought along a fake ponytail so Glenn could pretend to cut it off while he was asleep. Mark had tucked his real ponytail beneath his collar, a simple trick that nonetheless took in both Fabian and the assistant editor, who panicked: “You cut off the executive editor’s ponytail! You are going to get so fired!”

    Mark’s Remark: “Gruenwald’s third rule of comedy: Rules, like comedy, should always come in threes.”

    Part three came “a couple of years later” at a Marvel editorial retreat. The previous ponytail incident, Herdling said, was now “legendary” and “Mark called me” and said, “I want you to cut off my ponytail. This time I want you to really do it.”

    So on Saturday night the editors were playing a game of Thumper, and Herdling decided, “I’m going to throw the game.” Mark won and the other editors lifted him up in his chair to acclaim his victory. “Out come the scissors,” Herdling told us, and he cut off Mark’s ponytail and held “it up in the air as a trophy. There was dead silence.”

    The next morning Tom DeFalco, the editor in chief, “calls me over.” Here Herdling slipped into an impression of Tom, one that many Marvelites of the 1980s did, perhaps made funnier by the fact that Tom (a good sport) was right there in the audience. “What you did to Mark was inexcusable,” Glenn said Tom told him with a “stone face.” Herdling recalled, “When you’re a practical joker, Mark would say, you can’t live comfortably.” Herdling told us he thought DeFalco was in on the gag. DeFalco commanded him, “I want to see you in my office.” Herdling asked, “Tom, do you know?” “Do I know what?” DeFalco ominously replied. “It’s a joke,” Herdling pleaded, explaining that he and Mark had collaborated on it. “I want to see you both of you in my office,” DeFalco thundered.

    But at the end of the retreat, Herdling told us, DeFalco had him and Mark stand up and told the others, “You’ve been had by the best.” Moreover, he added, “That’s what comics are all about. If you’re not having fun at work, it’s going to show.” (Here I recalled the deafening silence in the halls of Marvel in my final years there, post-Mark. Those last two sentences should be framed and hanged in every comics editorial office.)

    Mark’s Remark:”Be good to people who care about you.”

    Next up was another former Marvel editor, Glenn Greenberg, who spoke about “how Mark cared about everyone at the company,” and gave his own case as an example. It was in the 1990s, during Marvel’s “darkest time.” Glenn had just been “promoted to associate editor,” but “every book I was given was a dog or was going to be canceled.” There had already been “one or two rounds of downsizing,” and “I figured this was it.” So “I came to the decision to turn back my promotion” and go back to being Tom Brevoort’s assistant.

    When Greenberg told Mark he was totally surprised and told him, “In the history of this company, no one has ever done this before.” And indeed, Glenn now realizes, as he said, “Why would the company want someone who did that to himself?”

    But Mark made up for Glenn’s naivete. “Later that day Mark took me aside” and said he told the editor in chief (not DeFalco at this point) why Greenberg had turned back his promotion “and that it should not be held as a black mark against me.” Greenberg told us, “To this day I get very choked up” when he thinks about that. “That spoke volumes about how much he cared. It was no more than a month or two later that he passed away.” (Another recently written tribute to Mark suggested that he was too soft-hearted when it came to getting rid of people. I leave it to you readers to decide if this is a vice or a virtue.)

    Glenn also recalled the classes in the craft of comics that Mark used to teach to the assistant editors, including himself, and said, “I really took to my heart” what he learned in them. He concluded, “If I had stayed in the industry my goal [would be that] I could be mentioned in the same breath as Mark Gruenwald and Archie Goodwin,” another respected and beloved editor who passed away two years later.

    Mark’s Remark: “Another of the things that make life worth living: falling in love.”

    Then yet another former Marvel editor, Carl Potts, stepped up to the lectern. (Do you get the impression that Marvel has gotten rid of a lot of editors over the last dozen years?) Potts recalled that Mark was happy “almost totally consistently” when he was “in the presence of his comrades” except for “one short period when he was slightly down,” because he was “concerned about his love life.” (This would be after the end of his first marriage.) But one day Marvel issued “a casting call for models” to dress as superheroines. This is how Mark met Catherine, and he “was immediately smitten.” (If you ever meet Catherine, you’ll understand why.) Potts recalled that Mark had said, “your first marriage is your starter marriage” and once Mark had married Catherine, “he was so happy with that side of his life.”

    Here Sara interjected that the first time that Mark told her he was dating a model, she asked him, “Dad, how can you date a mannequin? They’re not real.” Sara explained that she had seen the Twilight Zone episode in which the department store mannequins come to life.

    Mark’s Remark: “Gruenwald’s first rule of comedy: Anything more annoying to someone else than it is to you is funny.”

    Before the night of the MoCCA tribute, Tom DeFalco had said he didn’t want to speak publicly about his old friend Mark. But now Mike Carlin prodded him to tell the tale of one of Mark’s grandest practical jokes, “the gun story.” So Tom made his way to the lectern.

    But first he wanted to add his side to the saga of the night Glenn Herdling cut off Mark’s ponytail for real. DeFalco was asleep, but “for the next hour and a half I got frantic calls from everybody.” But, Tom told us, “I knew of the other fake ponytail incident,” so he figured it out: “one plus one equals two.”

    As for the gun story, Carlin had first assured everybody that this took place before the 9/11 attacks. DeFalco began by saying, “I used to have to do a lot of traveling with Mark.” On this particular business trip, “we were heading off to the airport” but after they arrived, suddenly “I’m surrounded by security.” It turned out that the X-ray machines had detected the outline of a gun in one of DeFalco’s bags. Security emptied the bag, but found “nothing that resembles a gun,” so they put the bag through the X-ray machine again, and the image of the gun reappeared. They finally realized that the “bottom flap” of the suitcase “will open up,” and inside they found tinfoil in the shape of a gun. DeFalco said security people were “trying to decide if they’re going to arrest me or not.” He then saw “Mark with a look of panic on his face” and “right away I knew.”

    Mark’s Remark: “As a young child, I used to go to my friends’ houses and reorganize their toys.”

    Mark was also DeFalco’s assistant editor at one point. In another example of what DeFalco termed Mark’s “lovely sense of humor,” “every time I took a trip” when Mark stayed behind in New York, when Tom returned, “my bookshelf would be rearranged.” DeFalco informed us, “We never really discussed the jokes,” and he would simply “try to figure out” the governing principle behind the new order Mark had arranged the books into.

    Then there was a convention in Oakland (presumably WonderCon before it moved to San Francisco), when DeFalco had a “late night business meeting at the bar” and at 2 AM discovered a “giant poster” proclaiming that Tom DeFalco would be signing autographs twenty-four hours a day and giving his room number. “Just knock,” the poster advised.

    Other friends of Mark’s were potential targets as well. DeFalco recalled how once when Ralph Macchio returned from a week’s vacation, he discovered that “every item” had been removed from his office, and there was a note saying that a former DC editor would be taking over the space. “Ralph ignored it,” DeFalco said, and “next morning everything was back” in place.

    And then there was Mark’s spinning wheel that would tell who was going to get downsized. “Mark was always ahead of his time,” DeFalco commented dryly. DeFalco explained that the wheel was “jury-rigged” so that “whichever office we walked into,” the wheel would always pick the “guy sitting in front of us.”

    Mark’s Remark: “I take humor seriously. If you haven’t laughed so hard you thought you’d vomit at least once a year, there was no point in living that year.”

    Mark was also Marvel’s self-appointed, unofficial officer in charge of keeping morale high. I learned something when DeFalco mentioned “all the crazy parties” that used to be held at Marvel–Halloween parties, Christmas parties–and revealed that “the company never paid for them. It was always Mark’s idea.” DeFalco told us he used to tell Mark, “You can’t afford this stuff,” and Mark would reply, “We can’t afford not to do it.”

    Moreover, “Mark was always the instigator” of “all the crazy stuff we used to do at conventions.” DeFalco said the convention would give us “two or three hours” of panel time to sell things. Mark, however, contended that the fans have “either bought it”–the new comics projects–“or not,” so he wanted to “give [Marvel’s] sales people one hour” and “then do two hours of crazy entertainment.” (Mark, you see, was trying to convey the idea that the spirit of Marvel was not grim and gritty or mercenary: the spirit of Marvel was fun.) DeFalco even confessed that in one of the Marvel game shows Mark staged at comics conventions, “he conned me into busting a balloon with my butt!”

    Mark’s Remark: “Are all writers frustrated performers?”

    This served as a good segue into the showing of a videotape compiling excerpts from some of the game shows that Mark staged at comics conventions under such titles as “Mondo Marvel” and the “Marvelympics.”
    The tape was, of course, introduced by a clip of Mark’s idol, Rod Serling. Here was Mark getting fans to impersonate Doctor Strange getting a wedgie or (ironically) Aunt May having a stroke. He challenges another fan to improvise a rap song about Ka-Zar, Quasar, and the Living Laser (well, they sort of rhyme). In another form of wrapping, Mark has fans compete in wrapping twenty-five feet of fabric around Marvel editors Bobbie Chase and Hildy Mesnik. And then there was the “Terror Box,” named after the now-forgotten lead of his own Marvel series: the box with Terror’s macabre visage would be placed over the heads of volunteer fans, who would then scream as loud as they could. And yes, there was a clip of a competition at busting balloons by sitting on them, with Tom DeFalco as a participant. Having unsuccessfully attempted to fight off boredom while sitting through a Marvel panel at this year’s New York Comic Con, I think something important is missing from Marvel presentations in the 21st Century A. G. (After Gru).

    Next on the tape was Mark in a tuxedo, emceeing a comics industry roast, I think, and doing jokes about the ribbons that celebrities used to wear at awards shows to support various causes. On the tape Mark said his “black and blue ribbon” represented “the Union of Downsized Marvelites.” In the museum Glenn Greenberg interjected, “That’s everybody here!”

    The tape concluded with a four-minute-long montage of still pictures from throughout Mark’s life, set to familiar music from the Peanuts animated specials, with Mark looking very different as a child, and later adopting a longhaired, bearded hippie look before emerging looking the way we knew him.
    There were pictures of himself with his buddy Dean Mullaney from their days publishing their fanzine Omniverse, pictures of Mark with Sara and Catherine, a shot of Tom DeFalco and Mark kissing Stan Lee on the cheeks, covers from the Silver Age comics that influenced Mark, and covers from the most important series he wrote: DP7, Quasar, Captain America, Squadron Supreme, and the Handbook. The tape concluded with a shot of Mark, intelligent and contemplative, looking out at us, with a picture of Captain America in the background. The montage was a portrait of a short but full life.

    Mark’s Remark: “There is no excuse for leading a boring life.”

    Finally, in accordance with Mark’s wishes, a friend of Catherine’s, known as Henry O., played the Beatles’ “In My Life” on the guitar. And with that, the tribute came to an end, although everyone remained to mingle for a while longer.

    The next day on his blog Tom Brevoort wrote that the evening “was like a strange time machine, like stepping back into the past and reliving the Marvel-that-was more than a decade ago.” He also observed that “For good or ill, that Marvel will never exist again, largely due to the passing of Mark Gruenwald.”

    Mark’s Remark: “When I die, I’m really going to miss me.”

    He’s not the only one.

    cic2006-10-13 02.jpg

    -Copyright 2006 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #149: Forty Years In Shadows

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    darkshadows.jpgOnly last week in “The Fred Hembeck Show” #74, its namesake confessed what he considered his deep, dark and shameful secret: that he, Fred Hembeck, was a soap opera fan. In sharp contrast, from almost the very start of “Comics in Context” three years ago, I have proudly proclaimed my own undying devotion to one particular soap opera: that classic melding of the daytime serial with Gothic melodrama, Dark Shadows, whose leading character was a villain turned tragic hero, the vampire Barnabas Collins.

    During the series’ original run, Dark Shadows became an enormous hit among young Baby Boomers, much like that later serial TV drama about vampires in a small town, Buffy the Vampire Slayer, did among young viewers in more recent years. During its original run Dark Shadows spawned two MGM movies, one of which, House of Dark Shadows (1970), will be shown on Turner Classic Movies the night of October 20. There were also Dark Shadows novels, a Dark Shadows newspaper comic strip, and Dark Shadows comic books, more than justifying the show’s suitability as a topic for my column.

    Way back in “Comics in Context” #11 I wrote an appreciation of the show, and in #12 I wrote about the 2003 Dark Shadows Festival, one of the annual conventions that celebrate the series. It had been announced that this would be the last of the official Festivals, much to the distress of both fans and members of the show’s original cast. In fact, one of the leading cast members, Kathryn Leigh Scott, even publicly confronted Festival head Jim Pierson onstage over this issue. So the conventions continued, albeit under different names, like the “Dark Shadows Weekend” on which I reported in “Comics in Context” #50 in 2004. Last year’s convention was held in Los Angeles, and I did not attend, but this August the convention returned to New York to celebrate the fortieth anniversary of the original series, which ran from 1966 to 1971.

    You might expect that these conventions would be attended almost entirely by aging Boomers who watched the show as children, and there are indeed a lot of us there. But, appropriately, Dark Shadows has proved to be The Show That Will Not Die. Several years after it went off the air in 1971, Dark Shadows returned in syndication, and it later found a home on various public television stations, and still later on the newly founded Sci-Fi Channel. As a result, new generations of viewers have had the opportunity to discover Dark Shadows for themselves.

    You may have observed that many cable networks start out by running classic TV series from the 1950s and 1960s, which they can acquire inexpensively, but as the cable network grows more successful, it dumps them. The Sci-Fi Channel followed the same pattern (but its management has had the good taste to retain the original Twilight Zone and to run the new Doctor Who, so they should be forgiven).

    But this has not spelled the end of Dark Shadows, either. At this year’s “Dark Shadows 40th Anniversary Celebration Weekend,” when speakers asked how many people in the audience were attending for the first time, an astoundingly large number of hands were raised. The reason is the revolution in video technology. MPI Home Video has issued the entire original series, first on VHS and now on DVD, and once a movie or television show is on DVD, its permanence is assured. (The short-lived 1991 revival of Dark Shadows, which had the misfortune of debuting the week that the first Gulf War began, also recently came out on DVD.) Moreover, as was noted onstage, it seems that people who watched DS when they were growing up are now using the DVDs to introduce the show to their children–and even grandchildren.

    Here is an aspect of the DVD revolution that is worth further examination: its capacity for extending the shelf life of the popular culture of previous generations. For example, I’ve worried in this column about how Cartoon Network and Boomerang have considerably reduced showings of classic Warners cartoons. Will the superb Looney Tunes Golden Collection DVD sets succeed in introducing new generations to Bugs Bunny and company instead?

    Earlier in this fortieth anniversary year for Dark Shadows, its creator, executive producer, and owner Dan Curtis, who directed its two movie spinoffs, passed away at the age of 78. Yet 2006 has also brought a rebirth for Dark Shadows in the form of new projects that serve as continuations of the original series. One is a new paperback novel from Tor Books, Dark Shadows: The Salem Branch, written by Lara Parker, who played the key role of the witch Angelique on the original series. The other is a new series of radio-style dramas on CD, produced by the British company Big Finish, which is best known for its long series of Doctor Who audio dramas featuring cast members from over the long history of that television series. Big Finish’s first two Dark Shadows CDs debuted at this year’s “40th Anniversary Celebration Weekend”; two more, including a Christmas-themed story, will be released in November.

    With Dark Shadows: The Salem Branch, Lara Parker has now written two Dark Shadows novels, which simultaneously serve as prequels and sequels to the original television series. In Barnabas’s backstory, in the late 18th century he visited the West Indian island of Martinique, where he had an affair with Angelique, the servant of an emigre French aristocrat named Josette DuPres. However, Barnabas dumped Angelique in order to become engaged to the wealthier and more socially respectable Josette. Unknown to either Barnabas or Josette, Angelique had been taught magic, including voodoo, by her mother. In the television series’ classic 1795 flashback arc, Josette arrived in Collinsport for her wedding to Barnabas, accompanied by the seemingly loyal Angelique, who began secretly using magic to prevent their marriage. In time Angelique succeeded in persuading Barnabas to marry her instead, but after their wedding he discovered she was a witch. His love for Josette returned, and he shot Angelique, who, dying, cursed Barnabas to become a vampire.

    Like actor Jonathan Frid as Barnabas, from the start Parker always endowed a character who could easily have been played as a one-dimensional villain with a sympathetic side, and the show’s writers responded. Angelique did not stay dead, but repeatedly returned through most of the series, often to take further vengeance on Barnabas. But, though it was mixed with hatred, the love she professed for Barnabas was real, as the series continued, she increasingly acted as his ally. In fact, in Angelique’s final appearances in the series, she lifted Barnabas’s curse and achieved redemption, only to be murdered by one of Barnabas’s enemies.

    The title of Parker’s first novel, Angelique’s Descent, which is now out of print, carries a double meaning. The book is partially set in 1971, immediately after the end of the original television series. Now human once more, Barnabas finds Angelique’s 18th century diaries, which make up the heart of the novel. Through the diaries Parker fleshes out the Martinique backstory for Barnabas, Josette, and Angelique, depicting events that were never actually dramatized on the TV series, while showing them from Angelique’s viewpoint. Thus the readers get to learn Angelique’s “descent.” Her mother not only knew voodoo but was black (though since Angelique/Parker looks wholly Caucasian, this seems unlikely). Parker also reveals the identity of Angelique’s father, which will not only surprise Dark Shadows fans but makes such good sense thematically and dramatically that it should be part of the show’s official canon.

    Through the diaries traces Angelique’s life from her childhood, when she is worshipped as a voodoo goddess, through her affair with Barnabas, presenting her not as a stereotypical scheming femme fatale but as an innocent who fell deeply in love for the first time and was indeed betrayed. The novel moves on to retell the familiar events of the 1795 arc from Angelique’s perspective, as her frustrated, unrequited passion for Barnabas led her down an increasingly immoral path, climaxing with the laying of her curse on Barnabas, whereby she sealed her own damnation. This is the other meaning of the title Angelique’s Descent.

    My impression is that Dark Shadows fans generally prefer a more clearly evil Angelique, and, indeed, the two attempted revivals of the series for television portray the character as purely villainous. (Even so, Lysette Anthony’s sensual Angelique in the 1991 revival was perhaps its most memorable performance.)

    But I’ve liked the resolution of Angelique’s story in 1971, including Barnabas’s anguished reaction to her death, ever since I first saw it, because there, towards the very end of the series, the writers performed the startling feat of turning the show upside down. Until then, it had seemed to be the story of how evil Angelique persecuted Barnabas, who remained steadfastly (or obsessively) in love with Josette–and with numerous ingenue characters who reminded him of her. The final Angelique episodes postulated that Barnabas had subconsciously been in love with Angelique all along but had refused to let himself admit him, thus inducing the longtime viewer to reconsider the entire series from a different perspective. Angelique’s Descent accomplishes a similar feat, reinterpreting the Barnabas-Angelique-Josette triangle at the heart of the series, without either excusing Angelique’s crimes or violating the spirit of the original show.

    Parker’s second novel, Dark Shadows: The Salem Branch, concocts lemonade from the seeming lemons that the original series offered up in the fall of 1970. Dark Shadows‘ writers had traditionally been careful in maintaining its continuity in detail, but they became sloppy in the show’s final year. Having previously established that Angelique had grown up in Martinique in the late 18th century, in 1970 they devised a flashback sequence showing that Angelique was really Miranda Duval, a member of a witches’ coven headed by the warlock Judah Zachary in the late 17th century. Miranda had been persuaded by Barnabas’s ancestor, Amadeus Collins, to testify against Zachary in a trial that was obviously inspired by the actual Salem witch trials of the same period. (Perhaps the writers thought no one would notice the discrepancy, but in the age of home video, TV series can no longer get away with violating their own continuity.) Parker solves the continuity conundrum by establishing that Angelique was a reincarnation of Miranda.

    If Miranda/Angelique had been reincarnated once, it could happen again. Angelique’s Descent concludes with an Angelique/Parker lookalike turning up in Collinsport. This woman and her troubled daughter become major characters in The Salem Branch, and Barnabas is understandably suspicious that Angelique has returned again; I will leave it to you to read the book and find out whether he is right.

    The Miranda storyline enables Parker to engage in one of Dark Shadows‘ trademark tropes: a character traveling from the present into another time period. In this case, Barnabas finds himself transported to Miranda’s own time. It might have been more dramatically effective had Parker found a less passive role for Barnabas to play in the 17th century than that of witness. Presumably, however, Barnabas could not have been allowed to intervene in events enough to alter the established history of Dark Shadows characters.

    What is most remarkable about The Salem Branch are Parker’s successful efforts at updating Dark Shadows without violating either its letter or its spirit. One obvious example is that the Angelique lookalike befriends a community of hippies who settle on the property she has purchased from the Collins family. At this year’s convention Parker admitted that she based this aspect of the book on her own countercultural experiences in the 1960s.

    In order to maintain the proper Gothic atmosphere, the original Dark Shadows series, even when telling stories set in the then-present (1966-1971), downplayed any evidence of modernity. As cast member Nancy Barrett remarks in her cabaret show, the Collinses were wealthy, but (as far as we could tell) didn’t own a radio or a television set. Aside from the younger actresses’ miniskirts, the Sixties rarely made their presence felt onscreen in the original series.

    But in Parker’s novel the hippies’ presence works. For one thing, the Sixties no longer connote the present but the past, approaching a half-century ago: the hippie sequences have themselves become period pieces, and thus more appropriate to Dark Shadows.

    Also, one of the things that made Dark Shadows work was the contrast between the emotionally repressed world of the normal characters and the secret world of the vampires, werewolves and witches, who embodied those forbidden lusts and violent passions. There was not even a hint that ingenue characters like Maggie and Carolyn and Vicki slept with their boyfriends. Barnabas himself typically suffered in unconsummated love for characters like Josette; his compulsive vampiric attacks might represent his frustrated emotions uncontrollably bursting forth. So it is intriguing for Parker to juxtapose Barnabas and these decidedly uninhibited hippies and to examine his reactions to them. Parker thus challenges the inhibited Gothic milieu of Dark Shadows without overturning it.

    Unsurprisingly, family patriarch Roger Collins is outraged by the newcomers. Come to think of it, Parker’s hippies are not unlike the gypsies who settled on Collins property in the original series’ 1897 story arc; that generation’s patriarch, Edward Collins, disdained them, too.

    The time travel element permits Parker to pursue a narrative strategy similar to that of Angelique’s Descent: this time she retells the real history of the Salem witch trials, but from the perspective of a Miranda, a practitioner of witchcraft. At this year’s convention, Parker observed that in most stories about the trials, the alleged witches are innocent, but, she asked, what if there had been a real witch present?

    In the original Dark Shadows series, all practitioners of witchcraft were in league with the devil. Parker takes a more contemporary and positive attitude towards witchcraft in her book. Judah Zachary remains a satanic presence, but Miranda’s magical abilities are not depicted as gifts of the devil, but as innate talents that can be used either for good or evil (as with witches Willow and Tara on Buffy). Parker is aware of contemporary Wiccans, as evidenced by a video shown at the convention in which she visits the real Salem. Her depiction of Miranda may also remind readers of mutants in Marvel’s X-Men: a young girl who discovers her unusual abilities, but must hide them for fear of persecution.

    This approach is actually more in keeping with the spirit of the original Dark Shadows than one might at first think. Barnabas began in the show as a villain, but eventually evolved into the series’ hero, who utilized his vampiric abilities to protect the family against various threats. But if he was publicly exposed as a vampire, he knew he would become an outcast, and be hunted down and destroyed. Although the series established Angelique to be a servant of the Devil, as it went on, she repeatedly allied herself with the heroes against other evildoers (and therefore, presumably, against her supposed Master’s wishes). Witchhunters, like the members of the Trask family, were greater menaces on Dark Shadows than some of the supernatural beings they hounded. Dark Shadows and X-Men were products of the same decade, and I have long wondered about the seeming coincidence that the most notorious mutant hunters in X-Men also bear the last name of Trask.

    What is most astonishing is The Salem Branch‘s depiction of vampirism. The original series depicted vampirism as a curse, which Barnabas longed to escape. But in Parker’s new novel, the cured Barnabas finds himself missing various aspects of being a vampire. As a vampire his senses were sharper, he had greater strength and physical grace, and he even could think more clearly. Now he can see his own reflection, but is distraught to find signs of aging. This surely reflects the author’s–and her readers’–own concerns about growing older. But I suspect it also indicates the influence of contemporary pop culture treatments of vampirism, such as Anne Rice’s novels and Joss Whedon’s Angel, which present vampires not as repulsive walking corpses but as superhuman immortals whose powers are enviable.

    Again, Parker is actually being faithful to a subtext of the original series. Though Barnabas wanted to be human, during those periods of the show in which he was (temporarily) cured, he was far less effective against supernatural adversaries. The super-powers (for that is what they were) he possessed as a vampire came in handy. And clearly the audience preferred watching Barnabas as a vampire: when ratings declined, his curse would invariably return.

    In each novel so far, Parker seems to find particular pleasure in writing dialogue for one of the original Dark Shadows characters. In Descent it was Roger, an irascible, old money New England WASP, who, as performed by the late Louis Edmonds, was reminiscent of movie characters played by George Sanders and Clifton Webb. The makers of the 1991 revival and the unsuccessful recent DS pilot for the WB Network clearly didn’t fathom this character type, but Parker gets it. In Salem Branch the standout is Carolyn, the Collins heiress, whom Nancy Barrett played as a young woman of wry intelligence and spirit who was frustrated by the ingenue role to which life (and the writers) had condemned her. Parker captures this, as well as justly depicting Carolyn as too spoiled to go out and get a real job, or go to college, or just leave town; after forty years of feminism, Carolyn’s insistence on living idly at home with mom no longer seems acceptable.

    I am not sure what I feel about the ending of Salem Branch; perhaps I’ll have to reread it to clarify my opinion. I will say that Parker has an insightful take on the relationship between Barnabas and his closest ally, Dr. Julia Hoffman, the physician who succeeded in curing his vampirism. A career woman before the rise of feminism, Julia was written on the show as a middle-aged spinster, pathetically in love with Barnabas, who rarely seemed to notice. Following the lead of DS writer Sam Hall, Parker has Barnabas engaged to Julia, but Parker makes clear that Barnabas is acting from a sense of duty and gratitude to her, not out of any real passion. In the conclusion to Salem Branch, Parker shows just how far Julia’s self-sacrificing love for Barnabas would take her, and I hope she gets to write a third Shadows novel so we can see where Barnabas and Julia go from here.

    The high point of the 2003 Dark Shadows Festival was the live performance of Return to Collinwood, a play written in the style of a radio drama by Jamison Selby, the son of David Selby, who played Quentin Collins in the original series. Enacted onstage by members of the original DS cast, Return to Collinwood showed what had happened to the show’s familiar characters in the early 21st century. Return was subsequently released on CD. Jamison Selby wrote a sequel, in which the ghost of Reverend Trask returns, for the 2004 convention.

    Now the British company Big Finish Productions has obtained the rights to produce new Dark Shadows audio dramas into the year 2009. The first two CDs, The House of Despair and The Book of Temptation, were unveiled at this year’s “40th Anniversary Celebration Weekend.” Both feature four members of the original cast–David Selby as Quentin, Lara Parker as Angelique, Kathryn Leigh Scott as Maggie Evans, and John Karlen as Willie Loomis–as well as familiar examples of composer Robert Cobert’s music for the original series.

    Listening to the first CD, at first I found the story meandering and worried that it diverged too far from the feel of the show. But as Quentin, returned from years of wandering, ventured into a mysteriously abandoned Collinwood, I was hooked. Dark Shadows has been shown on British television, and, listening to the CDs, I gained confidence that the people at Big Finish had a good grasp of the spirit of the original series.

    I was even pleased by a detail that many might overlook: ominous birds roosting at the deserted Collinwood. Dark Shadows aficionados know that the show was a postmodern pastiche of reworkings of elements from past horror classics. Could the birds in House of Despair be a nod to director Alfred Hitchcock’s and novelist Daphne DuMaurier’s The Birds (1963)? The TV show did a homage to Hitchcock and DuMaurier’s Rebecca (1940) but never got around to this.

    One element of the CDs definitely doesn’t work. On Big Finish’s “Dark Shadows Reborn” website (http://www.darkshadowsreborn.com/news001.htm) producer Stuart Manning says, “To preserve the soap opera tradition of the original series, each disc is split into three episodes, with a cliffhanger at the end of each episode.” But since each CD runs continuously for about an hour, there’s no point to this arbitrary division, and the recurring, seemingly purposeless use of Cobert’s opening theme music becomes increasingly annoying. (Cobert’s celebrated “Quentin’s Theme” and his jaunty background music for Collinsport’s tavern, the Blue Whale, make welcome appearances on the CDs, and I hope Big Finish uses still more of his Shadows score on future CDs. Just don’t wear out the opening theme’s welcome!)

    What does work very well indeed are the performances by the four original Dark Shadows cast members, returning to familiar roles from their youth, but now bringing considerably more experience as actors to those parts. Scott’s portrayal of Maggie is especially interesting. Some of Scott’s best moments on the original show came when she displayed a strong will from behind the facade of the stereotypical ingenue victims she was assigned to play. The Big Finish writers depict Maggie as resentful and embittered by her harrowing past experiences with the Collins family, and Scott brings this off without losing the sense of the endearing heroine that won her fans in the first place. Interestingly, this jaded Maggie is reminiscent of the character’s first appearance on the show, when she was written as an irreverent waitress, like an Eve Arden role, warning the show’s original heroine Victoria Winters to steer clear of the Collinses.

    Return to Collinwood and the Big Finish DS dramas faced the same dilemma. Many significant members of the original cast have passed away, and others are unavailable for other reasons. Most significantly, Jonathan Frid, who played Barnabas, went into semi-retirement in his native Canada in the early 1990s, and has not even attended one of the DS Festivals since then.

    In the first of their DS CDs, The House of Despair, Big Finish comes up with a clever way of writing out most of the familiar characters while leaving the door open to their eventual return. Further, Big Finish bites the bullet and casts a new actor as Barnabas. Big Finish even comes up with a rationale within the story for Barnabas having a different voice. I won’t give away their explanation here, but it’s not surprising considering Big Finish’s experience with the Doctor Who mythos. The new actor is acceptable in the part, but he has a long way to go to match the Big Four from the original show. I don’t think I’m reacting simply out of nostalgia here. Karlen, Parker, Scott and Selby exude such authority and charismatic presence in these roles that it would be hard for most newcomers to measure up. The Book of Temptation isn’t as good as House of Despair, but admirably further explores the “new” Barnabas’s character.

    With so many other characters having been written out, it is Barnabas, Quentin and Angelique, the three immortals, who take up residence in Collinwood in the Big Finish CDs. In the original show I had the impression that there were two communities: the “normal” people, who lived at the Collinwood mansion, and Barnabas and his allies, who were based at the Old House on the Collins estate, and who either secretly possessed supernatural abilities or guarded Barnabas’s secrets. Originally, Dark Shadows was about the “normals,” but it was the outsiders, like Barnabas and Quentin, who became the dominant characters. (This is indeed a 1960s show.) So it is appropriate that now this trio–a vampire, a werewolf and a witch–have finally taken possession of the main house.

    But now don’t we have three different series of sequels to the original Dark Shadows: Lara Parker’s novels, Jamison Selby’s plays, and the Big Finish audio dramas?

    On the aforementioned website Stuart Manning asserts that the Big Finish stories “take place between the end of the original series, and before Return to Collinwood. . . . We’ve deliberately avoided stating a specific timeframe, so that fans can decide a place for the new stories to take place. We could say they take place in 1975, 1982 or whenever, but I think that makes things less engaging. For us, these stories are happening now, in their own present, and they can be enjoyed more thoroughly if approached in that way.” That’s a fair approach. Parker’s novels are explicitly set in 1971, so the Big Finish CDs could take place afterwards.

    It would be advisable if everybody working on Shadows sequels adheres to a consistent continuity. With some effort the Parker novels, Selby plays and Big Finish CDs can be made to fit together, although it looks as if Angelique’s reincarnation will have to die and be resurrected twice to fit the continuity of Return and House of Despair. (Well, for Angelique this is no big deal: she could compete with X-Men‘s Jean Grey for most deaths and resurrections.) Parker burned down the Old House in Descent but rebuilds and restores it in Salem Branch, which is a good thing, since Willie Loomis lives there in Return to Collinwood!

    It’s strange that these sequels to the original Dark Shadows series are more successful creatively than Dan Curtis Productions’ own attempts to reboot it from the beginning. The 1991 revival lasted only two months and does not seem to have inspired enduring affection in DS fandom. Curtis tried again in 2004 with a pilot he and John Wells (of ER and The West Wing) produced for the WB Network. Dark Shadows was a forebear of Buffy and Angel; wouldn’t it have been appropriate if a revival become their successor on the WB? But the pilot, directed by P. J. Hogan, who also helmed the 2003 Peter Pan movie, bombed, and the WB lost interest in Dark Shadows.

    The pilot was shown publicly for the first time at last year’s Dark Shadows convention in Los Angeles, and was shown again at this summer’s New York “Celebration Weekend.” I found the pilot an interesting variation on the events that have already been depicted onscreen three times (in the original series, House of Dark Shadows, and the 1991 revival), but as a friend observed, you can see why it wasn’t picked up.

    The pilot opens with DS‘s traditional opening scene: Victoria Winters riding a train to Collinsport to begin her new job as the Collins family governess. But already the pilot gets things wrong. The new Vicki has short blonde hair, which makes her look too modern: her predecessors in the role had long, dark hair, which helped make them look the part of the heroine of a Gothic romance. As creator Dan Curtis stated, that’s what Dark Shadows is, so it’s also wrong when the new Vicki abruptly sees a grotesque living corpse appear on the train. The apparition turns out to be part of a dream, but Dark Shadows rarely dealt in such horrific sorts of shock effects. The train ride should instead set a quietly eerie mood as this isolated young woman travels into the unknown. But then, there is a nice touch: when she gets off the train in Collinsport, Vicki notices that her cell phone no longer works. That is right in keeping with the way the series avoided such tokens of contemporary times.

    That opening sets the pattern for the rest of the pilot: there are interesting new ideas here and there, but also dreadful errors in tone, and overall the pilot fails to awaken the dramatic power that Shadows aficionados know, from previous versions, these familiar events hold. The early episodes of the 1991 revival were virtually scene-by-scene remakes of House of Dark Shadows; the new pilot does not fall into this trap, but does not find a different way to bring the same basic storyline to effectively dramatic life.

    Since this pilot was intended for the WB, various principal cast members are (or at least look) younger than their counterparts in the original series. Blair Brown, as the family matriarch Elizabeth, looks and acts younger than Joan Bennett and Jean Simmons, both veterans of Hollywood’s Golden Age, did in the role in previous versions. But then Elizabeth, another old school WASP aristocrat, shouldn’t come off as vivacious and outgoing. As noted earlier, the pilot gets Roger wrong, though it gets Carolyn and Roger’s troubled son David right. Rather than the scruffy ne’er-do-well that John Karlen played on the original series, the pilot’s Willie Loomis seems more like a young, bespectacled slacker; that’s surprising at first, but it’s an interesting variation. What’s really strange is that Dr. Julia Hoffman is played by Kelly Hu, who portrayed Lady Deathstrike in the second X-Men movie. (As Dark Shadows aficionado Richard Howell pointed out, this makes her Doctor Hu.) Even apart from the fact that the name “Hoffman” doesn’t suggest an Asian-American background, casting the young and gorgeous Ms. Hu misses the point that Dr. Hoffman is supposed to be middle-aged, lonely, and rather drab. (Then again, one of the big surprises for me at this year’s convention came from the biographer of the late Grayson Hall, the original Julia, who said that Mike Nichols had originally intended to cast Hall as Mrs. Robinson in The Graduate!)

    The 1960s and 1990s versions of Willie Loomis would repel most women, but since the 2004 pilot was for the WB, its more presentable Willie has a girlfriend, and together they make the fateful expedition to the Collins crypt, hunting the family’s legendary treasure, where the chained coffin imprisoning Barnabas is concealed in a secret room. Here too there are some interesting new touches. Instead of lying conscious within his coffin for nearly two centuries, this Barnabas is a decayed corpse, truly dead, who is inadvertedly resurrected by a drop of blood. In this version of the scene of Barnabas’s release, we finally see the treasure: a torrent of gold coins fall onto the floor. But the pilot muffs the pain point again. This Barnabas holds Willie down while killing his girlfriend. There’s too much going on at once: the scene misses the iconic simplicity of the original version, with Barnabas’s hand thrusting from the coffin and seizing Willie around the neck.

    By following too closely the template of House of Dark Shadows, in which Barnabas is clearly a villain, the 1991 revival failed to make clear early enough that Barnabas is a reluctant vampire, tormented with guilt over his curse. To its credit, the pilot establishes this early on in a scene in which Barnabas cannot bring himself to bite the sleeping Vicki. (As in the 1991 revival, Vicki is the apparent reincarnation of Josette; this is a distinct improvement on the original series.)

    Dan Curtis originally intended Barnabas to be a villain who would be killed off within several weeks, and so he cast Jonathan Frid, a middle-aged actor with a background playing Shakespearean roles like Richard III. For the revivals, Curtis and company knew that Barnabas was the star role and cast more conventional leading men. In the 2004 pilot Barnabas becomes a young hunk, played by Alec Newman, who starred in the Sci-Fi Channel’s recent remake of Dune. Newman didn’t make much of an impression on me, except in a lengthy scene, set in Josette’s room in the Old House, in which he recounts the story of Barnabas’s doomed relationship with Josette to Vicki. During the “Celebration Weekend” we were also shown screen tests for the 1991 series, including Ben Cross’s performance of this same scene. I hadn’t liked Cross’s portrayal back in 1991, but I was impressed with him here; perhaps I should take another look at the 1991 revival.

    This points to the biggest problem with the attempted DS television revivals. The original Dark Shadows was a highly theatrical show, drawing its cast from the New York stage. It created drama and characterization through extended scenes that could have been enacted onstage. The scripts for pilot, and to a lesser extent the 1991 series, were constructed more cinematically, with scenes consisting of only brief dialogue exchanges. In contrast, the scene in Josette’s room stands out for giving its characters enough time to express their personalities, to establish a bond, to create the correct romantic mood, and to draw the audience in.

    What made Frid’s Barnabas work was his Shakespearean background, which enabled him to make his character larger than life, iconic, nuanced, and even tragic rather than merely melodramatic. Newman’s Barnabas is none of this, but perhaps he could have been had the pilot given him more room to breathe before rushing onward to the next plot point.

    Before the pilot was shown, convention head Jim Pierson, who has long worked for Dan Curtis Productions, warned the audience that “the last scene is not in the character of the Dark Shadows that Dan Curtis created.” It certainly wasn’t. Driving a car along a dark road, Vicki collides with Angelique, who is not killed, but maniacally roars at Vicki, who screams in response. Like I said, cheap shock effects. That last scene convinced me that we’re better off without this revival, although I wonder, now that Curtis is gone, whether any future attempt to resurrect Dark Shadows on television will have any real fidelity to the original.

    I could write a lot about this year’s “Celebration Weekend,” but I have time only to mention a few things . For example, in the 1980s I was present at the Festival’s annual auction when a portrait of Angelique that was used on the original series went up for sale. In a suspenseful round of bidding, a friend of mine purchased it for nearly three thousand dollars. (I got to help him carry his prize home!) At this year’s auction the portrait of Barnabas from House of Dark Shadows sold for $13,000!

    Autobiography took very different dramatic forms. Cast member Christopher Pennock performed a bravura reading of his latest comic book, turning his past and present into phantasmagorical black comedy. (I wonder why other comics authors don’t do dramatic readings of their work.)

    Nancy Barrett further reworked her cabaret act, using both familiar and obscure songs to tell her life story, including her initial fears of pursuing her career, allusions to unhappy failed relationships with men, and finally achieving self-realization in later life. All this and tap dancing too. (“I don’t have to be a really good tap dancer,” she told us modestly, “just really loud.”

    Broadway legend Donna McKechnie, a member of the original cast of A Chorus Line, made her first Dark Shadows convention appearance since 1981 (!), in order to promote her new autobiography Time Steps: My Musical Comedy Life. She read us the section about how she was written out of Shadows when she had to leave to start rehearsals for the original production of Company. In a reworking of the myth of Orpheus and Eurydice, her character and Quentin were attempting to escape from the underworld when she was buried beneath a sudden avalanche. McKechnie said she had not been warned that the stagehands were going to use “ten times” more “peat moss and Styrofoam rocks” than they had in rehearsal. She said she was “knocked down” and had peat moss “in my mouth, in my ears,” and then the lights went out: the whole crew had moved on to shoot the next scene, leaving her under all the peat moss and Styrofoam. “It seems funny now,” she told us, “but at the time it seemed an ungracious way to say goodbye.” And then we got to watch her infectious delight as she saw her death-by-avalanche replayed on the convention’s big screen.

    McKechnie and Pennock weren’t the only authors there; almost every one of the original cast members who were present at the “Celebration Weekend” had recently written a book. (Nancy Barrett hadn’t, but she was selling a CD of her cabaret show instead.) I found this inspiring: these people were acting forty years ago and still find creative outlets, whether as performers or as writers; I hope as the decades pass I will continue to write books myself.

    On the “Cast Reunion” panel actress Betsy Durkin told us, “I don’t think you’re ever too old to expand yourself and grow,” and was seconded by McKechnie. Lara Parker declared, “We have not stopped reinventing ourselves.” Kathryn Leigh Scott marveled, “And almost everyone up here has a book. That is extraordinary. I’m so proud of everyone.”

    Then John Karlen, beloved by the fans for his irreverence, took the opposite view. “Fifty-one weeks a year I do nothing. And I wait, and I wait for this moment now.” (At this point, David Selby was bent over, breaking up with laughter.) Karlen continued, “At this stage of the game I’m smart enough to throw in the towel. I threw in the towel ten years old and I walk the beaches of California with an orange.” And that’s a reasonable option, too.

    But the high point of this “40th Anniversary Celebration Weekend” came at the beginning of the annual “Cast Reunion” panel, when Jim Pierson surprised the audience and cast by taking a phone call. The voice of the man on the other end of the line came over the sound system: “This is Jon Frid speaking. Jonathan Frid,” he continued, as if none of us would realize who it is, finally adding, “Or Barney.” The audience, of course, exploded with joy: Frid, now in his early 80s, had not appeared at the Festivals in over a decade.

    Frid mentioned his new hobby, using a digital video camera. “I know nothing about technology,” he told us, but said this might lead to a “whole new career for me, who knows?” To the audience’s affectionate amusement, Frid confessed that he hadn’t been sure that this phone call would go through because I “haven’t paid my bill. Bell Canada has been trying to reach me for weeks,” apparently through a recorded phone messages, but he “thought it was a commercial.”

    Frid noted that so many of the original cast members have passed away, whereupon Pierson told him the names of all his former castmates who were there listening to him. Frid then assured us, “I feel I’m going to be living forever,” and the audience clapped and cheered. There were even shouts of “I love you.”

    Later during the panel, Kathryn Leigh Scott told the audience “When I heard Jonathan’s voice, I had tears in my eyes.”

    And that evening, before the showing of the 2004 pilot, we got to see an example of Frid’s work with his video camera: a short video in which he not only sent his greetings to us on the show’s fortieth anniversary but performed Shakespeare’s famous scene in which Richard III seduces Lady Anne beside the coffin of her husband, whom he had murdered. Frid played both parts, and, to my surprise, he poured his passion not into Richard , whom he has acknowledged as an influence on playing Barnabas, but into the anguished Lady Anne. There was the emotional fire that Jonathan Frid can still conjure at his best, a display of the acting prowess that young Boomers like myself famously rushed home from school each weekday to watch on Dark Shadows.

    Kathryn Leigh Scott observed twice during this year’s “Celebration” that the same month that she had attended Dan Curtis’s funeral and memorial , “suddenly we’re in a studio all working together again” on the Big Finish audio dramas. “There is an ending and there is a beginning,” she told us, and “it is all quite amazing.”

    ADDENDUM
    I would be remiss if I did not direct readers’ attention to a comic book series that should interest Dark Shadows fans. Claypool Comics’ Deadbeats, written and drawn by Richard Howell, is another ongoing serial about a small New England town beset by vampires. Howell acknowledges Dark Shadows as one of his major inspirations in doing the series, though Deadbeats has a distinct creative identity of its own. Deadbeats is still available in comics shops, but it will be moving to weekly publication on the Internet in early 2007. Aficionados of vampire fiction should follow it there.

    Copyright 2006 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #148: Radio City Rowling

    comicsincontext4.jpg

    Merely eight days after my return from this year’s San Diego Comic Con, I attended an event that outdid any of the presentations in the convention’s Hall H, an occasion that the Con is unlikely ever to duplicate, and it was right here in my home base of New York City.

    On August 2, 2006, I attended An Evening with Harry, Carrie and Garp at Radio City Music Hall. This was the second of two nights of readings, performed on behalf of charities, by three best-selling novelists. And just who in the literary world could pack a venue the size of Radio City Music Hall? There was John Irving, author of The World According to Garp, The Cider House Rules, and nine other novels. There was the organizer, Stephen King, the modern master of horror. I do not know how often Irving makes public appearances, but King has become a familiar face in New York, appearing at the New Yorker Festival and this season at Manhattan’s Symphony Space. But the third author lives in Britain, rarely makes public appearances and had not visited the United States in six years: J. K. Rowling, writer of the Harry Potter series. I never expected to see her in person, but I did at Radio City Music Hall that night.

    The usually ubiquitous Beat was aghast that I succeeded in attending when she did not. I was surprised myself at how easy it was to get in: I merely stopped by a Ticketmaster outlet two nights before. But on the night I attended, the Music Hall did indeed look sold out, as far as I could tell.

    King came up with the idea for the two “Evenings” were and invited Irving and Rowling to join him. King selected one of the charities that would benefit, the Haven Foundation, which aids writers and performing artists who are prevented from working by serious illness or injury. Rowling chose the other charity, Doctors Without Borders, a humanitarian organization that provides medical aid worldwide. At a press conference King said he hoped the two nights would raise a quarter of a million dollars for each charity.

    I wondered how Rowling reacted to flying across the ocean to arrive in New York City in the midst of one of this summer’s unusually intense heat waves, with heat indexes of one hundred degrees or more during her stay. When I arrived at Radio City Music Hall in the early evening of August 2, the weather was reasonably endurable, and the building’s air conditioning quickly put me at ease.

    The show began with a welcoming speech by actress Whoopi Goldberg, who got off to a bad start by making the common error of mispronouncing Rowling’s name. (It doesn’t rhyme with “howling,” though that might seem appropriate, but with “bowling.” Since this was the second night she had given the speech, you’d think someone might have corrected her beforehand.) Nonetheless, it was an entertaining speech, in which Goldberg declared that “These three writers are forces of nature equal to or greater than any of the supernatural events you can find in their books.” Goldberg commented that “somebody should have put them all together a long time ago. Because. . .if that little wimpy boy [Harry?] had asked that poor girl [definitely King’s Carrie] to the prom, it would have stopped a whole lot of crying.”

    Goldberg noted the large contingents of fans for Irving, King, and Rowling who were present in the audience. “There are plenty of J. K. Rowling fans here tonight,” Goldberg said, “and I think I know why they’re screaming,” as indeed they were., “It’s because all of the Stephen King fans are whispering to them all of the ways that Harry could possibly die.” As for those King fans, Goldberg maintained that “we hardly ever get together because so many of us are angry loners.” (Neither angry nor alone, the audience appreciatively laughed.)

    Goldberg introduced the next celebrity, who was in turn to introduce King. It was Tim Robbins, who played the lead in The Shawshank Redemption (1994), the film adaptation of King’s prison story, Appropriately, Robbins wore a striped shirt and pants that evoked prison garb. Among the celebrities making introductory speeches that night, Robbins was far and away the best, thanks to his running gag. Observing that the movie’s “title has been a source of confusion for its many fans,” Robbins proceeded to mispronounce it every time the name turned up in his speech, and each time more elaborately (e. g. “Shankshaw Redaction,” “Shinkshank Reduction“). You might think this would become tiresome, but the gag instead kept building in impact on the audience, and prevented Robbins’ speech from becoming mired in the expected tributes to King’s authorial prowess.

    After each author was introduced, there was a brief overview of his or her life and work shown on the videoscreens hanging over the stage, including clips from films adapted from the author’s books. I noted that in King’s case there was no excerpt from perhaps the best known film adaptation of his work, Stanley Kubrick’s The Shining (1980), which King is on record as detesting.

    Then each author would come out and read from a miniature set that was apparently designed to evoke his or her work. King got to sit on a replica of a backwoods back porch, although he soon became restless and moved about the stage.

    The three authors exemplified the dress code that I witnessed at the Eisner awards at the San Diego Con: the women dress up, and the men dress down.
    King represented one end of the evening’s fashion spectrum, wearing a blue sweatshirt, looking as casual as could be without slipping over into sloppiness.

    King began by thanking the audience for their hearty applause. “I think all the muggles are home tonight watching TV. The real people are here.” Damn straight. Then he looked warily at the chair. “You don’t think this thing’s electrified, do you?”

    King told us, “Well, so that was a really nice introduction, and people said very nice things, and now I think I’ll read a really gross story. Because it’s what I do. Hope you enjoyed your supper because you may not for long.”

    King chose to read “The Revenge of Lardass Hogan” from his novella The Body, which was adapted into the movie Stand by Me (1986). “Revenge” is about a small town pie-eating contest for which which the title character prepares by drinking a bottle of castor oil. During the contest, once Hogan has devoured enough pie, he starts to throw up, inducing an epidemic of vomiting from everyone (and on everyone) present, ending in Hogan’s triumph: tying with his chief competitor.

    King gave a bravura performance, at one point interrupting the story to exult, “I actually get paid for writing this stuff!” Listening to the tale, I realized that this was a comedic variation on the notorious prom scene from King’s Carrie: the protagonist uses his or her special talents to wreak grotesque havoc on a gathering of the community that have treated him or her as an underdog.

    King was followed by actor Stanley Tucci, who gave a serious and perhaps too formal speech introducing John Irving. I had expected that the KIng and Rowling fans would overwhelmingly outnumber any Irving readers who had shown up, so I was surprised by the widespread, enthusiastic applause that greeted his entrance. Irving represented the middle of the evening’s fashion spectrum, in an open-necked shirt and white pants, seated in a comfy chair in a set with a lamp, old, bound volumes, and ornate fireplace, that suggested a prosperous man’s study.

    Irving read a sequence from his novel A Prayer for Owen Meany, dealing with an annual Christmas pageant, for which the title character, an undersized schoolboy with a high-pitched voice, is usually sentenced to play an angel, ignominiously suspended above the stage; Owen, however, is determined to play the starring role, that of the infant Jesus, even though that role is assigned to actual babies.

    This was definitely the best of the three readings. Like King’s story, Irving’s passage kept building in comedic impact as it proceeded. Moreover, Irving, who has been a wrestler as well as an author, assumed a falsetto voice for Owen’s dialogue, which added to the hilarity, being utterly incongruous with Irving’s physique. Irving even broke himself up a few times during the reader, much to the audience’s delight. Oh, and by the way, Irving’s reading also contained a reference to vomiting, the evening’s unexpected recurring motif.

    The next introductory speech was made by Kathy Bates, who received a rousing welcome from the audience: the King fans know her as the star of the 1990 film adaptation of his book Misery. She had introduced King the night before; tonight she was there to introduce Rowling, who had been introduced on Tuesday by The Daily Show‘s Jon Stewart.

    “Tonight,” Bates began, “our next author makes her much-anticipated return to the United States, the first visit in six years. And that’s why at this moment I feel like Ed Sullivan when he was about to introduce the Beatles. Some of you kids be sure to ask your parents what I’m talking about in the way home. The Beatles were in a band called Wings.” Well, actually, anyone who grew up after the 1970s isn’t going to get that joke, either. Time passes more quickly than we may like to think. Describing the passion for Rowling’s work as “Pottermania,” Baker went on to praise her books for fostering a new generation’s enthusiasm for reading “just when it seemed that technology had infiltrated every last aspect of our lives. . . .” Baker summed up, “With words on a page, J. K. Rowling lured kids away from the screens and into the quiet of their rooms and took them to places where Google does not go.”

    Then there was a video overview of Rowling’s career, some of which was drawn from the BBC special Harry Potter and Me, which was repackaged in the United States as an episode of A & E’s Biography. The audience stirred when the onscreen Rowling showed the BBC interviewer the folder which contained the final chapter of the final Harry Potter book. When the face of Alan Rickman as Professor Snape flashed onto the screen, the audience applauded. Since I’ve always thought of Snape as the archetypal nasty teacher, this reaction surprised me. I had no idea he had so many supporters, and Rowling seemed taken aback by the audience’s response to him, too.

    Then Rowling came onstage, displaying a fashion sense that decidedly showed up the men’s. With her long blonde hair, wearing a little black dress, and responding to the enormous applause with a brilliant smile, she cut a very striking figure onstage. Her set consisted of a large chair, resembling a throne, standing between a small table, atop which was a Japanese-style fan, and a tall lampstand, holding a candelabra-like arrangement of lights at the top. The scene evoked a British castle, perhaps Hogwarts itself.

    Someone shouted out, “Don’t kill Harry!” “No pressure there,” said Rowling, sounding pressured indeed. “I feel slightly like I’m Herman’s Hermits having to go on after the Stones and the Beatles.” (My gosh, not only won’t kids in the audience get that reference, but Rowling herself is too young to remember Herman’s Hermits in their mid-1960s heyday!) The audience, the press, and even King and Irving may have considered Rowling to be the star of the show, but she seems to have considered the two veteran writers her superiors.

    She continued, “My consolation is I have the most interesting shoes.” It turns out that she used the same line the night before, so the video cameramen were ready. An enormous close-up of Rowling’s feet appeared on the videoscreens, and she had on these high-heeled silver sandals with serpent-like straps. She was right to be pleased.

    “I notice you like Snape,” Rowling observed in an amused tone. Then she said she would do a reading from the most recent of her books, last year’s Harry Potter and the Half-Blood Prince. (Those of you who have not read this book hereby receive a spoiler warning.) After that, she said, she would take some questions inasmuch as “in my experience my readers like me to answer questions and like me to hasten on to that part. . . .” In this particular sequence from the book, “Harry goes back in time and watches as Albus Dumbledore,” his mentor, “goes to inform another famous pupil of Hogwarts School of Witchcraft and Wizardry that he has a place at the school.” The audience cheered at her reference to Tom Riddle, who would become the Potter books’ archvillain, Lord Voldemort. “And you really shouldn’t be cheering that particular one,” she responded. “Snape I can kind of see. . . .”
    (But only “kind of,” you’ll note.)

    Rowling’s reading went decently enough, and she even successfully essayed a lower class voice for a female character. But King and Irving had selected pieces that were brilliant comedy set pieces, and gave them tour de force performances. Rowling’s selection instead dealt in a quietly ominous mood, and, since she only rarely makes public appearances, she is presumably less practiced at doing such performances of her work.

    Upon concluding her reading, Rowling dryly remarked that “nobody told me the theme of the readings was to be vomit. So I could have done something with the puking pastilles, but. . .I didn’t know.” And then she turned to questions from the audience.

    The first question came from a girl who identified herself as Christina, a thirteen-year-old from Staten Island. She wanted to know, “If you could bring one Harry Potter character to life, other than Harry, who would it be?”

    “Personally,” Rowling began, “although it’s a really tricky one: Hagrid, if I could have anyone.” The audience applauded the choice of Harry’s gigantic friend. “Because I think. . .we’d all like a Hagrid in our life, liability though he often is. . . . It would be really great if I met a fundamentalist Christian,” Rowling said, clearly referring to those parties who claim the Harry Potter books advocate satanism, “to say, “˜Would you like to discuss the matter with Hagrid?’”

    The next questioner was an eighteen-year-old New Yorker who pointed out that in the most recent Potter book, Harry’s “Aunt Petunia is said to be oddly flushed when Dumbledore announces that Harry will be returning only once more to Privet Drive,” where she lives. “Does this mean that Aunt Petunia harbors a hidden love or fondness for Harry and the connection he provides her to the wizarding world?”

    “That’s an excellent question,” replied Rowling, perhaps playing for time while she mulled over her answer. “And like all the best and most penetrating questions, it’s difficult to answer. But I will say this. There is a little more to Aunt Petunia than meets the eye and you will find out what that is in Book Seven.” At this the audience clapped and roared in excitement. They were present when J. K. herself had granted that rarest of valuables: a hint about what happens in the next book! (But what I want to know is, did she name Harry’s Aunt Petunia after Ben Grimm’s Aunt Petunia in Fantastic Four?)

    That small hint, though, had not sated the audience’s appetite to know more.
    Questioner #3 was a boy from New Jersey who gave his age as nine, enthused over the Harry Potter books, and then dropped a bombshell. Bringing up Dumbledore, the boy asked, “Since he is the most powerful wizard of all time and Harry Potter is so loyal to him, how could he really be dead?” The audience applauded and cheered, but Rowling buried her head in her hands and groaned. This very private writer was now having to answer to her readers en masse–including a small child–for the apparent death of a beloved character. “I feel terrible,” she said. “The British writer Graham Greene once said that every writer had to have a chip of ice in their heart,” she began to explain, but then dismay took over. “Oh, no,” she said, “I think you may just have ruined my career.”

    “I really can’t answer that question because the answer is in Book Seven, but you shouldn’t expect Dumbledore to do a Gandalf. Let me just put it that way,” she said. I now wonder if this nine-year-old would have understood this reference to the wizard of Lord of the Rings who literally undergoes the traditional mythic device of death and resurrection. I had myself wondered if Dumbledore would “do a Gandalf,” but now it seems not. “I’m sorry,” she told the boy. But Rowling wasn’t out of the woods on the Dumbledore matter yet.

    The next in line were a boy and his father, and you might expect that the boy was going to ask the question, but you would be wrong: the father did all the talking, and looked strangely familiar. “Hello,” said the father, “We are Salman and Milan Rushdie,” whereupon the audience burst into applause for the famous author. Not so very long ago, Rushdie was marked for death by Muslim fanatics and could not possibly have appeared in a huge public venue like Radio City Music Hall.

    “I’m not sure this is fair, Salman,” said Rowling, seriously. “I think you might be better at guessing plots than most.” Rushdie, indeed, writes children’s fantasy himself, such as Haroun and the Sea of Stories, and did a book on MGM’s The Wizard of Oz (1939) for the British Film Institute.

    Following the precedent set by the previous questioners, the elder Rushdie stated, “We are nine and fifty-nine.” He explained, “And this is really Milan’s question and it’s kind of a follow-up to the previous one.”

    “All right, okay,” conceded Rowling, unable to escape the trap.

    “Until the events of Volume 6,” Rushdie began, “it was always made plain that Snape might have been an unlikable fellow, but he was essentially one of the good guys.” The audience audibly agreed.

    “I can see this is the question you all really want answered,” observed Rowling, vastly outnumbered.

    “Dumbledore himself had always vouched for him,” Rushdie pointed out, like a debater marshaling his evidence.

    “Yes,” agreed Rowling.

    “Now we are suddenly told that Snape is a villain and Dumbledore’s killer,” asserted Rushdie. “We cannot, or don’t want to believe this. Our theory is that Snape is, in fact, still a good guy.” The audience applauded, as if Rushdie were Snape’s attorney, mounting his defense. “From which it follows that Dumbledore can’t really be dead,” Rushdie argued, “and that the death is a ruse cooked up between Dumbledore and Snape to put Voldemort off his guard, so that when Harry and Voldemort come face to face, Harry may have more allies than he or Voldemort suspects.” (This thought had occurred to me, too, when I read the book.) “So,” Rushdie summed up, delivering his coup de grace, “is Snape good or bad? In our opinion everything follows from it,” presumably meaning that if Snape is good, then Dumbledore lives.

    Rushdie had said all this in a perfectly reasonable tone, without raising his voice, but the audience was nonetheless aroused, reacting with laughter and applause. One account of the evening claims that Rowling “chuckled” but from my vantage point I detected no sign of this. She was on the spot.

    Instead, she replied quite cautiously, “Well, Salman, your opinion, I would say, is. . .right.” His opinion about what? That Snape is a good guy? If so, I’m surprised that Harry Potter fans haven’t made a greater fuss about this revelation. Or was his opinion that “everything follows” from the answer to whether or not Snape is a good guy?

    Rowling then asserted, “But I see that I need to be a little more explicit and say that Dumbledore is definitely dead.” Both apologetically and defensively, she noted that “I do know that there is an entire website out there [named] DumbledoreIsNot Dead.com, so I’d imagine they’re not pretty happy right now.” Concerned, Rowling continued, “But I think. . .all of you need to move through the five stages of grief, and I’m just helping you get past denial.” Perhaps due to nervousness, she added, “I can’t remember what’s next” in the five stages. “It may be anger so I think we should stop it here. Thank you,” she bid the Rushdies, and the audience applauded.

    Perhaps it was a relief for her that the time had come in the program for her to bring King and Irving back onstage to join her in taking further questions. Then King introduced Soledad O’Brien of CNN’s American Morning, who acted as moderator. She explained that over 1,000 questions had been submitted (via e-mail from ticket holders), from which twelve had been chosen. “The lucky dozen” questioners had been seated close to the stage and hence to the microphones; four of them had been the questioners during Rowling’s solo segment.

    This was clever. The organizers knew that there would be more questions for Rowling than for King and Irving, so she got to take four before the men joined her onstage. Moreover, it’s clear that someone had carefully selected the questions. Salman Rushdie didn’t get picked by sheer chance. There were neither stupid questions nor the sort of embarrassing social misfits one sees in San Diego question lines. The San Diego Con and other conventions could learn from this event’s example.

    The first questioner, a man from Alabama, asked. “Mr. King, do the contents of your head ever just scare the crap out of you?”

    “No,” replied King: “I pass the savings on to you.” After the audience’s laughter subsided, King went on, “I’ve said this before: there are people out there that pay a psychiatrist, you know, ninety dollars an hour, they only get a fifty minute hour, and those guys take all of August off and they go somewhere it’s cool.” (There was an obvious reference to our heat wave.) King continued, “I vent the same terrible feelings of fear and inadequacy and phobic reactions, and people pay me. It’s a great way to live, man,” King concluded to applause.

    Next came a woman from Connecticut who asked John Irving if he would describe any other sources for “events or characters” in A Prayer for Owen Meany.

    Irving replied that “I’m a very slow processor with those things that have affected me personally or emotionally. . . .If Owen Meany is, it’s fair to say. . .my Vietnam novel, it was written twenty years after the war. . . . And I wrote my most autobiographical novel about my childhood and my adolescence most recently, when I was already in my late 50s and early 60s. I work better by waiting,” he concluded. in other words, he gains perspective with the passage of time.

    As for the origin of Owen Meany, Irving said that when he was “back in my home town” one Christmas he got together with “two or three friends that, in some cases, I hadn’t seen since they were eight or nine or ten years old,” and they started discussing their friends who had either died in Vietnam or who had “thoroughly altered the course of their lives” through the steps they took “not to go.”

    One of his friends mentioned a name that Irving did not recognize. “They said to me, “˜Well, in Sunday school you used to pick him up by his ankles and shake him until all of the money fell out of his pants.’ And then I remembered this very little boy who was smaller than all of us. And we loved him but we liked to infuriate him because he had a voice like this,” Irving said, shifting back into Owen’s falsetto, “and we’d love to hear him get mad., He was so small that whenever you were around him you just had to pick him up, which he hated.”

    Then, Irving related, “I said one of the stupidest things I’d ever said in my life. I said to my friends, “˜Oh, he couldn’t have gone to Vietnam. He’s too small,’ having last seen him at the age of eight. And one of my closest friends said, “˜You moron, he probably grew!’” After the audience stopped laughing, Irving went on, “I went home and thought, what if he didn’t grow?. . .And that became Owen Meany.”

    As a victim of bullying myself as a child, I wondered about Irving’s claim that he “loved” this boy that, by his own admission, he and his friends would bully and manhandle. With time comes maturity and perspective, and Irving turned this unnamed boy into a sympathetic central figure in his book. But is there still an element of condescension and mockery in the way that Irving imitates Owen’s high-pitched voice? And did we in the audience share that attitude by laughing at that imitation?

    The next question was from a librarian from Pennsylvania who began by telling Rowling, “thank you for attracting so many students and adults as well to reading.” (Now there is something a little disturbing. It’s well known that Rowling’s books have inspired kids to become readers, but one might have hoped that people would have picked up the reading habit by the time they became adults.) The librarian wanted to know what Rowling would be writing after the final Harry Potter book.

    Perhaps previous questions had put Rowling on guard, because she began, “I thought you were going to attack me for Madam Pince, and I would like to apologize to you and any other librarians present here today.” She explained that “if they’d”–her heroes–“had a pleasant, helpful librarian, half my plots would be gone. Because the answer invariably is in a book but Hermione has to go and find it. If they’d had a good librarian, that would gave been that problem solved. So, sorry.” Gosh, this is becoming J. K. Rowling’s penance tour of New York.

    Then Rowling said upon completing the last Potter novel, she may go back to working on a shorter book “for I think slightly younger children that’s half-written.” But that won’t be soon. “I think I’ll need a short mourning period, though. You have to allow me to get past Harry.”

    A woman from Milwaukee said that her mother, who lives in Maine, says that King has been “a tremendous contributor to the community” in Bangor and that the townspeople treat him as “a regular Mainer,” and asked King how he “managed” to do this.

    “I’m just a regular guy, that’s all,” King replied (unlikely as that may seem). King explained that “if [people] only see you on a stage at Radio City Music Hall. . .for one night you get to be a big deal, but I’ll tell you something. . . Saturday I’m going to be home and my wife’s going to be there and she’s going to say, “˜Walk the dog and empty the dishwasher.’ And immediately your feet go back on the floor where you are.”

    King continued, “We’ve lived in Bangor since 1979, which means we have one other set of neighbors on the street who have lived there longer than we have, but they’re senile and they don’t remember us, so that almost doesn’t matter anymore.”

    King observed, “So we’ve been around. People know us. They’ve gotten used to us.” He noted that “they say familiarity breeds contempt, and before it breeds contempt, it breeds neighborliness, and that’s the nice thing about living in a small town.”

    He went on, “We live in a neighborhood. We have an ice cream parlor around one corner and a forest around the other corner. . .It’s like the village that you write about in the Harry Potter books,” King told Rowling, “and it’s like the towns that John writes about in a lot of the New England settings in his books, and it’s great.” So there is a link among these three writers that I had not previously considered: they share an affinity for chronicling small town life.

    A man from New York wanted to know if Irving would like to write a sequel about any of his characters.

    “That’s a good question,” Irving said. “I think I will never write a sequel for a very simple reason. I need to know the ending of my novel before I begin. Not just the ending but the tone of the voice of the ending. What’s happened of major emotional importance. Who the main characters are. Who even the major minor characters are. Where their paths cross. I make a kind of street map of the novel.” He summed up, “I’ve always written the last sentence first and I work my way back.” Hence, “it’s impossible for me to imagine that anything happens after the ending because the ending has meant so much to me that it’s where I begin.”

    This is very different from the world of comics, where serial publication rules, and longrunning characters go from one storyline to the next for years, and even decades. In contrast, Irving’s books would be plot-driven rather than character-driven.

    But then Irving added something even more intriguing. “On the other hand, here’s what’s comparable to a sequel, and it happens to me . . .unconsciously many times. Characters come back as other characters in subsequent novels. And I don’t even recognize their reincarnation while they’re emerging. It’s only when I finish a book that I realize, “˜Oh, this character is just another version of this character from a previous book.’

    He gave examples: “the physical description of Owen Meany, who is first described as looking embryonic, not yet born, was a passage I lifted from the physical description of the orphan Fuzzy Stone. . .in The Cider House Rules. . .” Here’s another: “Why is it Dr. Larch in The Cider House Rules, Jenny Fields in The World According to Garp, and eventually Johnny Wheelwright, the narrator of A Prayer for Owen Meany, all decide that they’ll never have sex? You know, I don’t know a lot of people like that.” He concluded, “So those are the curses of my sequels.”

    As a critic I’m well aware that there are thematic similarities among the works of any writer, and that a writer will tend to endow his protagonists, say, with similar character traits. Irving not only admits the latter, but has found a provocative image for describing the phenomenon. I always admire his acknowledgment of the role of his own subconscious in devising his characters.

    A woman from Toronto (Are you noticing how far some people came to attend this event?) asked King, “what kind of scary stories keep you up at night? Maybe your own? Maybe another author’s?”

    King said that “I think our idea of what scares us changes as we get older. As a young person, one of the scariest things I ever read was Lord of the Flies, because . . .the idea of those kids turning feral just scared the dickens out of me.”

    “Sometimes you get surprised into fright. When I picked up the Harry Potter books, I was not prepared for the depth of some of the frightening passages in there. Frankly, I was surprised by how scary the Death Eaters were.”

    “I scared Stephen King,” Rowling declared, beaming with pride.

    “Don’t be proud of yourself,” King warned her, in (mock?) annoyance, but it was too late: Rowling was obviously delighted.

    A woman from Indiana asked Irving if he ever gets “so involved in a character’s storyline that it affects your personal life?” Irving’s response further illuminated his previous answer about needing to distance himself from his past in order to write about it. In his most recent book, Until I Find You, “it was my childhood, my adolescence, and as much as I had thought I had waited long enough, and that I was old enough to deal with those things, I just remembered a lot of stuff that I would have been happier not to.”

    Next was a girl from Pennsylvania, who asked Rowling, “what is the one question your fans have never asked you and should have?” The audience loved this, since it was an invitation for Rowling to spill the beans on some other secret of the Harry Potter saga, as Rowling well realized.

    “Oh, God!” Rowling lamented. “How can I answer that? I can think of a couple of things that give away the ending of Book Seven. . . .Having got sixteen years down the line, I kind of feel that would throw it away.” Rowling would not take the bait: “I’m sorry.”

    As ever, she tried to explain by way of apology. “You see, people think that it’s all so fixed in my head. It’s not that obsessively plotted out.” (Not like Irving’s books, then?) “For example, this afternoon I believe I changed my mind on the title of Book Seven.” (The audience was audibly aroused.) “Having been quite convinced that I had the title, I suddenly thought, “˜No, that would be better, wouldn’t it?’ in the shower just before coming out here. . . .

    “But you know what,” she said, “I’m not going to tell you either version,” and the audience moaned in disappointment. Finally, Rowling had reached the end of her capacity for contrition, although she seemed more defensive than angry, as if asking for understanding from her six thousand pampered children arrayed before her. “Oh, come on! Now really! Have I not given you enough? I gave you Aunt Petunia. I told you Dumbledore is really–“ whereupon she drew her finger across her neck in a slashing motion. There’s the chip of ice.

    But her goodhearted sense of guilt immediately returned. “So I am trying to give something to you. Anyway, I’m sorry. I suppose it’s that question. Everyone’s really pleased you asked that question. It’s me who’s let everyone down, not you. Sorry.” Perhaps in part to cheer Rowling up, the audience applauded.

    To end the evening O’Brien addressed her own question to all three authors” “If you were to have dinner with any five characters from any of your books. . .who would you invite and why would they be on your list?”

    “Any five characters from any of my books?” asked King. “Honey, I’m eating alone.”

    “You could just invite all the dead ones and then they wouldn’t come,’ offered Irving. (Now, really, there are plenty of good, even heroic characters in King’s books, too!)

    “I would eat with Harry, Hermione, and Ron,” King said. “And Owen. . . .I can think of other people’s characters I’d eat with. And I can think of other people’s characters I’d eat.”

    Rowling went next: “Well, I’d take Harry, to apologize to him.” Contemplating further, she said, “I’d have to take Harry, Ron, and Hermione.” But then it became clear that she had fallen into another trap. “See, I know who’s actually dead.” Ah, so does this mean that Harry, Ron and Hermione all survive the end of Book Seven, as we all hope?

    King urged Rowling to “Pretend you can take them anyway,” whether the characters are alive or dead. “Well, then I would definitely take Dumbledore,” Rowling said. People in the audience called Hagrid’s name, and Rowling acceded to their wishes: “I’d take Hagrid, yeah. And Owen because he wouldn’t take up much space.”

    Irving put Dr. Larch, Owen, Patrick Wallingford from The Fourth Hand, on his guest list. He also listed three of his female characters, “Melanie, Hester, and Emma, who would probably burn the house down, but I’d be interested in meeting them.”

    Then O’Brien thanked the authors and questioners, King thanked the audience on behalf of the two charities, and the festivities were over. As the lights went up, I discovered I was seated right near a side door that opened directly onto the sidewalk outside, so I was able to make a quick exit without being swallowed up by the thousands who were all leaving at once.

    I’m not the only person who took a long time to write about the evening. On Sept. 13 in the diary on her official website (http://www.jkrowling.com/), Rowling started off by apologizing for not writing on it for so long (“Sorry, sorry, sorry, sorry, sorry.”) Despite her onstage trials, she declared that the shows with King and Irving “were so much fun” and “I would have happily done a third night. . .the crowds, both nights, could not have been more wonderful.” Likewise characteristically, she also “belatedly” came up with the question she had never been asked, and posted it elsewhere on her site (http://www.jkrowling.com/textonly/en/extrastuff_view.cfm?id=23). But Rowling doesn’t answer the question, because apparently it would indeed give away an important plot point.

    People have rightly marveled that three authors could draw an audience that filled the vast Radio City Music Hall and that reacted as if they were rock stars. Only afterwards did I reflect that The Music Hall seats 6000 people, but the San Diego Con’s infamous Hall H holds 6500. Ah, but could any Comic-Con guest fill Hall H nearly twice over? That’s what Irving, King, and Rowling accomplished over two nights.

    ADVERTISEMENTS FOR MYSELF
    Only a week after the previous session of my lecture series, “1986: The Year That Changed Comics,” I’m doing another one, on Monday, October 2, at the Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art in New York (www.moccany.org), this time about Art Spiegelman’s Maus.

    -Copyright 2006 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #147: San Diego 2006 – Is This Trip Really Necessary?

     

    comicsincontext4.jpg

     

    The following events took place between Saturday, July 22 at 6:40 PM and the present.

    “You’re still living in San Diego!” exclaimed the Beat in shock (and an admirable metaphor) a few weeks ago. But as Ed McMahon might have said to Carnac the Magnificent, “I hold in my hand”–metaphorically speaking–“the final installment of this year’s San Diego Con reports,” whereupon applause sounds through cyberspace. Some of you may be thinking, “Didn’t he tell us that he’d be spending fewer pages writing about the San Diego Con this year? But in 2003 and 2005 he took only six weeks to do it, and this year it’s eight.” Ah, I reply, sneaking through a well-planned loophole, but you’ll find that most of this year’s installments are shorter than last year’s.

    This week, therefore, marks my final attempt this year to persuade my fellow Quick Stop columnist, Fred Hembeck, who, despite being the Consummate Comics Fan, has never, ever been to the San Diego Con, that he should, nay, must go there someday. Fred already replied to my campaign on his blog (http://www.hembeck.com/FredSez.htm) on August 18: “Sorry, Peter–as long as I can’t carry on polish for my Stan Lee Press On Nails, I ain’t getting aboard!” But, Fred, there are other ways to go than by plane! You could follow the example of Lewis (not Lois) and Clark by undertaking a cross-country road trip. Driving out to Comic-Con, staying its length, and then driving back: why it’d only take roughly three weeks out of your life. Bring a laptop and you can blog en route.

    SATURDAY 6:40 PM
    If you read last week’s report, then you recall that I waited over two hours to get into the San Diego Convention Center’s cavernous Hall H, hoping to see director Sam Raimi give a presentation about the forthcoming Spider-Man 3 movie. (The Comic-Con asserts that being a member of the press does not ensure admission to Hall H. Well, why not?) But instead I got to see this other guy, who looked a lot like that character Silent Bob in those Clerks movies, who bestowed his wisdom about life upon the crowd. For convenience’s sake, let us continue to call him Mr. Smith.

    At the point at which I pick up my report, Smith had already been asked
    “what made you want to direct?” Smith said it was seeing Richard Linklater’s movie Slacker (1991), which has no plot in the conventional sense and consists of a series of dialogues between different characters. “God, if this counts as a film,” Smith said; the connection to Clerks is clear.

    Now another audience member asked Smith, what would he have done if directing hadn’t worked out for him as a career. “Before I wanted to be a filmmaker, I thought I wanted to own a deli,” Smith replied. (This too illuminates the Clerks movies.) “I didn’t really have a backup plan,” he confessed. it’s a good thing that following his dream paid off.

    The next fan wanted to know if Smith would be writing more comic books.
    “Me and comics, not a great mix,” Smith began. “Mostly because I–Where the fuck’d you go?” The fan had already obliviously wandered away from the microphone. “We were having a conversation,” protested Smith. You can become prosperous and famous and still end up with people walking away from you while you’re still talking to them.

    Smith pressed onward: “Because I have a hard time sticking on schedule.” He brought up his Spider-Man/Black Cat limited series, whose final issue was a full three years late. “You’re not supposed to take three years off,” he pointed out. Then he told us the price of missing deadlines: “For three years I was fuckin’ persona non grata at comic book conventions. “˜Where’s Spider-Man/Black Cat, tubby? Jersey Girl fuckin’ bombs and Spider-Man/Black Cat isn’t finished!’”

    Smith concluded, “Dude, I’m gonna get you laid and you won’t care about Spider-Man.” (This obviously hasn’t worked for Mr. Smith.) The fan, continuing to demonstrate his lack of manners, asserted that he’d heard Smith say that before. “I do,” Smith retorted proudly: “That’s one of my bits.”

    Next Smith was asked what he thought of being badmouthed recently on the HBO series Entourage. “I thought that was a compliment,” Smith contended. But wasn’t that negative publicity? “No fuckin’ such thing,” Smith declared. “They said my name on TV.”

    The next audience member in line spoke in praise of Jersey Girl, Smith’s film that centers on the relationship between a widowed father and his young daughter. “People who are not parents don’t get Jersey Girl,” she said. “People who are parents do get it.” Smith thanked her and the others who liked Jersey Girl. Despite its bad reputation, I rather liked Jersey Girl, too, and I’m not a parent. Maybe it’s because I’m middle–uh, I mean, have a mature outlook.

    Another fan asked what was Smith’s inspiration for Clerks II. “I opened up my mortgage bill,” Smith said, adding, “Back to the well.” (Smith and Bruce Timm have the same problem.) Then Smith said that he wanted to examine “what it was like to be in my thirties,” since the original Clerks was about life in his twenties. So I wonder if in ten years there will be a Clerks III about entering middle age.

    The next questioner wanted to know how “first time filmmaker” could break into the business. Smith said, “I don’t know the way in. I just made Clerks. So my advice to you is just make Clerks.”

    Smith wound up by talking about his recent dispute with Joel Siegel, the movie reviewer for Good Morning America. Siegel, Smith told us, “walked out of our movie the other day.” In Clerks II, as the centerpiece of lead character Dante’s bachelor party, his friend Randal arranges for “the donkey show,” which one might describe as bestiality as performance art. (Gee, whatever happened to hiring strippers?) This offended Siegel’s delicate sensibilities. “He said, “˜That’s it! I haven’t walked out of a movie in thirty-seven years!” Smith told us, but Siegel walked out of this one.

    Now it seems to me that the strange thing about this is that Clerks II shows us the two participants in the donkey show, but does not actually show them Doing It. Smith knows where to draw the line. So Clerks II is therefore no more or less offensive than The Aristocrats, in which bestiality, among other non-G-rated activities, is repeatedly mentioned but never shown onscreen. Did Siegel walk out of that movie, too?

    “It was weird,” Smith told us. “I grew up watching this dude on TV.” What upset Smith was not that Siegel walked out but that he was rude enough “to be disruptive in the middle of the press screening.” Smith was on the Opie & Anthony radio show and they asked him if he wanted to call up Joel Siegel and so they did. “It was one of the rare times I got to confront” a critic, Smith said. “I felt like I was arguing with my father,” Smith told us, “if my father had a big cowcatcher mustache.”

    And thus the day’s events in Hall H came to an end, and the campers could at last decamp. I may not have seen Sam Raimi and the Spider-Man 3 leads, but had it not been for my lengthy wait outside, I would not have seen Kevin Smith perform for the first time. Convention presentations should entertain as well as inform. Smith is a master of the con appearance as stand-up comedy act, and his casual way with profanity even gave me a bit of a sense of what it must have been like to see Lenny Bruce perform live.

    And then, as we filed out of Hall H, we were all handed Spider-Man 3 caps. It was as if that really had been the Sam Raimi panel after all.

    SATURDAY 8:00 PM
    But since I stayed to hear Kevin Smith, I was late getting to the restaurant in
    the Gaslamp Quarter restaurant where the Comic Arts Conference was holding its annual Saturday night dinner. In fact I arrived just as the Conference attendees were divvying up the check. So I headed over to Horton Plaza to get a quick dinner and then turned back towards the Convention Center.

    SATURDAY 9:00 PM
    I arrived back in the Sails Pavilion to watch the annual Masquerade, which was already in progress. Actually, the Masquerade took place in Room 20, the site of the Eisner Awards the previous night. But there is such demand to attend the Masquerade that tickets are now required to get in, and people without tickets can instead watch the proceedings on large video screens in the Sails Pavilion and Room 6A. Last year there was only a relative handful of people watching the show on the Sails Pavilion screen, but this year virtually every seat at the many tables arranged in front of the screen was occupied. This was yet another sign of how Comic-Con attendance continues to grow at so rapid a pace. This also set me thinking about why the entertaining but empty-headed Masquerade is so popular and yet the Eisner Awards, which are much more significant, could not even fill half of the same venue, Room 20.

    Among this year’s contestants were a group who purportedly enacted the plot of the first Pirates of the Caribbean movie within five minutes or so. At the end the names of the masqueraders were projected onscreen, and, to my astonishment, they all turned out to be women! How aware is Disney of the gender-bending appeal of their current flagship films? SpongeBob SquarePants cavorted onstage, perhaps in the vain hope that his number one fan Fred Hembeck would be there. At another point, a human-sized Pikachu was beheaded onstage, to tumultuous applause from the audience. Justice had triumphed at last.

    SUNDAY 10:30 AM
    There was no crowding at all on the main convention floor when I entered this morning. it’s a pleasure walking around. Well, Sunday is supposed to be a “slow” day at Comic-Con.

    SUNDAY 11:00 AM
    I returned to the DK Publishing booth to do another signing for my book X-Men: The Ultimate Guide. This time I was seated at the front of the booth. Carrie Fisher wasn’t at the next booth this morning, but directly in front of me, at the Lego display, a Lego version of SpongeBob was grinning at me, as if he considered me the next best thing to Fred.

    Again I found myself enjoying doing the signing and experiencing a small sliver of what it must feel like to be famous. Two young women even asked if they could have their photograph taken with me. See, Fred, here’s another reason you should come to Comic-Con: you too could get to feel like a celebrity for an hour!

    As I sat at the booth, I saw the traffic in the aisle in front of me grow heavier. It wasn’t even noon yet and the crowds looked like Saturday’s.

    On Friday night I’d spoken by phone to Quick Stop editor Ken Plume, and we had arranged that either he would stop by the DK booth between 11 and 12, or I would borrow a cell phone, call him, and find out where to meet him. He didn’t show up, and when I phoned his number, I got a recorded message that he was unable to take my call. This was strange. (Ken later informed me that he had to leave unexpectedly early for Los Angeles.)

    Once more I stayed longer than my allotted hour. I had a goal: I would keep on signing until we sold the last remaining copies of X-Men: The Ultimate Guide at the DK booth. And I’m happy to say we succeeded!

    SUNDAY 12:30 PM
    On Thursday my friend Meloney had told me I should go to the Inkworks area (since she freelances for them) on Sunday to locate her for our traditional Sunday afternoon get-together at the Con. But she wasn’t there, nor did the
    people on duty know where she was.

    Yet again I was forced to recognize that unless you set a definite time and place to meet someone during the Con, you are likely never to run into that person. My tentative plans for Sunday afternoon–getting together first with Ken and then with Meloney–had fallen apart. What could I do instead?

    SUNDAY 1:00 PM
    I would have felt my 2006 Comic-Con experience was incomplete had I attended only one of Mark Evanier’s panels. Mark has attended the San Diego Con every year starting with its very first, long before Hollywood publicists discovered it. I consider the panels he hosts to be the heart of Comic-Con, carrying on its tradition of honoring classic comics and animation. However gratifying it is to see movie directors and stars coming to San Diego to acknowledge us as their audience, to my mind they remain a sideshow. Panels like Mark Evanier’s are the main event.

    I arrived in Room 6CDEF shortly after 1 PM for Evanier’s final panel of this year’s Comic-Con, “Cartoon Voices II.” I’d attended one of his panels of voice actors for animation back in 1997, and in the intervening years they’ve justifiably grown so popular that this year Comic-Con held two of them, each with a different lineup of actors. Today’s panel had the largest audience in the largest room I’d ever seen for an Evanier-led panel.

    Since by his own account Mark has been losing a pound a day, Sunday he was two pounds lighter than when I’d last seen him at the Eisners. But then, we may have all lost weight waiting through the Eisners, and, for that matter, getting through the crush of people at Comic-Con.

    Evanier introduced the panelists, who included Bob Bergen, who recreates the voice of Porky Pig/the Eager Young Space Cadet for the Duck Dodgers TV show; Wally Wingert, who does voices for Family Guy; the attractive April Stewart, who performs voices on South Park; Quick Stop editor Ken Plume’s good buddy Billy West, who is not only the original Stimpy but also took over Ren, who performs Fry and other members of the Futurama cast, and who has on occasion been Bugs Bunny, Daffy Duck, Elmer Fudd and Popeye; and another pretty voice actress, Kimberly Brooks, who performs on Mucha Lucha.

    Ms. Brooks said that for the direct-to-video animated feature Batman: Mystery of the Batwoman (2003), she voiced the character of Kathy Ducaine, who “kinda sounds like me but very breathy,” as she proceeded to demonstrate. Evanier observed, “There are people who would pay $19.95 to hear that,” whereupon Wingert began breathing hard.

    Then the panel turned to some of the odder aspects of the voice acting profession. Take the Hanna-Barbera character Captain Caveman, whose only comprehensible dialogue consisted of yelling his name. Evanier said that Mel Blanc “yelled it once,” and Hanna-Barbera simply played the recording “over and over.” Then Evanier told us how Ted Cassidy did the roars for Godzilla on the character’s animated show. After Cassidy passed away, Evanier continued, the show “auditioned soundalikes until somebody realized” that they had “three hours” of Cassidy’s recorded roaring that they could simply recycle. So, Evanier concluded, “people who auditioned got beaten out by a dead guy,” who, he added, “didn’t get health benefits.”

    Bob Bergen recounted how he used to do voice work on Star Wars videogames and “got memos from George Lucas” saying he sounded as if “I didn’t believe in the Force. And I couldn’t argue with those memos,” Bergen said with deadpan irony.

    Then came the centerpiece of the panel: the actors would perform an old time radio script that they had never seen before in what Evanier termed an “ice cold reading.” In past editions of this panel, Evanier said, they had performed a Superman radio script, but this time they were doing Flash Gordon. In fact, this seemed to be Flash‘s first episode.

    Evanier then assigned the roles. Bergen would be Flash. Wingert would play “Announcer #2″ who should “talk very fast.” Stewart would portray the heroine Dale Arden, whom Evanier characterized as a “good girl” in her “mid-20s.” Evanier assigned Brooks to do Aura, whom he described as “the sluttier woman in this,” whereupon Brooks fixed the audience with a look of understated irony. Evanier told Billy West, “You’re going to be everyone else,” including “Announcer #1,” Dr. Zarkov, whom he described as having “a slight German accent” (But wouldn’t “Zarkov” be a Russian name?), “Slave #1″ (who West made sound something like Droopy) and the archvillain Ming the Merciless.

    Evanier explained that in assigning roles his intent was to “try not to have an actor talk to himself,” although he confessed that he once asked the late Paul Winchell if he minded talking to himself (in separate roles) and Winchell said, “What do you think I did for a career for 55 years?” (The answer: being one of the world’s most famous ventriloquists.)

    To enliven things further, Evanier introduced what he called “an improv game”: whenever he said “change,” the voice actor would “read the same line again in a different voice,” and then return to the original voice thereafter. Perhaps taken aback by the complexity, Bergen asked, “Are we getting paid for this?”

    Since my column doesn’t have an audio track, there is no way I can convey to you just how much fun this reading proved to be. The actors took every opportunity to play the script for laughs. For example, when Flash and Dale’s aircraft was being knocked about, April Stewart emitted groans that sounded somewhat suggestive. “Was it good for you, too, Dale”? ad libbed Flash/Bergen.

    Many laughs resulted from Evanier’s well-placed orders to “change.” For example, when West was performing Dr. Zarkov, whose “slight German accent” was, in practice, amusingly over the top, Evanier called “Change!” and Zarkov immediately morphed into a perfect imitation of a laid back George W. Bush, who had just located “a new planet, Ah guess.” At another “Change!” command, Kimberly Brooks’ sultry Princess Aura shifted into a villainous Valley Girl: “You are going to totally love me or you are so going to die.” Similarly, Wingert’s fast-talking Announcer #2 briefly became Paul Lynde, noting about two characters, “They’re both bitches.”

    Following the well-received reading, the panel took questions from the audience. Inevitably, the topic of getting into the voice acting profession came up. Bergen asserted that “Everybody in this room has a great voice,” but that is not enough: it’s necessary to study acting. Stewart agreed that the voice alone isn’t sufficient, saying, “It’s like saying I have a pencil, I should be a writer.” West urged people to “Keep trying. Don’t listen to what anyone tells you,” that there was “so much media out there” that are “always looking for voice people.” Stewart warned, “Don’t listen to any negativity” and to “walk out of the room” if you get any. Stewart and Brooks agreed that you should “Believe in yourself,” which is good advice for any field of endeavor.

    Evanier then singled out five great people in the history of voice acting for animation. The first was the late Mel Blanc, the voice of Bugs Bunny and so many other Warners characters, “who invented” the “kind of voice acting” used in animation today. Next was the late Daws Butler, whose name was applauded by the audience, the voice of Yogi Bear and the majority of early Hanna-Barbera characters, whom Evanier called “a wonderful actor and teacher.” Evanier contended that the “quality of a Hanna-Barbera cartoon” is “proportionate to the amount of work” Butler did in it. This is not as much of an overstatement as it might at first seem. The third was Butler’s frequent Hanna-Barbera colleague Don Messick, also deceased, whose name also received applause. So did that of the fourth, June Foray, the voice of Bullwinkle‘s Rocky and Natasha and Nell, whom Evanier said he was assisting in writing her autobiography; he said that next year she will be at Comic-Con signing the book. The fifth was Lennie Weinrib, the voice of H. R. Pufnstuf, among many other characters, who had recently passed away.

    One audience member told the panelists, “You guys have the coolest job in the world.” Subsequently, Bob Bergen recounted an anecdote that illustrates one reason why. He said that shortly after the 9/11 attacks, “four of us went to Krispy Kreme,” where he ordered donuts in the voice of Porky Pig. They ended up being given two dozen donuts for free, because, one of the Krispy Kreme staffers told them, “That’s the first time we’ve laughed in days.”

    By the panel’s end, one could agree with the audience member who told the panelists, “I came here for Billy West and found out I’m a huge fan of everyone else.”

    Even so, I was paying particular attention to West, whom Ken Plume has been praising for years in his phone conversations with me. West revealed on the panel that the following week he would start working on a new Futurama series that Comedy Central will air in early 2008, and that there will also be a Futurama movie. At one point West talked about being a Three Stooges fan and did a perfect imitation of Larry Fine’s voice for us. He explained that Futurama‘s “Fry sounds like a 25-year-old me” and described himself thus: “I’m 55 years old and I’ve got the body of a 16-year-old. . . in the trunk of my car.” What an amusing and talented guy.

    But it appears that voice acting, like freelance writing in the comics biz, isn’t the most stable of careers. Wingert noted that “videogames have saved a lot of us” when voice work for animation was scarce. West then said, “I didn’t go to college, I feel grateful for any work.”

    And then I had an epiphany. Fred and I only know Ken Plume as a voice on the telephone. We’ve never actually seen him. Lately Ken has started to compare himself to Charlie, the unseen boss of his Angels. (Well, Misty looks the part but not Paul Dini, Fred or me.) Mysteriously, I keep missing seeing Ken when we’re both in San Diego, or so I thought. It’s no wonder that when I asked Mark Evanier if he had seen Ken Plume, he gave me a meaningful look and told me to look for Billy West. For all I know, Billy West is moonlighting at Quick Stop to supplement his income, and “Kenneth Plume” is no more than one of West’s innumerable voices. Ken, it is now up to you to prove this isn’t true. The ball is in your court.

    SUNDAY 2:30 PM
    I decided that before Comic-Con ended, I should make my way across the sections of the gargantuan main floor that I hadn’t yet explored this year, including Artists’ Alley, which was way off to one end, against the far wall. I wouldn’t be surprised if many attendees never found it.

    If Sunday is still the “slow” day at Comic-Con, it’s only in the sense of how long it takes to move along the main floor. The aisles were so congested that it was like Saturday afternoon at its height. (Indeed, I learned that the Con stopped selling tickets on Saturday because the Convention Center was so packed with people.)

    Amidst this sea of humanity, I sighted a reminder of conventions past. Back in the 1970s, before women dressed in Princess Leia’s slave girl costume at comics conventions, some female attendees came wearing Red Sonja’s iron bikini. There, moving slowly through the masses of fans ahead of me was a shapely 21st century Sonja. Though she was surrounded by male fans, no one, to their credit, was hassling her; on the other hand, no one seemed to notice her either. Are convention attendees becoming too jaded?

    I spend most of my time at Comic-Con attending panels, in Hall H or the upper floors, and this year, when I ventured onto the main floor, it was to sit at a booth and sign books. Now, trying to move through the swarms of people on the main floor wasn’t pleasant at all. At San Diego Cons in the 1980s I was rather sad to leave the main floor on Sunday afternoon. This year it came as a relief.

    SUNDAY 4:00 PM
    The convention would end in an hour, but I was already out of the building.
    Instead I was sitting at an outdoor restaurant at the nearby Marriott, looking out over the pleasure boats docked at the harbor, and the blue water and bright sky beyond. I was here for a Publishers Weekly meeting, attended by editor (and Bob Clampett Humanitarian Award winner) Calvin Reid and his wife, manga reviewer Kai-Ming Cha, and the ubiquitous Beat to discuss our coverage of the con for PW‘s online newsletter Comics Week.

    It turned out I didn’t get to write any Comics Week pieces about the con. Mark Evanier has sagely observed on his blog (on Friday, July 21 at www.newsfromme.com) that “one of the problems with covering this mega-gathering is that it’s really about forty conventions in one.” Comics Week‘s limited space would be devoted to news about Marvel and DC, manga, and alternative comics from panels I had not attended: those conventions were more important to them than the con I had attended. The Beat used my observation about “pirates, pirates everywhere” observation but that was it. As for what I’ve chosen to report on here in my column, my readers should decide for themselves how significant it is.

    SUNDAY 5:00 PM
    It was closing time for this year’s Comic-Con, when traditionally a swarm of Daleks are released to exterminate any congoers who hadn’t heeded the commands to Convention Center. Seated in the Marriott’s outdoor restaurant, looking out over the peaceful harbor, I was just too far away to hear the fans’ high-pitched shrieks. I had other things on my mind. Having planned to spend the evening writing Comics Week articles, what would I do instead?

    I chose to do some San Diego things I’d never done before. First on my list was finally taking a ride in a pedicab, the combination bicycles and rickshaws that are used as open-air taxis. My pedicab driver was an attractive and strong-legged young woman, who was a much better conversationalist than your typical New York City cabbie. She was from Poland, and had only been in America for six months, but since Europeans put more importance on being multilingual than Americans do, she had become fluent in English before arriving here.

    SUNDAY 9:00 PM
    After dinner at Horton Plaza, I returned to my hotel on Coronado Island after dark. Discovering that the swimming pool was open at night, and that it was heated, I decided to spend a few hours out there. This was one of my best experiences on the trip. Although the pool seemed nondescript by daylight, at night it was magical, lined by silhouetted palm trees, with the lights of the San Diego skyline, including the Convention Center, off in the distance. There were only a relative handful of other guests using the pool, so it was quiet and peaceful. Wondering where guests kept disappearing to around a corner, I finally discovered the outdoor jacuzzi/spa, and I’d never been in one of them before either until that night.

    The whole experience was so soothing and relaxing, banishing the accumulated stress of the Con. Even returning to my room and discovering that the hotel bill had been screwed up again did no more than briefly interrupt my blissful state.

    MONDAY
    Last year I fantasized that after 5 PM on Sunday the entire Comic-Con is swept up in a gigantic tornado and vanished into a hole in the sky. Looking around on Monday morning, it was if there really had been such a storm. After checking out of the hotel, I was the sole passenger on the water taxi that took me to the mainland. There was not a single person on the sidewalk outside the Convention Center. Indeed, during my entire last day in San Diego, I saw no more than three people who gave some sign like commenting on my Dark Horse bag, that they had been to the Con. (By the way, remember those TokyoPop bags from last year’s Comic-Con, that were big enough to hold small children? They were missing from this year’s San Diego Con, so I had to find substitutes. Warner Brothers’ bags had handles that broke almost immediately. But my Dark Horse bag remained intact until I got all the way back home.)

    Did Annette, my new acquaintance from my flight to San Diego, follow up on my offer to show her the sights of the city on Monday. Of course not; I’m not that lucky.

    So, since I don’t believe in going to Southern California and spending all the time inside, I went off to the San Diego Zoo on my own. Unusually for San Diego, there was a downpour for an hour, and afterwards some of the animals seemed oddly, ah, frisky. I found myself standing in front of the enclosure for large African tortoises, two of whom were engaged in what Kevin Smith might call the Tortoise Show while another tortoise looked on. He wasn’t the only voyeur. Other zoogoers, some of them children, were watching the Show; photographs were taken. I wondered: what would Joel Siegel think? Life is a Film by Kevin Smith. (Like myself, you may have assumed that turtles have no voices. But now I have heard the grunting of a male tortoise in the ecstasy of love.)

    Then it was off to the airport, where in the security line I had my first encounter with one of the new “puffer” machines. They emit bursts of compressed air, presumably to upset any snake that may be hiding on your person in order to smuggle itself onto a plane. I would discover that the friendly white-haired gentleman at the ticket counter had listed the wrong gate for both my departing redeye flight from San Diego and my connection at Philadelphia. As I wearily logged all of my heavy carry-ons all the way across each terminal, I told myself: good thing I brought this laptop with me to no reason, eh?

    TUESDAY
    When I arrived home I was welcomed by an array of unexpected problems: my phones had gone dead, my desktop computer’s keyboard no longer worked, a record-shattering heat wave was about to begin, and so much more.

    NOW
    So I think back over all the hassles and hardships I endured preparing for my trip, flying out, dealing with problems at the hotel, missing connections with friends, inching through crowded convention aisles, dealing with more trouble on the way back, and I wonder: Is Fred Hembeck right after all? Is going to the San Diego Con more trouble than it’s worth?

    In the line outside the Convention Center on Saturday afternoon, I discussed with people around me how the Con could deal with overflow crowds for Hall H events. Should they pipe the audio outside, as Symphony Space did with the Whedon-Sondheim meeting I missed? Should they telecast the panels into another room, as they do with the Masquerade? (But it was pointed out to me that then it would be harder to stop people from making bootleg videos of the preview footage.) If attendance for Comic-Con continues to grow at this rate, what will happen next year? ( I think of the new stadium across the street from the Convention Center. Could they use that?)

    Michael Eury and I were recently commiserating over the unpleasantness of cross-country travel. Ken Plume has told me he doesn’t intend to return to the San Diego Con since it is so hard to get business done there nowadays. (But I bet Billy West will continue to show up.) On her blog (http://trishm.blogspot.com/) in August, colorist Patricia Mulvihill explained why she didn’t go to the Comic-Con this year: “at a certain point last year it became more wearying than wonderful. It was all just TOO MUCH. So when I decided to skip this year, it was as if a giant weight had been lifted.” She pointed out, “So much preparation goes into attending it almost feels like training for an endurance event. . . .just traversing the con floor has become a test of will.”

    I’ve already decided that it is simply too expensive to attend Comic-Con unless I can get one of my clients to pick up part of the bill. Besides, within five years, the new New York Comic-Con may evolve into the East Coast equivalent of the San Diego Con, and even Fred is seriously considering attending the next New York Con.

    And yet, what little I know about next year’s Comic-Con already makes it seem like something I’d want to see: Neil Gaiman and Roy Thomas as special guests, June Foray publicizing her autobiography.

    Mark Evanier, as always, is right about the San Diego Con: “once you get to the convention center here, you pretty much have to find the parts of the convention that matter to you. If you do, I think you can have a very good time.” I really liked the parts of the convention that mattered to me. Maybe one of my publishers will want me to go next year. I just hope that Comic-Con follows Mark’s example: the time has come for Comic-Con to do something drastic about cutting down its size.

    ADVERTISEMENTS FOR MYSELF
    On Monday evening September 25 the Museum of Comic and Cartoon Art (www.moccany.org) in New York City will hold another session in my lecture series “1986: The Year That Changed Comics.” This time my topic is Will Eisner’s semi-autobiographical graphic novel The Dreamer, about the early days of the comics industry. And my New York University course “The Graphic Novel as Literature” will commence two days later–if enough people sign up for it.

    -Copyright 2006 Peter Sanderson

  • Comics in Context #146: San Diego 2006 – A Hall Too Small

     

    comicsincontext4.jpg

     

    The following events took place at Comic-Con International in San Diego on Saturday, July 22 between 10:00 AM and 8:00 PM.

    SATURDAY 10:00 AM
    On Saturday I was to appear on a Comic Arts conference panel and do two book signings, so I wanted to look good. I felt I had put together an outfit that struck the right balance between professionalism and casualness. Having disembarked from my morning water taxi ride across the bay, I was heading towards the Convention Center when a female fan, whom I had never seen before, asked, “Why are you wearing a jacket on such a hot day?”

    So maybe this is why Paul Levitz wisely dresses casually for Comic-Con: so he won’t get his fashion choices criticized to his face by strangers on the street.

    When I went to my first event in Hall H on Friday, there was only a short line, and it moved quickly. This morning, there was not only no line for Hall H, but I was able to sit further down front than I ever had before. So why does Hall H have such a reputation for being hard to get into? Little did I then know.

    SATURDAY 10:30 AM
    Comic-Con’s Director of Programming, Gary Sassaman, emerged onstage, looking as dour as he had yesterday. “Welcome back,” he told the Hall H audience. “How many of you slept here last night?” He’s kidding, right? I looked at Mr. Sassaman’s face, magnified to brobdingnagian proportions, on an immense videoscreen and detected the faintest hint of a smile.

    Sassaman noted that it was a “very hot Saturday morning.” (But he was wearing a jacket, too!) Then he said that today there would be “some special guests” and some “amazing, spectacular, and just plain adjective-less guests.” This alluded to the rumor that the lead actors of Spider-Man 3 were going to make a surprise appearance.

    Sassaman asked the audience not to record the images from forthcoming films that would be shown on Hall H’s immense video screens in order to “share it with your 20 million friends on the Internet”; otherwise, Hollywood studios would no longer bring such preview footage to Comic-Con.

    “You’re going to want to stay in here the rest of the day,” Sassaman told us. He’s encouraging them! He’s an enabler for the “campers”! But if I did not have commitments elsewhere at the Con this day, I would have been wise to follow his advice and remain there.

    Then another familiar face, Jeff Walker, wearing a shirt labeled “Arkham Asylum Athletic Dept.” shirt, came onstage to present the day’s first Hall H panel: “Warner Bros. Presents 300,” the film adaptation of Frank Miller’s graphic novel about the Battle of Thermopylae, in which three hundred men from the ancient Greek city-state of Sparta, fought the vastly larger Persian army. First Walker introduced the film’s director, Zach Snyder. Then Walker brought out one of the movie’s stars, David Wenham, who played Faramir in Peter Jackson’s Lord of the Rings movies, and a woman sitting next to me let out a big cheer. The idea that comics conventions are invariably attended almost entirely by men has become dated. As if to offer further evidence, Walker introduced Gerard Butler (from the film version of Andrew Lloyd Webber’s Phantom of the Opera musical), who plays King Leonidas in 300, and female shrieks of joy erupted from the audience. (And, oh, yes, he was wearing a jacket.) After 300 opens, I expect that reporters on Hollywood will express surprise that such a violent film attracts a female audience, but this is clearly a chick flick of an untraditional sort. Finally, Walker introduced “the one and only Frank Miller,” who was again displaying his new wardrobe, this time including what looked like a large Western hat and a long, red jacket.

    Snyder started off by showing us the trailer for 300, a live action film which astonishingly, powerfully captured the look of Miller’s artwork for the graphic novel. It was rife with violence and sexuality, and also featured lines that seem like catchphrases in the making: “This is madness!”, “This is Sparta!” (Maybe that explains Walker’s shirt.)

    The audience reacted loudly and enthusiastically to the trailer. Once it was over, Gerard Butler, who hadn’t seen it before, said, “I want to see it again.” And so we did, right away.

    Then Snyder said, in a deadpan manner, “So we were going for something warm and fuzzy. . . It’s a family thing.” Then he asked for questions from the audience. There was no immediate response, and a panelist (Wenham, I think) observed that we were “obviously flabbergasted.”

    Stating that he drew the look of the film from Miller’s 300 comics, Snyder joked, “I had no ideas of my own.” Sharing the credit, Miller added that “Many of those backgrounds [in the 300 comics] were done by Lynn Varley,” his longtime collaborator. (Later during the panel Butler explained that the backgrounds in the film were computer generated: there were “cliffs that don’t exist, armies that aren’t there. Only the immediate surroundings are right there” on the set.)

    Snyder declared that Miller’s 300 book “is awesome.” In order to make the movie, Snyder explained he said “Let’s do that [directly adapt the comics], not fuck it up Hollywood style.”

    Miller responded, “And you didn’t. It’s really cool.”

    Describing his preparation for such a physically demanding role, Butler said, “I trained really hard for this,” and “am still recovering.” He claimed, “I came out of this pretty much a cripple.” Miller wryly interjected, “He was ninety-three pounds when he started.”

    Undeterred, Butler described the atmosphere on the set among all these actors playing warriors: “You have so much testosterone floating around there. At times you were willing to kill, willing to die.”

    Since he was playing the king, Butler said that he “wanted to get the respect of. . .the other actors, so I worked my little buttocks off.” There was a cheer from the audience. Miller observed to Butler, “Your buttocks just got a cheer.”

    Still undeterred, Butler asserted that he did “intensive training” physically which “goes a long way” towards giving him the feelings of “strength,” “determination,” and “sacrifice” that his role required.

    Returning to discussing the visual style of the film, Snyder explained simply that “The graphic novel’s pictures. A movie’s pictures.” He told us that in discussions with his co-workers “I go, “˜We have a picture here; let’s just do the picture,” meaning the visuals from the comics. If someone offered an alternate suggestion for a shot, Snyder said he replied, “It’s cool. For something else.” After a while, Snyder told us, his collaborators got the idea.

    In other words, the 300 movie is following the same strategy as the Sin City movie: directly recreating the look of the comics onscreen. In announcing Warners Animation’s forthcoming direct-to-video animated films of stories from DC Comics, like the “Death of Superman” arc, DC’s Paul Levitz indicated at Comic-Con that the videos would be based on the look of the original comics. Later that day there was a panel in Hall H about the projected movie adaptation of Will Eisner’s The Spirit, at which Miler was officially announced as its director. Although I had to miss it due to other commitments, I have since read that during the panel Miller asserted that he intended to present Eisner’s vision onscreen. Moreover, in stating that he would create the backgrounds via CGI, as in the Sin City movie, Miller explained that he wanted it to look as if “Eisner’s hand is drawing the movie.”

    So this is a new trend, and (despite my qualms about no longer seeing Bruce Timm character designs onscreen) a welcome one, I think, demonstrating unusual respect for the original source material. Why shouldn’t a Fantastic Four movie, whether live action or animated, try to translate the look of Jack Kirby’s artwork to the screen?

    Alluding on the scanty garb the cast wore in the 300 trailer, an audience member asked the actors about their reaction to the costumes or “lack of costumes you have to wear.” Again there were appreciative female shrieks.

    Butler responded that initially “I never felt so stupid in my life.” When he first donned “that leather codpiece,” “I thought, how am I going to get through this?” He added, “But then you’re surrounded by sixty guys wearing the same thing.” By the end of shooting, Butler said, “You just want to look bigger than the other guys.”

    “You win, Gerry,” said Wenham; “you’re the biggest.” (I just report what they actually said, folks.)

    Wenham reported that after he was cast in the film, “I bought Frank’s book” and saw the first appearance of the character he plays: “He’s naked. All he basically wears in the book is a leather codpiece.” But Wenham assured the audience, “I did some training and it was okay.”

    Miller addressed more cerebral aspects of 300. “I researched the hell out of this thing,” he told us. “I wanted to do the story since I was six years old.” Miller asserted that “The story is so compelling that I think each generation has to retell it.”

    Another audience member asked Butler what he has in common with his character. Butler answered, “Being extremely intelligent. . . powerful. . .insane. . .charismatic–were all things I found I didn’t have.” Then he added, “I have no idea what I’m talking about.”

    But there was a point behind Butler’s joking. “Seriously,” he continued, “you see things like honor and nobility [in 300]” that, he said, do not exist in “today’s society” and you “don’t have enough [of these qualities] in yourself,” but, Butler said, he “wants to have” them. Therefore, to act the role involved “getting in touch with what you gave yourself and then get in touch with what you don’t have.”

    As for the story of 300, Butler commented, “Frank makes it so dark.” “Moi?” replied Miller in mock innocence.

    Though the Hall H audience had earlier been warned what kind of questions would be inappropriate, there are invariably people who think the rules do not apply to them. The audience, however, polices its ranks. So it was that a female fan asked the actors for hugs; instead she got booed by the audience. Obliviously persisting in her stupidity, the female fan then asked the actors, “What’s your favorite color?” More booing ensued. But the actors played along. Wenham replied that today his favorite color was red. Butler said, “My favorite color is green.” Then he turned to Miller and admitted, “Nobody cares, I know.”

    Another questioner, commenting on the sex scenes in the trailer, observed that the moviemakers “show the relationship between Greek men and Greek women, but will you show the relationship between the Greek men and men?” This, of course, alludes to ancient Greek openness towards homosexuality. Miller responded, “No. We call this fiction.”

    Though she was not mentioned, it appears that Gerard Butler shares the attitude of The Incredibles‘ fashion designer Edna Mode towards capes. “Capes were a problem,” he complained. “After fifteen hours your shoulder was willing to fall off.”

    “Spoken like a real Spartan,” commented Miller.

    “It hurt,” Butler said emphatically. “And I got a little scrape on my shoulder sometimes.” (Whether Butler’s female fans in Hall H found this endearing or disillusioning, I have no idea.)

    Wenham said the “hardest part [of making the movie] was the training,” claiming that “My normal day training is three minutes long.” Wenham added, “The capes were a cinch. I didn’t have difficulty at all.” Later during the panel, Miller referred to Butler as “Mr. My Cape’s Heavy.” Yes, amid all the jesting one-upmanship, the testosterone was thick enough to cut with the proverbial knife.

    A fan from Greece asked Miller about going to Greece to research 300. “I did go to Greece,” Miller replied, stating that he had spent weeks there on a National Trust tour. He took “a side trip” to “the actual Hot Gates,” the site of the Battle of Thermopylae, but discovered it’s “not what it used to be.” The site “used to be a cliff over the sea.” The sea has moved over the years, and “now there’s a freeway” there. But Miller said he did visit “the mountain where the Spartans actually died,.” Miller concluded, “If I hadn’t sailed the Aegean and seen the cliffs, I don’t know how I could have done the story.” Butler interjected that “Six Spartans were killed crossing the freeway.”

    As with the Stardust panel, I was struck by how much respect the panelists showed the creator of the original source material, an attitude one does not expect in Hollywood. Wenham referred to “a true legend, Mr. Frank Miller!” Butler chimed in, “Frank Miller, the man himself!” And thus arrives that new phenomenon: the cartoonist as alpha male.

    Praising the movie, Miller asserted that “In seeing an early cut of the movie, everything looks timeless but very contemporary.” He pointed out that sometimes Snyder changed the speed of the cameras to make the Spartans look “superhuman” during the fighting. Miller summed up, “This feels like a very contemporary movie. It doesn’t feel like a stiff old relic. Zach did a terrific job.”

    And then they showed the trailer for a third time, whereupon I headed out of Hall H to make certain I got to the next panel on my list in time. This was important since I was scheduled to be on this particular panel.

    SATURDAY 11:30 AM
    This was session eight of the Comic Arts Conference, the annual academic conference on comics, being held in Room 7B: “The Supervillain: from Antagonist to Protagonist: Celebrating the Supervillain in Today’s Comics.”

    This panel was designed to publicize The Supervillain Book, an encyclopedia of supervillains in comics and other media, which made its debut at this year’s Comic-Con and will be officially published this fall by Visible Ink. The panelist included the book’s editors and principal writers Gina Misiroglu and Michael Eury, and CAC co-chairman Peter Coogan, scholar Alex Boney and myself as contributing writers to the book.

    We had done a similar panel for CAC last year, during which, unexpectedly, a man in a Star Wars Sith costume sat in the audience; since Darth Vader was mentioned in our presentation, we acknowledged the Sith from the stage. When Gina, Alex, contributing writer Heidi MacDonald (alias the Beat) and I did a panel for The Supervillain Book at this year’s New York Comic Con, the Trickster from The Flash turned up in the audience. At this year’s Comic-Con Gina arranged for Lex Luthor (in an unconvincing bald cap) and Dark Phoenix (with a very convincing costume and admirably voluptuous figure) to interrupt Michael Eury’s presentation. He knew they’d be showing up, but I was as surprised as anyone there. I’m glad they didn’t interrupt my presentation, which more serious, in keeping with an academic conference, but they were still fun. (And if having villains show up during the panel seems over the top, consider that, as I later learned, during the Lost panel, which overlapped with ours, there was a “plant” in the audience who purported to be a character from a Lost website.)

    My presentation was about how supervillains are used to dramatize the concept that the human psyche is split between good and evil. There are characters who embody this division through their multiple personalities, such as Two-Face in Batman, DC’s Eclipso, and the Incredible Hulk. Then there are supervillains who make the transition to becoming superheroes, such as Hawkeye, Quicksilver and the Scarlet Witch in the 1960s Avengers and Spike in Joss Whedon’s Buffy, or superheroes who journey in the opposite direction, like X-Men‘s Phoenix and Star Wars’ Anakin Skywalker. And then there are characters who walk an ambiguous path between good and evil. Do we see Marvel’s Punisher, a vigilante who kills criminals, as a hero or condemn him as a criminal? I offered as my concluding example Namor the Sub-Mariner, who was created by Bill Everett in 1939, and who now seems to me to be ahead of his time: Originally Namor was depicted as what we would now call a terrorist conducting a one-man war against New York City, and yet Everett and later writers have allowed us to see and understand Namor’s own point of view.

    SATURDAY 1:00 PM
    At the conclusion of the panel, we participants went down to the main convention floor to do a signing of The Supervillain Book at the booth area for Rory Root’s Comic Relief. We were joined by the Beat, and you can see a photo of her, Michael Eury and myself during the signing here (http://pwbeat.publishersweekly.com/blog/2006/07/26/sdcc-06-photo-paradeum-saturday/#more-239): it’s a fuzzy photo, but the Beat looks particularly pretty in it.

    Unfortunately, the signing was at the same time that Kevin Smith, benevolent monarch of Quick Stop Entertainment, was scheduled to appear in Hall H. But I felt it was my duty to Gina to do this signing. I’ve never met Kevin Smith; I wonder what he’s like?

    If one must venture onto the main floor on Saturday afternoon, at the height of the Comic-Con crowds, sitting at a booth is probably the best thing to do. Instead of trying to make your way through the hordes of attendees filling the aisles, trying to locate people you know, you can relax and watch the sea of humanity drift past. You can even find people as they go by. (Look! There goes George Perez!) So when Mister Freeze wandered by, complete with a Schwarzeneggerian accent, I called to Gina to have her get his attention. So Mister Freeze ended up posing in front of our booth, as did the Riddler, whom Gina stopped as he was going past.

    Group signings of a book work like assembly lines: one writer signs his or her name on the book and passes it down to the next writer, and so forth.

    SATURDAY 3:00 PM
    Now I was over at the DK (Dorling Kindersley) Publishing booth, next to one of the entrances to the main floor of the convention, to do a solo signing for the new expanded third edition of X-Men: The Ultimate Guide. Here I was reunited with Bess Braswell and Rachel Kempster of DK’s New York office and Alex Allan from the main office in London, all of whom are friendly and supportive.

    Since another DK writer was still signing at the front of the booth, I was seated on the side, so people walking through the doors to the convention floor passed right in front of me. This proved to be fortuitous, since, as I said, if you sit long enough at a good location at Comic-Con, people you want to see will pass by. Thus, within the hour, I was visited by my old friend, comics artist Bill Sienkiewicz and by my new acquaintance, Stuart Vandal, the British writer for the current Official Handbook of the Marvel Universe, and for the first time met comics artist Phil Jimenez, who, I was happy to discover, recognized my name.

    I signed a number of autographs, but wondered about a long line of people in front of the DK booth, heading somewhere else. I asked one of the DK ladies, and she told me these people were lined up to get autographs from Carrie Fisher in the next booth over. I looked 180 degrees behind me, and, yes, indeed, there she was in the booth right next to ours, signing away at Star Wars memorabilia; she even felt comfortable enough at one point to remove her shoes and put her feet up. I was signing autographs next to Carrie Fisher: now there’s something I would never have imagined.

    SATURDAY 4:00 PM
    I was feeling a little guilty since I spent part of the previous hour chatting with the aforementioned comics pros who stopped by the DK booth, and besides, I found I enjoyed doing signings. The next panel I intended to attend didn’t start till 5, so I volunteered to continue signing for a little while longer.

    After all, I’d had no trouble whatsoever getting into Hall H either on this trip or on last year’s trip, right?

    This was a mistake.

    SATURDAY 4:20 PM
    There was now a line waiting to get into Hall H. This was an understatement. The queue extended through the section of the lobby outside Hall H, out the door, down the sidewalk, past the Convention Center down to the end of the block, then turned at a ninety degree angle and ran along the sidewalk for the width of the Convention Center, then looped back towards the front of the Convention Center, went up the sidewalk and finally ended in front of the Convention Center doors through which I exited upon leaving the DK booth. This was no mere line: it was a labyrinth.

    Everyone in line was waiting to see the final Hall H presentation of the day, “Sony Presents,” which would preview the upcoming Ghost Rider movie and Spider-Man 3. Nicolas Cage, who plays Marvel’s Ghost Rider, was scheduled to be there, as well as Sam Raimi, director of all three Spider-Man movies, and, according to rumor, the lead actors of Spider-Man 3 too.

    Well, I had no trouble getting through the line for last year’s King Kong presentation. Sure, the line was much longer this afternoon, but at least I was practical enough to get in line forty minutes early.

    SATURDAY 5:00 PM
    Still in line. But Hall H panels don’t always start on time, right? And I saw last year’s Ghost Rider preview in Hall H (although Cage didn’t appear at that one), so I didn’t care about missing that part of the presentation. It was Raimi I wanted to see. (Kirsten Dunst would make a nice bonus.)

    SATURDAY 5:30 PM
    This guy who worked for Comic-Con kept walking up and down along the line, telling us that we had no hope of getting into the Sony presentation. Everybody around me found this guy annoying, and so did I. Virtually no one left: Southern California fans are clearly as stubborn as New Yorkers about queues.

    Besides, we had reason for hope: the line kept moving forward. It was like my experience waiting to get into New York’s Symphony Space to see Stephen Sondheim and Joss Whedon (see “Comics in Context” #77). In that case, the line moved to close up space when people gave up and stopped waiting. But this was not the case with this Comic-Con line: it kept on moving relatively quickly, and i saw few people leave.

    Besides, it was so chilly waiting in line outside Symphony Space in March. It was pleasantly warm in the line outside Hall H, even considering I was wearing a jacket.

    The annoying guy also kept telling us that there were “only 6500 seats” inside Hall H. What did he mean, “only” 6500? Hall H is considerably larger than any panel room that Comic-Con had only three years ago. The Metropolitan Opera House has 3800 seats; Radio City Music Hall has 6000. These are famously vast venues, and Hall H is more colossal still. Could it be that the ever-increasing audience for Comic-Con has already outgrown even the enormity of Hall H? Had the “campers” filled it up?

    SATURDAY 5:45 PM
    By now I had moved all the way through the line to a point roughly only nine feet from the door to the Hall H lobby. And here the line lost all forward momentum. I realized that had I left the DK booth at 4 PM, I probably would have gotten inside Hall H by now. As the saying goes, no good deed goes unpunished.

    My fellow Quick Stop columnist Fred Hembeck is doubtless reading this and thinking: I can stand around doing nothing just as easily at home (and often do) without going to all the trouble and expense of flying cross-country. Point taken.

    SATURDAY 6:40 PM
    Finally I was inside Hall H, and the last panel of the day was about to begin! Could it be? Was I going to hear Sam Raimi speak? He was the last person on the Saturday schedule for Hall H, after all.

    Gary Sassaman brought onstage the next speaker, who didn’t fit my image of Sam Raimi. This guy looked sort of like that Silent Bob character in those movies, except that (A) this guy didn’t wear a cap, and (B) this guy talked a lot, and so fast that I often couldn’t take notes quickly enough to keep up with him. Who is this guy?

    Then this guy (for convenience’s sake, let’s give him an anonymous-sounding name, like Mr. Smith) started taking questions from the audience.

    The first inquiry was about the status of the Green Hornet movie that “Smith” once planned to make. Smith said this wasn’t going to happen, because he is “not good at action” and instead “make[s] movies where people talk to each other.” He said that if he did a Green Hornet movie, the characters would “stand around talking about. . .pussy.”

    The next fan said, “Thanks for all the trouble you took to get here.” Modestly, Smith replied, “All I did was sit in the car.” It seems that he was stuck in traffic, just as Snoop Dogg had been yesterday on the way to Comic-Con. Quick Stop editor Ken Plume has informed me that Saturday traffic between Los Angeles and San Diego is not usually this bad. It appears that Comic-Con is now so huge that it creates traffic jams between major cities.

    Smith demonstrated a commendable paternal regard towards his fans. Observing that one questioner was accompanied by an attractive woman, Smith advised him, “You’re a comic book dude. Don’t dump the girlfriend. Very rarely,” he continues, would a male comics fan find a woman who would say, “I want to fuckin’ hang out while you fuckin’ talk to Spider-Man.” (Spider-Man just got mentioned, so I must be at the right panel, right?)

    Then someone wanted to know about the dance number in Clerks II, which had just opened the previous day. Smith told disgruntled audience members to “Chill out. It’s a valid question.” Then he told us, “I’m the straightest gay filmmaker. Doing a musical is right up my alley.” He declared there was “a lot of gayness going in in the movie. I was going like Fosse!” (Well, actually Bob Fosse was very much straight but never mind.) “I always felt I was one cock in the mouth shy of being gay myself,” Smith informed us. Gosh, this is so different from the 300 panel.

    Mr. Smith was like a skilled conductor and we in the audience were his orchestra. He told us he was going to bring out Clerks II actor Jason Mewes, and the audience got audibly excited. Then Smith told us, “I was just fuckin’ with you. He’s not here,” and the audience began to settle down again. Then, before emotions could die down, Smith broke into a big smile and said, “No! He is! Check it out!” And then out onstage came Jason Mewes, who looks like that Jay guy in those movies, but with short hair. And I thought: this isn’t Kirsten Dunst.

    The next question returned to a previous theme: “Would you wear a kilt in public?” Smith responded, “The shorts I wear are practically a fuckin’ dress anyway.”

    The next questioner was a deaf man who was accompanied by a sign language interpreter: the deaf guy wanted to know what Smith’s wife thought of the line in the Clerks II credits thanking her for “the pussy.” Smith observed, “Apparently even deaf dudes aren’t gentlemen anymore.” Pondering aloud, Smith said, “It’s so weird, cause you’re not looking at me.” Then he improvised an experiment, and got the interpreter to sign the following: “This isn’t Kevin talkin’ right now: For many years I’ve really wanted to suck your dick.”

    Then Smith answered the “pussy” question seriously. “I think she realizes without me, who would fuck you?” I was beginning to detect this Smith guy’s inner melancholy. He lamented, “Why is it always, “˜Kevin, I respect you; Jason, I would fuck you?’”

    The next questioner wanted to know how to get to work for Smith as an intern, inspiring him again to vent his inner pain: “All the interns I get are like, “˜I respect you.’ Mewes, on the other hand, takes interns all the time.” But then Smith confessed that there are no interns; “There’s like one dude who mans the phone, and it’s usually Mewes.”

    I felt that Smith and I had something in common, until I remembered what his wife looks like. Okay, he’s way better off than me.

    Speaking of his wife, another audience member wanted to know if it bothered Smith to have actor Brian O’Halloran kissing her in Clerks II. “No, it didn’t bother me,” Smith answered, though “if it was Affleck” it would have, because that would represent a “trade up.” Smith noted that “No woman wants to trade down. Why would she leave one fat bearded guy for another?”

    Even so, Smith admitted being bothered that his wife ended up kissing O’Halloran for an hour while they were shooting the scene. “I can’t let O’Halloran have the record,” Smith asserted, so he tried to kiss her for even longer, but after twelve minutes, he gave up and said, “Fuck it, let’s fuck.” Smith then advised us that as far as he was concerned, “Kissing is a prelude to fucking.”

    But I don’t want to give you the impression that this panel was just about sex. Smith also mused about the physical downside of growing older. “Honestly, it gets no better in your thirties,” he warned us. “Stuff starts falling apart.” Take this for example: “My shit was just too hard. I had hard core shit, like Jean-Claude Van Damme shit.” So Smith’s doctor advised him to start taking Metamucil, which had amazing results. “My shit has the consistency of Play-Doe now,” Smith reassured us. “It just flows out of me.” He counseled audience members in their twenties, “Start drinking Metamucil now. Protect your asshole.”

    Now, really, do you get this sort of valuable advice about life at the DC and Marvel panels? I think not. Come back next week for my Comic-Con grand finale and you’ll learn still more from the mysterious Mr. Smith.

    -Copyright 2006 Peter Sanderson